The LMS Test - Lab Modal Analysis Manual: Rev 12A

The LMS Test.
Lab Modal Analysis manual
LMS Test.Lab
Rev 12A
Copyright LMS International 2012

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Modal Analysis Theory ................................................................................. 9

Section 1.1 Estimation of modal parameters .......................................................... 9
Section 1.1.1 Modal parameters ................................................................................ 9
Section 1.1.2 A note about units .............................................................................. 11
Section 1.2 Types of analysis ............................................................................... 12
Section 1.2.1 Single or multiple degree of freedom method .................................... 12
Section 1.2.2 Local or global estimates ................................................................... 13
Section 1.2.3 Multiple input analysis....................................................................... 14
Section 1.2.4 Time vs frequency domain implementation ....................................... 16
Section 1.3 Parameter estimation methods ........................................................... 18
Section 1.3.1 Least Square Complex Exponential (LSCE)...................................... 18
Section 1.3.2 Least Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD) ........................................ 29
Section 1.3.3 PolyMAX ........................................................................................... 30
Section 1.4 EXPONENTIAL WINDOW CORRECTION IN MODAL ANALYSIS ........... 32
Section 1.4.1 Use of windows during Modal Impact Testing .................................. 32
Section 1.4.2 Exponential window on reference and response ................................ 33
Section 1.4.3 Only an exponential window on the response .................................... 34
Section 1.4.4 Practical implementation ................................................................... 34
Chapter 2 Data and its management ........................................................................... 37

Section 2.1 Data management and configuration ................................................. 37
Section 2.1.1 The desktop ........................................................................................ 37
Section 2.1.2 Applications ....................................................................................... 38
Section 2.1.3 Projects .............................................................................................. 38
Section 2.1.4 Documentation ................................................................................... 40
Section 2.2 Importing and exporting data ............................................................. 40
Section 2.2.1 Importing data items .......................................................................... 41
Section 2.2.2 Exporting data items .......................................................................... 50
Section 2.2.3 Copying pictures ................................................................................ 54
Section 2.3 My Links ............................................................................................ 55
Section 2.3.1 Elements in the My Links collection folder ....................................... 55
Section 2.4 Project data ........................................................................................ 56
Section 2.4.1 Sections .............................................................................................. 57
Section 2.4.2 Runs ................................................................................................... 57
Section 2.4.3 TDF .................................................................................................... 58
Section 2.4.4 LDSF ................................................................................................. 58
Section 2.4.5 Other folders ...................................................................................... 58
Section 2.5 Units and how to handle them ........................................................... 58
Section 2.5.1 Units................................................................................................... 58
Section 2.5.2 Canonical dimensions ........................................................................ 59
Section 2.5.3 Base unit set ....................................................................................... 59
Section 2.5.4 Unit systems....................................................................................... 60
Section 2.5.5 Interpreting Units ............................................................................... 61
Section 2.6 Searching for Data using the Data Explorer ...................................... 63
Section 2.6.1 [Procedure] To execute a simple data search ..................................... 63
Section 2.6.2 [Procedure] To define additional search criteria ................................ 65
Chapter 3 Documentation and Presentation .............................................................. 67

Section 3.1 Using cursors in displays ................................................................... 67
Section 3.1.1 [Procedure] To use cursors in the display .......................................... 67
Rev 12A 3
Section 3.2 Documentation User Attributes ......................................................... 71
Section 3.2.1 User Attributes ................................................................................... 71
Section 3.3 Document Memo Templates .............................................................. 72
Section 3.3.1 New Memo Template ........................................................................ 72
Section 3.3.2 Default Memo template ..................................................................... 73
Section 3.4 Creating print formats ........................................................................ 74
Section 3.4.1 [Procedure] To create a single-picture print format in the Data Viewing
worksheet 75
Section 3.4.2 [Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print format in Word or PowerPoint .. 76
Section 3.4.3 [Procedure] To set printing options ................................................... 77
Section 3.4.4 [Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print format .................... 78
Section 3.4.5 [Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to Word or PowerPoint .. 79
Section 3.5 The Layout management dialog......................................................... 79
Section 3.5.1 [Procedure] To create or modify a layout .......................................... 80
Section 3.5.2 The Layout management panel .......................................................... 94
Section 3.5.3 The Layout editing panel ................................................................... 96
Section 3.6 Function display windows ................................................................. 97
Section 3.6.1 To use the displays ............................................................................. 97
Section 3.6.2 The Axis menus ............................................................................... 105
Section 3.6.3 The Display menus .......................................................................... 122
Section 3.6.4 The Data menus ............................................................................... 131
Section 3.6.5 The Cursor menus ............................................................................ 133
Section 3.6.6 The Curve Legend menus ................................................................ 136
Section 3.6.7 The Single (cursor) menus ............................................................... 139
Section 3.6.8 The Double (cursor) menus ............................................................. 143
Section 3.6.9 The Harmonic (cursor) menus ......................................................... 146
Section 3.6.10 The Automatic (cursor) menus ........................................................ 148
Section 3.6.11 The Processing (cursor) menus ........................................................ 149
Section 3.7 Geometry display windows.............................................................. 152
Section 3.7.1 [Procedure] To use the displays ....................................................... 152
Section 3.7.2 The Geometry display functions ...................................................... 158
Section 3.8 Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays ................................. 177
Section 3.9 Curve scrolling (prev/next on function displays) ............................. 179
Chapter 4 Software and Hardware ............................................................................ 183

Section 4.1 Add-ins ............................................................................................ 183
Section 4.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................... 183
Section 4.1.2 General (Desktop) add-ins ............................................................... 184
Section 4.2 SCADAS III..................................................................................... 195
Section 4.2.1 The LMS SCADAS III frontend ...................................................... 195
Section 4.2.2 Main frame and signal processing units ........................................... 196
Section 4.2.3 Signal conditioning modules ............................................................ 197
Section 4.2.4 Offline operation .............................................................................. 201
Section 4.2.5 Master/Slave configuration .............................................................. 203
Section 4.3 Offline operation .............................................................................. 203
Section 4.3.1 Retry button ..................................................................................... 203
Section 4.3.2 Work offline button ......................................................................... 204
Chapter 5 Channels .................................................................................................... 207

Section 5.1 Channel identification characteristics .............................................. 207
Section 5.1.1 Channel identification fields ............................................................ 207
Section 5.2 Database sources .............................................................................. 215
Section 5.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................... 215
Section 5.2.2 Channel group field definitions........................................................ 215
Section 5.2.3 ODBC databases as an input source for Channel Setup ................... 218
4 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

Section 5.2.4 [Procedure] To create a database source that can be used for import into the
channel setup 218
Chapter 6 Functions ................................................................................................... 225

Section 6.1 Mode Indicator Functions ................................................................ 225
Section 6.1.1 Definition ......................................................................................... 225
Section 6.2 Modal Assurance Criterion .............................................................. 228
Section 6.3 Modal scaling ................................................................................... 228
Section 6.4 Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) and Mean Phase Deviation (MPD)230
Section 6.4.1 Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) ..................................................... 231
Section 6.4.2 Mean Phase Deviation (MPD) ......................................................... 231
Section 6.5 Mode Over Complexity (MOV) ...................................................... 231
Section 6.6 Mode participation ........................................................................... 232
Section 6.7 Comparison of modal model ............................................................ 232
Section 6.8 Decompose ...................................................................................... 233
Section 6.9 Synthesis of FRFs ............................................................................ 234
Section 6.9.1 Correlation and errors ...................................................................... 234
Section 6.10 Hybrid Modeling.............................................................................. 235
Section 6.10.1 Synthesize rigid body modes ........................................................... 235
Section 6.10.2 Calculate static compensation modes .............................................. 236
Section 6.10.3 Creating a consistent mode set ......................................................... 238
Chapter 7 Processing ................................................................................................. 241

Section 7.1 Time Data Editing Functions ........................................................... 241
Section 7.1.1 Channel, segment and position selection ......................................... 242
Section 7.1.2 Editing.............................................................................................. 243
Section 7.1.3 Modify segment ............................................................................... 246
Section 7.1.4 Fading .............................................................................................. 251
Section 7.2 Basic processing .............................................................................. 252
Section 7.2.1 Rms calculation................................................................................ 252
Section 7.3 Data Calculator Functions................................................................ 254
Section 7.3.1 Conditioning .................................................................................... 256
Section 7.3.2 Math ................................................................................................. 262
Section 7.3.3 Metrics ............................................................................................. 265
Section 7.3.4 Signal ............................................................................................... 265
Section 7.3.5 Examples of data calculator formulas .............................................. 269
Chapter 8 The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis workbook ......................................... 273

Section 8.1 The Modal Analysis menu bar ......................................................... 273
Section 8.1.1 File ................................................................................................... 273
Section 8.1.2 Edit................................................................................................... 276
Section 8.1.3 View................................................................................................. 277
Section 8.1.4 Data .................................................................................................. 278
Section 8.1.5 Tools ................................................................................................ 279
Section 8.1.6 Window............................................................................................ 305
Section 8.1.7 Help ................................................................................................. 306
Section 8.2 The Modal Analysis button bar........................................................ 306
Section 8.2.1 Toolbars ........................................................................................... 306
Section 8.3 Conditioning toolbar ........................................................................ 315
Section 8.3.1 To condition displayed data ............................................................. 315
Section 8.3.2 Conditioning functions .................................................................... 317
Section 8.4 The Documentation worksheet ........................................................ 322
Section 8.4.1 [Procedure] Project / Section info .................................................... 323
Section 8.4.2 Extended Project / Section info ........................................................ 326
Rev 12A 5
Section 8.5 The Data Explorer dialog ................................................................. 327
Section 8.5.1 [Procedure] To view and manage data ............................................. 327
Section 8.5.2 The Data Explorer Toolbar .............................................................. 328
Section 8.5.3 The Search panel .............................................................................. 330
Section 8.5.4 The Tree-view browser panel .......................................................... 332
Section 8.5.5 The Detail View panel ..................................................................... 337
Section 8.6 The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet ....................................... 341
Section 8.6.1 [Procedure] To create pictures of your data ..................................... 341
Section 8.6.2 The Data Explorer ............................................................................ 344
Section 8.6.3 The Picture Display panel ................................................................ 344
Section 8.6.4 The Picture Selection bar ................................................................. 346
Section 8.7 The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet ................................. 349
Section 8.7.1 [Procedure] To print data using a predefined print format ............... 349
Section 8.7.3 The Format display panel................................................................. 351
Section 8.7.4 The Format selection bar ................................................................. 351
Section 8.8 The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet..................................... 352
Section 8.8.1 The Data Explorer panel .................................................................. 352
Section 8.8.2 The Data Set panel ........................................................................... 352
Section 8.8.3 The Active Formula Set panel ......................................................... 352
Section 8.8.4 The Picture display panel ................................................................. 352
Section 8.8.5 [Procedure] To define a processing function ................................... 352
Section 8.8.7 The Data Set panel ........................................................................... 357
Section 8.8.8 The Active Formula Set panel ......................................................... 360
Section 8.8.9 The Picture Display panel ................................................................ 366
Section 8.8.10 The Picture Selection bar ................................................................. 367
Section 8.9 The Data Block Processing worksheet ............................................. 371
Section 8.9.1 [Procedure] To create and calculate user defined metrics ................ 372
Section 8.9.2 The Data List panel .......................................................................... 373
Section 8.9.3 The Data Block Processing Calculator ............................................ 376
Section 8.9.4 The Display panel ............................................................................ 382
Section 8.10 The Modal Data Selection worksheet .............................................. 384
Section 8.10.1 [Procedure] To select Modal data .................................................... 385
Section 8.10.2 Pane Header options ........................................................................ 386
Section 8.10.3 Find in panel .................................................................................. 386
Section 8.10.4 Data options panel ........................................................................... 387
Section 8.10.5 Data Selection table panel ................................................................ 388
Section 8.10.6 Display panel ................................................................................... 390
Section 8.10.7 Shapes set panel ............................................................................... 390
Section 8.10.8 Shapes pane ..................................................................................... 391
Section 8.10.9 The Geometry display panel ............................................................ 391
Section 8.11 The PolyMAX - Band worksheet..................................................... 391
Section 8.11.1 [Procedure] To define the band ........................................................ 391
Section 8.11.2 Data changes .................................................................................... 392
Section 8.11.3 Data table panel ............................................................................... 393
Section 8.11.5 Data display ..................................................................................... 395
Section 8.12 The PolyMAX - Stabilization worksheet ......................................... 396
Section 8.12.1 [Procedure] To stabilize ................................................................... 396
Section 8.12.2 Band panel ....................................................................................... 399
Section 8.12.3 Poles panel ....................................................................................... 399
Section 8.12.5 Data parameters ............................................................................... 402
Section 8.12.6 Automatic selection ......................................................................... 403
Section 8.12.7 Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter Selection options .............. 403
Section 8.12.8 Action buttons .................................................................................. 405

Section 8.13 The PolyMax - Shapes worksheet .................................................... 405
Section 8.13.1 [Procedure] To calculate shapes ...................................................... 405
Section 8.13.3 Residue type panel ........................................................................... 407
Section 8.13.5 Modes panel ..................................................................................... 409
Section 8.14 The Time MDOF - Band worksheet ................................................ 412
Section 8.14.1 [Procedure] To define the band ........................................................ 412
Section 8.15 The Time MDOF - Stabilization worksheet..................................... 416
Section 8.15.1 [Procedure] To stabilize ................................................................... 417
Section 8.15.5 Data parameters ............................................................................... 422
Section 8.15.6 Automatic selection ......................................................................... 424
Section 8.15.7 Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter Selection options .............. 424
Section 8.15.8 Action buttons .................................................................................. 426
Section 8.16 The Time MDOF - Shapes worksheet ............................................. 426
Section 8.16.1 [Procedure] To calculate shapes ...................................................... 426
Section 8.16.3 Residue type panel ........................................................................... 427
Section 8.17 The Modal Synthesis worksheet ...................................................... 433
Section 8.17.1 [Procedure] To synthesis FRFs ........................................................ 433
Section 8.17.2 Processing panel .............................................................................. 434
Section 8.17.4 Shapes table panel ............................................................................ 436
Section 8.17.5 Calculate, Parameters... and Advanced... buttons ............................ 437
Section 8.17.6 The Display panel ............................................................................ 440
Section 8.18 The Modal Validation - Validate worksheet .................................... 441
Section 8.18.1 [Procedure] To validate the accuracy of modal models ................... 442
Section 8.18.2 Active processing panel ................................................................... 443
Section 8.18.4 Process panel ................................................................................... 444
Section 8.18.5 List panel ......................................................................................... 446
Section 8.18.6 Validate active processing panel ...................................................... 447
Section 8.18.7 Correlate with active processing A with processing B panel ........... 449
Section 8.18.9 Matrix display .................................................................................. 453
Section 8.18.10 Geometry display ............................................................................. 454
Section 8.19 The Modal Validation - Data Handling worksheet .......................... 455
Section 8.19.1 [Procedure] To handle your data ...................................................... 455
Section 8.19.2 Section panel .................................................................................... 456
Section 8.19.4 Load Selected Modes in Workspace panel ...................................... 457
Section 8.19.5 Modes in workspace panel ............................................................... 459
Section 8.19.6 Create Processing from workspace panel ........................................ 460
Section 8.19.8 Geometry panel ................................................................................ 462
Section 8.20 The Multi-Run Modal - Fill Mode Mapping Table worksheet ........ 464
Section 8.20.1 [Procedure] To create a Mode Mapping Table ................................ 464
Rev 12A 7
Section 8.20.2 Look for Modes to be Merged panel ................................................ 466
Section 8.20.3 Investigate Selected Modes to be Merged panel .............................. 468
Section 8.20.4 Add Selected Target Modes panel ................................................... 468
Section 8.20.5 Add Processing to be Merged panel ................................................ 468
Section 8.20.6 Mode Mapping Table panel ............................................................. 470
Section 8.21 The Multi-Run Modal - Merge Modes worksheet ........................... 474
Section 8.21.1 [Procedure] To merge Modes .......................................................... 474
Section 8.21.2 Merge Options panel ........................................................................ 475
Section 8.21.3 Merge Modes in Mode Mapping Table panel .................................. 477
Section 8.21.4 Mode List panel ............................................................................... 478
Section 8.21.5 Mode Mapping Table panel ............................................................. 479
Section 8.22 The Modal Rigid Body - Data Selection worksheet ........................ 483
Section 8.22.1 [Procedure] To select Modal data .................................................... 483
Section 8.22.5 Verify data panel .............................................................................. 486
Section 8.22.6 FRF pane .......................................................................................... 488
Section 8.22.7 Rigid body analysis panel ................................................................ 489
Section 8.22.8 Geometry display panel ................................................................... 489
Section 8.23 The Modal Rigid Body - Calculate worksheet ................................. 489
Section 8.23.1 Calculate rigid body properties panel .............................................. 490
Section 8.23.2 Rigid body modes panel................................................................... 492
Section 8.23.3 Rigid body properties panel ............................................................. 492
Section 8.23.4 Geometry display panel ................................................................... 493

Chapter 1 Modal Analysis Theory
In This Chapter
Estimation of modal parameters .........................................9
Types of analysis ................................................................12
Parameter estimation methods............................................18
EXPONENTIAL WINDOW CORRECTION IN MODAL ANALYSIS 32
Section 1.1 Estimation of modal parameters
Section 1.1.1 Modal parameters
A modal analysis provides a set of modal parameters that characterize the

dynamic behavior of a structure. These parameters form the modal model and
the Figure below illustrates the arriving at the modal parameters.
Derivation of modal parameters
If a structure exists on which measurements can be made, then it can be

assumed that a parametric model can be defined that described that data. The
starting point is usually a set of measured data - most commonly frequency
response functions (FRFs), or the time domain equivalent, impulse responses
(IRs).
Rev 12A 9
For IRs the relation between modal parameters and the measurements is:
Figure 1: Equation 1-1
The corresponding relation for FRFs is:
where
 = IR between the response (or output) degree of freedom and the

reference (or input) DOF
 = FRF between the response DOF and the reference DOF
 = number of modes of vibration that contribute to the structure's
dynamic response within the frequency range under consideration.
 = residue value for mode
 = pole value for mode
 designates complex conjugates.
The pole value can be expresses as shown in the following equations.
where
 = the damped natural frequency of mode
 = the damping factor of mode
or
where
 = the undamped natural frequency of mode
 = the damping ratio of mode
The following equation shows that the residue can be proven to be the product
of three terms:
where

 = the mode shape coefficient at response DOF of mode

 = the mode shape coefficient at reference DOF of mode
 = a complex scaling constant, whose value is determined by the scaling
of the mode shapes.
Note: The mode shape coefficient can be either real (normal mode shapes) or
complex.
If the mode shapes are real, the scaling constant can be expresses as:
where
 = the modal mass of mode
The poles, natural frequencies (damped and undamped), damping factors or
ratios, mode shapes, and residues are commonly referred to as modal
parameters (parameters of the modes of the structure).
The fundamental problem of parameter estimation consists of adjusting

(estimating) the parameters in the model, so that the data predicted by the model
approximate (or curve- fit) the measured data closely as possible. Modal
parameters can be estimated using a number of techniques, these techniques are
discussed in the following sections.
Section 1.1.2 A note about units
The frequency and damping values have a dimension of 1/time, and are
therefore stored in Hz.
The residues have the same dimension as the measurement data. As an aside, it
is important to note that residues have a dimension. Residues are composed of a
product of mode shape coefficients and a scaling constant. The mode shape
coefficients do not have any dimension, nor absolute (or scaled) magnitude.
Dimension, and therefore units will be viewed as attributes of the scaling
constant.
Finally, for multiple input analysis, the residues are written in factored form as
the product of mode shapes with modal participation factors. Again, the product
of the factors has a dimension and absolute magnitude. Formally, the mode
shape coefficients will again be considered as without dimension and therefore
units will be viewed as attributes of the residues.
Rev 12A 11
Section 1.2 Types of analysis
Section 1.2.1 Single or multiple degree of freedom method
If, in a given frequency band, only one mode is assumed to be important, then
the parameters of this mode can be determined separately. This assumption is
sometimes called the single degree of freedom (SDOF) assumption.
The single degree of freedom assumption
Under this assumption, the FRF can be defined as:
This is assuming that to have the dimension of displacement over force.
It is possible to compensate for the modes in the neighborhood of this band, by

introducing so called upper and lower residual terms into the equation.
where
 = upper residual term (residual stiffness) used to approximate modes at
frequencies above
 = lower residual term (residual mass) used to approximate modes at
frequencies below
Upper and lower residuals are illustrated in the Figure below.

Upper and lower residuals
The equation can be further simplified by neglecting the complex conjugate

terms, and thus it becomes
Section 1.2.1.1 Single degree of freedom method

The single DOF assumption forms the basis for parameter estimation techniques
such as Peak picking, Mode picking and Circle fitting.
Section 1.2.1.2 Multiple degree of freedom method

The SDOF assumption is valid only if the modes of the system are well
decoupled. In general this may not be the case. It then becomes necessary to
approximate the data with a model that includes terms for several modes. The
parameters of several modes are then estimated simultaneously with so-called
multiple degree of freedom method.
Section 1.2.2 Local or global estimates
If you recall the time domain relationship between modal parameters and
measurement functions,
you will see that the pole values are independent of both the response and
the reference DOFs. In other words, the pole value is a characteristic of the
system and should be found in any function that is measured on the structure.
When applying parameter estimation techniques, one of two strategies can be
employed, making local or global estimates.
Rev 12A 13
Local versus global estimates
Local estimates Global estimates

Each data record is analyzed All the data records are analyzed
individually, and a potentially simultaneously in order to estimate the
different estimate of the pole structure's characteristics.
value is found each time.
Analyzing data in this manner With this approach, a unique estimate of the
produces as many estimates of pole values is obtained. Such estimates are
each pole as there are data therefore called global estimates.
records. It is then left to the user
to decide which estimate is the
best of to somehow calculate
the best average of all the
estimates.
Peak picking and Circle fitting The Least Squares Complex Exponential
are techniques that calculate (LSCE) and PolyMAX methods allow you to
local estimates of pole values. obtain global estimates of structure
characteristics.
Section 1.2.3 Multiple input analysis
Assume that data is available between input DOFs and output DOFs.
The expression for each of the individual data records (equation 2-4) can then
be rewritten in matrix form for all the data records.
where
 = matrix with as elements

 = matrix with as elements
The residue matrix in factored form is:
where
 = vector (column) with mode shape coefficients at the output

DOFs
 = vector (row) with mode shape coefficients at the input DOFs
If DOFs and are both output and input DOFs then the above equation

implies Maxwell Betti reciprocity,
This assumption is not essential however since the residue matrix can be
expressed in a more general form,
where
 = vector (row) with coefficients that express the participation of

the mode in response data relative to different input DOFs.
These coefficients are called modal participation factors therefore.
Note: If reciprocity is assumed then the modal participation factors are

proportional to the mode shape coefficient at the input DOFs.
Using the factored form of the residue matrix, the equation can be written as,
If just the data between any output DOF and all input DOFs are considered then
where
 = vector of data between output DOF and all input DOFs.

It is essential that both the poles and the modal participation factors are
independent of the output DOF. In other words in this formulation the
characteristics become
A multiple input modal parameter estimation technique is one that analyses data
relative to several inputs simultaneously to estimate the characteristics
expressed by equation above(i.e. both the pole values and the modal
participation factors).
The identification of modal participation factors is essential for decoupling

highly coupled or even repeated roots. To illustrate this consider a structure that
has two modes with pole values and very close to each other. Neglecting
the other modes and the complex conjugate terms the response data relative to
the input DOF can be expressed as
Rev 12A 15
or since
The latter equation that in the response data relative to an input DOF , a
combination of the couples modes is observed and not the individual modes.
The combination coefficients for the modes are the modal participation factors
and
The response data relative to another input DOF :
The only difference between these last two equation is the modal participation
factors and . If they are linearly independent of the modal participation
factors for input , then the modes will appear in a different combination in the
response data relative to input 1. As a multiple input parameter estimation
technique analyses data relative to several inputs simultaneously, and the modal
participation factors are identification then it is possible to detect highly couples
or repeated modes.
Section 1.2.4 Time vs frequency domain implementation
Using digital signal processing methods, only samples of a continuous function

are available. For modal parameter estimation the sampled data consist most
frequently of FRF measurements. Normally these are taken at equally spaced
frequency lines. Testing techniques such as stepped sine excitation allow you to
measure data at unequally spaced frequency lines.
For modal parameter estimation applications with the data measured in the
frequency domain, introducing the sampled nature of the data transforms the
equation for the model to:
where
 = samples of data in the measured range.

 = sampled value of the frequency in measured range.
A frequency domain parameter estimation method uses data directly in the
frequency domain to estimate modal parameters. It is therefore irrelevant
whether the frequency lines are equally spaced or not.
If the data are sampled at equally spaced frequency lines, then the FRF can be
transformed back to the time domain to obtain a corresponding Impulse

Response (IR). A Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm is used for this
transformation but the restriction on the number of frequency lines being equal
to a power of 2 (e.g. 32, 64, 128 ...) is no linger valid. After transformation, a
series of equally spaced samples of corresponding impulse response functions is
obtained. A time domain parameter estimation technique allows you to analyze
such equally spaced time samples to estimate modal parameters.
In practice, a variety of conditions mean that the frequency band over which
data is analyzed is smaller than the full measurement band. This is illustrated in
the following Figure.
Analysis frequency band vs. measurement band
The analysis frequency band includes only three modes whereas the
measurement band includes five. If the data is transformed from frequency to
time domain, then the time increment between samples will be determined by
the analysis frequency band and not the measurement band. If the frequency
band of the analysis is bounded by and then the is determined from
By substituting sampled time for continuous time
or
where
Time domain parameter estimation methods are based on the model defined by
equation above. They analyze to estimate . .
Rev 12A 17
Note: However this calculation is not unique.
Since
This implies that no poles outside the frequency band can be identified.
In other words, with a time domain parameter estimation method, all estimated
poles are to be found in the frequency band of analysis . This may
cause problems in estimating modal parameters if the data in the frequency band
of analysis is strongly influenced by modes outside this band (residual effects).
Since with frequency domain method is estimated directly, no such limitation
arises. A frequency domain technique may therefore sometimes be preferred
over a time domain technique for analyzing data over a narrow frequency band,
where residual effects are important.
Section 1.3 Parameter estimation methods
Section 1.3.1 Least Square Complex Exponential (LSCE)
The Least Square Complex Exponential method allows you to estimate values
of modal frequency and damping for several modes simultaneously. Since all
the data is analyzed simultaneously, global estimates are obtained.
To understand how the method works, recall the expression for an impulse
response (IR) given below
Figure 2: Equation 1-1
It can be seen from this expression that the pole values are not a function of
a particular response (output) or reference (input) DOF. In other words the pole
values are global (rather than local) characteristics of the structure. They are the
same for any measured FRF on the structure. It should therefore be possible to
use all the available data measured on the system to identify global estimate
simultaneously.
This method can be used with single and multiple inputs.
Section 1.3.1.1 Model for continuous data

A particular problem when trying to work with the previous equation to achieve
the above objective is that it contains residues , which do depend on the

response and reference DOFs. It is therefore essential to define another

parametric model for the data , in which the coefficients are independent of
response and reference DOFs and can be used to identify estimates for . It
can be proved that such a model takes the form of a linear differential equation
of order with constant real coefficients
Indeed, the equation above expresses the data as a linear superposition of a set
of damped complex exponentials occurring in complex conjugate pairs.
Such complex exponentials can be viewed as the characteristic solutions of a
linear differential equation with constant real coefficients
The impulse response, being a linear superposition of characteristic solutions, is

by itself also a characteristic solution. Therefore equation is valid if the
coefficients are:
Turning the reasoning around therefore, one could first try to estimate the
coefficient in the equation above by using all the available data. Estimates of the
complex exponential coefficient can then be determined.
Section 1.3.1.2 Model for sampled data

Measured data is however sampled, not continuous. So rather than working
from equation (3-1) it is necessary to work with
Equation 3-5
Instead of damped complex exponentials, the characteristics are now power

series with base number .
Following a similar reasoning to that explained above for continuous data, it

could be proved that the sampled data is the solution of a linear finite difference
equation with constant real coefficients of order (instead of a differential
equation as for continuous data).
Equation 3-6
The characteristics and therefore the poles can be found by solving,
Rev 12A 19
Equation 3-7
Section 1.3.1.3 Practical implementation of the method

The Least Square Complex Exponential is method that estimates the
coefficients by using data measured on the system.
In principle any data record can be used. Applying the method to just a
single data record at a time will result in local estimates of the poles.
To estimate the coefficients in a least square sense the equations for all possible
time points and all possible response and reference DOFs are to be solved
simultaneously as indicated in the following equation. This equation system will
be greatly over determined. To find the least square solution the normal
equations technique can be applied so that the final solution is calculated from a
compact equation with a square coefficient matrix. The coefficient matrix in this
equation is called covariance matrix.
where
 = last available time sample
 = number of response DOFs
 = number of input DOFs
We can write this in a simpler manner
The coefficients in the covariance matrix are defined as
Building this covariance matrix is the first stage in applying the Least Squares

Complex Exponential method. This phase is usually the most time consuming
since all available data is used to build the inner product.
Note: The next step is to calculate the estimates of modal frequency and
damping is to substitute the estimated coefficients and to solve for .
Section 1.3.1.4 Determining the optimum number of modes

The solution of the previous equation results in the least squares estimates of the
coefficient. It is also possible therefore to calculate the corresponding least
squares error. This error is of importance in determining the minimum number
of modes in the data. In the preceding discussion it has been assumed that
modes are present in the data.
However, the number of modes contained in the data is in fact unknown. It is

preferable that this should be determined by the method itself. Using the Least
Square Complex Exponential method, this can be achieved by observing the
evolution of the least square error on the solutions as a function of the number
of assumed modes
To do this, an equation is initially created, assuming a number of modes that

is sufficiently large. A subset of such an equation is then taken to solve for the
coefficients of a model that describes just one mode
The corresponding least square error is represented by .
When 2 modes are assumed in the data then the subset to be solved is
With corresponding least squares errors and so on. Now if a model is assumed
with a number of modes equal to the number of modes that is present in the data
then the corresponding least squares error should be significantly smaller than
the error for models with fewer modes.
A diagram that plots the least squares error for increasing number of modes is
called the least square error chart.
Rev 12A 21
Least squares error diagram, system with 4 modes
To determine the optimal number of modes you could try to compare frequency
and damping estimates that are calculated from models with various number of
modes. Physical intuition would lead you to expect that estimates of frequency
and damping corresponding to true structural modes, should recur (in
approximately the same place) as the number of modes is increased.
Computational modes will not reappear with identical frequency and damping.
A diagram that shows the evolution of frequency and damping as the number of
modes that can be calculated for use can then be seen, as those modes for which
the frequency and damping values of the physical modes do not change
significantly. In other words, those which have stabilized.
A stabilization diagram
Example
Let two data records be measured on a system, both shown in the Figure below.

Example least squares complex exponential
Let four data samples be measured of which the values are listed in the Table
below.
Local versus global estimates
n h11 h21
0 1 .0
1 0 1
2 -1 0
3 0 -1
Consider a model for 1 mode (N = 1). The above equations become:
The solution is therefore , . Then and are calculated
The frequency and damping values follow from
The solution indicates a mode with a period and zero damping. This is
compatible with the trend of the cursor as shown in the Figure above.
Rev 12A 23
Section 1.3.1.5 Multiple inputs least squares complex exponential

The Least squares Complex Exponential method, described above, uses all data
measured on a structure to estimate global estimates of modal frequency and
damping. In principle, data relative to several reference DOFs can be used.
However the model used by the previous method does not take specific
advantage of this.
The multiple inputs Least Squares Complex Exponential, (or polyreference), is

an extension of the Least Squares Complex Exponential that does allow
consistent simultaneous analysis of data relative to several reference DOFs. The
method computes global estimates of frequency and damping and also of modal
participation factors. Modal participation factors are terms that express the
participation of modes in the system response as a function of the reference (or
input) DOF, see the section on Multiple input analysis (on page 14). The
simultaneous estimation of frequency, damping and modal participation factors
means that highly couples, even repeated modes can be identified.
The basis for the Multiple Input Least Squares Complex Exponential method is
the model of the data introduced in the section on Multiple input analysis. (see
"Multiple input analysis" on page 14)
where
 = vector (row) of IRs between output DOF and all input DOFs
 = vector modal participation factor for mode . If reference DOF
are assumed then is of dimension
 = is the modes shape coefficient at the response DOF for mode
Note: In this model, frequency, damping and modal participation factors are
independent of the particular response DOF. It should therefore be possible
to estimate these coefficients using the available data simultaneously.
Model for sampled data

The model expressed by equation (3-11) is not directly suitable for global
estimation of frequency, damping and modal participation factors as it still
contains the mode shape coefficients that are dependant on the response DOF.
Therefore a more suitable model must be derived.
Introducing firstly the sampled nature of the data, equation (3-11) is rewritten
as,

Equation 3-12
It can be proved that if the data can be described by equation (3-12), it can also
be described by the following model
Equation 3-13
if the following conditions are fulfilled
Equation 3-14
Equation 3-15
(The proof of this follows from basic calculus along the same lines as for the
Least Squares Complex Exponential section (see "Least Square Complex
Exponential (LSCE)" on page 18).
Equation (3-13) represents, in matrix notation, a coupled set of finite

difference equations with constant coefficients. The coefficients are
therefore matrices of dimension .
The condition expressed by equation (3-14) states that the terms and
are characteristic solutions of this system of finite difference equations. As
equation (3-12) is a superposition of of such terms, it is essential that the
number of characteristic solutions of this system of equations at least
equals as expressed by equation (3-15).
Note: Finally, if data for each reference DOF is treated individually, i.e.
, then equation (3-13) and (3-14) simplify to equation (3-6) and (3-7).
Thus the least squares complex exponential method is a special case of the
multiple input least squares complex exponential method.
Rev 12A 25
Practical implementation of the method

To estimate the coefficients in a least square sense the equations for all possible
response DOFs are to be solved simultaneously, as indicated by the following
equation. A least squares solution is found, for example using the normal
equations method. The coefficient matrix in this equation is again the form of a
covariance matrix,
where
 = the last available time sample
 = the number of response DOFs
The order of the finite difference equation is related to the number of the
modes in the data It is preferable that this be determined by the method itself.
As the coefficients of the finite difference equation are solved for in a least
squares sense, this can be done by observing the least squares error as a function
of the assumed order. As an order is reached such that the model can be
describe as many modes are present in the data, the error should drop
considerably.
There is no linear relation between the number of modes that can be described
by the model and the order of the model. The relation between then number of
modes, the order of the model and the number of reference DOFs is listed in the
Table below. It can be seen that a model of order 8 can be described 11 or 12
modes if data for 3 inputs are analyzed simultaneously. In the error diagrams
therefore the same least squares error is shown for 11 and 12 modes.
As for the Least Squares Complex Exponential method, a stabilization diagram

can again be created to determine the optimal number of modes. As well as
comparing frequency and damping values calculated from models of
consecutive order it is now also possible to compare the stabilization of modal

participation factors. In the section on Multiple input analysis (on page 14), the
modal participation factors were shown to be proportional to the mode shape
coefficients at the reference DOFs. They also represent a physical characteristic
of the structure like the frequency and damping. Therefore, the values
corresponding to structural modes should also stabilize as the order of the model
is increased. This additional criterion adds much to the readability of the
stabilization diagram and to the ability to distinguish computational modes from
physical modes.
Additionally, the modal participation factors can be used by themselves to

identify physical modes. If they are normalized with respect to the largest, the
values should all be approximately real, in phase or in anti-phase, for structural
modes.
Relation between modal order (tabulated), number of modes
(N) and number of reference DOF (N(i))
N Ni=1 Ni=2 Ni=3 Ni=4 Ni=5 Ni=6

1 2 1 1 1 1 1
2 4 2 2 1 1 1
3 6 3 2 2 2 1
4 8 4 3 2 2 2
5 10 5 4 3 2 2
6 12 6 4 3 3 2
7 14 7 5 4 3 3
8 16 8 6 4 4 3
9 18 9 6 5 4 3
10 20 10 7 5 4 4
11 22 11 8 6 5 4
12 24 12 8 6 5 4
13 26 13 9 7 6 5
14 28 14 10 7 6 5
15 30 15 10 8 6 5
16 32 16 11 8 7 6
17 34 17 12 9 7 6
18 36 18 12 9 8 6
19 38 19 13 10 8 7
20 40 20 14 10 8 7
21 42 21 14 11 9 7
Rev 12A 27
N Ni=1 Ni=2 Ni=3 Ni=4 Ni=5 Ni=6

22 44 22 15 11 9 8
23 46 23 16 12 10 8
24 48 24 16 12 10 8
25 50 25 17 13 10 9
26 52 26 18 13 11 9
27 54 27 18 14 11 9
28 56 28 19 14 12 10
29 58 29 20 15 12 10
30 60 30 20 15 12 10
31 62 31 21 16 13 11
32 64 32 22 16 13 11
Example
To clarify the method, consider again the example discussed in the section
above (see "Example" on page 22). Let the example system satisfy reciprocity
so that is also equal to . The vector then represents the data
between response DOF 1 and reference DOF 1 and 2.
Consider a model for 1 mode (so , as ) thus we get:
The resulting matrix polynomial is therefore
and the solutions of the eigenvalue problem are
Note: The solution for the frequency damping is the same as found with the
Least Squares Complex Exponential. (see "Least Square Complex Exponential

(LSCE)" on page 18)
In addition you also find an estimate of the modal participation factors. For this
example they indicate that there should be a phase difference of in the system
response between excitation from reference DOFs 1 and 2 as is a cosine,
and a sine. This estimate seems to be correct.
Section 1.3.2 Least Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD)
The Least Square Frequency Domain method is a multiple DOF technique to

estimate residue, or mode shape coefficients. The method requires that
frequency and damping values have already been estimates. It can be used with
single or multiple inputs.
Consider the model expressed by equation
If estimates of the modal frequency and damping are available, then the residues
appear linearly as unknowns in this model.
To estimate the residues, the equation is transformed back to the frequency

domain. Assuming sampled data therefore
where
 = upper residual term used to approximate modes at frequencies above
 = lower residual term used to approximate modes at frequencies below
These are illustrated in the Figure given previously.
Note: The residues as well as lower and upper residuals are local
characteristics, in other words, they depend on the particular response and
reference DOF.
The Least Squares Frequency Domain method is based on the model expressed
by the equation above. Least squares estimates of residues, lower and upper
residuals are calculated by analyzing all data values in a selected frequency
range.
Rev 12A 29
Section 1.3.2.1 Multiple input Least Squares Frequency Domain

The Multiple input Least Squares Frequency Domain method is a multiple DOF
technique to estimate mode shapes. The method analyses data relative to several
reference DOFs simultaneously to estimate mode shape coefficients that are
independent of reference DOFs.
Consider the model expressed as:
If estimates of frequency, damping and modal participation factors are

available, then the mode shape coefficients appear linearly as the only
unknowns in this model. Furthermore, they are dependent on the response DOF
(and not on the reference DOF) so that data relative to several reference DOFs
can be analyzed simultaneously.
To estimate the residues, the equation above is transformed to the frequency

domain. Adding residual terms and assuming sampled data results in
where
 = upper residuals between response DOF and all reference DOFs,

vector of dimension
 = lower residuals between response DOF and all reference DOFs,
vector of dimension
The multiple input LSFD method is based on the equation above.
Section 1.3.3 PolyMAX
The PolyMAX method is a further evolution of the least-squares complex

frequency-domain (LSCF) estimation method. The LSCF method identifies a
so-called common-denominator model and was introduced to find initial values
for the iterative maximum likelihood method. These "initial values" yielded
very accurate modal parameters with a very small computational effort. The
most important advantage of the LSCF estimator over the available and widely
applied parameter estimation techniques is the fact that very clear stabilization
diagrams are obtained.
It was found that the identified common-denominator model closely fitted the
measured FRF data. However, when converting this model to a modal model by
reducing the residues to a rank-one matrix using the singular value
decomposition (SVD), the quality of the fit decreased. Another feature of the

common-denominator implementation is that the stabilization diagram can only

be constructed using pole information (eigenfrequencies and damping ratios).
Neither participation factors nor mode shapes are available at first instance. The
theoretically associated drawback is that closely spaced poles will erroneously
show up as a single pole.
Section 1.3.3.1 Data model

Just like the FDPI (Frequency-domain direct parameter identification) method,
PolyMAX uses measured FRFs as primary data. Time-domain methods, such as
the polyreference LSCE method, typically require impulse responses (obtained
as the inverse Fourier transforms of the FRFs) as primary data. In the PolyMAX
method, following so-called right matrix-fraction model is assumed to represent
the measured FRFs:
Equation 3-23
where is the matrix containing the FRFs between all m inputs

and all l outputs; are the numerator matrix polynomial coefficients;
are the denominator matrix polynomial coefficients and p is the
model order. Please note that a so-called z-domain model (i.e. a
frequency-domain model that is derived from a discrete- time model) is used in
(3-23), with:
Equation 3-24
where is the sampling time. Equation (3-23) can be written down for all
values of the frequency axis of the FRF data. Basically, the unknown model
coefficients are then found as the least-squares solution of these
equations (after linearization).
Section 1.3.3.2 Modal parameters

Once the denominator coefficients are determined, the poles and modal
participation factors are retrieved as the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of their
companion matrix. This procedure is similar to what happens in the
time-domain LSCE method and allows constructing a stabilization diagram for
increasing model orders and using stability criteria for eigenfrequencies,
damping ratios and modal participation factors.
Although theoretically the mode shapes could be derived from the model
coefficients , we proceed in a different way. A so-called pole-residue
model is considered:
Rev 12A 31
wheren is the number of modes; are the mode shapes;

respectively denote complex conjugate, transpose, and complex conjugate
transpose of a matrix; are the modal participation factors and are
the poles, which are occurring in complex-conjugated pairs and are related to
the eigenfrequencies and damping ratios as follows:
This procedure is similar to what happens in the time-domain LSCE method and
allows constructing a stabilization diagram for increasing model orders and
using stability criteria for eigenfrequencies, damping ratios and modal
participation factors.
are respectively the lower and upper residuals modelling the

influence of the out-of-band modes in the considered frequency band. The
interpretation of the stabilization diagram yields a set of poles and
corresponding participation factors . Since the mode shapes and the
lower and upper residuals are the only unknowns, they are readily obtained by
solving the equation in a linear least-squares sense. This second step is
commonly called least-squares frequency-domain (LSFD) method (see "Least
Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD)" on page 29). The same mode-shape
estimation method is normally also used in conjunction with the time-domain
LSCE method (see "Least Square Complex Exponential (LSCE)" on page 18).
Section 1.4 EXPONENTIAL WINDOW CORRECTION IN

MODAL ANALYSIS
Section 1.4.1 Use of windows during Modal Impact Testing
To reduce the remaining noise at the end of the acquisition time a force window
is applied to the input channel and an exponential window to the response
channel.
If your test structure is only lightly damped, the response may continue beyond
the end of the acquisition time. In this case, to minimize leakage problems, the
signal must be forced to decay completely using an exponential window. This
has the effect of adding artificial damping to the system.
Applying a Force/exponential window to the input signal avoids this problem

since it provides a one-to-one relationship between the windowed reference and
the response channel. A Force/Exponential window is created by the
multiplication of a Force window with the Exponential window used for the
response channels.

Section 1.4.2 Exponential window on reference and response
Suppose we have a time domain reference signal x(t) and a time domain
response signal y(t), the Fourier transforms of these signals are
with X(s) and Y(s) the Laplace transform of x(t) and y(t); and
The frequency response function (FRF) is
If the same exponential window has been applied on x(t) and y(t), we have
X’(f) and Y’(f) become:
The FRF of these windowed functions is:
And therefore
If a function H(s) has n poles (that are not too coupled) in the Laplace domain
then h(t) can be written as:
Rev 12A 33
Then h’(t) becomes
By using H’(f) the estimated poles become
for i = 1 to n
Because has a negative sign and a positive sign, the estimated damping
is higher than the real damping.
Adding to the estimated damping therefore compensates the applied

exponential window.
If you, after the estimation, want to compare the synthesized FRFs with the
original ones (which were subject to an exponential window), this beta-factor
has to be subtracted from the poles before the actual FRF synthesis can be
calculated correctly.
Section 1.4.3 Only an exponential window on the response
Suppose only the response signal has been subject to an exponential window,
then H’(f) becomes:
and therefore there isn’t any general relation between H’(f) and H(f).
Section 1.4.4 Practical implementation
Section 1.4.4.1 Interpretation of the exponential factor

When using the mathematical formulas, applying an exponential window is
actually a multiplication with , with a value between zero (no

window, damping zero) and infinity (damping infinity). In Test.Lab a different

interpretation has been given (and shown to the user). In this case the
exponential factor is actually the exponential decay L, which determines the
percentage level at the end of the time window T. In the figure below the
relations between , L and T are shown.
The relation between the exponential window, Beta, T and L
Since , with
the number of time samples, the time between each time sample,
the sample rate and the bandwidth, we get the following relation:
Rev 12A 35
Since a FFT of a real signal x[0], x[1],…, x[N-1] has to following form: X[0],
X[1], X[2], X[3], … X[N-1] with X[i] = conjugate(X[N-i]) for i=1…N/2, only
the first 1+N/2 frequency samples are necessary to uniquely identify the signal.
This strategy is followed in Test.Lab (and Cada-X). Therefore we have the
following relation between the blocksize in time domain and frequency domain:
Section 1.4.4.2 The followed strategy

From the theory we learn that an exact compensation is only possible when the
same exponential window has been applied to both response as reference.
For the practical implementation we follow the strategy of Cada-X, i.e. we

always take the exponential window factor of the response (even if no window
has been applied to the reference).

Chapter 2 Data and its management
In This Chapter
Data management and configuration ..................................37
Importing and exporting data .............................................40
My Links ............................................................................55
Project data .........................................................................56
Units and how to handle them ............................................58
Searching for Data using the Data Explorer .......................63
Section 2.1 Data management and configuration
This document discusses some concepts and terminology concerned with the
Test.Lab software in general and the Desktop software in particular.
 The desktop (on page 37)
 Applications (on page 38)
 Projects (on page 38)
 Documentation (on page 40)
Section 2.1.1 The desktop
The Test.Lab desktop is the basic software module or application that is started
by double clicking the LMS shortcut or icon on your computer. An application
window appears that contains a menubar, a toolbar and a working area.
A new window is opened every time you open a project. These multiple project
windows can be arranged using the Window menu either, as a cascade or, to
make them all visible, as tiles. Each one of these windows is related to a
different project.
Every application window has a menubar and a toolbar (although the toolbar
can be hidden, if required, using the View Toolbars menu). The contents of
the menubar and toolbar depend on the active window and the project /
application that it represents. You can make a particular window active by
clicking on it and the active project / application window is then distinguished
by the color of its title bar turning in a darker blue.
Note: All operations performed using the menubar and toolbar will be
executed on this active project / application window.
Rev 12A 37
Section 2.1.2 Applications
An application is an integrated software module, such as Test.Lab Desktop.

Each application provides all the functionality required to perform a specific
task. Each step required to accomplish this is performed using a specific
worksheet, and by stepping through each worksheet in order, the required task
can be realized. The complete set of worksheets required for an application
comprises a workbook.
You can open any Test.Lab application by using the Start menu on the
Windows taskbar. Click on the application's shortcut available under the
Programs menu. You can then open an existing project (.lms file) within the
application by using the File Open... menu or the Open Project icon on
the toolbar. Or, you can open a new project by using the File New menu or the
New Project icon on the toolbar.
You can open an existing project by right clicking on the project and selecting
Open with....
Then select the Test.Lab application that you want to use.
If you want to open your projects using this application by default just check the
corresponding checkbox Always use the selected program to open this
kind of file.
Section 2.1.3 Projects
A project is a single entity that contains all the data that you require to be kept
together. It is a means of grouping a set of data that logically belong together.
This is typically the data relating to a particular test object. It could thus include
all sorts of data, such as measurement data, test and processing setups, geometry
and modal data.
Note: One project is not necessarily related to just one application.
You can use different applications with the same project and you can use a
single application with a number of different projects, though typically you
would not have the same project open in different applications at the same time.
Projects are automatically assigned a name that contains a sequential number

(ProjectX). The project can be renamed when being saved using the File Save
As... menu or the Save icon on the toolbar.

Section 2.1.3.1 Opening a project within an application

First, start the application by clicking on its shortcut.
Using the toolbar icon for New Project (on page 308) will open a new
default project (NewProject.lms on the <install
dir>\LMSTest.Lab11A\central\Install folder.
You can open an existing project (.lms file) within the application by using the
File Open... menu.
A project can be assigned a name and be saved as an .lms file.
Section 2.1.3.2 Opening a project directly

Using Windows Explorer, when you double-click the project file, it is opened
by the default application. This default is set during the Test.Lab installation
procedure.
You can also use the standard Windows functionality to open an existing project
with a different application.
First select the project in a Windows Explorer and right click the file.
In the popup menu, use the Open With... option to select the application that
you want to open the project.
Section 2.1.3.3 Project templates

Every project is based on a template that determines the initial setup and
settings for a new project. A project template can contain multiple test setups or
sections. Project template files have the extension .tpl
Section 2.1.3.3.1 [Procedure] To make a new project template

Step 1
Open an existing project. Make any changes to the test setup you require.
Step 2
Save the project settings with the File Save As Template... menu and give it a
name (file_name.tpl).
When you next use File New on the menubar to start a new project, the new
template will be available for selection.
Section 2.1.3.3.2 [Procedure] To change the default project template

Step 1
First make a new project template as above.
Step 2
When you save the project settings via the File Save As Template... menu,
Rev 12A 39
select the option to create a template shortcut on the desktop.

You can now open a new file with the created template by double clicking the
desktop shortcut.
Section 2.1.4 Documentation
Documentation in the form of user defined attributes as well as MS Word

documents or pictures, can be attached to projects, sections and runs. You can
use the documentation worksheet to add a document to a project and to a
section.
To add a document to a run, use the browser tree in the Data Data Explorer
menu. In addition, other files including picture files can be added.
Section 2.1.4.1 LMS Document templates

Every project, section and run document is based on a template. This template
determines the basic structure and format for a document. Document template
files normally have the .doc extension. The program provides a default template
for project, section and run documents.
Section 2.2 Importing and exporting data
This document describes the types of files that you can import and export and
those that can be embedded in a report.
The Test.Lab software enables you to view and access data on the network
systems that have been configured for access.
This data is accessed via the network folder in the browser tree of the Navigator
worksheet with the “Network” icon . From this folder you can export the
data items to a text (.txt) and, if suitable, to a sound (.wav) file.
A graphical representation of the data can be displayed in the appropriate

windows. A complete layout, composed of one or more display windows and
the data inside them, is termed a “picture”. Pictures can be copied and pasted
into other applications using a number of different formats.

 Importing data items (on page 41)

 Exporting data items (on page 50)
 Copying pictures (on page 54)
Section 2.2.1 Importing data items
You can import data using the

 Browser tree
 Bookmarks
 Tec.Manager
Section 2.2.1.1 Data types you can import

This section describes the different types of data that can be accessed and thus
imported in the Desktop software. These are categorized into the following
types:
 Cada-X project databases (see "The Cada-X project database" on page 41)
 Cada-X TDF databases (see "The TDF database" on page 43)
 Cada-X TRDS files (see "TRDS files" on page 44)
 Road Runner data or Pimento data (see "Road Runner files" on page 46)
 Sysnoise data (see "Sysnoise databases" on page 46)
 Universal files (on page 45)
 SDF files (on page 46)
 RPC III files (on page 47)
 Matlab data (on page 47)
 Polytec add-in (on page 49)
 Test.Lab data
 Virtual.Lab data
 ASAM-ODS ATF data
 STL files (geometry) (see "STL data" on page 49)
Section 2.2.1.2 The Cada-X project database
Note: The project being discussed here is a Cada-X database and not the
Test.Lab storage facility used in the Desktop software context.
The Cada-X project database is used to store a wide variety of data that can be
acquired and created using the Cada-X software. It is a collection of data that
logically belong together; most frequently they all refer to a common object - a
car prototype for example. This includes geometrical data describing a structure,
test data measured on the structure and the results of analyses performed on the
test data. The five types of data that are contained in a project are illustrated
Rev 12A 41
below.
Contents of the Cada-X project database
Only one geometry definition of a test structure can exist in a project. There can
be any number of test sections and analysis sections that hold the results of
measurements and analyses on the test structure. You will see from the figure
above that the Cada-X database can also hold multiple sets of units.
When browsing, the project icon represents a project database. Clicking on

the sign next to this icon will reveal all the available data types in that
project.
Section 2.2.1.2.1 Tests

Tests contain test data that has either been measured or computed. A block of
data values making up the specific function represents such data.
When browsing, the test section icon represents a test section. Clicking on
the sign next to this icon will reveal the contents of the test section.
In all cases a textual memo can be associated with each test.

2.2.1.2.1.1 Data functions
Data functions are composed of a series of data values that make up the block.
In addition there is a descriptive header containing information about the type of
block.
When browsing, the function icon indicates data functions. Any data
represented by this icon can be viewed in a display window in the Desktop
software application. A number of selected functions can be loaded into a
FrontBack window where they will overlay each other, or they can be loaded
into a Colormap or Waterfall window where the series of blocks will be
presented along a third axis.
The type of function (FRF, time record, coherence ...) is indicated along side
each record and can be read from the tool tip if the mouse pointer is placed over
the function icon. The primary identification of the function is also displayed. In
most cases this identifies the measurement point or channel on which the data
was acquired.

Data values
The series of data values which make up a block can be displayed as a static
function in a FrontBack window. You can export the complete list of values to a
number of alternative formats (see "Exporting data items" on page 50).
Data record headers

These are an extremely useful set of field values which are used to characterize
a data block and which can be used for searches and to derive information about
the characteristics of the data. Most of these appear in the legend that can be
associated with a display window. They can be read from the “Properties” sheet
associated with the data.
Section 2.2.1.2.2 Geometry

Only one geometry definition can exist in a Cada-X project database. This is
basically a wire frame model of the test object and consists of nodes (where
measurements are made and at which points mode shape deflections are
determined), connections between the nodes and surfaces between sets of three
nodes. You can see the nodes / connections / triangles in the “Properties” sheet.
The geometry of an object is represented by the icon and can be loaded into
a “Geometry” window, where it will form the “undeformed model”. Mode
shapes can be imposed on it and animated.
Section 2.2.1.2.3 Analyses

Analyses are a means of grouping results that are the outcome of various modal
analyses on the test data in the current project. Any number of analyses can be
held in a project and each one can hold a number of mode records.
Modes can be viewed in a Geometry window, where the correct model is on

display, and be animated on that model. Actual values can be seen in the
properties. If required, you can also export the values.
Section 2.2.1.3 The TDF database

The TDF database is used for the storage of “streamed data”. This is generally
extensive sets of measurement data that in most cases are unprocessed time
signals.
When browsing, the TDF identifies a TDF database. Clicking on the

sign next to this icon will reveal the contents of the TDF database.
There is no hierarchical structure to the TDF database. Bundles of channels are

grouped together in either “recordings”. Recordings can be of various lengths
and with varying numbers of channels.
Rev 12A 43
Structure of the TDF database
TDF files are generated in the Throughput Acquisition Monitor.
Recordings are bundles of streamed data that are imported, processed and
manipulated in Test monitor. They can come from imported DAT recordings,
measured directly using Binaural recording or be generated by processing from
within the Time data processing or Sound Quality monitors. Each recording can
contain an unlimited number of “channels” that logically belong together.
Recordings are represented in the browser by the 'recording' icon. Dragging

a recording into a display will result in all the channels it contains being
displayed. Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal all the channels
that were contained in the recording. The function represents each of these
channels. Any data represented by this function icon can be viewed in a (2D)
Frontback display window in the Desktop software.
Section 2.2.1.4 TRDS files

During a Signature monitor acquisition, a series of basic measurement functions
(time signals or frequency spectra for example) are acquired at specific times
during the complete acquisition. The acquisition of these basic measurement
functions is triggered by the value of a tracking parameter; which can be rpm,
time, temperature or some other variable that the user is interested in. This
results in a series of data blocks (or functions) that are known collectively as a
“map” since it plots the evolution of the measurement function with respect to
the tracking parameter.
Contents of a TRDS file
In addition, various composite functions can be generated. Each time the target
tracking parameter value is met, a single (real or complex) value is calculated

for each composite block based on the newly acquired data. The maximum
number of acquisitions determines the length of such blocks. The contents of
such blocks can be the tracking parameter values or online analysis functions
such as OA levels, order and frequency sections.
All of this data can be saved in a TRDS file. When browsing, the TRDS
indicates a TRDS file. Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal the
contents of the TRDS file.
The contents of this file will either be the “map” of basic measurement
functions or the single block composite functions. These various entities are
grouped together according to measurement channels as indicated by the
'channel' icon.
The function icon represents the single blocks of composite data, and the
type of function is indicated alongside. Data represented by this icon can be
visualized in a FrontBack window.
The waterfall icon represents the “map” of basic measurement functions.

Such data can be dragged into a 3D display window such as a waterfall or a
colormap window. The Z axis will be annotated with the value of the tracking
parameter (time, rpm, or whatever) as stored in the TRDS file. Clicking on the
sign next to the waterfall icon will reveal all the basic measurement
functions, each one being represented by the function icon. You can select a
number of these functions and load them into a 3D display window too, but in
this case the Z axis will be annotated with the number of functions loaded.
Section 2.2.1.5 Universal files

A Universal File is a physical file in ASCII format, containing symbolic data in
physical records with a maximum record length of 80 characters. The term
Universal File is used to denote a complete file which can contain a number of
“file datasets”. There are a number of different file datasets each used to
describe different types of functions.
The 'Header file data set' (151) contains the information for the model's name,
description and the generating program. It also contains information for the time
and date of the file's creation and last access.
The 'Units file data set' (164 or 156) contains the units and the description of the
units for the data set, as well as the factors for converting the file units to SI.
The 'Function at Nodal DOF file data set' (58) documents any time or frequency
domain function with several lines of ID information, response and reference
location, direction and name. The ordinate data type and abscissa spacing along
with the specific data type, axis labels, and units are also included in the file.
The 'Function at Nodal DOF file data set' (58b) contains data in both ASCII and
binary formats. The header (first 11 records) for Dataset 58b is identical to that
of Universal File Dataset 58. It contains function attribute information in ASCII
format. The remainder of the file contains the same data as Universal File
Dataset 58, but it presents that data in binary format.
Rev 12A 45
The 'Trace Lines' (82) specifies the trace line number, color, identification, and
the entries defining the trace. This file gives the connectivity that is used
together with the grid points to display the configuration of the system under
test or analysis.
The 'Analysis Data at Nodes' (55,2414) describes the specific kind of analysis
performed, as well as, the data model and characteristics, specific data type, and
number of data values.
When browsing Universal files, an icon indicates the complete Universal file.
Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal the number of functions
measured at nodal DOFs (type 58 data sets) contained in the file. Each of these
will be represented by the icon and can be displayed in a FrontBack window.
Section 2.2.1.6 SDF files

SDF stands for Standard Data Format, and is a data format that allows data to be
shared between HP analyzers. SDF files can contain the following kinds of
measurement data.
 time history, auto-correlation, cross-correlation, impulse response
 frequency
linear spectrum, autopower spectrum, crosspower spectrum, frequency
response, ordinary coherence, partial coherence, multiple coherence.
 amplitude
histogram, probability density function, cumulative density function
 full octave, third octave
 acoustic
pressure data, intensity data, velocity data, sound power data
 waterfall data
The .sdf file contains a number of data records.
Section 2.2.1.7 Road Runner files

These are data files that are created using the LMS Roadrunner/Pimento Mobile
system. A number of files can be reported.
 Frequency data files (with .fdf extension)
 Order data files (with .odf extension)
 Octave data files (with .zdf extension)
 Time data files (with .tdf extension). These files can contain time data
streams and block data associated with the time streams.
These files contain individual records.
Section 2.2.1.8 Sysnoise databases

Sysnoise databases have the extension .sdb. These contain all the data relating

to one model. This includes geometrical data describing the model. The model
also has a number of potentials that are the primary acoustic results, arising
from the analysis that you have performed. These potentials are related to a
node or field point associated with the model, and the data available are the 2D
acoustic functions relating to a single direction. In addition there is the global
pressure results for each node. These 2D functions can be seen in a FrontBack
window.
Section 2.2.1.9 RPC III files

RPC III (Remote Parameter Control) files are sequential, fixed length, 512-byte
record files, containing a standard header, followed by data. The header
contains information about the data, stored as keyword-value pairs. For more
information about the RPC III file format, see the MTS website. In the Desktop
software you can view binary time history files - not ASCII or histogram files.
When browsing, the icon represents the rpc file. This file contains a time history
for each channel, which can be displayed in a FrontBack window. Properties of
the file show the header information.
Section 2.2.1.10 Matlab data

Matlab is a technical computing environment that combines numeric
computation, graphics and visualization, and a high-level programming
language for scientific and engineering applications. The name MATLAB
stands for MAtrix LABoratory. It provides easy access to matrix software which
enables the user to solve complex numerical problems without actually writing
a program.
Vectors and other one-dimensional matrices can be viewed in a FrontBack

window. Two-dimensional matrices can be shown in a Waterfall or Colormap
window.
When creating data in matlab, it is possible to make a header, so that the data is
annotated in Test.Lab. Beneath a short description of this structure. For concrete
examples, please use the ‘export to matlab’ functionality.
When exporting in MKS units, the data will be stored in MKS units (so even if
the label says ‘g’, the values are expressed in m/s2). The data structure is the
following:
Function_Record -> [depends on the structure of the data]
XValues -> Values (1xm)
-> quantity -> label ('g')
-> unit transform -> offset (0)
-> factor (0.10192)
-> log_ref (1)
Rev 12A 47
-> quantity terms (see lower)
YValues-> Values (nxm)
-> unit transform -> offset (0)
-> factor (0.10192)
-> log_ref (1)
-> quantity terms (see lower)
When exporting in user units, the data will be stored in user units (the label is g,
so also the data is in ‘g’. There is no description of the label given - the data
structure is the following:
Function_Record -> [depends on the structure of the data]
XValues-> Values (1xm)
YValues-> Values (nxm)
(link to this place) -> quantity terms-> -> num 1
-> den 1
-> Quantity(LENGTH)
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity ANGLE
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity MASS
-> -> num -2
-> den 1
-> Quantity TIME
-> -> num 0

-> den 1
-> Quantity CURRENT
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity LIGHT
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity TEMPERATURE
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity MOLECULAR_AMOUNT
Section 2.2.1.11 Polytec add-in

Enabling this add-in will make it possible to read Polytec data in Test.Lab.
When the add-in is loaded, Polytec FileAccess rev 2.3 and 2.7 files that are
encountered while browsing via the "My Computer" entry point in the Data
Explorer, will be recognized and can be opened for browsing and reading
geometry data, FRFs and coherences.
Section 2.2.1.12 STL data

The STL file format is a geometry definition file format that uses a mesh of
triangles to form the shell of a solid object, where each triangle shares common
sides and vertices. Most CAD packages will allow you to export to the .stl file
format. It is the industry standard for exchange of geometry for rapid
prototyping. The file extension stands for STereoLithography. This allows to
import basic geometry info from almost any CAD package. Test.Lab supports
binary and ASCII STL Files. It is recommended to generate the geometry with a
rather coarse faceting. The STL files format does not contain any information
on units. Test.Lab assumes that the units are in mm.
Section 2.2.1.12.1 [Procedure] How to import data using

Tec.Manager
Be sure that you that you know your user name and password for Tec.Manager.
Step 1
Go to the Tools Add-ins menu and verify that the “Tec.Manager Hub” add-in
has been activated.
Step 2
Right click on the “Search Results” basket in the Data Explorer and choose
Rev 12A 49
“Add from Tec.Manager” from the dropdown menu that appears.

Step 3
Enter your user name and password in the “User” dialog that appears and click
OK to open Tec.Manager.
Step 4
The “Select basket” dialog appears, containing the list of all available baskets in
Tec.Manager. Select the desired basket and click OK. The data contained in the
chosen basket appears in the Detail View tree of the Data Explorer.
Step 5
Continue importing all desired baskets, one at a time, as shown above.
Note: If there is only one basket available in Tec.Manager, its data is imported
automatically when you choose Tec.Manager from the Search Results
dropdown menu.
Step 6
You can now view your data and/or insert it into a plot format. If desired, you
can save it, by right clicking on it and choosing Save to input basket in the
dropdown menu that appears.
Note: If you don't save your imported data to you input basket, it will be
replaced the next time that you bring in search results into the Detail View
browser.
Section 2.2.2 Exporting data items
You can export links (see "[Procedure] To create and export links
(bookmarks)" on page 55) to your data using bookmarks.
You can also export data files using the popup menu in the Data Explorer.
Step 1
Open up the browser tree in the Navigator worksheet.
Step 2
Browse for the data item you want to export.
Step 3
Right click on the data file to select it.
Step 4
Select Export to from the popup menu in the Navigator worksheet.
Step 5
Choose the file format you want for the data item. Data types and suitable file
formats for their export are given in the following table.
Step 6
Specify the name and location where you want to save the data.

Note: For exporting Test.Lab data items to Cada-X you must specify both the
name of the database and the project.
Step 7
Click Save.
Data items that are in the browser tree can be exported as a text (.txt) file, to a
Cada-X database or projects file and, if suitable, a sound (.wav) file. The table
below correlates the data types with the formats that can be used for their
export.
Data Cada- Univers SD Matla DynaWork Tex Wa AFM

types X al File F b s t v file
(ASCII
)
Time X X X X X X X
Coherence X X X X X X
Frequency X X X X X X
Geometry X X
Waterfall X X X
Modal X X X
Modes
Operation X X
al Modes
Data types and suitable export formats
Note: Modes can be exported to AVI files directly from the Geometry display.
Section 2.2.2.1 Cada-X

This exports data items to a Cada-X database for further analysis. A dialog
appears in which you can specify the project (and the test) in which the data will
be stored.
Section 2.2.2.2 Universal File

This writes data in a file in Universal file format. A dialog appears in which you
can specify the location and the file name.
When mode shapes are exported to universal file, they are always scaled using
Unity Modal Mass.
Section 2.2.2.3 SDF

This exports 2D Data to an SDF file. A dialog appears in which you can specify
the file in which the data will be stored.
Rev 12A 51
Section 2.2.2.4 Matlab

Exports block(s) to a Matlab file. A dialog appears in which you can specify the
file in which the data will be stored.
Save with single precision floating point format
When this option is checked, the exported Matlab file will be written with single
precision (instead of double).
Group similar blocks in a matrix
When multiple blocks are selected during the export, this option will ensure that
blocks with an equal function class will be grouped in one folder. The folder
will be named after the common function class. As the concept of a waterfall
structure is unknown in Matlab, this can be useful to group the similar blocks.
Save in MKS units
If this option is checked, the data of the Matlab file is written in MKS units (e.g.
for accelerations, it will be expressed in m/s2 – even if the displayed unit is g).
In the Matlab file, you will find the complete ‘description’ of the unit including
the dimensions, the factor and offset.
If this option is not checked, the data is expressed in the ‘user units’ (e.g. for
accelerations, it will be expressed in ‘g’). The Matlab file only contains the
label of the unit.
Section 2.2.2.5 DynaWorks

Export data to DynaWorks format.
Use binary format for measurements
You can decide to use the binary format for measurement data. This option is
very useful for long time traces.
Section 2.2.2.6 Text

In this case, the data values (X and Y values) in the function will be written to a
text file with the extension .txt. You can define the location and the name of the
file. This file can be viewed using a text editor such as Notepad or WordPad,
and it can also be imported into other applications such as Word ™ or Excel™.
Section 2.2.2.7 GPS
Section 2.2.2.7.1 KML (Keyhole Markup Language)

In this case, the GPS data in the throughput file will be exported to a KML file
that can be opened in Google Earth.
Filter options:

 None: no filtering will be applied. All points that are available in the TDF
will be exported.
 Minimum time between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much time there should be between 2 points in
the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
 Minimum distance between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much distance there should be between 2 points
in the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
Section 2.2.2.7.2 NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association)

In this case, the GPS data in the throughput file will be exported to a NMEA.
Filter options:
 None: no filtering will be applied. All points that are available in the TDF
will be exported.
 Minimum time between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much time there should be between 2 points in
the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
 Minimum distance between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much distance there should be between 2 points
in the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
Section 2.2.2.7.3 Open KML

In this case, the GPS data in the throughput file will be exported to a KML file
directly visualized in Google Earth. The default filtering setting, Minimum time
between points = 1s, will be used.
Section 2.2.2.8 Wav

In this case, the data values will be written to a sound or audio file with the
extension .wav. You can define the location and the name of the file. This file
can be played back on your audio hardware or device.
Section 2.2.2.8.1 Separate Files...

In this case, multiple traces are written into multiple wav files, one wav file for
each data trace.
Section 2.2.2.8.2 Concatenated Files...

In this case, multiple traces are written into one wav file, one after another.
Exporting to Concatenated Files allows you to append the selected data items
together and write them into a single wav file.
Rev 12A 53
Section 2.2.2.9 AFM file (ASCII format)

In this case, data can be exported in an ASCII format with extension .afm and
these data can be imported afterwards in Test.Lab via Test.Lab Modal Analysis.
Section 2.2.2.10 RPC III

In this case data will be exported to an RPC III file format. This only works for
throughput data.
Section 2.2.3 Copying pictures
A picture is a display layout with data. A complete picture can be copied (and
pasted) to any application that accepts the type of file selected. Left click on the
picture tab to schedule the picture popup menu and access the copy options.
There are four types of copy that can be made here, each of which is described
below.
Copy to Metafile
A Metafile is a picture format where the individual elements in the picture are
retained as such and can be edited individually. These files can be pasted into
Word and PowerPoint, and the contents (text strings, fonts, lines and colors,
etc.) of the picture can be edited within these applications.
This option is also available from the display popup menu that appears when
right clicking in a display window.
Copy to Bitmap
A bitmap is picture format with a fixed number of pixels and colors. It can be
pasted into Word and PowerPoint, and the picture can be re-sized and formatted
within these applications.
It can also be pasted into a suitable graphic editing application where it can be
edited to a certain extent as a graphic file.
Copy as Active Picture (embedded data)

In this case, not only is the picture copied, but the functionality in the display is
available too. It can then be pasted into Word and PowerPoint and changes
made directly to how the data is displayed.
This means that you have access directly to the popup menus that are used to
control both the format of the data function on display as well as the
characteristics of the window in which it appears. Even if no Reporting Seat
Client is installed on your system, you can install a plug-in that allows you to
activate and edit the pictures that are embedded in the document. This can result
in a very large document however.

Copy as Active Picture (linked data)

Documents containing active pictures with embedded data can be large. In order
to reduce the size of the document, active pictures can be copied with links to
the data. These pictures can then be pasted into Word and PowerPoint. Now
when the picture is activated, the link is activated and used to load the data and
the functionality of the display. This means that you can now make changes to
how the data is displayed using the popup menus available in the display
windows.
Section 2.3 My Links
My Links (often referred to as bookmarks) are a convenient way to provide

direct access to specific data items that you need to refer to quickly. They can
also be exported so that other users on your network can access your data.
Section 2.3.1 Elements in the My Links collection folder
The My Links folder is found in the Data Explorer with the My Links icon .
Individual links are defined in this folder as “links” to specific data items. They
have a “Link” icon such as or . They can be dragged into the displays in
exactly the same way as any other data files. Bookmarks for data folders need to
be expanded by clicking on the next to the link before individual data files
can be selected and displayed.
Collections of referenced / marked / linked data items can be combined into a

New Folder within the link (bookmark) collection.
Linked items and folders of linked data can be exported to shared files or
directories from which other users can access them. In the same way bookmarks
that other users have exported can be imported into the bookmark collection or
folders within it.
All the operations that can be performed on link elements are described in the
Navigator worksheet.
Section 2.3.1.1 [Procedure] To create and export links (bookmarks)

Step 1
Select the item that you want to link to. This operation can be performed on a
single data function, or on any type of data container such as a test section or a
database. All sub-directories and folders in the selected data container will be
included and will be available in the bookmark.
Step 2
Right click on the selected item and select Copy from the popup menu.
Rev 12A 55
Step 3
Scroll back up to the top of the browser tree and find the “My Links” icon .
Step 4
To place the link in the My Links folder, right click on the My Links folder to
display the popup menu.
Select Paste as link from the popup menu to place the reference directly in the
My Links folder. Then click on the next to the My Links folder to see the
new reference. A link icon that has the same icon and label as the original data
represents it.
Step 5
To place the link in a new folder select Add folder from the popup menu of the
My Links icon.
Click on the to expand the My Links folder and you will see the New
Folder. Right click on this and select Paste as link from the popup menu.
When you open up the folder, you will see the reference preceded by a link
icon.
To change the name of the folder, right click on it and select "Rename" from the
popup menu.
To place the new link in an existing folder, right click on this folder and select
Paste as Link from the popup menu.
Step 6
Continue this process until you have built up the collection of references and
folders that you require.
Data referenced as links (bookmarks) can be manipulated and visualized in
exactly the same way as data that is being accessed over your network.
Step 7
To export links, select the object(s) that you want to export. This can be a single
data function, a data container or a bookmark folder.
Right click on it and select Export from the popup menu.
In the dialog that appears, select the shared directory on which users will search
for links and enter a name for the link file. Link (bookmark) files have the
extension, .bmk. Click on Save to create the file and place it in the specified
directory.
Alternatively, select Export to from the popup menu and choose the file type
you want to use to export the data.
Another user can import a link by right clicking on the My Links icon or a link
folder and selecting Import from the popup menu.
To delete a link, right click on it and select Delete from the popup menu.
Section 2.4 Project data
This document is concerned with the management of data within a Test.Lab

project.
Section 2.4.1 Sections
Sections are contained within projects. They are a means of organizing sets of
data that have been acquired under the same test conditions, analyzed using the
same parameters or derived using the same processing.
The channel setup and the measurement and processing parameters are part of
the Section. Activating a Section will cause these parameters to come into
effect.
When you start an application (or a new project), it creates a single section
within a new project. You can attach memos and other files (see "[Procedure]
To create or edit documentation" on page 323) to a section.
You can also create additional sections using the Data New Section... menu.
There is always an active section (shown in the Active Section

field in the toolbar) and all operations performed using
the menu and tool bar will be executed on this active section.
Note: All generated data is placed and saved in the active section.
Section 2.4.2 Runs
Runs are found within sections. They contain data from all measurement
channels that were acquired during the same measurement sequence. Each time
the Start button is used then a new run will be initiated which will contain the
acquired data.
Data is always saved in a run when the data acquisition is stopped. This data
must be removed if you do not want to keep it.
The setup used to measure a run is kept in its archived settings. You can
Print/View the archived settings, by viewing the content of the run in the Detail
View panel of the data browser and accessing the "Print/View archived
settings" option from the popup menu obtained by right clicking on the
Archived settings item. You can cause the setup to come into effect using the
Load the archived settings option from the popup menu obtained by right
clicking on the Archived settings item.
Rev 12A 57
Section 2.4.3 TDF
When time recording during acquisition is enabled during measurement a TDF

database is created containing the raw unprocessed time signals. When
browsing, the TDF icon identifies a TDF database. Clicking on the sign
next to this icon will reveal the contents of the TDF database.
Physically the TDF is located in the same directory as the Test.Lab database
(starting with the project directory).
You can change the Bind Strategy (see "Options - Data tab" on page 289)
between the Test.Lab run and the TDF in the Settings tab of the
Tools Options menu.
Section 2.4.4 LDSF
Section 2.4.5 Other folders
Other folders include Post Processing folders, Conditioning folders and

Pictures.
When post processing has been carried on run data, you obtain a Processing
folder for each set of calculations you have carried out, within the relevant
section. Similarly, when you make pictures of your data, you will have a Picture
file for each one. These are placed in the active section.
Section 2.5 Units and how to handle them
This section describes the use of units and discusses how they are handled in the
Test.Lab software.
Section 2.5.1 Units
Measured data comes in all sorts of different units that need to be interpreted by
the software (see "Interpreting Units" on page 61). It is possible that
accelerations could be measured in “g”, m/s2, mm/s2 or feet/min2.
However all these different units are just variations on a theme since

acceleration has the basic dimensions of length divided by time squared. The
definition of any unit is based on the combination of canonical dimensions (on
page 59) which are used to create it.
The Test.Lab software provides a number of different unit systems (on page 60)
in which you can express your measured data.
Section 2.5.2 Canonical dimensions
There are seven canonical dimensions that are used to describe physical
quantities. One reference unit is defined for each of these dimensions.
Canonical dimension Reference unit Abbreviation

length meter m
angle radian rad
mass kilogram kg
time second s
current Ampère A
temperature Kelvin K
light candela cd
Reference units
All other physical quantities have a dimension that is a combination of the

canonical dimensions.
For example, force = mass x acceleration and so its canonical definition would
be mass x (length /{time squared}).
Every measured quantity will thus be allocated a unit that is a combination of

the corresponding reference units.
For example, acceleration will have a unit that is the reference unit of length
divided by the reference unit of time squared (m/s2).
Section 2.5.3 Base unit set
There are a number of physical quantities that are used in engineering data, such
as, frequency, order, velocity, acceleration, force, and power amongst others.
Each of these is a combination of its canonical dimensions. These quantities
along with the canonical dimensions listed above make up the Base unit set.
The base unit set is supplied with the software and contains one entry for each
Rev 12A 59
physical quantity.
There are four different unit systems in which these basic quantities can be
expressed in the LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis:
 Technical
 SI
 English
 ISO 1683-1983
It is also possible to define your own units (see "[Procedure] To define your
own unit system" on page 62).
Section 2.5.4 Unit systems
The unit system in which your data will be expressed can be configured with the
menu bar via Tools Options and clicking on the “Units” tab to access the Units
options. From the dropdown menu beside the “Active Units System” field,
select the unit set in which you want your data values displayed.
The table below shows those basic engineering quantities for which different
units are used in the different systems. All other quantities, not listed here, will
be displayed in the equivalent SI unit or that created from the basic reference
units. (see "Canonical dimensions" on page 59)
Quantities SI Technical English

Length m m in
Time s s s
Mass kg kg lb
Current A A A
Angle ° ° °
Temperature K °C °F
Light cd cd cd
Ratio / / /
Number # # #
Frequency Hz Hz Hz
Rotational speed rpm rpm rpm
Order order order order
Velocity m/s m/s in/s
Acceleration m/s2 g g
Voltage V V V

Quantities SI Technical English

Force N N lbf
Pressure Pa Pa psi
Energy J cal cal
Power W hp hp
Charge pC pC pC
Moment of Force Nm Nm Nm
Irradiance W/m2 W/m2 W/m2
Acceleration over m/s2 over N g/N m/s2 over N
Force
Pressure over Force Pa/N Pa/N psi/lbf
LMS Unit systems
Section 2.5.5 Interpreting Units
Section 2.5.5.1 Original units versus Test.Lab units

Via Tools Options Units, you can specify whether to use Test.Lab units or
original units to interpret external data.
Note: External data is all data which is not Test.Lab data (*.lms). Test.Lab
data accessed via a data server is also considered external data.
All units are “translated” into the active Test.Lab unit system. Suppose you
access external data that was originally measured in inches and you display it
using Test.Lab units. The result will be that you see the external data in meters
if the Active Unit System is set to Technical, or inches if it is set to English.
When you use original units, the external data will always be displayed in
inches, no matter what the Active Unit System is set to. When the data was
measured in Test.Lab, the Active Unit System is always applied.
Section 2.5.5.1.1 Using the original units

When the data is accessed, the units are resolved based on the information that
is available in the original data and - if the original data does not contain
sufficient unit information - based on a unit table. Test.Lab data and Cada-X
project databases contain enough information to solve the unit information. For
all other data formats, the default unit table is used. You can find this table,
“original_user_units.xml” in the <install dir>\Central\Configuration folder.
When your data is in English units and you work with “use original units”, it is
best to rename this “original_user_units.xml” file to
Rev 12A 61
original_user_units_mks.xml and then rename the

original_user_units_english.xml file to original_user_units.xml. In this way,
English units are resolved better.
When your data contains units that are unknown in the default table, you can
modify the original_user_units.xml. You can do this manually but then you
must respect the xml syntax. For a PC, the Test.Lab installation provides a tool
(in the support directory) that converts a .csv file (produced by printing an
LMSCada-X units table) to a valid XML file.
2.5.5.1.1.1 [Procedure] To make a unit xml file
Step 1
In Cada-X, type the command “list units”.
This will bring up a formatter with the currently active unit table.
Step 2
From within this formatter, print the units table to a csv file.
Step 3
Start up the MakeXML tool.
Step 4
In the left hand side, select the csv file.
Step 5
On the right hand side, browse to the <install dir>\Central\Configuration folder.
Step 6
Name the file “original_user_units.xml”.
Note: Before saving this file, it is strongly recommended to rename the original
file.
Section 2.5.5.1.2 Using Test.Lab Units

After the original units are resolved, the unit information is fitted into the
Test.Lab active unit system based on the information of the quantity. If multiple
cases of this quantity exist, the label is taken into account as well.
If the unit does not exist in the active unit system, the default unit for this
quantity is used. It might be useful to define the same unit as the original data as
a new case of an existing quantity. To change unit cases follow the procedure
below.
2.5.5.1.2.1 [Procedure] To define your own unit system
Step 1
Select Tools Options Units.
Step 2
In the Units tab, select the Active Unit System you want to use. By default, this
is set to “Technical”.
Step 3
Put a checkmark in the “User Defined Unit” checkbox located below the
“Active Unit System” field and click on the Edit Units button to open the “Edit

Units” dialog.
Step 4
Add the desired cases.
You can change any or all of the following settings:
 Unit label
 Log reference
 Power
 Unit factor
 Unit offset
When the Use Original Units radio button is activated, Test.Lab will take the
units in their original form.
Section 2.6 Searching for Data using the Data Explorer
This document shows you how to search for data using the Data Explorer
Search Panel embedded in the Navigator worksheet.
All the data in your projects, sections and runs can be manipulated through the
“Data selection” dialog that is available from the Data Data Selection menu
or the toolbar icon . Here, you can move items or delete them.
A toggle at the top of the dialog allows you to select the location of the data you
require. The default location is the Active Project that contains the folders in
which your saved data is stored.
Note: The most recent acquisition data is stored in the Online data folders. To
access these, use the dropdown menu to toggle for the Online data location.
Also through the browser tree that is available in some worksheets, the data
content of the project can be seen.
Section 2.6.1 [Procedure] To execute a simple data search
While in the Navigator worksheet, you need to select the folder in which the
search is to be made. It is good practice to be as specific as possible (identifying
any relevant sub-folders).
Step 1
Select the folder which you want to search.
Step 2
Rev 12A 63
Click on the Search button to open the Search fields.

These fields are used for specifying your search criteria.
Step 3
Verify that the Address field contains the address of the folder where the
search is to take place.
Normally, you will have selected this folder during the first step of this
procedure.
Note: Once you start the search process (by clicking the Search now button),
the contents of the Address field changes. It now indicates the Search Results
folder, where your search results have been put.
Step 4
Fill in the Origin field (using the dropdown menu) by selecting the general type
of data that you are looking for (Test.Lab data, LMSCada-X Project Database,
LMS Pimento/RoadRunner, Universal file....).
Step 5
In the Search For field, enter the specific type of data that you are looking for
using the dropdown menu (i.e. block set, waterfall, etc.).
Step 6
If desired, refine your search by changing the contents of the Look in field by
selecting an address from the dropdown list.
By default, the Look in field shows the same address as that shown in the
Address field. The dropdown menu gives you the history of previous searches
and the address of folders from where these searches have been made and
allows you to view their contents. It also allows you to further refine your
search within the Search Results folder.
Note: If you want to change the Address field (at the top of the panel) in order
to search for data found in a different location, you must first click on the
Folders button to go back to the browser and select your new location.
Step 7
Check the “Search by properties” box if you want to search by the properties of
the file.
Using the dropdown menus, fill in the Property and Comparison fields and
specify the value to search for. The * character is a wild card.
To facilitate your search for a required property, type the first letter of the
property in the field. This sets the dropdown menu to display all available
properties starting with the letter that you have typed.

Note: If you are not sure of the exact value of a property, you can search for
*some_characters* (some characters of the value that you are looking for).
Step 8
If this is the only search criterion that you want to use, click on the Search
Now button to start the search. (Clicking on the Stop Search button aborts the
search process.) The resulting file items will appear in the Search folder.
Note: Each time you search for data, any data that your Search Results folder
contains from a previous search is replaced by the data from the new search.
You can save search results data in your input basket.
Section 2.6.2 [Procedure] To define additional search criteria
Step 1
Click on the Adv. Search button to open the Criteria list field. (Clicking on it
again, closes it again.)
Step 2
Fill in the Property, Comparison and Value fields in the same way that
you set your first criteria.
Step 3
Click on the Add criterion button to add your criterion to the criteria list field
below. You can remove a criterion from the list by selecting it and clicking the
Remove Selected Criterion button.
Step 4
Continue until all criteria have been defined and, if desired, save your criteria
file to the project by clicking on the Save Criteria button. It can be loaded into
the Search dialog at any time using the Load Criteria button.
Step 5
Click on the Search Now button to start the search using all the defined
criteria.
Note: Each time you search for data, any data that your Search Results folder
contains from a previous search is replaced by the data from the new search.
You can save search results data in your input basket.
Rev 12A 65
Chapter 3 Documentation and Presentation
In This Chapter
Using cursors in displays ....................................................67
Documentation User Attributes ..........................................71
Document Memo Templates ..............................................72
Creating print formats ........................................................74
The Layout management dialog .........................................79
Function display windows ..................................................97
Geometry display windows ................................................152
Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays ...................177
Curve scrolling (prev/next on function displays) ...............179
Section 3.1 Using cursors in displays
A range of cursors can be used in Colormap, FrontBack, Geometry display,

Octave, Waterfall and Upper/Lower windows. The basic principles applying to
the use of cursors is the same for all types of windows, but there is more
functionality provided in the FrontBack and Upper/Lower displays, in which
specific curves can be selected and data values examined. The procedure given
below takes as an example the use of a double X cursor in a FrontBack or an
Upper/Lower window as a way of introducing the features of cursors in general.
More details on all the cursor functions are to be found in the documents
relating to the specific display windows.
Section 3.1.1 [Procedure] To use cursors in the display
This procedure assumes that you have a FrontBack or an Upper/Lower window

open with at least one data function on display.
Step 1
Right click inside the display area to obtain the display popup menu. You can
always get this menu by right clicking anywhere in or around the window, while
keeping the Ctrl key depressed.
Step 2
Select Front/Back Options... (in the case of a Front/Back) from this menu, then
click on the Cursors tab.
The Options entry appears in all windows in which cursors can be added and it
allows you to set the default cursor properties for each type of cursor. All
cursors of this type, which are then added, will have these default style and
display characteristics.
Rev 12A 67
Default cursor properties are associated with a display window type or picture.
The defaults for each cursor has thus to be set for every type of display window.
Note: After setting the defaults you can use Save Current Layout As... from the
View menu to save the layout and associated default cursor properties.
The properties of individual cursors already on the display can be changed.

Click on the cursor and select Cursor properties... from the popup menu
displayed. Any changes made here will only affect the cursor selected and not
any other cursor or the default properties of this cursor type.
First, click on the Cursors tab, define the settings and then click on Apply to
view the results, in order to set the default options.
Step 3
Select the cursor type of Double X from the Cursor dropdown selection
menu.
Step 4
The “Style” section of the dialog enables you to set the line style of the cursor
and choose the type and size of font for displaying the numerical values.
Click on Line... and choose the line color, pattern and width of the cursor.
Click on OK to accept the changes and to close the Line Style dialog.
Step 5
Click on Font... and select the font type, style, size and color.
Click on OK to accept the changes and to close the Font dialog.
Step 6
The “Value” section of the dialog enables you to turn the display “on” or “off”
and choose the format for how cursor or data values are displayed.
To display cursor values, check the Display button. To remove them from the
display uncheck it.
Step 7
The number of decimal points for the cursor value can be set using either the up
and down arrows provided or the keyboard.
Step 8
The cursor value can be displayed in engineering notation or not by checking or
unchecking the Engineering notation button.
Step 9
To makes these X axis values stand out check the ToolTip Style button. The
cursor values will then be displayed in a box with a gray background so they
will be much easier to see on a crowded display.
Step 10
The intersections of the cursors with the displayed curves can be shown by
checking on the Always display intersections. The cursor values will be
displayed in a box with a yellow background.
Click on OK to accept the changes and to close the Cursor Properties dialog.

This will return you to the display area.

Step 11
Right click inside the display area to obtain the display popup menu.
Step 12
Select X from the Add Double cursor menu. A pair of vertical lines with the
linestyle that you just selected will appear in the display. The X axis values will
be displayed as you have defined.
Step 13
Place the mouse cursor exactly on the left line and holding the right mouse
button down, drag it in either direction. Both cursors will move. This can also
be done by selecting the left line and using the arrow keys to move the cursor in
either direction.
Step 14
Place the mouse exactly on the line of the right cursor and holding the right
mouse button down, drag it in either direction. Now, only this cursor line will
move, thus changing the distance between the pair of cursor lines. This can also
be done by selecting the left line and using the arrow keys to move the cursor in
either direction.
Step 15
Right click on either of the cursor lines and you will see a popup menu that
allows you to change the cursor properties and how it is displayed.
Step 16
Selecting Cursor properties, schedules a dialog with the same functionality as
the “Cursors tab” in the Options 2D dialog. But any modifications that you
make here will only affect the current cursor and not the default one.
Note: Double cursors act as one. Any changes in properties made to one
cursor line will affect both.
Step 17
To zoom in on the area between the cursor lines select Zoom. The distance
between the cursor lines now becomes the X axis limits. The X axis limits are
now fixed, with the minimum and maximum values defined by the cursor
values. When you want to return to the previous view, right click on or below
the X axis and select Limits from the popup menu. Then reset the X axis limits
to Free or Optimized and this returns you to the full X axis range for the data.
Step 18
Now select any one of the data curves by left clicking on it. The curve will now
have series of markers on it and the Y values that correspond to the cursor
position on the selected curve will be displayed. If the ToolTip Style button is
checked these Y values will be displayed in a box with a yellow background.
The corresponding X values will have a gray background.
Step 19
Right click on the either of the cursor lines and you will now see a number of
additional entries in the popup menu. These enable you to make the cursor jump
to a specified point on the selected curve.
Step 20
Rev 12A 69
Right click on the right cursor line and select Move to next local maximum
from the cursor popup menu. This cursor line will then move forwards (to the
right) to the next peak of the selected curve. The other cursor line does not
move and so the distance between the cursor lines increases.
If you perform the same operation on the left line, this will move it forwards to
the next peak. This time, the right cursor line also move forwards a similar
amount, so as to keep the cursor lines the same distance apart.
Step 21
To move the right cursor line to the next minimum data value, right click on the
right cursor line and select Move to next local minimum from the cursor
popup menu. This cursor line will then move forwards to the next dip of the
selected curve.
Performing the same operation on the left line, this will move it forwards to the
next lowest point. This time, the right cursor line will also move forwards a
similar amount, so as to keep the cursor lines the same distance apart.
Step 22
Similarly, using other options from the cursor popup menu, you can move the
cursor backwards (to the left) to the previous peak or dip value. Select Move to
previous local maximum to move the cursor backwards to the previous peak
value. Select Move to previous local minimum to move the cursor backwards
to the previous dip value.
To move to the curve's maximum value select Move to global maximum.
Note: To move only one cursor line you must select the left one before carrying
out a Move to... option. To move both cursor lines you must select only the
right one.
Step 23
Now select a second data curve.
Individual curves can be selected by clicking on them with the mouse. To select
more than one curve at a time, left click on each curve in turn while holding the
Shift key down. To select all the curves on the display, right click inside the
display area to obtain the display popup menu. Then you can select Select All
Curves.
Step 24
Any Move to... option you now select from the cursor popup menu will
consider both or all your selected curves. For example, select Move to next
local maximum and the cursor line will move to the first peak it finds on either
of the two curves.
Step 25
You can remove the double cursor by right clicking on either cursor line and
selecting Remove Cursor from the menu.

Section 3.2 Documentation User Attributes
This document explains how to define User Attributes. The attributes represent
a set of key values associated with a project or a section.
Section 3.2.1 User Attributes
User Attributes are displayed in the User Attributes grid on the worksheet. This
grid lists all the attribute values stored in the project or section. Although
editing the values is done directly on the grid, you need to use the following
procedure to define new attributes.
Section 3.2.1.1 [Procedure] To define a set of User Attributes

Step 1
Select whether your attributes are to be associated with the project or with a
section by clicking on the appropriate minor tab at the top of the worksheet.
Step 2
Open the Attributes dialog by selecting Tools Add New Attribute from the
menu bar. The Add Attributes tab appears.
Step 3
In the Add Attributes tab, enter the name of the attribute in the “Name” field.
Step 4
Select what type of format the values must be defined as. Possible choices are:
Text, Number, Date and List.
Step 5
Click on the Add button. Your newly defined attribute is now displayed in the
User Attributes grid. You can edit it after clicking on its corresponding Edit
button in the grid.
Text
In this case the user must fill in the values as a text string. Enter a default value
in the value (text) field.
Number
Only a numeric value can be entered for this type of attribute. Enter a default
value in the value (number) field.
Date
Values for date attributes are chosen from a dropdown menu beside the value
field.
List
In this case the user must select the values from a pre-defined list. Select the list
Rev 12A 71
from the list field.
Section 3.2.1.1.1 [Procedure] To define a predefined list of attribute

values
Step 1
Click on the ”New List” tab in the Attributes dialog.
Step 2
Type the name of the new list in the bottom left text field and click on the Add
button above it in order to add it to the list on the left hand side of the dialog.
Step 3
To define the values in this list, select the new list and enter the first value in the
right hand text field. Then click on the Add button. Repeat this step to add
more values. You can also use the Import From Txt button to import list
attribute values from a text file. Continue until all the required values have been
entered.
Step 4
Sort the list values into the required order using the sorting buttons. When the
list is ready, click on the OK button to save it in a documentation template.
Step 5
In the “Add Attributes” tab, select the list from the “List” field and select the
default value to be shown in the “Value (List)” field.
Step 6
Continue defining attributes.
Section 3.3 Document Memo Templates
This document explains how to make a new template for your memo document.
It also shows you how to change the default memo templates, used for projects,
sections, runs and blocks in the Documentation worksheet.
Section 3.3.1 New Memo Template
The following procedure shows you how to make a new documentation

worksheet template that can be imported into your project and used in place of a
default documentation template for the worksheet.
Section 3.3.1.1 [Procedure] To make a new memo template

Step 1
Open the word processing application e.g. Word or Notepad that you want to
use for writing documents.

Step 2
Create the document you require as a template.
Step 3
Use the Tools Options... menu to check the location of the “Memo
Inventory” directory where templates are being stored.
Normally, this is in the directory:
{LMS application}\Local\MemoInventory
Click on the File Locations tab to view the current location of the Document
Inventory directory.
Step 4
Save the document (file_name.doc) you have just created in this directory.
When you next use the Import... button in the Documentation worksheet to
attach a file to a project or section, the new document will be available for
selection.
Section 3.3.2 Default Memo template
New memos for projects, sections, runs or blocks are normally created using
their specific default document template. The following procedure explains how
to make changes to these default templates.
Section 3.3.2.1 [Procedure] To change the default memo template

Step 1
Use the Tools Options... menu to check the location of the “Memo
Inventory” directory where templates are being stored.
Normally, this is in the directory:
{LMS application}\Central\MemoInventory
Click on the File Locations tab to view the current location of the Memo
Inventory directory.
Step 2
Locate the file:
MemoInventory.txt
It lists the file-names of the default document templates for project, section, run
and block memos.
This file is found in the directory:
<LMS application>\central\MemoInventory
Note: To save the edited file, as MemoInventory.txt, the read-only attributes

assigned to this file must first be removed.
Step 3
Rev 12A 73
Open, edit and save the appropriate file.

Use Windows Explorer to change the properties of the MemoInventory.txt
file.
Right click the file and using the File menu, select Properties.
Uncheck the “Read-only” Attributes box and click OK
Now changes to the file can be saved.
Replace the current documentation inventory file by saving it using the same
file name.
The new memo template will be used whenever the New from Template...
button is used.
Note: You should return the properties of the Memo Inventory file to read-only.
This means that the file cannot be changed or accidentally deleted.
Section 3.4 Creating print formats
Print formats for your reports can be made from a picture using the Navigator
Data Viewing worksheet. They can also be created directly in Word or
PowerPoint, which is advantageous in the case of reports with multiple pictures
or pages.
The LMS Printing Add-In 11A toolbar should be present in your PowerPoint or
Word application. If not you should add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to
Word or PowerPoint. (see "[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In
toolbar to Word or PowerPoint" on page 79) Default print formats are usually
made for the most commonly used picture layout.
This document provides you with the following procedures:

 To create a single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet

 To create a multiple-picture print format in Word or PowerPoint (see
"[Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print format in Word or
PowerPoint" on page 76)
 To set printing options (see "[Procedure] To set printing options" on page
77)
 To add Meta information to a print format (see "[Procedure] To add Meta
Information to a print format" on page 78)
 To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to Word or PowerPoint (see
"[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to Word or
PowerPoint" on page 79)
Section 3.4.1 [Procedure] To create a single-picture print

format in the Data Viewing worksheet
Step 1
In the LMS Test.Lab File menu, click on Printing Options (see "[Procedure]
To set printing options" on page 77) and indicate which application you want to
use: Word or PowerPoint.
Step 2
Select the picture you want to use as a basis for your print format, by clicking
its identification tab and then choose Make Plot Format in the dropdown
menu.
Step 3
In the “Save New Plot Format As” dialog that appears, the name field indicates,
by default, the type of layout that you have chosen and the type of application
file that the plot format will be saved as (.doc or .ppt). If you keep this name for
your plot format, it will automatically become the default format, activated by
clicking on Plot in the dropdown menu. You can make the name more
significant, if you wish, but it will not be saved as the default format. The name
will appear in the list of available plot formats and click on Plot with in order to
activate it.
Step 4
Click on the OK button to close the dialog and to open the Word or PowerPoint
application. The chosen layout is now displayed in the application.
Step 5
Build your print format using the standard editing features of the chosen
application (creating headings, text fields, importing graphics, etc.).
Note: If your picture is not empty (i.e. if it contains data), remove the data so
that the picture will be empty of unnecessary data (except any desired
reference data) and ready to receive data from whoever will be using the plot
format to produce a report.
Step 6
Rev 12A 75
To add Meta information to an existing print format (see "[Procedure] To add

Meta Information to a print format" on page 78), select the picture and then
click on the LMS New Field button to open the “Select Display Dependent
Attribute” dialog.
Meta information lets you specify meta data - additional information about the
data rather than just its data values - in a variety of ways. Meta data can be data
properties, user attributes, LMS Tec.Manager information, etc.
Note: The LMS Printing Add-In 11B toolbar should be present in your
PowerPoint or Word application. If not you should add the LMS toolbar to
your application. (see "[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to
Word or PowerPoint" on page 79)
Section 3.4.2 [Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print

format in Word or PowerPoint
If you wish to create a format for a report containing multiple pictures, it is best
to do it directly in Word or PowerPoint.
Step 1
In the Test.Lab File menu, click on Printing Options (see "[Procedure] To set
printing options" on page 77) and indicate which application you want to use:
Word or PowerPoint.
Then start your application and open an empty PowerPoint presentation or
Word document.
Step 2
Click on the LMS New Picture button in the application toolbar. This opens a
dialog listing all available display layouts. Choose a layout.
Note: The LMS Printing Add-In 11B toolbar should be present in your
PowerPoint or Word application. If not you should add the LMS toolbar to
your application. (see "[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to
Word or PowerPoint" on page 79)
Step 3
In the same dialog, a name appears in the name field. It can be changed, if
desired. The only restriction in choosing a name is that it must be unique to the
document.
If you wish to have a multi-picture (multi-page) report, enter page 1, page 2,
etc.) instead of “picture 1”, etc. (or something similar, i.e. Page 1 Upper,
Lower, etc.).
Note: When a user loads this print format, the pictures are loaded with the
names that you specify here.

Step 4
Make any number of pictures in the same way. For each picture, you can add
Meta information (see "[Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print
format" on page 78). Build your print format using the standard editing features
of the chosen application (Creating headings, text fields, importing graphics,
etc.).
Section 3.4.3 [Procedure] To set printing options
Step 1
Go to the File menu and click on Printing Options. (see "[Procedure] To set
printing options" on page 77)
Step 2
Set the Default Microsoft Office application as either “Microsoft Word” or
“Microsoft PowerPoint” in the Output panel.
Step 3
Specify whether the output should be Paper (default printer) to print on your
default printer or Electronic (Microsoft Office document) to save the printout.
Note: When you print a picture, the format associated with the default MS
Office application is used. For example, if you want to print a picture based on
the “FrontBack” layout format, the format FrontBack.doc is used if your
default is set to MS Word and the format FrontBack.ppt is used if it is set to MS
PowerPoint.
Step 4
Enabling the option “Use OOXML documents (docx, pptx) will ensure making
use of “Open Office XML”. This setting will also determine the output format
(.doc or. docx for example) of your document or print format. Making use of
this option will reduce the time consumed during plotting. Even when using an
Office 2003 version you can download for free a compatibly pack allowing you
to use these functionality (see
http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/products/HA101686761033.aspx).
Step 5
Set the Use picture settings from option as either “Pictures in the print format”
or “Test.Lab Picture” in the General settings panel.
Choose the “Pictures in the print format” setting to print the picture in
accordance with your predefined format settings. This is useful when you want
similar data to always be printed out in the same way.
Choose the “Test.Lab Picture” setting when you want the paper copy of the
picture to be exactly the same as the original Test.Lab picture shown in the
Display panel. This setting overrules the predefined print format settings.
Step 6
If the Output is set to Electronic, you can specify the Picture format as either
“Test.Lab Active Picture” or “Windows Metafile” in the Settings for electronic
(Microsoft Office document) panel.
Rev 12A 77
When the option is set as “Test.Lab Active Picture”, not only is the picture
copied to file, but also the functionality of the Test.Lab display is also available.
All the formatting functions, such as adding and deleting cursors, are available
in the document.
When you choose “Windows Metafile”, you will not be able to activate the
picture in the resulting document.
Step 7
If you have multiple pictures to print, you can save them to one electronic
document by switching on the option “Combine multiple documents into a
single document”.
Note: When combining into a single document, the first format will determine
settings such as page format, margins, etc.
Section 3.4.4 [Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print

format
Step 1
Open the desired picture (print format file) in the appropriate MS Word or
PowerPoint application and select it.
Step 2
Click on the LMS New Field button in the toolbar.
The ”Select Display Dependent Attribute” dialog opens.
Step 3
Select a display.
The left part of the dialog is a graphical representation of the layout. Each
rectangle represents a display.
Step 4
Click on the rectangle that represents the desired display (where the attribute is
to be inserted) to select it.
A thick, black border appears around the selected rectangle.
Step 5
Select a trace number from the dropdown menu beside the Trace Number field
in the dialog.
The trace number indicates which trace of the display is selected. The first data
block that will be dropped into the picture is trace 1, the next data block to be
dropped will be trace 2, and so on. You will need to select the trace number
(datablock) where you want to add an attribute to the print format.
Step 6
Select the attribute that you want to include in your print format.
In the dialog, a tree view is shown listing all possible attributes that can be
added to your print format. To display the names of the attributes in front of

their values, check "Include attribute name in field".

Step 7
Insert any other desired attributes by the above steps.
Note: Remember to hit the Add button for each attribute that you wish to
insert in the print format.
Step 8
Click on the Done button to close the window. The chosen attributes are
added to the print format and are visible in the form of text boxes at the same
location as the layout. You can drag the text boxes to a different position, if
necessary.
Section 3.4.5 [Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In

toolbar to Word or PowerPoint
Step 1
Execute Start Programs LMS Test.Lab 11B Configuration Configure
Office for Printing
This activates the LMS Printing Add-In 11B toolbar.
Step 2
If you do not see the LMS toolbar when you start up Word or PowerPoint, go to
the View menu, click Toolbars and then click the LMS Printing Add-In 11B
toolbar to display it in the application.
Section 3.5 The Layout management dialog
This dialog enables you to create, modify and import display layouts to be used
in the worksheets that display pictures. You can also use this dialog to save
newly-defined layouts, to add them to your list of favorites which means they
will be easily accessible for use, and to export them so that other users can
access them.
The Layout Management dialog is scheduled by selecting View Layout

management from the menu bar.
Rev 12A 79
The Layout management dialog
Section 3.5.1 [Procedure] To create or modify a layout
Section 3.5.1.1 [Procedure] To make a display layout

Step 1
Select a starting template
The first thing you need to do is get a starting point template into the Layout
editing panel. This starting point can be an existing defined layout that you will
use as a template, or it can be a template supplied by LMS. This starting point
template must be in the “Layout management” list.
You might have to import one by first clicking on the Import button and
selecting the necessary file. (If the file you have selected contains layouts that
have the same name as a layout already in the list, then a warning will be
issued.)
Step 2
View the template
To load a layout or a template into the Layout editing panel, simply click on it
in the “Layout management” list. A representation of this layout will appear in
the editing area. You can adjust the window types and other properties of the
windows in this dialog, though it is not possible to either add or subtract
windows to the layout.
You therefore need to start with a layout or template with the required number
of windows. Keep clicking on the different items in the “Layout management”
list until you find one with the right number and arrangement of windows.

Step 3
Set the window type
To change the window type, select the required entry from the Switch To
options that appear in any of the popup menus associated with the window.
These popup menus are obtained by right clicking in or around the window.
Different types of window can be used.
The current window will convert to a basic format of the selected window type
that can have its properties edited.
Step 4
Edit the window properties
Characteristics of the windows can be modified and saved as part of the layout.
You should bear in mind that all of their properties can also be adjusted in the
worksheet at run time and that in the case of cursors for example, it makes more
sense to finalize their appearance, once the data is present. The properties that
can sensibly be associated with the layout and the means to set them are
described here.
 Axis properties
By right clicking on an axis, you can adjust all of the properties of that axis:
whether it is displayed at all, the limits (including the way they are calculated
and displayed), the format of the data on that axis and, the presence of ticks and
grids.
The following properties are all set from the display popup menu. This menu
can be obtained by right clicking in the display area itself. If you have difficulty
in obtaining the correct menu, then right clicking anywhere with the Ctrl key
depressed will result in the display menu popping up.
 Legend
A legend that will display text annotating the data can be added to the window.
Select Legend from the display popup menu.
 Background color around the window
Select Options XX... (where XX = the window type) from the Display popup
menu. Then specify the 'Display area color' that you would like.
Note: The “Display area color” is an important parameter since when pasting
your final picture into a Word document or PowerPoint presentation, the
background color (the default is grey) is taken too. You should ensure that the
background color blends suitably with that of your slide or paper.
 Background color inside the window

Select Options XX... (where XX = the window type) from the display popup
menu. Then define the Graphic area color.
 Waterfall properties
Select Options Waterfall... from the display popup menu in a waterfall window
to set the color for the traces to be displayed, the presence of hidden lines and
the proportions of the waterfall.
Rev 12A 81
 Size
The relative size of the window in the working area can be adapted by sizing in
both the horizontal and the vertical directions. To do this place the mouse cursor
on the edge you want to change and drag the mouse in the required direction,
while depressing the Ctrl key.
Note: It is not possible to adjust the ratio of the area assigned to each
window. For example, in a layout with two windows, each window and its
associated axes and legend windows, can only occupy a maximum of half of
the total area.
When you have defined all the window properties to be associated with the
layout, you can proceed to saving your layout .
Step 5
Define an icon for the layout
This is an optional step in which you can use a bitmap that will be used to
represent your layout. If you then add the layout to your list of favorites, this
icon will appear on the worksheet and serve as a quick and easy way of loading
the layout. If no specific bitmap is specified then the layout can still be selected
by name from the drop down menu in the worksheet and a blank icon will be
used if the layout is added to the favorites.
LMS provides a bitmap with some of the templates it supplies with the
software. If you wish to modify the existing bitmap, just double click on it and a
standard bitmap editing tool will be scheduled.
If you have your own source of bitmaps, click on Choose file, select the
required bitmap file and push Open . A copy of the bitmap will appear in the
'Icon' area.
Step 6
Save the layout
When the display layout is set up as required, you can save it.
The name of the starting point layout will be displayed in the 'Save layout' input
field. If you want to create a new layout, then you must enter the name for this
layout in the input field. Other wise you can replace the current layout definition
for this layout with the newly defined one.
Click on Save layout.
If you entered a new name for the layout, this will appear in the 'Layout
management' list.
Step 7
Add to favorites
Adding a layout to the list of favorites means that it is easily accessible from the
worksheet - especially if an icon has been defined to represent it.
Select the layout from the 'Layout management' list and click Add to
favorites. It will appear in the lower list. It can be removed from this list using
the Delete button.

Step 8
Export the layout
It is also possible to place layouts on a shared directory from where it can be
accessed by other users. To do this select the ones required from the 'Layout
management' list and click on Export. Select the directory, where you want to
export the layout(s) to, and give it a file name. The .lie (layout import export)
extension will be added.
When you have defined all the layouts you need, leave the 'Layout management'
dialog by using the Close button.
Numerical Display Panel

This panel can contain 1 or more gauge or numerical displays. It can only be
used to display tacho or static channel values online in Signature workbook.
Geometry
Single Geometry or 3D display for the visualization of the nodes, lines and
surfaces of a geometry model, and the animation of a mode shape.
The Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
Rev 12A 83
Upper Lower Geometry
The UL Geometry or Upper Lower 3D Display has two Geometry displays, one
above the other, and both displays have their own action buttons. Therefore, the
phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can be different, and
this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Upper Lower Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.

Left Right Geometry
The LR Geometry or Left Right 3D Display window has two geometry displays
alongside each other, and both displays have their own action buttons.
Therefore, the phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can
be different, and this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Left Right Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
Rev 12A 85
Quad Geometry
This is a geometry or 3D display that shows four views at once. One of them
has exactly the same features as the single geometry display. The three other
views have a fixed orientation and translation, meaning the point of view can
not be changed and the model can not be moved.
To switch the projection of the views from European to American, select “Quad
Projection American” in the Tools Options Displays dialog.
The Quad Geometry (3 Display) icon represents it.

Bode
This display represents a function window divided into two parts. It shows you
two aspects of the same data. When you load a single data trace into this
window, the upper part shows the amplitude and the lower part shows the phase
of the same trace. When you switch the format of the upper part from
Amplitude to Real, the format of the lower part switches to Imaginary. An X
cursor operates on both parts of the window.
The Bode display icon represents it.
Rev 12A 87
Colormap
This display is used to display a series of data functions in relation to a third

parameter such as time or rpm. This parameter is plotted along the Z axis. The
Y (ordinate) value of each block is represented as a color thus providing a two
dimensional map of X against Z.
In LMSTest.Lab, a waterfall icon represents this data and it can be

displayed in a Colormap window. In addition a series of blocks represented by
the function icons can be displayed.
The Colormap display icon represents it.

FrontBack
This display shows a 2D function window with an X and Y axis used to display
a number of overlaying data functions. Two separate Y axes are provided; one
on the right and one on the left.
Data can be displayed relative to one or the other and the format of these two
axes can be made different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for
example) of the same data can be overlaid on each other.
In the LMSTest.Lab software you can display any data record that is
represented by the function icon in a FrontBack window.
The FrontBack display icon represents it.
Rev 12A 89
Nyquist window
A Nyquist display contains three axes:

3.5.1.1.1.1 X axis
On this axis, the argument of a block will be presented.
3.5.1.1.1.2 Y horizontal axis
The result of a block viewed in a certain axis format.
3.5.1.1.1.3 Y vertical axis
The result of the same block as on the horizontal axis, but viewed in another
format.
The Nyquist window icon represents it.

Octave
This display shows frequency spectra as octave blocks. In an Octave display

window you can see the result of integrating test data values over various types
of octave bands and their overall level values. These OA levels are calculated
and displayed for both the weighted and linear overall level.
The octave window icon represents it.
Upper/Lower
This display represents a pair of 2D windows that are linked together. They
allow you to compare data traces above one another rather than behind one
another, as in a FrontBack display window. This means, for example, that when
adding an X cursor, the same cursor is active in both the upper and the lower
window.
You have to add two curves with compatible X axes. Data can be displayed
relative to one or the other and the format of these two windows can be made
different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for example) of the same
Rev 12A 91
data can be compared.
You can also adjust the ratio of the area assigned to each window. Drag the
horizontal blue line between the Upper and Lower display windows to the
desired width.
represented by the function icon in an Upper/Lower window.
The Upper/Lower (UL) window icon represents it.
Waterfall
This display shows a series of data functions in relation to a third parameter

such as time or rpm. This parameter is plotted along the Z axis and shows the
evolution of a function under particular conditions.
In the LMSTest.Lab software data represented by the waterfall icon can be

displayed in a waterfall window. In addition you can load a number of
individual data functions into a waterfall window too.
The Waterfall window icon represents it.

XY
This display shows the Y-values of one block in function of the Y values of a
second block on the condition that both blocks have the same X-axis. An XY
display contains four axes:
3.5.1.1.1.4 X axis
On this axis, the argument of the blocks will be presented.
The Y-values of a block. These values are used to compare with other Y-values
of blocks on the other Y axes (front and back).
3.5.1.1.1.6 Y front axis
On this axis, an unlimited number of blocks can be added. The result of one
block on this axis will be combined with the result of the Y horizontal axis to
form one display curve. Both blocks must have the same argument, which is the
argument of the X axis.
3.5.1.1.1.7 Y back axis
Similar to the Y front axis.
The XY window icon represents it.
Section 3.5.1.2 [Procedure] To make a reference curve layout

Step 1
Click on Select a layout... and choose the layout you want to use from the
Layouts Selection dialog or by clicking on a favorites icon.
Step 2
You may need to make a new layout (see "[Procedure] To create or modify
a layout" on page 80).
Step 3
To load data into a display, open the data selector by clicking on the Data
Rev 12A 93
Selector icon in the toolbar, or by selecting Data Data Selector in the

menubar.
Step 4
Drag and drop your reference data onto the display layout. This can be from
previous run(s) in either the current (active) project or other projects.
Note: The window must be either empty or be displaying data of the same type
as you are loading.
Step 5
Repeat this for all the curves that you want to use as a reference, then close the
Data Selector window.
Step 6
Drag and drop onto a display the online data that you are going to measure.
The format and characteristics of the display can be changed via popup menus.
Step 7
Carry out the measurement sequence and view the data online as it is being
acquired.
Save and name your reference curve layout by using View Save Current
Layout As...
Section 3.5.2 The Layout management panel
Section 3.5.2.1 Layout list

This area lists all the layouts that are defined for the current user.
This listing consists of all the layouts which have been imported, created by the
current user and which LMS supplies as standard. These layouts can be edited

as required by simply clicking on them in this list. Items selected from the list
become the subject of the action buttons and the first one appears in the Layout
editing area.
Section 3.5.2.2 Import...

This button schedules a dialog that allows you to import a layout import export
(.lie) file containing one or more layouts.
These layouts are imported from a shared central directory to make them
available for the current user. Such layouts would be the basic ones supplied by
LMS as starting templates, or completely defined layouts generated by other
users and exported for general availability.
Section 3.5.2.3 Export...

This button schedules a dialog in which you can export the layouts selected in
the list in a layout import export (.lie) file.
Other users can access layouts that are exported to a shared central directory.
Section 3.5.2.4 Delete

This button deletes the selected layout(s) from the list. If it has not been
exported then it will be lost. It is also removed from the favorites list.
Section 3.5.2.5 Add to favorites

This button adds the selected layout(s) to the list of favorites. It will appear in
the favorites list. An icon will appear in the worksheet and act as a quick means
of loading the layout.
Section 3.5.2.6 Favorites list

This area lists all the layouts which have been defined as favorites by the
current user. Defined layouts can be added to this list using the Add to
favorites button. An icon will appear in the worksheet and act as a quick means
of loading the layout. A bitmap to identify the icon can be selected using the
Choose File button when the layout is in the Layout editing panel.
Section 3.5.2.7 Delete (favorites)

This button, next to the favorites list, deletes the selected favorite(s) from the
list. The layout remains in the 'Layout management' list.
Rev 12A 95
Section 3.5.3 The Layout editing panel
Section 3.5.3.1 Layout editing area

This area displays the layout selected from the Layout management list. You
can use a range of functions to modify the layout (see "[Procedure] To
create or modify a layout" on page 80) as required.
Section 3.5.3.2 Save layout field

This field displays the current name of the display layout that is in the 'Layout
editing' area. It can be used to enter a new name that you want to assign to the
current layout.
Section 3.5.3.3 Save layout button

Click on this button to save the current layout with the name you have defined
in the input field. The properties of an existing layout will be overwritten,
though confirmation to do this is requested first.
Section 3.5.3.4 Icon

This area contains a button that schedules a dialog from which you can select a
bitmap file which will represent the current layout. This bitmap is displayed
alongside. If the layout is added to the list of favorites, then this bitmap will
appear in the worksheet and serve as means of selecting the layout. You can
modify a displayed bitmap by just double clicking on it. This will schedule a
suitable application in which you can edit it.
Section 3.5.3.5 Close

This button closes the layout management dialog.

Section 3.5.3.6 Help

This provides help on the layout management dialog.
Section 3.6 Function display windows
This document describes all the options in the function display windows:
 Bode
 Colormap
 FrontBack
 Octave
 Upper/Lower
 Waterfall
 XY
 Nyquist
 Numerical Display Panel (Only for Signature online data (see "Options -
Numerical Display" on page 130))
Not all options apply to every display window.
Geometry windows (see "Geometry display windows" on page 152) are

described separately.
Section 3.6.1 To use the displays
There are a number of parameters that control both the format of the function on
display as well as the characteristics of the window in which it appears. These
options are executed from the popup menus.
Section 3.6.1.1 To view data

Step 1
Open a layout by clicking on the icon that refers to a favorite layout that you
wish to open or by choosing a display from the Create a picture dropdown
menu.
Step 2
Load your data into the chosen display by either, dragging the data from the
Rev 12A 97
browse tree and dropping it into the window, or, by doing a copy/paste
operation.
Bode
A layout contains the following types of window:
The Bode display represents a function window divided into two parts. It shows
you two aspects of the same data. When you load a single data trace into this
window, the upper part shows the amplitude and the lower part shows the phase
of the same trace. When you switch the format of the upper part from
Amplitude to Real, the format of the lower part switches to Imaginary. An X
cursor operates on both parts of the window.
The Bode display icon represents it.

Colormap
The Colormap display is used to display a series of data functions in relation to

a third parameter such as time or rpm (so called waterfall data). This parameter
is plotted along the Z axis. The Y (ordinate) value of each block is represented
as a color thus providing a two dimensional map of X against Z.
In LMSTest.Lab, this data is represented by a waterfall icon and it can be

displayed in a Colormap window. In addition a series of blocks represented by
the function icons can be displayed.
It is possible to add 2D data on top of waterfall data visualized in a colormap.

This can be done by dropping the 2D data in the left corner of the colormap.
The data is shown if the X and Y units of the 2D data correspond to those of the
CM or if it is a compatible order section of this waterfall data.
The Colormap display icon represents it.
Rev 12A 99
FrontBack
The FrontBack display shows a 2D function window with an X and Y axis used
to display a number of overlaying data functions. Two separate Y axes are
provided; one on the right and one on the left.
Data can be displayed relative to one or the other and the format of these two
axes can be made different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for
example) of the same data can be overlaid on each other.
represented by the function icon in a FrontBack window.
The FrontBack display icon represents it.

Nyquist
A Nyquist display contains three axes:

3.6.1.1.1.1 X axis
On this axis, the argument of a block will be presented.
The result of a block viewed in a certain axis format.
3.6.1.1.1.3 Y vertical axis
The result of the same block as on the horizontal axis, but viewed in another
format.
The Nyquist window icon represents it.
Rev 12A 101

Octave
The Octave display shows frequency spectra as octave blocks. In an Octave

display window you can see the result of integrating test data values over
various types of octave bands and their overall level values. These OA levels
are calculated and displayed for both the weighted and linear overall level.
The octave window icon represents it.
UL
The Upper/Lower display represents a pair of 2 or more 2D windows that are

linked together. They allow you to compare data traces above one another. This
means, for example, that when adding an X cursor, the same cursor is active in
the upper and all the lower window.
You have to add two curves with compatible X axes upon each other. Data can
be displayed relative to one or the other and the format of these two windows
can be made different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for
example) of the same data can be compared.

You can also adjust the ratio of the area assigned to each window. Use Ctrl to
drag the horizontal blue line between the Upper and Lower display windows to
the desired width.
When dragging data to the left part of the display in the ‘automatic’ drop zone,
the data will automatically be spread – 1 y 1. Possibly, zones will be added
automatically – up to 20. You cannot drop more curves then available zones.
represented by the function icon in an Upper/Lower window.
The Upper/Lower (UL) window icon represents it.
Section 3.6.1.1.2 StripChart
The StripChart can be used to overview time series. The overview window on
top in this display shows the complete time data, the detailed window (beneath
the overview) shows the detailed section.
You can drag up to 20 time traces into this display – they all will have their own
overview and detailed zone. You cannot drop more traces then available zones.
Technically, the difference between an UL and a StripChart is the default

settings – they share all functionality.
The StripChart window icon represents it.
Rev 12A 103

Waterfall
The Waterfall display shows a series of data functions in relation to a third

parameter such as time or rpm. This parameter is plotted along the Z axis and
shows the evolution of a function under particular conditions.
In the LMSTest.Lab software data represented by the waterfall icon can be

displayed in a waterfall window. In addition you can load a number of
individual data functions into a waterfall window too.
The Waterfall window icon represents it.

XY
The XY display shows the Y-values of one block in function of the Y values of
a second block on the condition that both blocks have the same X-axis. An XY
display contains four axes:
3.6.1.1.2.1 X axis
On this axis, the argument of the blocks will be presented.
The Y-values of a block. These values are used to compare with other Y-values
of blocks on the other Y axes (front and back).
3.6.1.1.2.3 Y front axis
On this axis, an unlimited number of blocks can be added. The result of one
block on this axis will be combined with the result of the Y horizontal axis to
form one display curve. Both blocks must have the same argument, which is the
argument of the X axis.
3.6.1.1.2.4 Y back axis
Similar to the Y front axis.
The XY window icon represents it.
Section 3.6.2 The Axis menus
Section 3.6.2.1 X-axis
Section 3.6.2.1.1 Limits

This menu enables you to specify how the limits of the displayed data will be
determined.
Rev 12A 105

Free
The limits will correspond to the highest and lowest value actually contained
within the data. They will therefore change whenever new data is loaded into
the window, or when data is removed.
Optimized
In this case the highest and lowest values encountered in the data are rounded
up to convenient values.
Fixed...
In this case you can define the upper (max) and lower (min) value to be
displayed. Use a Double Cursor within the data window itself in order to set
these values.
Note: Note that you can also access this dialog by double clicking on the axis
itself.
Section 3.6.2.1.2 Format X

The options in this cascading menu determine how the X axis values will be
formatted.
Linear
Values between the upper and lower limits will be displayed on a linear scale.
This option is not available for Octave displays.
Decades
Values between the upper and lower limits will be displayed in decades, which
means that each division is a multiple of 10 of the previous one. This option is
not available for Octave displays.
Octaves
In this case the range between the upper and lower values are divided into
whole octave bands. The center frequency of one octave band is twice the center
frequency of the previous one, and the range increases with the center frequency
too. You may find that the limits are adjusted so that complete octave bands can
be encompassed. This option is not available for Octave displays.
Octave bands
This option applies only to Octave displays. It integrates Y-values within a
frequency band. This results in a single Y value, which corresponds with the
center frequency on the x-axis. It is used to draw one bar for each frequency
band.
The number of frequency bands is determined by the format of the x-axis:

Octave 1/1, Octave 1/2, Octave 1/3, Octave 1/12, and Octave 1/24.
For instance with respect to Octave 1/1, Octave 1/2 uses twice the number of

frequency bands to integrate the Y-data. But note that a frequency band of
Octave 1/1 is twice as long - according to the x-axis - as one from Octave 1/2.
The same holds for other Octave formats.
Section 3.6.2.1.3 X Axis

This option is only available if the data in the display has more then 1 x-axis
connected to it, eg an order spectrum can have a time and an rpm axis. This
option allows the user to switch to one of the other X-axes.
Section 3.6.2.1.4 Second X Axis

This option is only available if the data in the display has more then 1 x-axis
connected to it, eg an order spectrum can have a time and an rpm axis. This
option allows the user to set a second X-axis on top or on bottom of the display.
This second x-axis has its own settings. The limits follow the limits of the first
axis and cannot be set independent.
Section 3.6.2.1.5 Unit

This item shows you the unit currently on the display. If the axis has no data in
it, a list appears showing all available measurement units. It is not available for
Waterfall displays.
The unit can be defined before data is in the display, a list of the complete unit
set is shown. When the data afterwards are shown, this unit is used – if it is
compatible with the unit of the data. When data is already in the display, only
corresponding units of the same quantity are shown.
Section 3.6.2.1.6 General…

This option shows the ‘General Axis options’.
In the tab ‘Y Axes’ is indicated which Y axis to be shown (default, the front and
the back axis are shown – you can add the ‘back 2’, the ‘back 3’ and the ‘back
4’ axis). This tab is only available for front/back displays.
In the tab ‘Optimized limits’, some parameters for the calculation of optimized
limits can be set here. For log, dB, decade and octave format, the 'optimized
limit ranges’ can be specified other then default. For the amplitude format, the
default can be overwritten so that it always will use zero as minimum limit.
Section 3.6.2.1.7 Visible

This option switches on or off, all the annotation (as defined by the other axis
menu options) on this axis. It is not available for Waterfall displays.
Section 3.6.2.1.8 Options

This schedules a dialog in which the appearance of different features of the axis
is set. Define the settings and then click the Apply button to view the results, in
Rev 12A 107

order to set display options.

3.6.2.1.8.1 Ticks
Ticks are short lines used to graduate an axis. Two lengths of lines are displayed
indicating the major and minor divisions of the range of values shown on the
axis.
Visible
Switches all ticks on or off.
Line Style
Schedules a dialog in which the color, pattern and thickness of the tick lines can
be set.
Base Resolution
This parameter specifies if the base ticks are calculated automatically or
specified by the user (custom). If it is on "Automatic", the range is defined as
the power of 10 that is less than the displayed limits. So if the displayed limits
are 99, then the range will be 10. And if the displayed limits are 101, then the
range will be 100. One (major) tick line is shown for each range.
Offset and increment

The value of these parameter defines the offset and increment of the ticks – if
the base resolution is on ‘custom’.
Subdivisions
The value of this parameter determines the number of divisions that will be
displayed within the base resolution range. It only can be used in case of Base
resolution on automatic. Subdivisions on 1 means that only the major ticks will
be displayed. A resolution of 5 means that 4 minor tick lines will displayed
between the major ticks.
Selecting the subdivisions on Automatic means that between 10 and 20 ticks

will be displayed in total.
Type
You can select where the tick lines are to be placed in relation to the axis.
When they are inside the lines will be placed wholly within the display
window, along with the data.
When they are outside, they will be placed outside of the data window in the
border around it next to the annotation.
When they are crossed the lines will straddle the axis with their mid points on
the axis.
Annotation visible
When this option is "on" then the values corresponding to a tick will be

displayed next to it. The characteristics of this annotation are defined using the
Font button.
Font
This schedules a dialog in which you can define the font type, size, style and
color that you want to use for the annotation of the ticks. An example of the
current style is shown in the box alongside.
Decimals
If the annotation of the ticks is visible, then this field determines the number of
values behind decimal point that will be displayed. Increasing the number of
decimals displayed on the X axis may mean that fewer tick lines can be
annotated.
Engineering notation
Checking this button "on" means that the tick values will be displayed, when
possible, in the exponential form Ae+b or Ae-b, where A is the number defined
by the number of decimals and b is the power (as a multiple of three).
3.6.2.1.8.2 Grid
A grid is a set of lines that can be overlaid on the displayed data perpendicular
to the selected axis. The lines have a user defined appearance and interval.
Visible
The check box switches the grid on or off.
Base Resolution
This parameter specifies if the base grid lines are calculated automatically or
specified by the user (custom). If it is on “automatic”, tThe range is defined as
range will be 100.
Offset and increment

The value of these parameter defines the offset and increment of the grid lines –
if the base resolution is on ‘custom’.
Subdivisions
The value of this parameter determines the number of lines that will be
displayed within the base resolution range. It only can be used in case of Base
resolution on automatic. Subdivisions on 1 means that one grid line will be
displayed in the range, and a resolution of 10 means that 10 lines will be
displayed in the same range.
Selecting the subdivisions on Automatic means that between 10 and 20 grid

lines will be displayed in total.
Rev 12A 109

Line Style
Schedules a dialog in which the color, pattern and width of the grid lines can be
set.
3.6.2.1.8.3 Limits
The options here define how the limit values will be displayed. The actual value
of the limits is determined from the Limits menu.
Visible
Switches the display of the limit values "on" or "off".
Font
color that you want to use for the annotation of the limit values. An example of
the current style is shown in the box alongside.
Decimals
If the annotation of the limits is visible, then this field determines the number of
figures behind the decimal point that will be displayed.
Checking this button "on" means that the limit values will be displayed, when
3.6.2.1.8.4 Unit
The options here define how the unit associated with an axis will be displayed.
The actual units shown depend on the selected unit set.
Visible
Switches the display of the unit "on" or "off".
Font
color that you want to use for the annotation of the unit. An example of the
3.6.2.1.8.5 Format
The options here define how the format of the data associated with an axis will
be displayed. The actual format to be used is selected from the Format menu for
the X, the Y or the Z axis.
Visible
Switches the display of the format value "on" or "off".
Font
color that you want to use for the annotation of the format. An example of the

Section 3.6.2.2 Y-axis

determined.
Free
Optimized
Fixed...
these values.
itself.
Section 3.6.2.2.2 Format Y

The options in this cascading menu determine which aspect of the ordinate
values in the data will be displayed as well as the type of scaling to be used.
Note: Different values for this parameter can be set for the left (front) and
right (back) Y axes in the FrontBack display window and for the top (upper)
and bottom (lower) Y axis in the UpperLower display window .
Real
Only the real part of a complex function is displayed.
Imag
Only the imaginary part of a complex function is displayed. This option is not
available for Octave displays.
Amplitude
Only amplitude values are displayed.
Rev 12A 111

Y formats
Phase
Phase values between +180 and -180 are displayed. This option is not available
for Octave displays.
dB
The dB values are displayed. If you want to extend the annotation with the DB
reference, you can do that for the involved unit(s) in the unit editor.
Log
The Y values are displayed on a logarithmic scale.
Section 3.6.2.2.3 Processing

Integrate/Differentiate
You can apply a single of double integration or differentiation data by first
selecting the appropriate curves and then selecting an option from the
Processing drop down menu.
Integration/differentiating is possible on data in the front or back of a front-back

display, in the upper or the lower of a upper-lower display, in the amplitude and
phase of a bode display, on a waterfall display and on a colormap display.
Integration in the display is only available for ‘frequency related’ data, not on
time data. Calculation is done by multiplying with/dividing by jω.
Weighting
You can apply weighting on data making use of the predefined weighting
factors (A,B,C and D). The pop-up menu also allows showing the original
smoothing (in case some front-end weighting or pre-weighting was applied) or
linear weighting (none). By default the data in the display will be shown with
their original weighting. Weighting is possible on data in the front or back of a
front-back display, in the upper or the lower of a upper-lower display, in the
amplitude and fase of a bode display, on a waterfall display and on a colormap
display.
Weighting in the display is only available for ‘frequency related’ data, not on
time data. Calculation is done by multiplying with the weighting curve in
frequency domain.

Smoothing
The pop-up menu allows you to apply linear smoothing on data. The Linear
smoothing uses (except for the first and last sample) following algorithm :
NewX(i) = (X(i-1)+2*X(i)+X(i+1))/4. For complex valued functions, the
smoothing is performed on the amplitudes only.
Applying some exponential smoothing will be the result of two different

smoothing actions. First a smoothing is applied from the beginning until the end
of the data. Then a smoothing will be applied from the end until the beginning
of the considered data. This will make sure that the peak values do no shift from
their original position. Smoothing can only be applied on frequency based data.
In the pop-up menu you can choose whether light, medium or heavy smoothing.
They will respectively represent a smoothing factor of 0.1, 0.5 and 0.8. You
have also the possibility to specify a custom smoothing factor between 0 and 1.
Section Scaling
By default, section data (order sections, frequency sections) is always calculated
and shown in RMS values. This function allows a user to view sections with
scaling ‘peak’. Clicking it on will have no effect on other data (e.g. spectra will
not change with this).
Reset All
This button will reset the applied weighting to the 'original' weighting and the
smoothing to 'none'.

Waterfall displays.
Section 3.6.2.2.5 Hatching

This option makes it possible to hatch between the first 2 curves – in the front
and/or the back of a front-back.
Hatching is only supported for line segments and markers (not for block
outlines (used for octave data)).
Hatching is only supported for strict monotone signals.

Rev 12A 113



3.6.2.2.8.1 Grid
Visible
Switches the grid on or off.
Line Style
set.
Base Resolution
range will be 100.
3.6.2.2.8.2 Ticks
axis.
Visible
Line Style
be set.

Base Resolution
Type
the axis.
Annotation visible
Font button.
Font
Decimals
annotated.
3.6.2.2.8.3 Limits
Visible
Rev 12A 115

Font
Decimals
3.6.2.2.8.4 Unit
Visible
Font
3.6.2.2.8.5 Format
Visible
Font
Section 3.6.2.2.9 Color Scale

This option enables you to select a color range to be used to display the data
values. It is only available in a Colormap display window.
All the installed colormap scales are listed in the cascading menu.

Section 3.6.2.3 Z-axis

determined.
Free
Optimized
Fixed...
these values.
itself.
Section 3.6.2.3.2 Format Z

This option is only available in Colormap and Waterfall display windows. It
determines in which format the Z-axis values will be displayed. The format of
the Z-axis is always Linear.

Waterfall displays.

Rev 12A 117



3.6.2.3.6.1 Grid
Visible
Switches the grid on or off.
Line Style
set.
Base Resolution
range will be 100.
3.6.2.3.6.2 Ticks
axis.
Visible
Line Style
be set.
Base Resolution

Type
the axis.
Annotation visible
Font button.
Font
Decimals
annotated.
3.6.2.3.6.3 Limits
Visible
Font
Rev 12A 119

Decimals
3.6.2.3.6.4 Unit
Visible
Font
3.6.2.3.6.5 Format
Visible
Font
These menus are obtained by right clicking on any X, Y or Z axis. They enable
you to adjust the characteristics of that axis. The contents of some entries in this
menu will depend on the type of axis.
For a FrontBack axis menu, different characteristics can be set for the left
(front) Y and the right (back) Y axes. While in the case of an UpperLower axis
menu, different characteristics can be set for the top (upper) Y and the bottom
(lower) Y axes.
Section 3.6.2.4 X-axes

Use the X-axis popup menu to switch between the X axes that are available.
Depending on displayed data type a number of options are provided.


3.6.2.4.1.1 Order map, spectrum waterfall, individual spectra of a
waterfall
Derived Frequency / Order
In Colormap and Waterfall displays you can view an order map with a
frequency X axis and a spectrum waterfall with an order X axis. There is a
frequency (or order) X axis available for each rpm Z axis.
You can also view the individual blocks of waterfalls with a derived
Frequency/Order axis in a 2D function display. This option is not available in an
octave display.
3.6.2.4.1.2 Sections, (orders, frequency sections, octave sections,
overall level, ...)
Sections are 2D slices through 3D maps or waterfalls, the X axis of a section
corresponds to the Z axis of the waterfall. Sections can contain the following X
axes:
Time
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the time value they
were measured. The first value is annotated with time 0, the other values are
annotated with the time relative to that of the first value.
Time (Throughput)
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the time value they
were measured. The time values correspond to those of the time recording
(Throughput file). This time recording can be superimposed in the same display
for comparison purposes.
Tacho channel (rpm), Derived Tacho channel and Static

channel
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the measured value
of the selected Tacho, Derived Tacho or Static channel.
Derived Frequency
You can view orders (and other sections) against frequency. For each Tacho
axis a frequency axis is available. For order sections, the order number of the
order section is taken into account.
For example:
 1st order section, with rpm axis from 2100 to 6100 rpm gives a frequency
axis from 35 to 101.66 Hz
 3rd order section, with rpm axis from 2100 to 6100 rpm gives a frequency
axis from 105 to 305 Hz
Derived number
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the sequence
number in which they were measured.
Rev 12A 121

Section 3.6.2.5 Second X-axes

Use the Second X-axis popup menu to display a second X-axis on top of a
display. Only second X-axes with a correlation greater or equal to 98% with the
primary X-axis will be available. If the data in the display contains no second
X-axes, this field will be grayed out.
When the primary X-axis is changed, the second X-axis will be removed. The
pop-up menu allows you then to select again a second X-axis if available.
If cursors are added to a display, they will always be linked to the unit of the
primary X-axis.
Section 3.6.2.6 Z-axes

Depending on the value of this toggle, another Z axis is annotated. A number of
options are provided. It is only available in Colormap and Waterfall display
windows.
Derived number
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the sequence number in
which they were measured.
Time
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the time value they
were measured. The first record is annotated with time 0, the other records are
annotated with the time value relative to that of the first record.
Time (Throughput)
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the time value they
were measured. The time values correspond to those of the time recording
(Throughput file ).
Tacho channel (rpm), Derived Tacho channel and Static

channel
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the measured value of
the selected Tacho, Derived Tacho or Static channel.
Section 3.6.3 The Display menus
This menu is obtained by right clicking in the display area of the window and
not on a curve. When there is a lot of data in a window it can be more easily
obtained by right clicking anywhere in the window, while holding the Ctrl key
down.

Section 3.6.3.1 Add Single Cursor

This allows you to add a number of single cursors (see "The Single (cursor)
menus" on page 139) with arrowhead handles.
Section 3.6.3.2 Add Double Cursor

This allows you to add a number of double cursors (see "The Double (cursor)
menus" on page 143) with arrowhead handles. Double cursors can be used to
examine specific ranges of data values.
Section 3.6.3.3 Add Harmonic Cursor

This allows you to add a number of harmonic cursors (see "The Harmonic
(cursor) menus" on page 146) with arrowhead handles. Harmonic cursors
change their separation in a way that makes them all harmonics of one
frequency.
Section 3.6.3.4 Add Automatic Cursor

This allows you to add an automatic peak cursor or an automatic valley cursor.
They cannot be handled and indicate the peak or valley of the selected curve
within the range of the display.
Note: They can only be used on 2D displays, not on a waterfall or colormap.
Section 3.6.3.5 Add Processing Cursor

All different kinds of processing cursors are available on waterfalls and
colormaps. You can insert a Z-, Order-, Frequency and Cross-cursor in a
display. The corresponding processed block can be dragged and dropped into
another display. While moving the processing cursor the view is instantaneously
updated.
An X-processing cursor is also available in a Front/Back display. The start

situation is a picture with at least two 2D-displays. In one of the 2D-displays
you can drop at least one function that is a processed function of that waterfall,
e.g. the OA-level or an order section. On this curve you can define a processing
cursor and the application identifies the corresponding spectrum according to
the specific position of that processing cursor. After dropping the corresponding
spectrum in a display, you can move this processing cursor and the view will be
updated instantaneously.
There is also the ability to adjust the processing parameters. For example, the
width unit of an order section can be determined by order, percentage,
frequency or number of lines.
The processing cursors can also be used in semi-embedded active pictures.
Rev 12A 123

Section 3.6.3.6 Remove All Cursors

This option removes all the cursors in the display. Right click on the cursor and
select Remove Cursor from the dropdown menu, in order to remove
individual cursors.
Section 3.6.3.7 Paste

This option can be used to paste an item that has been copied from the list in the
Data Explorer window.
Paste to Front / Back

In a FrontBack display window, you can paste data browser entries from the
Data Explorer to the front or to the back axis, executing this function in either
the left or the right hand side of the window.
Paste to Upper / Lower

In an UpperLower display window, you can paste data browser entries from the
Data Explorer to a specific axis in either the upper or lower window, depending
on where you executed the function (the upper or the lower side).
Section 3.6.3.8 Select All Curves

This option selects all curves on display. Individual curves can be selected by
left clicking on them or by pressing the Shift key while left clicking. It is not
available for Colormap or Waterfall displays.
Section 3.6.3.9 Deselect All Curves

This option deselects all the curves that are currently selected. Individual curves
can be deselected by left clicking on them with the Shift key depressed. It is not
available for Colormap or Waterfall displays.
Section 3.6.3.10 Remove Curve

This option relates to Colormap and Waterfall displays only. It removes “all”
curves in the display.
Section 3.6.3.11 Remove All Curves

This option removes all the curves in the display, from both the front and the
back axes. Right click on the curve and select Remove Curve from the
dropdown menu, in order to remove individual curve. It is not available for
Colormap or Waterfall displays.
Section 3.6.3.12 Legend

This toggles the presence of a floating legend inside the display window in
which information relating to the displayed data can be seen. You can drag it

with the mouse to any desired location in the window. Clicking on the small
box inside the floating legend selects the curve. Right-clicking on a legend
schedules a popup menu (see "The Curve Legend menus" on page 136) which
allows several actions to be made on both the legend itself and on the data in the
display.
Section 3.6.3.13 Title Legend

This toggles the presence of a title legend inside the display window. The title
legend enables you to show a title and the attributes common to all curves. You
can drag the title legend with the mouse to any desired location in the window.
Section 3.6.3.14 Cursor Legend

This toggles the presence of a floating cursor legend inside the display window
in which information regarding the cursor position, crossing values of the cursor
with the curve(s) and possibly calculated information can be seen. You can drag
it with the mouse to any desired location in the window. The formatting of the
contents is the same as and determined by the formatting of the legend. In the
cursor legend options you can also define whether the unit labels will be shown
in the cursor legend.
Right-clicking on a cursor legend schedules a dropdown menu with the

possibility to copy the contents of the legend into the Windows clipboard. These
contents can than be saved in e.g. Microsoft Excel.
Auto
When switched on, whenever an X, Y or cross cursor is added to the display,
the corresponding cursor legend will automatically be opened. When removing
the last cursor of a certain type, the corresponding cursor legend will disappear
automatically. When switched off, no cursor legend will be shown
automatically.
X
When switched on, the cursor legend for X cursors becomes visible.
Y (front)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Y (front) cursors becomes visible.
Y (back)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Y (back) cursors becomes visible.
Cross (front)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Cross (front) cursors becomes visible.
Cross (back)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Cross (back) cursors becomes visible.
Rev 12A 125

Section 3.6.3.15 Copy to Metafile

This function copies the contents of the display window to a metafile in the
windows clipboard. It can then be pasted into another application e.g. Word.
It is also possible to copy the contents of the complete picture (all the windows
in the layout) by executing the same function from the popup menu obtained
from the picture tab.
Section 3.6.3.16 Preview Mode

When this setting is "on", then the contents of the window will automatically be
updated by simply clicking on an item in the Data selector panel.
For the FrontBack Display, the selected item will be added to the back (right)
axis.
For the UpperLower Display, the selected item will be added to the lower
(bottom) axis.
You must select a suitable data type for the window and it must be compatible
with any data that is currently on display on the chosen axis. The magnifying
glass icon at the top right hand corner of the window indicates when this setting
is "on".
Section 3.6.3.17 Undo

This option will undo the latest zoom action. It will have the same effect as
using the backspace.
Section 3.6.3.18 Interactive zooming

With this option, you can switch on or off the interactive zooming with the
mouse.
Section 3.6.3.19 Maximize

This option causes the window in which you are working fill the entire desktop
space. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Section 3.6.3.20 Restore

This option can be used after the Zoom or the Maximize operations to restore
the active window to its rightful size within the layout/worksheet.
Section 3.6.3.21 Display Size

This option offers the possibility to resize and restore the picture size.

Maximize
This option causes the window in which you are working to fill the entire
desktop space. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Maximize to Picture
This option applies when you are working with a layout that contains a number
of windows. Selecting this option makes the active window fill the display area
panel. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Restore
This option can be used after the Maximize or the Maximize to Picture
operations in order to restore the active window to its rightful size within the
layout/worksheet.
Section 3.6.3.22 Display Format

The option Align front/back displays in picture allows you to align the format
of all displays in the picture.
The Copy and Paste options allow you to copy the format of one display and
paste it into another.
Section 3.6.3.23 Aspect ratio

This option is available for the XY display only. By default the ratio (eg mm/nr
of pixels) used for X and Y axis is the same. If the aspect ratio is put to ‘User
defined’, a user can define another ratio. With the Ctr-mouse, you can give the
diagram any ratio wanted.
Section 3.6.3.24 Axis options

This opens the “Axis options” dialog which lets you apply chosen limit ranges
to all axes set to “optimized” limits.
 Log range (expressed in decades)
 dB range
 Decade range
 Octave range
Section 3.6.3.25 Overall Level Options...

This option is only available for Octave displays. It schedules the “Overall
Level Options...” in which the display settings for the two types of overall levels
are set. The level marked [A, B, C or D] is the sum of the data values with the
standard acoustic filtering known as [A, B, C or D] weighting applied. The level
marked 'L' is the sum of the linear (unweighted) data values in all octave bands.
To display the actual data values on top of the bar, check the 'Show overall level
values' box “on”.
Rev 12A 127

To calculate both types of overall level, check the 'Calculate both weighted and
linear overall level” box “on”.
To turn “off” either setting, uncheck the relevant box.
Section 3.6.3.26 Options

This schedules the 'Options' dialog in which a number of display settings can be
defined. Each one is set by first clicking on the tab, setting the parameters
values as required, then clicking Apply to see the effect.
Section 3.6.3.26.1 Layout

3D Effect
When this setting is on, then the border around the display area appears to have
some depth.
Display Area Color

Clicking on this button enables you to select the color which surrounds the
display area within its portion of the overall layout.
Graphic Area Color

Clicking on this button enables you to select the color used as background in the
display area.
Section 3.6.3.26.2 Cursors

This dialog enables you to set the default cursor properties for a particular type
of cursor that is available in the display. These properties will be applied to all
cursors of this type when they are scheduled. It does not affect existing cursors.
The properties of existing cursors can be adjusted using the same dialog, by
right clicking on the cursor line.
Cursor
You can select the type of cursor that you want to apply the settings to from the
drop down list.
Style line
Clicking on this button schedules a dialog in which you can choose the color,
pattern and the width of the cursor line.
Style font
Clicking on this button schedules a dialog in which you can choose the font in
which the cursor value (if displayed) will be shown.
Display Handle
Turning this option “on” displays the cursor handle.

Line Type
You can select from a dropdown menu if the visualized with a line, a short line
or no line.
Value display
When this button is checked on, then the current cursor value will be displayed.
Decimals
The number in this field determines the number of decimal places behind the
point that will be displayed in the cursor value.
Checking this button 'on' will mean that the cursor values (if they are visible)
will be displayed, when possible, in the exponential form Ae+b or Ae-b, where
A is the number defined by the number of decimals and b is the power (as a
multiple of three).
ToolTip Style
When this button is checked on, then the cursor annotation value will be
displayed with a colored background, in the style of a tooltip, which makes it
easier to distinguish.
Always display intersections

This button always you to show always the intersections with all the curves in
the display, even when the curves are not selected.
Label
You can define a label for each cursor which then will be shown in the cursor
legend.
Harmonic count
Number of lines for an harmonic cursor.
Snap to data values

When this field is set to "snap to data values on curve", the only possible cursor
positions are on physically measured samples. When it is set to "None", the
cursor can be positioned anywhere. If the cursor is positioned between two
physically measured samples, then the readout value will be a linear
interpolation between the two surrounding samples.
Section 3.6.3.27 Options - Miscellaneous - Online

This option concerns the display of spectra during an online measurement
process. It is only available for Colormap displays.
Number of visible traces

The number of spectra shown during an online measurement can be adjusted.
Rev 12A 129

Section 3.6.3.28 Options - Numerical Display

A numerical display panel can contain 1 or more gauge or numerical displays. It
can only be used to display tacho or static channel values online in Signature
workbook.
When right-clicking on a display, the following functions are available:
Gauge / Numerical
Select the type of display.
Linear / dB
Select the format of the data.
Color Scale
Define the limits for the gauge and allows to define 3 different colors
corresponding to 3 range of data.
Precision
Define the number of decimals to be displayed.
When there are several displays in 1 numerical display panel, it is possible to

rearrange them by dragging and dropping them.
Section 3.6.3.29 Options - Curve

These options are only available for Waterfall displays.
Hidden lines
When this option is on, then front blocks will hide the lines of blocks that are
behind them.
Line Style...
Clicking on this button schedules a dialog in which you can choose a color,
pattern and width for the curves to be displayed in the window. The same style
will be applied to all curves.
Section 3.6.3.30 Options - View

These options are only available for Waterfall displays.
Scale
This is the percentage of the total height of the current window used for the X-Y
plane. This value can range from 0.01 (1%) to 0.99 (99%).
Angle
This is the angle at which the Z axis is set. Values from 0.01° up to 65° are
possible.

Section 3.6.3.31 Tool

Zoom
When selected, zooming can be done by left clicking and dragging a square on a
curve. It modifies the display menu obtained by right clicking in the display
area of the window. Unzooming can be done by double clicking in the display
area or by selecting “Undo” from the modified display menu.
General
When selected, the standard display menu is obtained by right clicking in the
display area of the window.
Section 3.6.4 The Data menus
These operations relate to the data traces that are on display.
Section 3.6.4.1 Remove

Clicking on this item removes the selected curve from the display.
Section 3.6.4.2 Move to Front/Back

Only available in a Front/Back display. Clicking on this item moves the selected
curve either to the back or the front of the display.
Section 3.6.4.3 Cut

Clicking on this item cuts the selected curve from the display. You can paste the
curve in any compatible display by clicking on Paste menu item in the Display
popup menu.
Section 3.6.4.4 Copy

Clicking on this item copies the selected curve from the display. You can paste
the curve in any compatible display by clicking on Paste menu item in the
Display popup menu.
Section 3.6.4.5 Copy values

This option is not available for Colormap or Waterfall displays. It allows you to
copy the values of the selected curve for pasting purposes.
[All]
Copies all the values of the selected curve.
Rev 12A 131

[Between X limits]
Copies only the values of the selected curve between the X limits of the display.
Section 3.6.4.6 Status Message

Clicking on this item schedules a message box indicating the status of the block.
This item becomes only sensitive when a message is available.
Section 3.6.4.7 Data Properties

This option is not available for Colormap or Waterfall displays. It opens the
“Properties” dialog presenting a table of the identification details for the
selected data. Columns can be hidden from view by right clicking on the header
field and then choosing Hide from the popup menu that appears.
Section 3.6.4.8 Curve Properties

This option schedules the Curve Properties dialog in which you can define the
properties of the curve used to draw the traces. It is not available for Colormap
or Waterfall displays.
Line
You can choose styles for the lines from the Trace style, Color, Pattern and
Width dropdown menus.
Fill
This allows you to select the color used for the selected curves from the Fill
Color dropdown menu.
Marker
This only becomes sensitive when you have selected markers as the trace style
and pressed the Apply button. You can then select the size of the markers from
the MarkerSize dropdown menu.
Annotation
An annotation can be added to the legend.
Section 3.6.4.9 Replay

This option allows you to replay audio data when the Replay Add-in is
included. More explanation in the Audio replay & filter dialog chapter.
Section 3.6.4.10 Select

This option is not available for Colormap or Waterfall displays. Selecting is
performed by left clicking on the data trace or by clicking on the curve
identification box inside the floating legend (see "The Curve Legend menus"

on page 136). The selection is indicated by a series of small square markers

appearing on the curve. Selection is important when you are using cursors. A
displayed cursor value is that of the selected function. As you move the cursor
over the selected function the cursors snaps to a data point and displays the
corresponding X and Y values.
You can add curves to the current selection by left clicking on a curve with the
Shift key depressed.
You can remove a single curve from the selection by left clicking on it with the
Shift key depressed. Simply left clicking on a curve selects that curve and
deselects all others.
Section 3.6.5 The Cursor menus
These operations relate to the cursors that are on display. All of the cursor
options found in the complete set of displays are described or referred to here.
However, all of the options do not apply to all of the displays.
Cursors are added to a display using the Display menu (see "The Display
menus" on page 122).
Right clicking on a cursor brings up a popup menu.
Section 3.6.5.1 Remove cursor

This removes the cursor from the display.
Section 3.6.5.2 Zoom

This relates to double cursors only and expands the display between the cursor
values. The X axis now has fixed limits, with the minimum and maximum
values defined by the cursor values. To return to the original settings use the
Limits menu (see "Limits" on page 105) to reset the X axis limits.
Note: The following sub-menu entries concern the X-axis in the Bode,
FrontBack and UpperLower windows and are only seen if one or more curves
are linked.
Section 3.6.5.3 Move to…

The user will be asked for the value, where the cursor will be moved to.
Section 3.6.5.4 Move to next Sample

The cursor will move to the next sample.
Rev 12A 133

Section 3.6.5.5 Move to previous Sample

The cursor will move to the previous sample.
Section 3.6.5.6 Move to next local maximum / minimum

This option is not available for Colormap, Octave or Waterfall displays. It
causes the cursor to jump to the next maximum (peak) or minimum (dip) in a
positive X direction found on any of the selected curves.
Section 3.6.5.7 Move to previous local maximum / minimum

causes the cursor to jump to the previous maximum (peak) or minimum (dip) in
a negative X direction found on any of the selected curves.
Section 3.6.5.8 Move to global maximum / minimum

causes the cursor to jump to the overall maximum or minimum value of all of
the selected curves.
Section 3.6.5.9 Snap to Data Values

If on, the cursor can only be placed at a sample of the data (and not in between).
Section 3.6.5.10 Lock position

This option locks the cursor to its current position. It cannot be moved anymore
until the "lock position" option is disabled again via the same menu.
Section 3.6.5.11 Calculations

This option is available for double cursors and single X cursors. It specifies
which calculated values should be shown in the cursor legend, in addition to the
cursor position(s) and crossing values.
Section 3.6.5.11.1 Modal Cursor calculations in Front/Back and

Bode display
Next to these general calculations, in a Front/Back and a Bode display also the
calculation of the damping factor - damping ratio – loss factor is available for a
single cursor.

The damping factor, damping ratio, and loss factor can be easily calculated from
the two 3dB frequency values: the left and right crossvalues of the line, 3dB
lower than the local peak value:
where:
Q :damping factor
:damping ratio
:loss factor
Section 3.6.5.11.2 Cursor calculations in Waterfall and Colormap

display
Possible calculations are: min, max, mean, RMS and range.
Section 3.6.5.12 Processing…

When clicking this, an overview of some derived processing on the current
cursor is shown – e.g. an order section on order cursor of a waterfall.
Section 3.6.5.13 Properties…

This schedules a dialog in which you can adapt a number of characteristics of
the selected cursor.
These are the same options as previously documented for the Cursor tab in the
Options dialog (see "Options" on page 128) accessed through the Function
Display menu.
Rev 12A 135

Section 3.6.6 The Curve Legend menus
Section 3.6.6.1 Show
This allows you to show the legend of 5, 10, 15 or all the curves that are
selected. You can also choose an other number of curves to be shown by
clicking custom.
You can then scroll through the different curves by clicking the up or down
arrows next to the curve legend .
Section 3.6.6.2 Copy Legend Values

This allows you to copy the complete content of the legend and to paste it in a
MS Word document, MS Excel, … .
Section 3.6.6.3 Size to fit

This automatically sets the optimal size of the legend box in the display.
Section 3.6.6.4 Options...

This opens the “Curve Legend Options” dialog containing five tabs.
Custom Content
This tab lets you choose custom content for your legend from a list of all the
possible information available for the legend box. The available attributes
depend on which Origin and Type you have selected. In the list of attributes you
can navigate to the desired attribute by using the keyboard and typing the first
letter.

As the number of all available attributes is quite extended, we provide the

possibility to define a “Favorite list” of the attributes which you plan to use on a
regular base.
When an attribute is highlighted you can press the “Add to Favorites” button.
This will make sure you create a “Favorite List” which can be visualized by
enabling the “Show Favorites” checkbox. Multiple attributes from different
origin and type can be added to this “Favorite List” when this “Show Favorites”
option is disabled. On the other hand you can only remove items by pressing the
“Remove from Favorites” when the “Show Favorites” is enabled.
In the right panel you define the attributes that can be visualized in either the
legend or title legend. This list can receive input from the general list or the
Favorites. So, when switching the view of the Favorite List on or off, the
selected attributes will remain the same.
There is also the possibility to choose where the attributes common to all curves
are shown. Either the can be shown in the title legend or the legend or even
both. Note that you first need to enable to title legend first in the popup menu if
you would like the attributes to be visible.
Standard Content
This tab lets you choose, from a list of suggested standard content items, what
you wish to display as standard information in your legend box.
Calculated Content
This tab lets you choose from a list of single values which can be reported in the
legend. A single value is a calculated value from the data block. Those values
will be calculated after the visualization processing (i.e. window corrections,
weighting…)
The following single values are available. Some more explanation can be found
in the manual which is referred to.
Sound Metric: (all in the LMS Test.Lab Sound Diagnosis manual > The LMS
Test.Lab Sound Diagnosis workbook > The Sound Diagnosis worksheet > The
Metrics Panel > Metrics table)
 Sound Pressure Level
 Loudness ISO523B Free Field
 Loudness ISO523B Diffuse Field
 Articulation Index
 Open Articulation Index
 Sharpness Free Field
 Sharpness Diffuse Field
 Loudness Stevens 6 (ISO532A)
 Loudness Stevens 7
 Tone-to-noise Ratio
Rev 12A 137

 Prominence Ratio
 Tonality
 ANSI Speech Interference Level
 Preferred Speech Interference Level
 Noise Rating (NR)
 Noise Criterion (NC)
 Balanced Noise Criterion (NCB)
Note: The acoustical metrics will not be supported for time data, they will only
be useful for frequency spectra or 3rd octave spectra. To be able to perform
some sound Metrics calculations the 'sound diagnose license' is also required. If
not available, all previously added values will still be displayed in the legend.
Statistical Value: (all in the LMS Test.Lab Signature Acquisition manual >
Functions > Frame statistics)
 Variance
 Range
 RMS
 Average
 Maximum
 5% percentile
 10% percentile
 50% percentile
 90% percentile
 95% percentile
 Last Value
Note: All the calculations for statistical single values on complex-valued

spectra are performed on the amplitudes.
The format in which the single values are reported can be adapted.
 Prefix: the name that appears in the Legend (i.e. to enter "AI" for
Articulation Index) Decimal: the number of decimals can be specified
(0-12)
 dB: selecting this option will represent the data in dB in stead of linear
format. If you want to add the log reference of this dB value, you can do so
by adding this for the involved unit(s) in the unit editor.
 Unit Label: you can optionally append the data with the unit label.
Layout
This tab lets you change the appearance of your legend box, including the box

itself (border and background colors, size and visibility) and the fonts used to
display its contents (font color, size, effects...).
Title Content
This tab enables you to give the display a title. This will be shown in the title
legend. There is also the possibility to choose where the attributes common to
all curves are shown.
Title Layout
This tab lets you change the appearance of your title legend box, including the
box itself (border and background colors, size and visibility) and the fonts used
to display its contents (font color, size, effects...).
Section 3.6.7 The Single (cursor) menus
Section 3.6.7.1 Single X

This schedules a single vertical line, with an arrowhead handle, that can be
dragged with the mouse. The X value corresponding to the cursor position is
annotated just above the lower x-axis. If any of the functions are selected, then
the corresponding values on those traces are also annotated.
Octave
In an Octave Display, the cursor is placed on the centre frequency of the octave
band.
UpperLower
In an UpperLower Display, the cursor line covers both windows.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall Display, this item schedules a YZ plane that can be dragged
along the X-axis.
Section 3.6.7.2 Single Y

This schedules an Y cursor on the display i.e. a single horizontal line, with an
arrowhead handle, that can be dragged with the mouse).
Colormap
In a Colormap display, this item schedules a single horizontal line in the color
scale area to the right of the data display area. It can be moved with the mouse
and the Y value corresponding to the cursor position is annotated.
FrontBack
In a FrontBack display, the entry that you obtain from the Y menu item depends
Rev 12A 139

on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The left half of the
window relates to the left (front) axis, and the right half of the window relates to
the right (back) axis.
These entries schedule a single horizontal line that can be moved with the
mouse. The Y value on the corresponding axis is annotated next to the axis. If
any of the functions on that axis are selected, then up to 20 X values
corresponding to this Y value will be annotated.
UpperLower
In an UpperLower display, The entry that you obtain from the Y menu item
depends on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper
window relates to the top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom
display. These entries schedule a single horizontal line that can be moved with
the mouse. The Y value on the corresponding axis is annotated next to the axis.
If any of the functions on that axis are selected, then up to 20 X values
Waterfall
In a Waterfall display, this item schedules an XZ plane that can be dragged
along the Y axis with the mouse. The Y value corresponding to the cursor
position is annotated.
Section 3.6.7.3 Single Z

These are only available on Colormap and Waterfall displays.
Colormap
In a Colormap display, this item schedules a single horizontal line in the display
area. It can be moved with the mouse or the arrow keys and the according Z
value to the cursor position is annotated.
Waterfall
The Z-cursor will schedule a XY-plane that can be moved along the Z-axis. The
block at the cursor position will be highlighted. Even when the trace density is
modified (reduced) the block at the Z-position will be shown and highlighted. A
cross-hair cursor indicates the peak value of the spectrum.
Section 3.6.7.4 Order

These are available in Colormap and Waterfall windows.
Colormap
In a Colormap display, an order cursor is a radial line rotating about the point X
= 0, Z = 0. It can be used for examining “orders” when the Z axis values are
rpm.
The line can be moved with the cursor or you can use the ‘Move to …’ cursor
menu option.

The ‘order’ value displayed is the ratio of the X (frequency value) and the Z
(frequency value) :
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (frequency value)
Or when the Z axis values are rpm:
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (rpm) / 60
Order cursor in a Colormap display
You can give the order cursor an ‘offset’ on the X-axis. In this case the radial
line is rotating about the point X = offset, Z = 0.
The offset can be moved with the cursor at the location of the offset point.
The displayed values are the ‘offset’ and the ‘order’ value:
X (frequency value) = Offset + Order * Z (frequency value)
Also the Mirrored order is shown:
X (frequency value) = Offset - Order * Z (frequency value)
Order cursor with offset in a Colormap display
Waterfall
In a Waterfall Display, an order cursor is a radial plane rotating about the point
Rev 12A 141

X = 0, Z = 0. Dragging can move it and the value X/Z of its current position is
displayed.
Order cursor in a Waterfall display
The exact value will of course depend on the values that are being displayed
along the Z axis. This cursor can be used for examining orders when the Z axis
values are rpm. The value displayed is the ratio of the X (frequency value) and
the Z rpm *60 (frequency value).
Section 3.6.7.5 Frequency

These are only available on Colormap and Waterfall displays.
This type of cursor will schedule a YZ-plane that can be dragged along the
X-axis when the axis is a frequency axis. Even when switching to another
available X-axis (for example order), the frequency cursor will annotated the
according frequency. As a consequence, the shape of the cursor will change
also.
A regular single X cursor will always schedule a YZ-plane.
Section 3.6.7.6 Single cross

This schedules a vertical and horizontal line in the window. The crossed pair
can be moved with the mouse. The X and Z coordinates corresponding to the
position of the crossing point in the display area are annotated as (X, Z).
FrontBack
In the FrontBack display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The left half of the window
relates to the left (front) axis, and the right half of the window relates to the
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a vertical and horizontal line in the
window. The crossed pair can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
crossing point. The X and Y coordinates corresponding to the position of the
crossing point in the display area are annotated as (X, Y). The Y value relates to
the selected axis.

UpperLower
In the UpperLower Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a vertical and horizontal line in the
window. The crossed pair can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
crossing point. The X and Y coordinates corresponding to the position of the
crossing point in the display area are annotated as (X, Y). The Y value relates to
the selected axis.
Section 3.6.8 The Double (cursor) menus
Section 3.6.8.1 Double X

This schedules a pair of vertical lines that can be moved with the mouse. The X
values corresponding to the cursor positions are annotated. Drag the left line to
move the cursor pair. Drag the right line to change the distance between the
lines.
Octave
For an Octave Display, it is the same as two single cursors, except for the
coherence between them.
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, this schedules a pair of YZ planes that can be dragged
along the X-axis with the mouse. Dragging the left plane moves the cursor pair.
Dragging the right plane changes the distance between the cursor planes.
Section 3.6.8.2 Double Y

This places a double Y-cursor on the display.
Colormap
For a Colormap Display, this schedules a pair of horizontal lines in the color
scale area to the right of the data display. They can be moved with the mouse
and the Y values corresponding to the cursor positions are annotated.
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, this schedules a pair of XZ planes that can be dragged
along the Y axis with the mouse. The Y values corresponding to the cursor
positions are annotated. Drag the bottom plane to move the cursor pair. Drag the
top plane to change the distance between the cursor planes.
FrontBack
In the FrontBack Display, the exact entry that you obtain from this menu
depends on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The left half of
Rev 12A 143

the window relates to the left (front) axis, and the right half of the window
relates to the right (back) axis. These entries schedule a pair of horizontal lines
that can be moved with the mouse. Drag the bottom line to move the cursor
pair. Drag the upper line to change the distance between the lines.
The Y values on the corresponding axis are annotated. If any of the functions
associated with the same axis are selected, then up to 20 X values
UpperLower
In the UpperLower Display, the exact entry that you obtain from this menu
depends on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper
window relates to the top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom
display. These entries schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of which is
separated by a constant distance. The separating distance corresponds to the
distance between the zero value and first line, which is annotated. Dragging a
cursor line across the zero line moves all the harmonic lines to the opposite side.
The distance between all the lines can be adjusted by dragging any one of the
lines up or down.
Section 3.6.8.3 Double Z

These are only available in colormap and waterfall windows.
Colormap
For a Colormap Display, this schedules a pair of horizontal lines in the data
display area that can be moved with the mouse along the Z axis. The Z values
corresponding to the cursor positions are annotated. Drag the bottom line to
move the cursor pair. Drag the upper line to change the distance between the
lines.
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, this schedules a pair of XY planes that can be dragged
along the Z axis with the mouse. The Z values corresponding to the cursor
positions are annotated. Drag the front plane to move the cursor pair. Drag the
back plane to change the distance between the cursor planes.
Section 3.6.8.4 Double Order

Colormap
In a Colormap Display, a double order cursor is a pair of radial lines rotating
about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The pair can be moved together by dragging the
left hand line (black in the figure). The angle between them can be adjusted by
dragging the right hand line (red in the figure). In each case, the value X/Z
corresponding to the positions of the two lines is annotated.

Double Order cursor in a Colormap Display
This exact values will of course depend on the values that are being displayed
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, a double order cursor is a pair of radial planes rotating
about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The pair can be moved together by dragging the
left plane. The angle between them can be adjusted by dragging the right plane.
In each case, the values X/Z corresponding to the positions of the two planes is
annotated.
Section 3.6.8.5 Double Cross

This schedules two crossed vertical and horizontal cursor lines. The X and Z
values corresponding to the two crossing points are annotated. Drag the
lower/left cross in order to move the pair. The distance between them can be
adjusted by dragging the upper/right cross.
FrontBack
For a FrontBack Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
right (back) axis. These entries schedule two crossed vertical and horizontal
cursor lines. The X and Y values corresponding to the two crossing points are
annotated. The pair can be moved by dragging the lower/left cross and the
distance between them can be adjusted by dragging the upper/right cross.
UpperLower
For an UpperLower Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper window relates to the
top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom display. These schedule
a series of crossed vertical and horizontal cursor lines at fixed intervals. The X
and Y intervals can be adjusted independently. The separating distance
corresponds to the distance between the zero-value and the first line. Dragging
Rev 12A 145

the first horizontal line across the zero line moves all the horizontal lines to the
opposite side. The distance between all the lines can be adjusted by dragging
any one of the crossing points in any direction.
Section 3.6.9 The Harmonic (cursor) menus
Section 3.6.9.1 Harmonic X

This schedules a series of vertical lines, at equal intervals. The distance between
each line is that of the basic frequency range, i.e. the distance between the first
line and the starting frequency.
X Harmonic cursor
Moving any one of the lines will cause the others to adjust and so maintain a
constant distance between them all. The basic frequency range is annotated on
the X axis. When the limits are free or optimized.
Section 3.6.9.2 Harmonic Y

This related to a Waterfall Display and schedules a series of YZ planes, at equal
intervals. The distance between each plane is the basic frequency range, i.e. the
distance between the first line and zero.
Moving any one of the planes will cause the others to adjust and so maintain a
constant distance between them all. The basic frequency (if it lies within the
displayed limits) is annotated on the X axis.
FrontBack
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of
which is separated by a constant distance. The separating distance corresponds
to the distance between the zero value and first line, which is annotated.
Dragging a cursor line across the zero line moves all the harmonic lines to the
any one of the lines up or down.

UpperLower
For an UpperLower Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper window relates to the
top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom display. These entries
schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of which is separated by a constant
distance. The separating distance corresponds to the distance between the zero
value and first line, which is annotated. Dragging a cursor line across the zero
line moves all the harmonic lines to the opposite side. The distance between all
the lines can be adjusted by dragging any one of the lines up or down.
Section 3.6.9.3 Harmonic Z

This item schedules a series of XY planes, each of which is separated by a
constant distance. The distance between all the planes can be adjusted by
dragging any one of them up or down. The Z value of the lowest plane is
annotated on the left (Z) axis.
Section 3.6.9.4 Harmonic Order

Colormap
In a Colormap Display, a harmonic order cursor is a set of radial lines rotating
about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The whole set can be moved together by dragging
any of the lines. The ratio X1/Z1 of the first line is annotated. Each of the
following lines is a multiple of this first ratio.
Harmonic Order cursor in Colormap Display
This exact values will of course depend on the values that are being displayed
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, a harmonic order cursor is a set of radial planes
rotating about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The whole set can be moved together by
Rev 12A 147

dragging any of the planes. The ratio X/Z of the first plane is annotated. Each of
the following planes is a multiple of this first ratio.
This cursor can be used for examining orders when the Z axis is displaying rpm
values.
Section 3.6.9.5 Harmonic Cross

This item schedules a series of crossed vertical and horizontal cursor lines at
fixed intervals. The X and Z intervals can be adjusted independently by
dragging any of the cross points in the required direction. The separating
distance corresponds to the distance between the lowest value and zero and
these values are annotated.
FrontBack
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of
which is separated by a constant distance. The separating distance corresponds
to the distance between the zero value and first line, which is annotated.
Dragging a cursor line across the zero line moves all the harmonic lines to the
any one of the lines up or down.
UpperLower
What you obtain from this menu depends on where you are bringing up the
Display popup menu. The upper window relates to the top display, and the
lower window relates to the bottom display. These schedule a series of crossed
vertical and horizontal cursor lines at fixed intervals. The X and Y intervals can
be adjusted independently. The separating distance corresponds to the distance
between the zero value and first line. Dragging the first horizontal line across
the zero-line moves all the horizontal lines to the opposite side. The distance
between all the lines can be adjusted by dragging any one of the crossing points
in any direction.
Section 3.6.10 The Automatic (cursor) menus
Section 3.6.10.1 Add Automatic Cursor

This allows you to add an automatic peak cursor or an automatic valley cursor.
They cannot be handled and indicate the peak or valley of the selected curve
within the range of the display.
Note: They can only be used on 2D displays, not on a waterfall or colormap.

Section 3.6.11 The Processing (cursor) menus
Section 3.6.11.1 Add Processing Cursor

All different kinds of processing cursors are available on waterfalls and
colormaps. You can insert a Z-, Order-, Frequency and Cross-cursor in a
display. The corresponding processed block can be dragged and dropped into
another display. While moving the processing cursor the view is instantaneously
updated.
An X-processing cursor is also available in a Front/Back display. The start

There is also the ability to adjust the processing parameters. For example, the
width unit of an order section can be determined by order, percentage,
frequency or number of lines.
The processing cursors can also be used in semi-embedded active pictures.
Section 3.6.11.2 Processing X

Front/Back
A Processing X-cursor is only available in a Front/Back display. The start
Section 3.6.11.3 Processing Z

Colormap
In a Colormap display, this item schedules a single horizontal line in the display
area. A Cursor Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according
Frequency Spectrum into one or several displays. Moving the cursor with the
mouse or the arrow keys will ensure that the according view is updated
instantaneously. The Cursor Processing dialog can always be accessed by
clicking on [processing…] in the popup menu of the cursor.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall display, this item schedules a XY-plane in the display area. A
Rev 12A 149

Cursor Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according
Frequency Spectrum into one or several displays. Moving the cursor with the
mouse or the arrow keys will ensure that the according view is updated
instantaneously. The Cursor Processing dialog can always be accessed by
clicking on [processing…] in the popup menu of the cursor.
Section 3.6.11.4 Processing Order

Colormap
In a Colormap display, a Processing Order cursor is a radial line rotating about
the point X = 0, Z = 0 when the X-axis is a frequency axis. (If the X-axis is set
to order the cursor will schedule a vertical line) .
The ‘order’ value displayed is the ratio of the X (frequency value) and the Z
(frequency value) :
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (frequency value)
Or for Z-axis values in rpm:
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (rpm) / 60
The Cursor Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according
Order into one or several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the
arrow keys will ensure that the according view is updated instantaneously.
The Cursor Processing dialog can always be accessed by clicking on

[processing…] in the popup menu of the cursor. Even the parameters which
determine the width of the order can be modified by right clicking on the block
in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit can be specified in order, %,
frequency and number of lines.
You can give the order cursor an offset on the X-axis. The radial line is then
rotating about the point X = offset, Z = 0. In this case the Cursor Processing
dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according ‘off-zero order section’
into one or several displays. You can also drag and drop the ‘mirrored off-zero
order section’.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall Display, a Processing Order cursor is a radial plane rotating about
the point X = 0, Z = 0 when the X-axis is a frequency axis. (If the X-axis is set
to order the cursor will schedule a YZ-plane) The value displayed is the ratio of
the X (frequency value) and the Z rpm *60 (frequency value). The Cursor
Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according Order into one
or several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the arrow keys will
ensure that the according view is updated instantaneously.

determine the width of the order can be modified by right clicking on the block
in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit can be specified in order, %,
frequency and number of lines.

Section 3.6.11.5 Processing Frequency

Colormap
In a Colormap display, a Processing Frequency cursor will schedule a line that
indicates the centre of a Frequency or Octave section. The value displayed is the
centre frequency value of the section. The Cursor Processing dialog will allow
you to drag and drop the according Frequency or Octave Section into one or
several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the arrow keys will

determine the width of the section can be modified by right clicking on the
block in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit of a Frequency section
can be specified in frequency, % and number of lines. For an Octave section
you can specify the bandtype.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall display, a Processing Frequency cursor will schedule a plane that
indicates the centre of a Frequency or Octave section. The value displayed is the
centre frequency value of the section. The Cursor Processing dialog will allow
you to drag and drop the according Frequency or Octave Section into one or
several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the arrow keys will

block in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit of a Frequency section
can be specified in frequency, % and number of lines. For an Octave section
you can specify the bandtype.
Section 3.6.11.6 Processing Cross

Colormap
In a Colormap display, a Processing Cross cursor will schedule a cross-cursor
indicating the values of the X and Z-axis. The Cursor Processing dialog will
allow you to drag and drop the according Frequency Section, Frequency
Spectrum, Octave Section and Order Section into one or several displays.
Changing the position of the vertical line of the cross-cursor will update the
Frequency and Octave. The position of the horizontal line of the cross-cursor
will determine which Frequency Spectrum can be shown. And the value of the
Order Section is the ratio of the X and Z values of the cross-cursor.

block in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit of a Frequency Section
can be specified in frequency, % and number of lines. In an Order Section you
can define the width unit in order, %, frequency and number of lines. For an
Rev 12A 151

Octave section you can specify the bandtype.
Section 3.7 Geometry display windows
Geometry windows are used to display the geometric representation of a

structure and the modes that operate on that structure. The display window can
be used to manipulate the undeformed and the deformed model of the structure.
Section 3.7.1 [Procedure] To use the displays
Step 1
Open a Geometry display by clicking on one of the three icons that refers to the
Geometry display that you wish to open or by using a Geometry display from
the Select a layout dropdown menu.
Step 2
Load the undeformed model into the display, by dropping a geometry into it
from the browser window.
Note: components can be dropped in the geometry display.
Step 3
Load your modes into the chosen display by either, dragging the modes from
the browse tree and dropping them into the window, or by doing a copy/paste
operation.
Step 4
The animation is achieved using a number of frames in which the deformation
steps through a cycle of values defined by a cosine function. The geometry
model and the modes can be manipulated through a set of three icons and a
popup menu in the display.

Geometry
The following types of Geometry (or 3D) displays are available:
Single Geometry display for the visualization of the nodes, lines and surfaces of
a geometry model, and the animation of one or two mode shapes.
The Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
To use a single mode shape, just drag and drop it from the detail panel on the
left-hand side to the geometry on the right-hand side. The animation will then
automatically start and the mode shape will be visible. Click the right mouse
button to change the settings of the animation and to start or stop it. In the lower
left or the lower right corner of the display window, you can see what mode
shape is active.
It is also possible to use a second mode shape on the same time on top of the
already existing first mode shape. To do this, just drag the second mode shape
on the geometry on which the first mode shape is active. However it is
important that you drop the second mode shape on the outer-right side of the
geometry display. When you move the mode shape over the display while
holding the mouse button pressed, the text ‘main’ or ‘overlaid’ will appear on
under the mouse arrow. When the text ‘overlaid’ appears, you are in the right
area of your display. Here you can drop the second mode shape.
Rev 12A 153

You will notice that the ‘main’ area is much larger than the ‘overlaid’ area. This
is because most user only wish to see one mode shape at a time and drop the
mode shape in the middle of the display. If the first mode shape is already active
on the ‘overlaid’ area (on the right side), just drag and drop the second mode
shape on the ‘main’ area (on the left side) to see the two mode shapes at the
same time.
If you wish to see only one mode shape when two different mode shapes are
active, you can drop the mode on each side of the display. On the lower left and
the lower right corner you can see what mode shape is active on what side.
To see another mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape and drop it
on the area (overlaid or main), the mode that was already active, will then be
overwritten by the new one.
UL Geometry
The UL Geometry or Upper Lower 3D Display has two Geometry displays, one
above the other, and both displays have their own action buttons. Therefore, the
phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can be different, and
this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Upper Lower Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
In order to visualize a mode shape, select the ModeSet of the current geometry

in the navigator panel and drag and drop the mode shape you want to see in the
upper or lower half of the display window. You can visualize a maximum of 2
mode shapes simultaneously, one in the upper half of the display window and
one in the lower half.
To change the mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape onto the
existing mode shape to replace it.
Options for the mode shapes are available by clicking the right mouse button.
LR Geometry
The LR Geometry or Left Right 3D Display window has two geometry displays
alongside each other, and both displays have their own action buttons.
Therefore, the phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can
be different, and this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Left Right Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
In order to visualize a mode shape, select the ModeSet of the current geometry
in the navigator panel and drag and drop the mode shape you want to see in the
left or right half of the display window. You can visualize a maximum of 2
mode shapes simultaneously, one in the left half of the display window and one
in the right half.
Rev 12A 155

To change the mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape onto the
existing mode shape to replace it.
Options for the mode shapes are available by clicking the right mouse button.
Quad Geometry
This is a geometry display that shows four views at once. One of them has
exactly the same features as the single geometry display. The three other views
have a fixed orientation and translation, meaning the point of view cannot be
changed and the model cannot be moved.
To switch the projection of the views from European to American, select “Quad
Projection American” in the Tools Options Displays dialog.
The Quad Geometry (3 Display) icon represents it.
To use a single mode shape, just drag and drop it from the detail panel on the
left-hand side to the geometry on the right-hand side. The animation will then
automatically start and the mode shape will be visible. Click the right mouse
button to change the settings of the animation and to start or stop it. In the lower
left or the lower right corner of the display window, you can see what mode
shape is active.

It is also possible to use a second mode shape on the same time on top of the
already existing first mode shape. To do this, just drag the second mode shape
on the geometry on which the first mode shape is active. However it is
important that you drop the second mode shape on the outer-right side of the
geometry display. When you move the mode shape over the display while
holding the mouse button pressed, the text ‘main’ or ‘overlaid’ will appear on
under the mouse arrow. When the text ‘overlaid’ appears, you are in the right
area of your display. Here you can drop the second mode shape.
You will notice that the ‘main’ area is much larger than the ‘overlaid’ area. This
is because most user only wish to see one mode shape at a time and drop the
mode shape in the middle of the display. If the first mode shape is already active
on the ‘overlaid’ area (on the right side), just drag and drop the second mode
shape on the ‘main’ area (on the left side) to see the two mode shapes at the
same time.
If you wish to see only one mode shape when two different mode shapes are
active, you can drop the mode on each side of the display. On the lower left and
the lower right corner you can see what mode shape is active on what side.
To see another mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape and drop it
on the area (overlaid or main), the mode that was already active, will then be
overwritten by the new one.
Acoustic Geometry
Rev 12A 157

This is a geometry display which is used to show acoustic data: sound intensity,
sound pressure, and sound power data:
 Sound intensity data: interpolated color display in dB format and arrows
 Sound pressure and sound power data: interpolated color display in dB
format.
The color scale in dB is shown at the right side of the display.
Section 3.7.2 The Geometry display functions
The geometry model and the modes can be manipulated using the manipulation
icons, your mouse and a popup menu in the display.
Section 3.7.2.1 The Geometry model manipulation icons
Section 3.7.2.1.1 Move
This icon allows you to interactively move the model in the X and Y
dimensions of the screen. Press on the icon and drag the mouse to move the
model to the required position.
You can restore the model to its original position by selecting Views Default
view from the popup display menu available when you right click anywhere in
the display.
Section 3.7.2.1.2 Zoom in / zoom out
This icon allows you to interactively increase or decrease the size of the model
in the window. Press on the icon and drag the mouse to zoom in or zoom out as
required.
You can restore the model to its original size by selecting Views Default
view from the popup display menu. You can also size the model to fit neatly in
the window by selecting Fit model from the popup display menu.
Note: You can also zoom in and zoom out by turning the mouse wheel.
You can interactively rotate the model on display. The way to do this is by
pressing down the left mouse button in the geometry display, and moving the
mouse. You can then rotate the model to the preferred view whilst keeping the
mouse button depressed. To restore the model to its original rotation, select

Views Default View from the popup display menu available when you right
click anywhere in the display.
Note: You can also use the mouse wheel to rotate the model. To rotate about
the horizontal axis, hold down Shift while turning the mouse wheel. To
rotate about the vertical axis hold down Ctrl while turning the mouse wheel.
Section 3.7.2.2 The Geometry display menu
Section 3.7.2.2.1 Deformed Model

This is the model on which deformations can be performed.
3.7.2.2.1.1 Nodes
Marker
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes of the model.
Names
This toggles the display of names on the nodes of the model.
Euler Angles
This toggles the display of axis triads depicting the orientation of the Euler
angles of the node of the model.
3.7.2.2.1.2 Lines
This toggles the display of line elements.
3.7.2.2.1.3 Surfaces
This toggles the display of surface elements.
3.7.2.2.1.4 Solids
This toggles the display of solid elements.
3.7.2.2.1.5 Edges
This toggles the display of the edges of the model. This amounts to a wire frame
representation, e.g. a triangle has three edges while a line has one.
3.7.2.2.1.6 Faces
This toggles the display of the faces of the model, e.g. a cube has six faces
while a triangle has one.
3.7.2.2.1.7 Show All
This switches on the visibility of all the items.
3.7.2.2.1.8 Show None
This switches off the visibility of all the items.
Rev 12A 159

Section 3.7.2.2.2 Selection

Selectable elements of the deformed model will be highlighted when the mouse
passes over them. Clicking on these selectable elements will select them. You
can also select more than one element at the same time by left clicking on them
while pressing the Shift key or dragging the mouse over the model with the
middle mouse button depressed.
3.7.2.2.2.1 Select All
Selects all the displayed elements.
3.7.2.2.2.2 Clear Selection
Clears the selected elements.
3.7.2.2.2.3 Select Deform Maximum
This option is available only when a mode (with mode shapes) is used in the
geometry.
X
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum X direction
deformation.
Y
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum Y direction
deformation.
Z
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum Z direction
deformation.
Length
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum vector
length deformation.
3.7.2.2.2.4 Node
Names
This toggles the display of names on the selected nodes of the model.
Euler Angles
angles of the selected node.
Section 3.7.2.2.3 Undeformed Model

The undeformed model serves as a reference only. No actions like deformation
or selection are possible on it. The deformed model must not be in the display.
Select Show None from the Deformed Model menu entry to remove the
deformed model from the display.

3.7.2.2.3.1 Nodes
Marker
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes of the model.
Names
This toggles the display of names on the nodes of the model.
Euler Angles
angles of the node of the model.
3.7.2.2.3.2 Lines
This toggles the display of line elements.
3.7.2.2.3.3 Surfaces
This toggles the display of surface elements.
3.7.2.2.3.4 Solids
This toggles the display of solid elements.
3.7.2.2.3.5 Edges
This toggles the display of the edges of the model. This amounts to a wire frame
representation, e.g. a triangle has three edges while a line has one.
3.7.2.2.3.6 Faces
This toggles the display of the faces of the model, e.g. a cube has six faces
while a triangle has one.
3.7.2.2.3.7 Show All
This switches on the visibility of all the items.
3.7.2.2.3.8 Show None
This switches off the visibility of all the items.
Section 3.7.2.2.4 Model scale

This entry allows you to select relative or absolute model scale. When you have
several geometry and you want to compare them by using the same geometry
display, then you can use these options.
3.7.2.2.4.1 Relative
When this option is “on”, if you drop a geometry into a geometry display, the
model will be resized to fit the geometry display, so that you can see the
complete geometry.
3.7.2.2.4.2 Absolute
When this option is “on”, if you drop a geometry in the geometry display, the
model scale is not modified. This is useful when you want to compare 2
geometries.
Rev 12A 161

Section 3.7.2.2.5 Show Model Scale

This shows the geometry model scale in the geometry display.
Section 3.7.2.2.6 Animation

This option switches the animation of a vector on or off. The deformed model is
frozen in the current position.
Section 3.7.2.2.7 Animation settings

Deform
This option switches on or off the deformation animation.
Color
This option switches on or off the color animation.
Arrow
This option switches on or off the arrow animation (deformations are shown in
arrows).
Nodal lines
This option switches on or off the nodal lines (nodal lines are default displayed
in black solid lines).
Section 3.7.2.2.8 Delay (ms)

The entries in this sub menu set the time in milliseconds between the displays of
consecutive frames. The total time to complete the animation cycle is the
{delay} x {the number of frames per cycle}. The delay is a minimum rather
than a maximum time.
Section 3.7.2.2.9 Frames per cycle

The entries in this sub menu set the number of frames that are used during the
animation cycle. The more frames used, the smoother the animation appears.
The frames that appear are defined by an even distribution of the selected
number from the complete animation cycle, though this depends on the
deformation format that you are using too. The figure below illustrates the
effect of using four frames in the animation cycle.

Frames per animation cycle
Section 3.7.2.2.10 Expand

These options allow you to choose whether the mode shapes will be expanded
and how they are expanded.
Note: These expand options are not available if there is no mode used in the
geometry display.
None
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will not be expanded.
Slave DOFs
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will be completed with the
animation of the slave DOFs.
Note: when a component is dropped in the geometry display, in stead of a full

geometry, the slave DOF information will not be used.
Protect Measured
When the “Slave DOFs” option is “on”, the “Protect Measured” option will be
available. If you have defined some slave DOFs which are also measured DOFs,
you can either choose to use the result of slave DOFs (“Protect Measured”
option “off”) or the measured data (“Protect Measured” option “on”) for
animation.
Automatic Geometrical
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will be expanded in a automatic
way. In this case an algorithm is used to automatically search for master nodes
which is bases on the Cartesian distance.
Automatic topological
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will be expanded in a automatic
way. In this case an algorithm is used to automatically search for master nodes
which is based on the topological distance.
Rev 12A 163

Smoothing
In case of automatic expansion, smoothing of the animation is applied. The
level of smoothing can be low, medium, or high.
Section 3.7.2.2.11 Animation Control
This dialog enables you to stop, start and adjust the animation of the results.
The animation is based on a cosine function varying from + max to - max

deformation. When the format of the displayed vector is Amplitude/Phase, then
the displacement for each point (Dp) for a complex value (Vp) = Rp + iIp is
given by and is illustrated below.
Displacement for each point
The Play button starts the continuous and repetitive animation of the results.
The Stop button halts the continuous animation.
The From Backward and the From Forward buttons are only sensitive when
the continuous animation is “off”. They allow you to step to the next or
previous frame in the cycle. This will be indicated in the “Phase” field. The
increment depends on the number of “Frames per cycle”.
Section 3.7.2.2.12 Remove animation

Main/Overlaid
When the geometry display is selected, the main or overlaid animation can be
removed.
Upper/Lower
When the upper lower geometry display is selected, the upper or lower
animation can be removed.

Left/Right
When the left/right geometry display is selected, the right or the left animation
can be removed.
Section 3.7.2.2.13 Edit deformation Scale...

This entry allows you to adjust the scale of the deformation displayed. A dialog
appears in which you can choose to use a relative or an absolute deformation
scale.
When you choose a relative deformation scale, you can drag a slider to increase
or decrease the scaling factor applied to the current mode shape. The
deformation scale is always relative to the model and the current mode.
When you choose an absolute deformation scale, you have 2 options:

 Per m model: this is still actually a 'relative' scale. The scale is kept fixed
relative to the model. If you zoom in on the model or resize the workbook,
this value is kept the same. The deformation will always stay the same
relative to the model.
 Per cm screen: this is an absolute value compared to the screen. The value
you supply here (X), means that a deformation of 1 cm on your screen
corresponds to amplitude of X in the mode shape. The deformation scale
you can display on the screen is related to this. A distance is shown on the
screen and the corresponding amplitude of the mode shape.
Note: The relation between the distance shown on the screen and amplitude
of the mode shape is correct, but the relation between the deformation scale
shown in the display and the absolute value you enter per cm screen, is not
exact. It is impossible to make this absolute exact.
Link
If you use Left/Right or Upper/Lower geometry, this option will be available.
Use the “Absolute” deformation scale, check the “Link” check box, the
deformation scale of the Left or Upper will be the same as the one of the Right
or Lower. When you change the deformation scale for the Left or Upper, the
one of the Right or Lower will be adapted automatically.
Section 3.7.2.2.14 Show Deformation Scale

This shows the deformation scale in the geometry display.
Section 3.7.2.2.15 Deformation Format

This sub menu determines the format in which the animated vectors are
displayed.
Real
The movement of a particular node is proportional to the real part of the
Rev 12A 165

corresponding vector element. Nodes for which the corresponding vector

elements have real parts with identical signs move in phase, whereas other
nodes move 180° out of phase.
Imag (Imaginary)
The movement of a particular node is proportional to the imaginary part of the
corresponding vector element. Nodes for which the corresponding vector
elements have imaginary parts with identical signs move in phase, whereas
other nodes move 180° out of phase.
Amplitude/Phase
The movement at a particular node is proportional to the amplitude of the
corresponding vector element. The phase relationship between the movements
of different nodes is determined by the phase difference of the corresponding
vector elements.
Amplitude
This is the same as Amplitude/Phase but the nodes move in phase if the absolute
value of the phase difference between the corresponding vector elements is less
than 90°, otherwise they move 180° out of phase.
Absolute
Same as Amplitude but only the first half of the animation cycle is used. This
does not mean, however, that all points move in phase.
Section 3.7.2.2.16 Deformation Scalar Transform

If you drop a scalar rather than a vector quantity into the display, then it will be
converted to a vector, in the direction selected from this menu and with its
scalar value as the length. Each of the directions is shown in the top right corner
of the display.
Section 3.7.2.2.17 Deformation Directions

This entry allows you to choose in which direction the deformation will be
animated. You can either choose one of these directions (X, Y or Z) or one of
their combinations.
X
The deformation will only be in the X direction. If you have a mode shape of Y
and Z direction, you will see that the deformation is 0.
Y
The deformation will only be in the Y direction. If you have a mode shape of X
Z
The deformation will only be Z direction. If you have a mode shape of X and Y

direction, you will see that the deformation is 0.
Section 3.7.2.2.18 Edit Color Scale...

This entry allows you to adjust the color scale of the color displayed. It
schedules a dialog where you can select the spectrum type (Temperature,
Magenta, Gray Scale, Hue, Hue Scale, Abaqus, Ansys, Patran and Rainbow)
and the number of colors.
Note: For some spectra, the number of colors cannot be modified.
Section 3.7.2.2.19 Show Color Scale

This shows the color map of the defined color scale in the geometry display.
Section 3.7.2.2.20 Color Format

The entry in this menu determines the format in which the results are displayed.
Remember that a vector quantity must first be transformed to a scalar using the
Vector transform option. A result can be animated through a cycle by
multiplying it with a cosine function.
Real
The real part of the result is displayed as a color value.
Imaginary
The imaginary part of the result is displayed as a color value.
Ampl/Phase
The color animation is often used to visualize acoustic data, like sound
intensities. The format type “Amplitude/Phase” of the color drop area in the
geometry display is used to show the data with phase information. In case of
sound intensities all vectors are in phase, except for the sign (+/- 180 degrees).
So, for showing sound intensities with sign information, the “Amplitude/Phase”
format of the color animation is to be used (together with the “Arrow” type).
Amplitude
The color at a particular node is proportional to the amplitude of the
corresponding result.
Absolute
Same as Amplitude but all values are shown as positive.
Phase
The color at a particular node is proportional to the phase of the corresponding
result.
Rev 12A 167

Amplitude/dB Real/dB Imag/dB

The particular aspect of the result is displayed on a dB scale. Animation is not
possible.
Section 3.7.2.2.21 Color Interpolation

This option is used to interpret the visual color animation with either the
“Banded” or the “Smooth” option.
Banded
Colors are interpolated in the discrete domain of the color map, every color
shown will be in the color map and the result is that you see discrete bands of
colors.
Smooth
Colors are smoothly interpolated in the RGB domain.
Isolines
Colors are interpolated in the discrete domain of the color map as is the case
with the Banded option. However, not the color bands themselves are shown
but the color lines at the borders of these bands.
Section 3.7.2.2.22 Color Vector Transform

This option is used to transform a vector into a scalar value. It will either have
the value “length” derived from the components in the three directions [ (x2 +
y2 + z2)] or just the value of a single component.
Section 3.7.2.2.23 Edit Arrows Scale...

This entry allows you to adjust the scale of the arrows displayed. A dialog
appears in which you can choose to use a relative or an absolute deformation
scale.
When you choose a relative deformation scale, you can drag a slider to increase
or decrease the scaling factor applied to the current mode shape. The
deformation scale is always relative to the model and the current mode.
When you choose an absolute deformation scale, you have 2 options:

 Per m model: this is still actually a 'relative' scale. The scale is kept fixed
relative to the model. If you zoom in on the model or resize the workbook,
this value is kept the same. The deformation will always stay the same
relative to the model.
 Per cm screen: this is an absolute value compared to the screen. The value
you supply here (X) means that a deformation of 1 cm on your screen
corresponds to amplitude of X in the mode shape. The deformation scale
you can display on the screen is related to this. A distance is shown on the
screen and the corresponding amplitude of the mode shape.
Note: The relation between the distance shown on the screen and amplitude of
the mode shape is correct, but the relation between the arrow scale shown in
the display and the absolute value you enter per cm screen is not exact. It is
impossible to make this absolute exact.
3.7.2.2.23.1 Link
If you use Left/Right or Upper/Lower geometry, this option will be available.
Use the “Absolute” arrow scale, check the “Link” check box, the arrow scale of
the Left or Upper will be the same as the one of the Right or Lower. When you
change the deformation scale for the Left or Upper, the one of the Right or
Lower will be adapted automatically.
Section 3.7.2.2.24 Show Arrows Scale

This shows the arrows scale in the geometry display.
Section 3.7.2.2.25 Arrows Format

The entry in this menu determines the format in which the results are displayed.
A result can be animated through a cycle by multiplying it with a cosine
function.
Real
The real part of the result is displayed as an arrow with a certain size and
direction.
Imaginary
The imaginary part of the result is displayed as a arrow with a certain size and
direction.
Amplitude/Phase
The arrows animation is often used to visualize acoustic data, like sound
intensities. The format type “Amplitude/Phase” of the arrows drop area in the
geometry display is used to show the data with phase information. In case of
sound intensities all vectors are in phase, except for the sign (+/- 180 degrees).
So, for showing sound intensities with sign information, the “Amplitude/Phase”
format of the arrows animation is to be used (together with the “Arrow” type).
Rev 12A 169

Amplitude
The color at a particular node is proportional to the amplitude of the
corresponding result.
Absolute
Same as Amplitude but all values are shown as positive.
Phase
The color at a particular node is proportional to the phase of the corresponding
result.
Amplitude/dB Real/dB Imag/dB

The particular aspect of the result is displayed on a dB scale. Animation is not
possible.
Section 3.7.2.2.26 Arrows Scalar Transform

If you drop a scalar rather than a vector quantity into the display, then it will be
converted to a vector, in the direction selected from this menu and with its
scalar value as the length. Each of the directions is shown in the top right corner
of the display.
Section 3.7.2.2.27 Arrows Directions

This entry allows you to choose in which direction the deformation will be
animated. You can either choose one of these directions (X, Y or Z) or one of
their combinations.
X
The deformation will only be in the X direction. If you have a mode shape of Y
Y
The deformation will only be in the Y direction. If you have a mode shape of X
Z
The deformation will only be Z direction. If you have a mode shape of X and Y
direction, you will see that the deformation is 0.
Section 3.7.2.2.28 Edit Arrow Limits

The arrow limits can be set in free or fixed mode. In case of fixed mode, the
user has to specify the lower and upper limits.
Section 3.7.2.2.29 Nodal Lines Properties

This entry allows you to adjust the Nodal Line Properties of the deformed main

model and the overlaid model, if available.
Adjustable options are the Line Color, Line Style and Line Thickness.
Press the default button to reset al values to their original ones.
Section 3.7.2.2.30 Nodal Lines Format

The entry in this menu determines the format in which the nodal lines are
displayed: Real, Imaginary, Amplitude/Phase, or Amplitude (default).
Section 3.7.2.2.31 Nodal Lines Directions

This entry allows you to choose for which direction the nodal lines will be
displayed. You must choose one of these directions (X, Y, or Z).
Section 3.7.2.2.32 Fit Model

This resizes the model, so that it fits comfortably into the display window. This
operation has no effect on the particular view of the model or the deformation.
Section 3.7.2.2.33 Views

The options in this menu allow you to view the model along one of the major
axes. These are illustrated in the figure below.
Model with three axes
Default
This shows the default view of the model as shown in the figure above.
XY
This shows the top view of the model, looking at it from the positive Z
direction, with the positive Y axis horizontal and the positive X axis vertical.
Rev 12A 171

XY view of the model
YZ
This shows the end view of the model, looking at it from the positive X
direction, with the positive Y axis horizontal and the positive Z axis vertical.
YZ view of the model
ZX
This shows the side view of the model, looking at it in same direction as the
positive Y direction, with the positive X axis horizontal and the positive Z axis
vertical.
ZX view of the model
Sound maps
This view menu is used to tune the animation settings for displaying acoustic
data:

 Sound intensity data: interpolated color display in dB format and arrows

 Sound pressure and sound power data: interpolated color display.
Mode shape animation

This view menu is used to tune the animation settings for displaying mode
shapes:
 Deformation display in Amplitude/Phase format.
Section 3.7.2.2.34 Visual Extensions

The entries in this menu provide a number of facilities to improve the
visualization of the model.
ZX / XY /YZ Plane
These options display the corresponding plane of the global axis system of the
model. Each plane extends symmetrically around the model.
Bounding Box
This option draws a box in which the model fits completely.
Origin
Toggles the display of an axis triad depicting the model origin.
Show all
This switches all the visual extensions “on”.
Show none
This switches all the visual extensions “off”.
Section 3.7.2.2.35 Pre-fix Node - Name with Component

Check this option “on” when you want the node name to be shown in the
component:node format, for example, ROOF:67. If this option is “off”, you will
only see “67”. This option is used only when the toggle of node name of the
model is “on”.
Section 3.7.2.2.36 Use Component Visualization

Components are shown in distinctive colors to identify them. This option
enables you to use the defined components visualization. If this option is not
checked, all the components are shown in the geometry display. Click on the
“Component Visualization...” option for defining the components that you want
to see in the display.
Section 3.7.2.2.37 Component Visualization...

Components are shown in distinctive colors to identify them. This option
Rev 12A 173

enables you to remove components from the display completely.
Click on the “Component Visualization...”, the “Component Visualization”

dialog will popup and list all the components contained in the model.
To make components visible, check the “visibility” checkbox. This component

will become invisible if the checkbox is unchecked.
To move components along an axis (either X, Y or Z), define the distance that
you want to move the component.
If you want to define different ways of viewing the geometry, you can use
“Preset”. Change the visibility and/or translation of the components, then push
the Add button, and a dialog will popup and you can define the name of the
“Preset”. The available “Preset” will be shown in the Preset list, then select one
of them, push the Use button, and the defined preset will be used.
Note: The preset information is not related to the geometry, the presets are
stored as configuration information.
Pushing the Defaults button returns the selection to the default selection, that is
all the components are visible.
Section 3.7.2.2.38 Display size

Maximize
This option causes the geometry window in which you are working to fill the
entire desktop space. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Restore
This option can be used after the Maximize operations to restore the active
geometry window to its rightful size within the worksheet.
Section 3.7.2.2.39 Copy To Clipboard

Copies the current picture to the clipboard so that it can be pasted elsewhere as
a graphical object.
Section 3.7.2.2.40 Export To Video...

This enables you to export a moving image of the animation cycle to a video
(.avi) file. A dialog is scheduled in which the name and the location of the file
are to be defined. If the animation is running, then the complete cycle (360°) is
recorded, starting at the beginning (0°). If the animation is not activated, then it
is started for the recording.
Section 3.7.2.2.41 Options...

This schedules a dialog in which the appearances of different features of the

geometry display are set. 3D Display options can be set by first clicking on the
required tab, defining the settings and then clicking on OK to view the results.
3.7.2.2.41.1 Background
The options here define the background appearance.
Top color
The color at the top of the geometry display.
Bottom color
The color at the bottom of the geometry display.
Text annotation color

The color of the text of the geometry display.
Lighting
Enables or disables Lighting in the background.
Alpha Blended Transparency

Enables or disables the Alpha Blended Transparency.
3.7.2.2.41.2 Visual Extensions
The options here define the visual extension appearances.
Bounding Box
Bounding box is a box surrounding the model, it can be transparent or outline.
A different color can be used for the bounding box.
Planes
The color and the appearance of each plane (XZ, XY and YZ) can be defined
individually. The plane can either be solid, transparent or grid. If you use grid,
then you can define the density of the grid by using the slider.
3.7.2.2.41.3 Marker
The options here define the marker appearance. A different marker appearance
can be used for the deformed model and the undeformed model.
Type
Box, sphere, hourglass etc. are the different marker types.
Size
The size of the markers can be defined by moving the slider.
3.7.2.2.41.4 Models
The options here define the model appearance. A different model appearance
can be used for the deformed model and the undeformed model.
Rev 12A 175

Shade color
If a surface does not belong to a specific component, the shade color will be
applied to that surface in the model.
Note: A surface created with nodes coming from different components does
not belong to a specific component.
Line color, style, and thickness

If a line does not belong to a specific component, the line color will be applied
to that line in the model. Defining the line style will affect the appearance of all
the lines in the model, also of the lines belonging to a specific component.
Note: A line between 2 nodes coming from 2 different components does not
belong to a specific component. When animating a main and an overlaid
mode, the component coloring is switched off for all the lines and surfaces.
Arrow color and style

The color and the style of the arrows can be specified.
3.7.2.2.41.5 Modifications
Modification Tab is only useful when there is modification (see LMS
Modification Prediction).
Scale Factor
The slider defines the size of the modifications.
Relate Size to Magnitude

The modifications can be drawn with respect to the magnitude of mass, stiffness
and damping defined in the dialog. If the modification is defined with more than
one of these values, the order as shown in the dialog will be used.
Section 3.7.2.2.42 Legend

The first line of the geometry legend is fixed: ‘Mode X: frequency, damping,
mode description’, where X is the number of the mode.
Section 3.7.2.2.43 Legend Options

The second line of the geometry legend can be customized by the user.
Show Favorites
Show your favorite properties if selected and if you have already defined your
favorite properties.
Origin
Here you can select the origin where you wish to select the properties you wish

to add to the legend.
Type
Here you can select the type of properties you wish to use in the legend.
Available List
This list shows all available properties.
Selected List
This list shows the properties you have selected for the legend.
Add to/Remove from Favorites

Use these buttons to add or remove properties from the list of Favorites.
Selection order buttons

On the right side of the dialog, there are 4 buttons which allow you modify the
order in which the properties will appear.
Section 3.8 Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays
Shortcut Action
Key For which
display
Mouse
Drag horizontally zoom in x-direction all function

displays
Drag vertically zoom in Y-direction all function

displays
Drag diagonally zoom in XY-direction all function

displays
Shift-drag horizontally pan in x-direction all function

displays
Shift-drag vertically pan in Y-direction all function

displays
Shift-drag on overview pan over x-axis upper/lowe

r -
overview
Rev 12A 177

Shift-click on overview pan over x-axis - shifts 1 upper/lowe

range forward or backward r -
overview
Shift-scrollwheel on axis scroll over axis all function

displays
Ctrl-scrollwheel on axis zoom in/out on axis all function

displays
Ctrl-drag on axis move axis position all function

displays
Ctrl-drag on splitter move splitter Bode +

between upper and lower Upper/Low
of a BODE er with 2
views
Ctrl-double click on Y-axis expand axis upper/lowe

r (with
more than
2 views)
Right-click on axis/curve/cursor/legend/de all function

axis/curve/cursor/legend/e fault popup menu displays
mpty space
Ctrl-right click (anywhere) default popup menu of the all function

display displays
Double click on axis "set fixed limits" menu all function

comes up displays
Double click on curve "adjust curve properties" all function

menu comes up displays
Double click on cursor "move to position" menu all function

comes up displays
Keyboar
d
Backspace UNDO last axis setting (up all

to 20) functions
display
Cursor keys (no curves move selected cursor all

selected) (normal interval) functions
display
Shift-cursor keys (no move selected cursor (small all

functions

curves selected) interval) display
Cursor keys (with one or move selected cursor to all

more curves selected) next/previous sample functions
display
Ctrl-cursor keys (with one move selected cursor to X axes

or more curves selected) next/previous local only
maximum
Section 3.9 Curve scrolling (prev/next on function

displays)
In the picture display panel,
the button
allows a user to show or to hide advanced curve scrolling. When clicking on it,
an extra bar appears:
making it possible to scroll over curves, currently displayed in the picture. It

only applies to 2D and 2.5D function displays (so not on geometry displays nor
on the numerical display).
You can iterate over DOF ID, channel ID, REF DOF ID and section value – in
the explanation beneath it’s indicated as the iterator.
With the buttons, you can switch to the first , the previous group ,
the previous , the next , the next group and the last group
.
A list of the possible iterator values is made, based on the location of the data.
Following rules are followed:
 All data is searched for on the folder itself or 1 folder up (in case of
Rev 12A 179

waterfalls or referenced spectra).

 Data of the same ‘type’ is identified.
 For DOF ID, only data with the same function class, the same section value
(if applicable) and the same REF DOF ID (if applicable) is taken into
account.
 For REF DOF ID, only data with the same function class and the same DOF
ID is taken into account.
 For Section values, only data with the same function class and the same
DOF ID is taken into account.
For some specific function classes, some extra properties should be equal – eg
for FRF: the estimator (if applicable), for orders: the tacho.
 If data from different locations is displayed, only the common iterator
values are taking into account.
 The blocks are ordered alphabetically by the iterator values.
 A group is defined as a number of consecutive iterator values.
When clicking on , you get an overview of this list, clearly indicating the list
of DOF IDs found for the displayed curves.

The ‘Advanced view’ shows in the rows all possible DOF IDs and in the
columns each displayed curve. The crossing shows the name of the
corresponding block for each DOF ID and curve. If multiple result blocks are
found on 1 crossing, randomly a block is picked.
You can also exclude tacho signals from this list. Raw tachos are excluded
automatically
If some blocks are missing in this schedule, this ‘iterator value’ is skipped by
the prev/next. The example beneath shows such an example for this. Channel 3
and 4 are available both for the Octave sections (first column) as for the WF,
channel 5 and 7 are only available for the WF. By consequence, it is not
possible to jump to channel 5 nor 7.
Color codes:
: currently displayed DOF ID/curve
: DOF ID/curve that can be reached with prev/next
: DOF ID – for which 1 of the displayed curves has no

corresponding data
: DOF ID – for which 1 of the displayed curves has no

corresponding data, and it is displayed. In this case, prev/next is not possible.
Rev 12A 181

Chapter 4 Software and Hardware
In This Chapter
Add-ins ...............................................................................183
SCADAS III .......................................................................195
Offline operation ................................................................203
Section 4.1 Add-ins
Section 4.1.1 Introduction
Add-ins extend the basic functionality of an application with some rather

specific functions, features or tools. In the application, add-ins provide either
extra functions to existing worksheets or new worksheets, or both.
Note: You will need to have a license for the add-in in order to include it in
an application.
You can load add-ins using the Tools Add-ins menu entry. This schedules
the Add-ins dialog that lists all the available add-ins. Each add-in has a
checkbox that you can toggle “on” or “off”. Check “on” to activate the add-in
and include it in the application or “off” (i.e. uncheck the checkbox) to
deactivate it and remove it from the application.
You can include more than one add-in at the same time in the application. By
default, the active add-ins will be saved in the application configuration files
and they will remain active when you restart the application. You can change
the default by using the Tools Options... menu entry. In the Options dialog,
use the Add-ins tab and uncheck the “Save list of active add-ins" when the
application is closed; checkbox if you do not want to save your active add-ins
when the application is closed.
Note: Although you can activate any available add-in (if you have the license
for it) in any application, not all add-ins are useful in all applications.
Some add-ins require other add-ins in order to carry out their function. If you
check “on” an add-in that requires additional add-ins then they will also be
checked “on” automatically.
If an add-in adds additional worksheets to an application, these new worksheets

will appear at the end of the workbook. This means that in the workflow bar the
Rev 12A 183

extra worksheets will always appear at the end.
You can modify the order and the visibility of the worksheets using the Tools
Workbook Configuration menu entry. This schedules the Workbook
Configuration dialog that allows you to change the worksheet order and to
select which worksheets are visible in the workbook.
Section 4.1.2 General (Desktop) add-ins
This document lists the general add-ins for Test.Lab applications.
Note: Not all the listed Add-ins are available in all workbooks.

 3D Acoustic Camera (on page 186)

 Angle Domain Processing (on page 186)
 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering (on page 186)
 Application Launcher (on page 187)
 ASAM ODS Database Export (on page 187)
 ASAM ODS Driver (on page 187)
 Audio Replay (on page 187)
 Audio Replay & Filtering (on page 187)
 Automated Reporting (on page 188)
 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection (on page 188)
 Batch Reporting (on page 188)
 Yellow button (on page 188)
 Customized Metrics Calculator (on page 188)
 Data Block Editor (see "Yellow button" on page 188)
 Data Block Processing (on page 189)
 DATX Data Driver (on page 189)
 Excel Data Driver (on page 189)
 Geometry (on page 189)
 Harmonic Removal (on page 189)
 Harmonic Tracking (on page 189)
 HD Acoustic Camera (on page 189)
 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH (on page 190)
 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension (on page 190)
 Head Data Driver (on page 190)
 Human Body Vibration (on page 190)
 Interactive Time Data (on page 190)
 MDM-plug-in (on page 190)
 Mission Synthesis (on page 190)
 Modal Analysis (on page 190)
 Modal Analysis Lite (on page 190)
 Modification Prediction (on page 190)
 Multi Reference Post Processing (on page 191)
 Nastran Data Driver (on page 191)
 nCode Data Driver (on page 191)
 Network Hub (on page 191)
 Offline RPM-Extraction (on page 191)
 Offline Sine Data Reduction (on page 191)
 OPAX (on page 191)
 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time Animation (on page 191)
 Operational Modal Analysis (on page 192)
Rev 12A 185

 Operational Modal Analysis Lite (on page 192)

 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis (on page 192)
 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite (on page 192)
 Order Tracking (on page 192)
 Parameter Locking (on page 192)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis (on page 192)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite (on page 192)
 Polytec Data Driver (on page 192)
 Principal Component Analysis (on page 193)
 Rigid Body Calculator (on page 193)
 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer (on page 193)
 SCADAS Recording (on page 193)
 Signature Data Post-Processing (on page 193)
 Signature Throughput Processing (on page 193)
 Sound Diagnosis (on page 193)
 Sound Intensity Analysis (on page 194)
 Sound Quality Metrics (on page 194)
 Tec.Manager Hub (on page 194)
 Time Data Editor – Advanced (see "Time Data Editor - Advanced" on
page 194)
 Time Data Editor – Standard (see "Time Data Editor - Standard" on page
194)
 Time Data Extraction (on page 194)
 Time Data Selection (on page 194)
 Time Data Processing (on page 194)
 Time Domain TPA (on page 195)
 Time Signal Calculator (on page 195)
 Time-Variant Frequency Analysis (on page 195)
 TPA Component Editing (on page 195)
 Transfer Path Analysis (on page 195)
 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5) (on page 195)
 Windows Automation Support (on page 195)
Section 4.1.2.1 3D Acoustic Camera

This add-in loads the post-processing sheet of 3D Acoustic Camera into a
Desktop environment.
Section 4.1.2.2 Angle Domain Processing
Section 4.1.2.3 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering

This functionality can be used in Signature acquisition and in Signature

Throughput Processing.
Octave spectra are generated by filtering the time data in octave bands and
averaging the result in the time domain. This functionality corresponds and is
consistent with the functionalities offered in RTO (Real Time Octave filtering).
You can choose to perform RTO in parallel with FS, RTO only, or FS only. A
checkbox is available for each channel group to select what processing has to be
performed.
Section 4.1.2.4 Application Launcher
Section 4.1.2.5 ASAM ODS Database Export
Section 4.1.2.6 ASAM ODS Driver

Enabling this add-in will make it possible to read and write ASAM ODS data.
This can be done in two ways:

 Reading and write ATF files (ATF classic and ATF xml)
 Connecting with an ASAM ODS server
When the add-in is loaded, ATF files that are encountered while browsing via
the “My Computer” entry point in the Data Explorer will be recognized and can
be opened for browsing and reading data.
Data blocks can be exported to a classic ATF file or an xml ATF file.
Next to this, an extra entry point will become visible in the Data Explorer:
“ASAM ODS”. Opening this entry point will result in a list of 1 or more entries,
each corresponding to an ASAM ODS server that has been configured. The
connection configuration for these servers can be done during the installation, as
well as by editing the corresponding files in the
central\Configuration\ASAM-ODS directory.
Section 4.1.2.7 Audio Replay

Audio feedback will be offered on data in displays in layouts and on data in the
Strip Chart Display panel in the Time Data Selection worksheet of the
Throughput Validation & Processing Host workbook.
Audio replay is offered on selected data in displays by means of a popup entry

('Audio replay') in the popup menu of the selected data. When this popup is
triggered, a dialog appears having simple audio control buttons and a trace list.
The Throughput Data corresponding to the selected data will be retrieved and
replayed. A double cursor appears in order to select a segment. A scrolling
cursor appears and is synchronized with the playback during replay.
Section 4.1.2.8 Audio Replay & Filtering

Audio feedback will be offered on data in displays in layouts and on data in the
Strip Chart Display panel in the Time Data Selection worksheet of the
Rev 12A 187

Throughput Validation & Processing Host workbook.
Audio replay is offered on selected data in displays by means of a popup entry

('Audio replay') in the popup menu of the selected data. When this popup is
triggered, a dialog appears having simple audio control buttons, a trace list and
a filter area. The Throughput Data corresponding to the selected data will be
retrieved and replayed. A double cursor appears in order to select a segment. A
scrolling cursor appears and is synchronized with the playback during replay.
Following online filters will be offered:
 Lowpass
 Highpass
 Bandpass
 Bandstop
 Notch
 Order
Section 4.1.2.9 Automated Reporting

Automated reporting is about the possibility to start the reporting without user
input immediately after the measurement is finished using predefined templates.
The automated reporting sheet allows you to predefine the plot formats and
mappings.
Section 4.1.2.10 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection
Section 4.1.2.11 Batch Reporting

This add-in provides a simple environment for printing large amounts of data in
an automatic way.
In this worksheet you can take in the data from any source, sort them based on
any property, load in the appropriate format and push the Print button. Formats
can go from very simple 1 display / 1 page formats to complicated
multi-page/multi-picture reports. But of course, the formats are like all standard
Test.Lab formats: based on Microsoft Office.
Section 4.1.2.12 Yellow button

 In case the measurement has not started yet: start measurement.
 In case the measurement is going on: stop measurement.
 In case the measurement has stopped and the message “Do you want to save
the current run?” pops up, reject the run.
Section 4.1.2.13 Customized Metrics Calculator
Section 4.1.2.14 Data Block Editor

With this add-in, it is possible to define new data blocks in a convenient way.
The most important header information can be defined in this worksheet, as

well as all data values. Any format of data can be defined: fixed or variable
X-axis, real or complex data, linear or dB values. On line visualization makes
the definition process easy and intuitive. Values can also be entered by simple
copy/paste from e.g. Microsoft Excel.
Section 4.1.2.15 Data Block Processing
Section 4.1.2.16 DATX Data Driver
Section 4.1.2.17 Excel Data Driver

This Driver will allow importing blocks or Waterfalls by using the Excel
format. As this format is commonly used and it is not always desired to see all
.xls-files in the navigator, this driver must be loaded as Add-in.
Within Test.Lab one can copy from within a display the values of blocks or
Waterfalls onto the clipboard. These values can be pasted into an Excel sheet.
Each sheet in the Excel file will be shown as a folder in the Test.Lab Navigator
which has the name of the sheet. Note that each sheet can contain several blocks
or one Waterfall (up to 127 spectra due to limitation of Excel).
Several data formats are supported when using the Excel Data Driver. All
following data types can be used next to each other in one sheet.
 real/imag
 ampl/phase
 dB/phase
Note: Note that only standard Test.Lab properties will be recognized when
using the Excel Data Driver. When some properties cannot be recognized,
they will be mentioned in a separate message-sheet.
Section 4.1.2.18 Geometry

This add-in helps you to define a 3D representation of the structure under test.
You can create and manipulate components, nodes, line, surfaces and slave
nodes of a complicated structure.
Section 4.1.2.19 Harmonic Removal
Section 4.1.2.20 Harmonic Tracking
Section 4.1.2.21 HD Acoustic Camera

This add-in enables the post-processing sheet of HD Acoustic Camera in
Desktop environment.
Rev 12A 189

Section 4.1.2.22 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH

This add-in enables the iNAH processing (irregular Nearfield Acoustic
Holography) in post-processing HD Acoustic Camera. iNAH quantifies sound
power and improves spatial resolution and therefore sound source localization
in the frequency range below 1000Hz. The maximum distance array-source is
30cm.
Section 4.1.2.23 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension

This add-in enables to analyze run-up run-down recordings in the
post-processing sheet of HD Acoustic Camera.
Section 4.1.2.24 Head Data Driver

This add-in allows to read/use/process Head data files from HEAD Acoustics
(*.hdf files) as any native LMS Test.Lab file. A specific “HEAD” icon is
displayed for each .hdf file in navigator.
Section 4.1.2.25 Human Body Vibration
Section 4.1.2.26 Interactive Time Data
Section 4.1.2.27 MDM-plug-in
Section 4.1.2.28 Mission Synthesis
Section 4.1.2.29 Modal Analysis

This add-in gives you the possibility to perform a modal analysis immediately
after testing a structure by using the FRFs. In this add-in, dedicated worksheets
are created for a 3-steps estimation method, and different validation tools such
as MAC and synthesis FRFs are available for validation of the modal model.
Section 4.1.2.30 Modal Analysis Lite
Section 4.1.2.31 Modification Prediction

The LMS Test.Lab Modification Prediction implements a dynamics
modification theory to predict the effect of structural modifications on a
mechanical structure's modal parameters. These modifications can take the form
of local changes to mass, damping and stiffness.
The Modification Prediction application allows you to evaluate the effect of

mass, spring-damper and tuned absorber modifications. Two minor worksheets,
List Modifications and Predict Modes, are defined in order to predict the effects
of structural modifications on a structure. The Modification Prediction
worksheet helps you to predict modes and to evaluate the result predicted for
your modifications by synthesizing FRFs and comparing the original FRFs with

the new ones.
Section 4.1.2.32 Multi Reference Post Processing
Section 4.1.2.33 Nastran Data Driver
Section 4.1.2.34 nCode Data Driver
Section 4.1.2.35 Network Hub

The Network Hub makes it possible to directly access data on remote machines
(both Unix and Windows based), without knowing the physical names of the
machine. It offers network abstraction for situations where the data that have to
be read, processed or analysed are stored on multiple computer throughout the
network.
The “Network Hub” add-in loads the Network Hub Client. When this client is
loaded, an extra entry point becomes visible in the Data Explorer, called
“Network”. When opening this entry point, a list of all available startpoints on
Network Hub Servers becomes visible. These startpoints can be defined via the
Startpoint Configuration Wizard that is available on those computers where the
Network Hub Servers are installed.
Section 4.1.2.36 Offline RPM-Extraction

This add-in allows you to extract a RPM signal from measured vibration or
acoustic signals.
The RPM-Extraction worksheet can be used in cases where it is difficult or

impossible to measure the rpm using a tacho-device. An example is the
turbo-rpm in cars that have a turbocharger.
The RPM can be saved in a run (TDF) and can then be used either for signature
throughput processing in the Time Data processing worksheet or for order
filtering in the Sound diagnosis worksheet.
Section 4.1.2.37 Offline Sine Data Reduction
Section 4.1.2.38 OPAX
Section 4.1.2.39 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time Animation

This add-in helps you to investigate the deflection shapes of structures in
operational conditions, using either time or frequency domain data. In
Animation, you can either use order and frequency section or FRFs or
crosspower information for stationary condition. In time animation, you can use
time recordings.
Rev 12A 191

Section 4.1.2.40 Operational Modal Analysis

This add-in gives you the possibility to identify a modal model in operational
conditions. Instead of using FRFs as input data, crosspowers and autopowers
are used as well.
In this add-in, dedicated worksheets are created for a 3-step estimation method,
and different tools are available for validation of the modal model.
Section 4.1.2.41 Operational Modal Analysis Lite
Section 4.1.2.42 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis
Section 4.1.2.43 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite
Section 4.1.2.44 Order Tracking
Section 4.1.2.45 Parameter Locking

To capture company specific procedures, lab supervisors can create Templates
for specific measurement procedures where all critical parameters have been
locked. This includes:
 Giving parameters a specific value
 Changing the font and color of user interface fields
 Making fields insensitive or invisible
 For each Template, a shortcut is created to launch the correct application
with the right workbook configuration. This shortcut can be put on the
desktop or distributed by E-mail to the test bench.
Section 4.1.2.46 PolyMAX Modal Analysis
Section 4.1.2.47 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite
Section 4.1.2.48 Polytec Data Driver

Enabling this add-in will make it possible to read Polytec data in Test.Lab.
When the add-in is loaded, Polytec FileAccess rev 2.7 files that are encountered
while browsing via the “My Computer” entry point in the Data Explorer will be
recognized and can be opened for browsing and reading geometry data, FRFs
and coherences.

Section 4.1.2.49 Principal Component Analysis
Section 4.1.2.50 Rigid Body Calculator
Section 4.1.2.51 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer

This data organizer will automatically organize a set of measurement functions
according to multiple conditions:
 Run id
 Point id
 Measurement direction
 Measurement function
 Runup or rundown
Data from multiple Test.Lab projects can be combined and from then on, data
interpretation becomes very straightforward. You can easily
 Fill up automatically displays
 Scroll through all measurement points or measurement functions
 Calculate the average and envelope over all runs and automatically update
all displays
 Disable a run, add another run and update the average.
When using this add-in during an acquisition in Signature or Spectral Testing,
the 2D results of the current measurement run can easily be compared with the
average and envelope of the corresponding functions in the previous runs. In the
case of wrong measurements, the user can reject the last run.
Section 4.1.2.52 SCADAS Recording

This add-in enhances the Data Explorer with specific SCADAS Recording
functionality. It allows to read the properties of SCADAS Recording template
files and SCADAS Recorder data files. The quick overview data in the
SCADAS Recording data files can be directly accessed and SCADAS
Recording data can be imported into the active project/section.
Section 4.1.2.53 Signature Data Post-Processing

In this worksheet you can calculate a whole range of functions from the
measured data.
Section 4.1.2.54 Signature Throughput Processing

This add-in enables access to the Time Data Processing worksheet for
processing time data.
Section 4.1.2.55 Sound Diagnosis

This add-in allows analyzing sounds via replay, filtering (online and offline),
Rev 12A 193

DSP processing and metric calculation.
Section 4.1.2.56 Sound Intensity Analysis

The LMS Test.Lab Acoustic Intensity Analysis module supports evaluating a
structures acoustic behavior. Visualization is done using 2D color mapping of
sound pressures or sound intensities superposed on the measurement grid.
The 2D color maps are transparent so that pictures of the test object can be
positioned in the background relative to the measurement grid. The basic
acoustic intensity data can be visualized, checked and selected in a dedicated
worksheet. Measurement meshes can be defined freely and independent of
naming conventions for measurement surfaces. Results can be exported to MS
Excel including the ISO 9614-1 field indicators.
Section 4.1.2.57 Sound Quality Metrics
Section 4.1.2.58 Tec.Manager Hub

The Tec.Manager Hub provides a deep integration between Test.Lab and
Tec.Manager. Loading this add-in, adds the following functions to the Test.Lab
Desktop and all other workbooks:
 Possibility to start the Tec.Manager client from the corresponding icon in
the Desktop toolbar Using this client, you can perform searches, and the
results of these search operations can be stored in a Tec.Manager “basket”.
 Direct loading of a Tec.Manager basket in the “Search Results” entry point
of the Data Explorer.
 Automatic registration of Test.Lab projects and their contents, in the
Tec.Manager environment, immediately after saving them from within
Test.Lab.
 Direct access to Tec.Manager HTML-based meta-info templates, for
advanced documentation of Test.Lab projects.
Section 4.1.2.59 Time Data Editor - Advanced

See Time Data Editing Functions (on page 241).
Section 4.1.2.60 Time Data Editor - Standard
Section 4.1.2.61 Time Data Extraction
Section 4.1.2.62 Time Data Selection

See The Time Data Selection worksheet.
Section 4.1.2.63 Time Data Processing

See The Time Data Processing worksheet.

Section 4.1.2.64 Time Domain TPA
Section 4.1.2.65 Time Signal Calculator

This adds the “Active Formula Set panel” in the Time Data Selection
worksheet. The Time Signal Calculator allows you to perform calculations on
time traces. It can be used as a time data pre-processor for the Signature
Throughput Processing Add-In.
Section 4.1.2.66 Time-Variant Frequency Analysis

This add-in enables access to the Time Frequency Analysis worksheet for
examining the spectral contents of a signal when this is varying in time.
Section 4.1.2.67 TPA Component Editing
Section 4.1.2.68 Transfer Path Analysis
Section 4.1.2.69 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5)

These add-ins can be configured through the file ExternalUI.ini in the
Central\Configuration directory. In this way, ActiveX programs can be loaded
in worksheets (up to 5) in order to host them in the Test.Lab user interface.
These add-ins provide up to 5 general ActiveX component hosts which may, or
may not, interact with Test.Lab.
Section 4.1.2.70 Windows Automation Support
Section 4.2 SCADAS III
The LMS Test.Lab software runs on a PC using the Windows operating system
in conjunction with the LMS SCADAS III frontend. This document contains
information relating to the frontend.
Information about the system requirements and installing the software can be
found in the Installation manual. This is available in electronic form from the
Start menu and can be accessed using Programs LMS Test.Lab 11A
Manuals Installation manual.
Section 4.2.1 The LMS SCADAS III frontend
SCADAS III is a modular and expandable system. The LMS SCADAS III
mainframe is available in a frontend version with 16 input/output slots. System
expansion up to 240 modules (960 channels) is possible by the use of one or
Rev 12A 195

more slave frames, each with 17 input/output slots.
The following hardware is supported

 SC316 main frame with processing units (see "Main frame and signal
processing units" on page 196)
 Signal conditioning units (see "Signal conditioning modules" on page
197)
 Master/Slave configuration (on page 203)
Section 4.2.2 Main frame and signal processing units
The SC316 main frame is supported by the LMS SCADAS III frontend system.
The SCADAS III system-architecture is based on a system controller or
block-processor (B-PROC) and on signal processor cards or stream processors
(S-PROCs). Each mainframe needs a block-processor, except for Master/Slave
configurations where only the master needs one. The B-PROC provides for
block operations and for communications with the host via a SCSI-interface.
Each SCADAS III input module consists of two or more cards: the S-PROC
signal processing card and one or more signal conditioning modules. An
S-PROC stream processor is a high performance circuit board used for real-time
data acquisition and digital signal processing. It includes four, 24-bit,
sigma-delta digital converters. Each S-PROC provides anti-alias filtering with
decimation and several other digital signal processing functions such as
overload detection and online data correction using the calibration factors of
gain and offset.
The characteristics of the S-PROC units supported are listed below.
Signal processing units
V!2 S-PROC S-PROC 90B,/90C/90D/91B/91D/91E

90A/92A
Max 51.2 204.8 kHz 204.8 kHz
sampling kHz
frequency
Maximum 23 92 kHz 92 kHz
bandwidth kHz
Blocksize 256-8k 256-32k
Each S-PROC is connected to one or more signal conditioning modules that are
described below.

Section 4.2.3 Signal conditioning modules
Each conditioning module includes analog overload detection with front panel
LED indication and built-in calibration to guarantee the specifications over a
long period.
A cable check is foreseen for all modules when working in ICP-mode. This
means that for any channel in ICP-mode which is not terminated by an
ICP-transducer, the red front-panel LED will light up.
The following signal processing modules are supported.
PDT
Programmable Dual Tacho
The PDT is a dual channel tachometer input used to synchronize the acquisition
with an external signal. Flexible and programmable signal conditioning supports
a variety of tacho signals. Auto-ranging input amplifiers ensure stable
acquisition of the tacho signal with changing amplitudes. The inputs can be
configured so that one input becomes an external trigger input and the other
remains a tachometer input. Switching of the input configuration is under the
full control of the software. The PDT includes a tachometer signal preview
mode. When this mode is active, two ADCs acquire both input signals for
observing the tacho signals. The PDT has its own DSP-board (D-PROC).
Programmable Dual Tacho extensions
These are only available when upgraded PDT modules are used: They provide
additional tacho parameters for:
 Detecting missing or double pulses (PulseCorrection Factor).
 Replacing exponential smoothing by a linear smoothing
(LinearSmootingFactor).
 Defining the number of interpolation points used for triggering acquisitions
(Rpm update).
PQA
Programmable Quad Amplifier
The PQA is a voltage amplifier module supporting an input range from +/- 62.5
mV to +/- 10 V and includes an ICP power supply to transducers. The PQA
includes cable check with LED indication for ICP transducers. The module has
grounded BNC connectors and provides DC and AC coupling of the input
signal. Analog A-weighting can be switched on when the module is not stacked.
PQBA
Programmable Quad Bridge Amplifier
The PQBA is a four channel module that supports strain transducers - and those
based on the same principle, such as piezoresistive or variable capacitor sensors.
Rev 12A 197

You can use full, half, and quarter bridge configurations, with bridge
completion resistors switched under full software control. Automatic bridge
nulling (to compensate for bridge unbalance) uses current injection techniques.
A voltage to current converter with a 100-mA/V conversion factor generates the

bridge calibration current. It can also provide 120 and 350 Ohm resistors as
strain gauges for bridge calibration purposes and a bridge supply voltage from
0.1 to 10 V.
PQCA
Programmable Quad Charge Amplifier
The PQCA is a charge amplifier module supporting conventional piezoelectric

transducers. It covers, over the full-scale, input ranges from +/- 25 pC to +/-
51,200 pC. Calibration signal insertion on the transducer cable allows complete
check of the measurement chain including the transducer itself. The PQCA has
Microdot input connectors.
PQDCA
Programmable Quad Differential Charge Amplifier
The PQDCA is a four-channel differential charge amplifier with an input range

from +/- 0.1 pC to +/- 13200 pC. It has a calibration check circuit to test the
sensor and sensor cable; and the charge is injected via the sensor to the input of
the amplifier.
The PQDCA is very similar to that of the PQCA module above, except that the
PQDCA has truly differential (i.e. balanced) inputs instead of single-ended
inputs.
PQFA
Programmable Quad Floating Amplifier
The PQFA is a four channel voltage amplifier with an input range from +/-100
mV to +/-10 V, and includes an ICP power supply to the transducers. The
PQFA has an ICP cable check circuit to detect an open loop in the sensor cable;
errors are indicated through a front-panel LED for optimum user feedback and
transferred to the host as well.
The overload LED indicates both analog overloads, detected at the input
amplifier as well as digital overloads detected by the signal processor board.
Built-in calibration functions plus cable checks ensure that the specifications are
maintained over an extended period. The PQFA has on-board, high-pass filters
(0-75 Hz). The floating input removes ground loops between sensors and
frontend, thus eliminating the need for isolated sensors or isolation mounting
studs. Unlike differential inputs, floating inputs support ICP sensors.
PQMA
Programmable Quad Microphone Amplifier
The PQMA is a microphone amplifier module with an input range from 62.5

mV up to 25 V. Transducer power supply includes 200 V polarization voltage,

symmetrical and asymmetrical pre-amplifier voltage supply, and an ICP supply.
Thus the PQMA supports a variety of transducers including conventional or
pre-polarized microphones with standard or high current output amplifiers or
ICP pre-amplifiers as well as ICP accelerometers and load cells. A calibration
source is available to test the complete measurement chain including the
microphone. The PQMA has on-board, cutoff frequency, high-pass filters
(0-255 Hz). The PQMA has 7-pole, LEMO connectors.
Note: The activation/de-activation of the 200 V polarisation voltage cannot be

done from the software. Four dip-switches are available on the side of the
conditioner module to select pre-polarisation on a per channel base. The
frontend needs to be turned off and the conditioner removed from the frontend
in order to change the setting of these switches.
PQTA
Programmable quad thermocouple amplifier
The PQTA is a four-channel thermocouple conditioner, suitable for handling a

wide range of thermocouple types. The PQTA inputs are cold junction
compensated and the linearization of the thermocouple curve is performed
automatically. In combination with a thermocouple, this module can measure
the temperature to an accuracy of 0.1° K.
The measurement of the temperature during a test procedure is useful, not only
to prevent the overheating of the object under test, but also to monitor the
temperature behavior under severe conditions such as a repeated engine run-up /
run-down sequence.
QDA
Quad Digital Acoustic
The QDA module is specifically designed to acquire digital audio signals from
binaural artificial heads. It supports two pairs of stereo channel inputs and HMS
data. For each pair of stereo channel inputs, the data format can be either
AES/EBU or SPDIF. The connection for the AES/EBU data format is via a
special 3-pin LEMO or cinch connector, for SPDIF, it is a 1/4" stereo jack.
The QDA accepts 16 or 24 bit digital data. Input audio sample rates are 32, 44.1
and 48 kHz with a maximum output sample rate of 51.2 kHz. Other output rates
are available by means of decimation and resampling.
QDAC
Quad Digital to Analog Converter
The QDAC is a four channel module using four bit-stream DACs with 20-bit
resolution. The maximum signal output is +/- 5 V. The QDAC supports a wide
range of applications such as general-purpose FFT analysis and modal analysis.
It also supports a variety of standard functions such as sine, random and burst
random noise, up to 20 kHz.
Rev 12A 199

QTV
Quad Torsional Vibration
The QTV is a four channel input module used to measure torsional vibrations. A
stream of encoder-pulses is converted to a fixed sampled stream of time data,
where each time sample is the instantaneous rotational speed at that time
moment.
The QTV can be described as a digital F/V convertor. A voltage input

conditioner module (100 kHz analog bandwidth, input range from 62.5mV up to
10 V) ensures accurate acquisition of the original tacho signal. Detection of
zero-crossings and calculation of RPM variations is then performed in the
digital domain by a high performance 24-bit digital signal processor. The
estimation and interpolation algorithm used for the detection of zero-crossings
ensures a very high accuracy. The maximum tacho frequency that can be
measured is 51.2 kHz. For the detection of zero-crossings the level can be
adjusted, an amount of hysteresis and a holdoff time can be specified and the
trigger slope can be set to up, down or both. A QTV channel is described in
terms of QTV parameters.
The measurements are acquired simultaneously and synchronous with the other
analog signals and are processed in the standard way (all processing functions
are supported).
The QTV channels can also be used in time mode which means that they are
used as a regular dynamic channel for measuring e.g. pressure or other
quantities.
VDAC
VibCo Digital to Analog Converter
The VDAC-II is a four-channel output module. It contains four 24-bit DAC,
with a maximal signal output of -/+ 10V. It supports continuous and burst
random, sine and swept sine up to a frequency of 20 kHz.
The four channels are:
 Status
The first channel on the VDAC-II is the "Status" channel. At this moment, the
status channel is only supported in Sine Control and Random Control.
In Sine Control the status channel will have a +5V DC output when sweeping
upwards, a -5V DC output when sweeping downwards and a 0V output when
building up, interrupted, or stopped.
In Random Control the status channel will indicate the level of the test (in dB).
The signal will be +1V DC at full level, -3dB (or 0.7079V DC) at a level of
-3dB, ...
 CLO
The second channel is the "CLO" - Constant Level Output. It is a sine wave
with the same frequency as the signal on the third connector of the VDAC-II.
This CLO is used when making parallel measurements with a Sine Reduction
application.

The CLO signal only becomes active after having pushed "Start" in the Sine
Control worksheet. Its default amplitude is 1 V. To change this amplitude,
define the environment variable “LMS_SINE_COLALEVEL” (e.g. a value of
“4.0” will change the CLO level to 4.0 V amplitude).
 1
The third connector, labelled "1", is used as output of the drive signal, and will
be connected to the amplifier of the shaker.
 2
The fourth connector, labelled "2", can be used to generate a quadrature CLO
signal (i.e. a copy of the CLO signal, but with a phase shifted over 90 degrees).
To activate this quadrature CLO, define the environment variable
“LMS_SINE_QUADRATURECOLA” and give it the value “ON”. The
amplitude of the quadrature CLO is always the same as the amplitude from the
CLO signal.
Section 4.2.4 Offline operation
When the connection with the Front-End fails during startup the following
dialog will be presented to the user with the following options:
No Front-End connection dialog
Section 4.2.4.1 Retry button

A new attempt will be made to make a connection with the Front-End. If the
user had forgotten to switch on the Front-End, this is a great moment to do so
and then push the Retry button.
Section 4.2.4.2 Work offline button

The user chooses to work offline using an existing hardware configuration.
There are 2 possibilities:
Use embedded configuration

In this case the configuration that is last saved with the project or template will
be used. This will be possible because the contents of the .cfg file will be
automatically saved inside the project or template starting from Rev 5A SL1. In
Rev 12A 201

case there is no embedded configuration present (e.g. templates and projects

made before Rev 5A SL1) it will only be possible to use an external
configuration. In this case the Use external configuration checkbox will be
checked in a read-only way.
Use external configuration

In this case a configuration has to be picked up from an external .cfg file. By
default the ScadasIII.cfg file will be selected in the Local\Configuration folder,
if present. A file dialog (see below) will open to be able to pick up a .cfg file,
which will be initially positioned in the Local\Configuration folder.
Configuration file dialog
The OK button will apply the selected choice, but Cancel will cause the
application to exit.
Additional rules are:
 When a hardware connection has been established, it will not be possible to
work offline. The 'Work offline' dialog simply will not pop up in this case.
This is done to avoid confusion about the real setup in use. If there is a need
for offline operations whilst a front-end is connected, the user can always
switch off the Front-End to do so.
 The .cfg file in the Local\Configuration file is overwritten with the
configuration that is used for starting up, either in the online or offline
scenario. The contents of the .cfg file will always be saved in the project or
template; in order to make sure both match.
 It will be possible to create and parameterize a project entirely offline,
based on a template containing an embedded hardware configuration or by
picking up an external configuration.
Help button
Last but not least there is also a Help button that opens up a help dialog with
some suggestions and that explains the dialog. The reason for this is that it is not

possible to open the Application's help when this dialog has popped up, whilst it
is likely that the user might require some assistance in this case.
Section 4.2.5 Master/Slave configuration
A master slave configuration can be set up using the SC316 frontend system as
the Master and the SC317 as the Slave system.
Note: An SC316 master frame can be used as a slave frame by selecting

position “S” for the M selector on the back of the unit. In that case, the
B-PROC is bypassed
The SC316 is equipped with a master interface for M/S operation. This master
interface is located at the rear of the instrument to preserve the number of
input/output slots. An LMS SCADAS III slave mainframe communicates via
the master/slave interface to the SC316 mainframe. Each slave rack has its own
clock and calibration module. The clocks are synchronized with the master
through a Phase Lock Loop circuit providing clock frequency synchronization
and, compensation for signal delay in the master/slave cable. This arrangement
allows master/slave cables up to 500 metres (total length) without degradation
of the phase match specifications.
Section 4.3 Offline operation
When the connection with the Front-End fails during startup the following
dialog will be presented to the user with the following options:
No Front-End connection dialog
Section 4.3.1 Retry button
A new attempt will be made to make a connection with the Front-End. If the
Rev 12A 203

user had forgotten to switch on the Front-End, this is a great moment to do so

and then push the Retry button.
Section 4.3.2 Work offline button
The user chooses to work offline using an existing hardware configuration.

There are 2 possibilities:
Use embedded configuration

In this case the configuration that is last saved with the project or template will
be used. This will be possible because the contents of the .cfg file will be
automatically saved inside the project or template starting from Rev 5A SL1. In
case there is no embedded configuration present (e.g. templates and projects
made before Rev 5A SL1) it will only be possible to use an external
configuration. In this case the Use external configuration checkbox will be
checked in a read-only way.
Use external configuration

In this case a configuration has to be picked up from an external .cfg file. By
default the ScadasIII.cfg file will be selected in the Local\Configuration folder,
if present. A file dialog (see below) will open to be able to pick up a .cfg file,
which will be initially positioned in the Local\Configuration folder.
Configuration file dialog
The OK button will apply the selected choice, but Cancel will cause the
application to exit.
Additional rules are:
 When a hardware connection has been established, it will not be possible to

work offline. The 'Work offline' dialog simply will not pop up in this case.
This is done to avoid confusion about the real setup in use. If there is a need
for offline operations whilst a front-end is connected, the user can always
switch off the Front-End to do so.
 The .cfg file in the Local\Configuration file is overwritten with the
configuration that is used for starting up, either in the online or offline
scenario. The contents of the .cfg file will always be saved in the project or
template; in order to make sure both match.
 It will be possible to create and parameterize a project entirely offline,
based on a template containing an embedded hardware configuration or by
picking up an external configuration.
Help button
Last but not least there is also a Help button that opens up a help dialog with
some suggestions and that explains the dialog. The reason for this is that it is not
possible to open the Application's help when this dialog has popped up, whilst it
is likely that the user might require some assistance in this case.
Rev 12A 205

Chapter 5 Channels
Chapter 5 Channels
In This Chapter
Channel identification characteristics.................................207
Database sources ................................................................215
Section 5.1 Channel identification characteristics
This document lists and provides information on all the measurement channel
fields and values used to define their identification.
Channel information is defined in the “Channel Setup” worksheet. The fields

that are displayed are specified using the Channel Setup Visibility editor in the
Tools menu. Here, full details on the fields are provided and the possible values
that can be entered.
These are grouped into the following categories:

 Channel definition fields
 Transducer fields (on page 210)
 Signal conditioning fields (on page 212)
 Location point definition (on page 212)
 Vibration control fields
 QTV parameters
 Tacho parameters
 Bridge Settings (on page 213)
Section 5.1.1 Channel identification fields
Section 5.1.1.1 Channel definition fields

Channel identification - Channel definition fields
Identification field Explanation

OnOff A switch to make the channel active. If on, it
will be used in the following acquisition.
ChannelId A sequential number assigned by the
software. Cannot be altered by the user.
UserChannelId A lengthy text string that can be used to
Rev 12A 207

Chapter 5 Channels

annotate a particular channel
PhysicalChannelId An identification string assigned by the
software according to the physical input
module to which the channel is connected.
E.g. Tacho1: first input on a PDT module.
This cannot be altered by the user.
ChannelGroupId The name of the measured data group to
which the channel belongs. Must be selected
from the groups that have been defined.
Reference A switch that declares this channel as a
reference channel for FRF calculation .
DynamicRange Lists the dynamic range in dB of the input
module
Range Selected input range for the channel in
electrical units.
Range EU Selected input range for the channel in
engineering units. This is derived from the
Range divided by the Actual Sensitivity.
Range Format Determines whether Range EU is listed in a
Linear, dB or Log format.
InputMode Sets the type of transducer input. Must be
selected from the available fields which will
depend on the input module. Types are
Voltage, ICP or Charge. Also defines the
AC/DC coupling.
For a PQBA module, 1/1 bridge (AC), 1/2
bridge (AC) and 1/4 bridge (AC) mode are
available.
For a PQBA II or BDS4 module, additionally
to the bridge modes, also balanced current
and dynamic strain modes are possible. The
dynamic strain mode is the same as input
mode “Balanced A, 2 wire AC” with the
difference that for the dynamic strain input
mode, the Sensitivity will be automatically
calculated with formula: sensitivity = R*I*k
with R the gage resistance, I the supply
voltage and k the strain gage factor.
For a VB8 module, all above bridgeged
modes, voltage AC, voltage DC, ICP,
potentiometer, sensor with excitation,
differential sensor with excitation, single
ended and sensor with 15V excitation **
For a DB8 module, Voltage DC,

Chapter 5 Channels

potentiometer, sen sensor with excitation,
ended and sensor with 15V excitation are
available.
For a DB8-II module, Voltage DC,
potentiometer, ICP, sensor with excitation,
ended, sensor with 15V excitation and sensor
with 15V excitation, inverted, are available.
Coupling* Defines the input coupling which must be
selected from the options that are dependent
on the frontend module.
DCOffset Defines the DC Offset applied by the tacho
module in order to achieve the trigger level
defined in Tracking Setup.
LPFilterOn If ‘On’ a low pass filter is used during
acquisition. Use the LPCutoff field to specify
the cutoff frequency. In signature
workbooks the LPFilterCharacteristics and
LPFilterOrder fields specify the filter
characteristics. In other workbooks always a
6-th order Butterworth filter is used.
LPCutoff Sets the cutoff frequency of the low-pass
filter. It can have values within the range
50Hz - 102400Hz.
LPFilterCharacteristics Specifies the type of the low-pass filter. It
can be a Butterworth or a Bessel IIR filter.
This is only available in signature
workbooks. In other workbooks always a
Butterworth filter is used.
LPFilterOrder Specifies the order of the low-pass filter. It
can have values 2,4,6,8 or 10. This is only
available in signature workbooks. In other
workbooks the order is always 6.
LPMinimumOversamplingFactor It can have the value 0 or a value greater or
equal to 2. If you specify a value different
from 0 the system will warn you when you
have specified a bandwidth in acquisition
setup that is lower than 0.5*
LPCutoff*LPMinimumOversamplingFactor.
The warning is given when arming. This is
only available in signature workbooks.
HPCutoff Sets the cutoff frequency of the high-pass
filter (if available).
Rev 12A 209

Chapter 5 Channels
Notes:
* With a QDA module select coupling SPDIF or AES/EBU.
** note on VB8 input modes:
Sensor with excitation, differential: this input should be used for sensors that
are internally composed of a full bridge and require a power supply. The
sensitivity of this sensor is dependent on the supply voltage.
Sensor with excitation, single ended: this input should be used for sensors
that are internally composed of a half bridge and require a power supply. The
sensitivity of this sensor is dependent on the supply voltage.
Sensor with 15V excitation: this input should be used for sensors that require
a power supply. The sensitivity of this sensor is independent on the supply
voltage.
For more information on how to connect these sensors please refer to:
hq-srv28.lmsintl.com:700/share/html%20pages/TL/Theory%20Signature/421
87.htm#o42204
Section 5.1.1.2 Transducer fields

Channel identification - Transducer fields
Transducer The name of the company that manufactured the

Manufacturer transducer.
Transducer Type Defines whether the transducer is an accelerometer, a
microphone, or some other type.
Serial number Serial number of the transducer.
Transducer User-defined description of the transducer.
Description
Actual sensitivity The sensitivity is the electrical output per measured unit
(Electrical unit/EU). The actual value is the value as
determined by a calibration procedure and is the value
that will be used for the measurements.
Actual sensitivity This is the unit used to describe the actual sensitivity

Chapter 5 Channels
unit value e.g. mV/g or mV/(m/s2).

Calibration factor This is the output in engineering units per measured
electrical unit (EU/Electrical). The value is coupled with
the Actual Sensitivity value.
Calibration factor This is the unit used to describe the Calibration factor
unit e.g. g/mV or (m/s2)/mV.
Nominal sensitivity The manufacturer supplies the nominal value for the
transducer. This value is used to set initial ranges for the
calibration procedure and as a check that the measured
value is good.
Nominal sensitivity This is the unit used to describe the nominal sensitivity
unit value e.g. mV/g.
Offset The value of the offset of the transducer (electrical
output when load = 0) as determined by a calibration
procedure.
Offset unit The unit for the offset e.g. mV.
Offset zeroing In this field you can define the offset zeroing strategy:
 Never: by default, the offset of this channel will not
be changed during zeroing
 Once: the offset of this channel will be changed
during zeroing in the Acquisition Setup sheet, but
not in the Measure sheet.
 Always: the offset of this channel will be changed
during zeroing in the Acquisition Setup sheet and in
the Measure sheet
Due for calibration Date when the transducer should be calibrated again e.g.
on Wed Jan 02 2005 or 2005-01-08 01:00:00 or 01/20/05
(MM/DD/YY).
Calibration valid for Number of days that the calibration value is valid for.
Electrical unit The measured electrical unit.
Measured Quantity Specifies the physical quantity measured by the
transducer.(*)
Polarity Can be either a positive (+) or negative (-) sign.
(*) The fixed list of measured quantities can be extended, if wanted. Add the
extra quantities in the TransducerQuantities.txt file in the local GridFilters
directory.
Rev 12A 211

Chapter 5 Channels
Section 5.1.1.3 Signal conditioning fields

Channel identification - Signal conditioning fields

Pre-weighting* Pre-weighting applied by conditioning unit.
Default weighting is Linear.
FrontEndWeighting** Weighting applied by the frontend.
TimeIntegration Integration of time data applied by the
frontend. Available options are None, Single
or Double integration. Not available in
SignatureRealTime acquisition workbooks
TimeTransformation Only available in the HighSpeedRecording
workbook. When switched on, it allows to
show acceleration data in velocity and/or
displacement format in the
HighSpeedMonitoring workbook.
Pre-gain1 Calibration, Preamplifier gain set by conditioning unit that
Pre-gain2 Calibration is used during calibration.
Gain format Defines whether the pre-gain is expressed as a
multiplication factor (linear) or in dB.
* With PRE-weighting, an external device weights the incoming signals before

being acquired and no weighting is applied by the software.
In the Pre-weighting field you can describe the weighting filter that was applied.
In this way, this filter will form part of the properties of the acquired data
blocks.
** In the case of FRONTEND weighting, then analog A weighting is used for

the PQA modules, and digital A weighting can be used on the S-PROC DSP for
the PQMA and PQCA modules. Digital A weighting can only be used if the
ADC bandwidth of the frontend is set to 25,600 kHz. In Signature applications,
the default ADC bandwidth is set to 51,200 kHz. It can be changed in the
Acquisition Setup worksheet > Acquisition parameters > More... dialog
box.
The weighting filter, applied to a datablock forms part of the properties

describing that block.
Section 5.1.1.4 Location point definition

Channel identification - Location point definition

Point A field in which you can describe the point on
the structure under test where the transducer is
located. This can be in a number of formats:

Chapter 5 Channels

free, geometry, etc. The standard geometry
format is "comp:node", where "comp" is the
name of the component (to which the node
belongs) and "node" is the name of the node
(often a number). Default value is PointX
where X is a sequential number.
Direction Measurement direction for the point. Can be
selected from the options in the dropdown
menu.
Section 5.1.1.5 Bridge Settings

Channel identification - Bridge Settings

BridgeSupply Defines the bridge supply voltage.
Relates the relative resistance change of the strain
StrainGaugeFactor (*)
gauge to the strain produced in the strain gauge.
This field determines whether the supply sense
ExternalSense lines are used or not or whether an external shunt
resistance is used for the shunt calibration.
This field determines whether the shunt sense line
ShuntWire is used or not. Check the checkbox on if you want
to use the shunt sense line.
This field determines which resistance is used for
ShuntResistance
shunt calibration.
In this field you can determine which branch of the
bridge sensor the shunt resistor is placed on during
ShuntBranch shunt calibration. An illustration of which number
corresponds to each branch is shown in the Bridge
Type Illustration panel.
This field determines the current that is injected
into the bridge to make it balanced. This is
Bridge Balancing
determined by the bridge nulling process and can
be edited by the user.
This field determines the lead resistance of the
bridge sensor and it is determined by Calibration
by current-injection process.
Bridge Lead Resistance For shunt calibration, you can add the lead wire
resistance of 1 lead wire. The actual number of
lead wires will be taken into account and the total
lead wire resistance of the bridge will be
compensated for.
Rev 12A 213

Chapter 5 Channels
This field determines the resistance of the strain

gage.
For a PQBA or PQBA-II module, this is only
Bridge Gage Resistance
sensitive in case ¼ bridge is used. In this case, you
can select 120 Ω or 350 Ω.
For the VB8, you can type any value.
This field determines the sign of the sensitivity.
Polarity This field is only sensitive for a module that
supports shunt calibration (PQBA II, VB8).
Bridge Factor This factor is a scale factor that is calculated when
calibration by current injection is done for a PQBA
or PQBAII module. This scale factor is
proportional to the sensitivity.
This field determines the sign of the sensitivity. This field is only sensitive for a
module that supports shunt calibration (PQBA II, VB8).(*)
StrainGaugeFactor
where
 = resistance change of strain gauge
 R = nominal gauge resistance
 G = strain gauge factor
Section 5.1.1.6 Microphone settings (M4 , VM8 module)

Channel identification - microphone parameters
Polarization The polarization voltage is either 0V

or 200V. A 200V DC polarization
voltage is commonly required for high
precision microphones.
Power Supply The preamplifier supply voltage is 28V

or 0V when not applicable .

Chapter 5 Channels
Section 5.2 Database sources
Section 5.2.1 Introduction
This document describes the types of database that can be used to store channel
information. In addition, it details the information such databases require to
have, to act as a source of input for the channel identification fields in the
Channel Setup worksheet.
It contains the following:

 A description of the channel identification fields that are grouped together
as channel group field definitions (on page 215).
 A list of the database types for making ODBC databases (see "ODBC
databases as an input source for Channel Setup" on page 218) that can be
used as a source of input for the channel fields.
 A procedure to create a database source (see "[Procedure] To create a
database source that can be used for import into the channel setup" on
page 218) and to make it available for use in the Channel Setup worksheet.
There are three types of databases that can be used as a source for the
identification of a particular channel group. These database types and channel
groups are termed transducer, measurement point and signal conditioner. Each
one contains a different set of fields for the complete channel identification.
Section 5.2.2 Channel group field definitions
There are three groups of channel identification fields. These are

 Transducer (see "Transducer identification fields" on page 215)
 Measurement point (see "Measurement point identification fields" on
page 217)
 Signal Conditioner (see "Signal conditioner identification fields" on page
217)
Each group of channel identification fields is included in a separate database.
Section 5.2.2.1 Transducer identification fields

The following fields could be included in a “transducer” database.
Rev 12A 215

Chapter 5 Channels
Transducer - Channel identification fields
Identification Field Meaning Required

Manufacturer The name of the company
that manufactured the
transducer.
Type of transducer Defines whether the
transducer is an
accelerometer, a microphone,
or some other type.
Serial number Serial number of the
transducer.
Description User-defined description of
the transducer.
Measured Quantity The physical quantity that Yes
the transducer measures, e.g.
acceleration, pressure.
Nominal Sensitivity Sensitivity is the electrical
output/measured unit.
Nominal value for the
transducer is supplied by the
manufacturer.
Actual Sensitivity The actual sensitivity as Yes
determined by a calibration
process.
Sensitivity Unit Unit for the sensitivity (e.g. Yes
mV/g, g/V, mV/Pa and
Hz/mV).
Actual Offset Offset (output at zero load)
of the transducer, as
determined by a calibration
process.
Electrical Unit Electrical unit for the offset.
Offset zeroing Offset zeroing strategy
Polarity The polarity of the
transducer, which can be a
positive (+) or negative (-)
sign.
Due for calibration on The date when the transducer
should be calibrated next.
Calibration valid for Number of weeks that the
current calibration value is
valid for.
Simulated Value Value in engineering units

Chapter 5 Channels
Identification Field Meaning Required

that is simulated by the
internal shunt.
Offset zeroing Offset zeroing strategy:
Never, Once, Always
Reference Offset Reference offset value
Electrical Value Electrical value that the
sensor should read out for a
given engineering value
Engineering Value Engineering value that the
sensor should read out for a
given Electrical value
Bridge Supply Supply voltage or current for
the bridge type sensor
Input Mode Input Mode that should be
used to measure with this
sensor
Gage Resistance Resistance of 1 strain gage of
the bridge
Section 5.2.2.2 Measurement point identification fields

The following fields could be included in a “measurement point” database.
Measurement point - Channel identification fields
Identification field Explanation Required

Point id A description of the point Yes
in the structure where the
transducer is located.
Direction Measurement direction for
the point. It can be selected
from the options in the
dropdown menu. This
takes the format: sign then
axis e.g. +Z.
Section 5.2.2.3 Signal conditioner identification fields

The following fields could be included in a “signal conditioner” database.
Rev 12A 217

Chapter 5 Channels
Signal conditioner - Channel identification fields
Identification field Explanation Required

Weighting Pre-weighting applied Yes
by conditioning unit.
Default weighting is
Linear
GainX GainY Preamp gain set by Yes
conditioning unit
Gain format_X Defines whether the Yes
gain is expressed as a
multiplication factor
(linear) or in dB
Section 5.2.3 ODBC databases as an input source for Channel

Setup
The database or source file that contains the channel identification information
that you want to make available has to be defined as an ODBC Data Source.
The most commonly used sources of data are Microsoft AccessTM databases,
Microsoft ExcelTM workbooks and text files.
Section 5.2.4 [Procedure] To create a database source that can

be used for import into the channel setup
This procedure describes how to make the information in a database file

available for import into the Channel Setup worksheet.
Step 1
Choose the database type.
There are three types of databases that can be used as a source for the channel
identification. These are termed “Transducer”, “Measurement point” and
“Signal Conditioner”. Each type contains different sets of fields (see "Channel
group field definitions" on page 215) for the complete channel identification.
Step 2
Create the required file.
Typical formats in which channel information is held are: Text files, Access
databases and Excel workbooks.
 A text file is a simple means to make data available and it is the obvious
choice for making a “measurements point” data source since this only

Chapter 5 Channels
requires two fields per channel. This can be created in Notepad or Wordpad.
 For an Access database you need to have a table that contains at least the
number of required fields for the database type that you are going to create.
 An Excel worksheet or workbook can also be accessed directly.
You need to make a list of your channel information that can be used, for
example, as a transducer database. In the list, worksheet rows are the channel
data values or records and the worksheet columns are the channel id fields.
It is important that you enter your channel data so that your list is suitably
organized and formatted. You should have:
 only one list per worksheet
 all your rows with similar items in the same column
 your channel id fields (column labels or names) in the first row of the list
and formatted as text.
 no empty rows and columns if possible
 no spaces in your cells. You should indent the data within cells to format
them.
 a name for all your cells containing information, for example: 'Transducers'.
You can use numbers and capital letters in the name but you must have no
spaces. Separate words with an underscore (_).
To name your data cells, after entering all your data into the Excel worksheet,
select them all. Click the Name box at the left end of the formula bar. Type the
name for your cells (e.g. “Transducers”) and then press Enter.
You must use this name for your data as the ODBC data source name to access
your data when you use the Excel worksheet as a database (see "[Procedure]
To create a data source from an Excel file" on page 221).
Make sure that you include all the required fields for the database type.
Step 1
From the Start menu select Settings then Control panel, then double click on
'Administrative Tools'.
Step 2
In the Administrative Tools Panel, select 'Data Sources (ODBC)' and double
click on it to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog.
Step 3
Select the “System DSN” tab and click on Add to open the 'Create New Data
Source' dialog.
Step 4
Select the driver in the list corresponding to the data source you want to use. .
Use the 'Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb)' for an Access file and the 'Microsoft
Text Driver (*.txt)' for a text file. Click on Finish. You may wish to use the
Microsoft Excel Driver (*.xls) to define the ODBC source (see "[Procedure]
To create a data source from an Excel file" on page 221) on the system.
Step 5
Select the procedure that relates to the database source type you are using.
Rev 12A 219

Chapter 5 Channels
Note: The procedure now continues from the Channel Setup worksheet in the
Test.Lab application
Step 6
In the “Channel Setup” worksheet, click on the “Use Database” tab in the pane
header. In the Database panel, select the database type from the left drop down
menu on the top right corner of the worksheet. Select the name you just
assigned from the right drop down menu. Click Open. The information in the
database source will appear in the panel and can be inserted into the channel
setup.
Section 5.2.4.1 [Procedure] To create a data source from a text file

Step 1
Enter the name that you want to assign to the Data Source.
Step 2
In the Administrative Tools Panel, select 'Data Sources (ODBC)' and double
click on it to start the dialog. Check the “Use Current Directory” button “off”
and then click on Select Directory.
Step 3
In the dialog that appears, find the directory where the file is saved, then click
OK. Then click on OK to return to the “ODBC Data Source Administrator”
dialog.
Step 4
Click on Configure.
Step 5
In the next dialog click on Options. In the panel that opens up, click on define
Format. (You can also click the “Default” button “off” and select the type of
file extension required)
Step 6
Select the file from the left hand list, then select the format (Tab Delimited)
from the format menu.
Step 7
Click on Guess.
The right hand list will then show a series of entries F1 - FX where X is the
number of fields that are in the file.
Step 8
Click on F1. In the Data Type field, first check that the value has been correctly
guessed and then, only if necessary, adjust it. Enter the name of the field in the
Name field (e.g. Transducer Manufacturer)
Step 9
Click on Modify. Then continue until all the fields have been defined.
Step 10
Click on OK to close the “Define Text Format” dialog. Then click OK to close
ODBC Text Setup dialog. Then click OK to close the “ODBC Data Source
Administrator” dialog.

Chapter 5 Channels
Step 11
If you have used CHAR as data-type for one of your columns, you have to open
the "schema.ini" file that has been created in the directory in which the .txt file
is located. In this file, there are rows with the text Col1="column name"
"column type", for example Col1=WEIGHTING FLOAT. When a column is
CHAR, this is missing in the schema.ini file and you have to type it yourself
and save the schema.ini file.
Also, if your text file contains only integer values for a field where the field
type is indicated as 'Real' in the Data Source Editor you will have to edit
schema.ini file and replace the 'INTEGER' type indications to 'FLOAT'.
Step 12
You are now ready to continue.
Section 5.2.4.2 [Procedure] To create a data source from an Access

file
Step 1
Enter the name that you wish to assign to the data source in the top field.
Step 2
Click on Select.
Step 3
In the “Select database” dialog, select the drive, the folder and the database
table, then click on OK.
Step 4
Click on OK to close the “ODBC Microsoft Access Setup” dialog, then click
OK to close the “ODBC Data Source Administrator” dialog.
Step 5
You are now ready to continue.
Section 5.2.4.3 [Procedure] To create a data source from an Excel

file
Step 1
If you have selected the Microsoft Excel Driver (*.xls) as the ODBC source that
you wish to define on the system, clicking on Finish opens the 'ODBC
Microsoft Excel Setup' dialog. Fill in the following fields as shown:
 Data Source Name: Enter exactly the name that you used when creating
the Excel data source (see "[Procedure] To create a database source that
can be used for import into the channel setup" on page 218) for all your
data cells, for example 'Transducers' .
 Description: If required, enter a brief description.
 Version: If required, using the dropdown menu, select the Excel version
that you used to make the file.
Step 2
Once you have filled in the fields, click on Select Workbook...
Step 3
Rev 12A 221

Chapter 5 Channels
In the “Select Workbook” dialog, select the drive, the folder and the Excel file
that you want to use.
Step 4
Click OK to close the “Select Workbook” dialog, then click OK to close the
“ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup” dialog and finally, click OK to close Data
Source Administrator” dialog.
Step 5
Select Data Source Editor from the LMS Test.Lab Tools menu.
Step 6
In the 'Data Source Editor' dialog, fill in the following fields as shown:
 Object type: Select from the dropdown menu which type of database you
want to use.
 Data Source name (ODBC): Enter exactly the name that you used
above when creating the ODBC data source (see "[Procedure] To create a
data source from an Excel file" on page 221) and creating the Excel data
source (see "[Procedure] To create a database source that can be used for
import into the channel setup" on page 218) for all your data cells, for
example 'Transducers'.
Alternatively just enter the first letter and hit Enter. Click on the
“Machine Data Source” tab and then select the name from the list and
click OK.
 SQL Request: Enter SELECT * FROM <name of the data source>;.
Enter exactly the name that you used above when creating the ODBC data
source (see "[Procedure] To create a data source from an Excel file" on
page 221) and creating the Excel data source (see "[Procedure] To create
a database source that can be used for import into the channel setup" on
page 218) for all your data cells.
For example with 'Transducers' as your data source name, enter
SELECT * FROM TRANSDUCERS;
Note: When the data source is created from an Access database the <name of
the data source> in the SQL Request statement should be the name of the
table in the Microsoft Access database where the information can be found.
Excel Names and SQL requests are not case sensitive and both upper
and lower case letters can be used.
Step 7
Hit the Enter key. In the “field names mapping” panel, you will see displayed
the FieldNames that belong to the database type (transducer, measurement point
or signal conditioner) that you created.
Step 8
The FieldNameLocation column will be full of question marks and the Field
Required column alongside contains either the value of 0 or 1. Fields with a 1
must be assigned a value.
Step 9

Chapter 5 Channels
Select the item in the FieldNameLocation column that you wish to define and
this activates a dropdown list
Step 10
Open the dropdown list and select the item from those (column labels or names)
in the data source file which correspond to the FieldName item that you are
defining.
Step 11
Define all the remaining FieldName items in the same manner. This does not
have to include all the rows in this list. If you cannot find a corresponding item
in the FieldNameLocation list, leave the question marks ('???') in that cell.
Note: You must specify a FieldNameLocation for all the required fields
(where FieldRequired = 1).
Step 12
Enter a name for this database in the lower “Data source name” field. This is the
name that will be available for selection in the “Channel Setup” worksheet.
Click Save.
Step 13
Click OK to close the Data Source Editor.
Section 5.2.4.4 [Procedure] To remove a data source

Step 1
Go to Control panel Administrative tools and remove the database.
Rev 12A 223

Chapter 6 Functions
Chapter 6 Functions
In This Chapter
Mode Indicator Functions ..................................................225
Modal Assurance Criterion ................................................228
Modal scaling .....................................................................228
Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) and Mean Phase Deviation (MPD) 230
Mode Over Complexity (MOV) .........................................231
Mode participation .............................................................232
Comparison of modal model ..............................................232
Decompose .........................................................................233
Synthesis of FRFs...............................................................234
Hybrid Modeling ................................................................235
Section 6.1 Mode Indicator Functions
Section 6.1.1 Definition
Mode Indicator Functions (MIFs) are frequency domain functions that exhibit
local minima at the natural frequencies of real normal modes.
The number of MIFs that can be computed for a given data set is equal to the
number of input locations that are available. The so-called primary MIF will
exhibit a local minimum at each of the structure's natural frequencies. The
secondary MIF will have local minima only in the case of repeated roots.
Depending on the number of input (reference) locations for which data is
available, higher order MIFs can be computed to determine the multiplicity of
the repeated root. So a root with a multiplicity of four will cause a minimum in
the first, second, third and fourth MIF for example.
There are several types of mode indicator functions such as multivariant,

complex, modified real, coincident, imaginary and real MIFs.
MIF types and meanings
Mif
Physical meanings Eigenvalue formulation
Type
Rmif Monophase Measure of the ratio
forced of reactive energy
modes of to active energy
Rev 12A 225

Chapter 6 Functions
vibration transmitted to the

structure during a
cycle of forced
vibration.
Mmif Looking Minimize the cost
directly for function given by
real normal the ratio of the
mode, by Euclidian norm of
minimizing the in-phase
the ratio of response vector to
out-of-phase the norm of the total
energy to response vector.
total energy
Mrmif Minimize the ratio
of the Euclidan
norm of the in-
phase response
vector to the norm
of the quadrature
response vector.
Comif
Immif
Cmif
Where:
  H  i  
 : is the (No x Ni) dynamic flexibility or the displacement FRF matrix


 : denotes the Moore-Penrose pseudoinverse
 A    HR   HR 
T
  B    HI T  HI 
 : conjugate transpose of
Indication of
Indication of
multiple
Mif undamped
undamped Advantages Disadvantages
Type natural
natural
frequency
frequency
Rmif Zero crossing Several curves Performance No assessment of

Chapter 6 Functions
with positive cross the is less mode purity;

slope frequency axes sensitive to
high damping
values;
locate mode Sensitive to
with closely rank-deficiency of
spaced FRF matrix and
frequency; noise;
Missing zero due to
poor frequency
resolution;
Mmif Dips : Troughs (dip) Good Influenced by cross -
minima of in the next performance eigenvalues effects;
the smallest smallest for high modal
eigenvalue eigenvalue density;
locate mode
with closely
spaced
frequency;
Mrmif Dips : Troughs (dip) locate mode Difficulties in
minima of in the next with closely Interpretation of dips
the smallest smallest spaced in higher order of
eigenvalue eigenvalue frequency; mifs;
Influenced by cross -
eigenvalues effects;
Comif Local dips Better than False minima occur
Immif if close even for noise free
natural measurement data;
frequency;
Immif Local peaks Performance decrease
with high modal
density;
Cmif Frequencies Complex Influenced by cross -
of local peaks mode eigenvalues effects;
indicate indicator;
damped
Evolve to a
natural
complete
frequencies;
parameter
estimation
technique;
Rev 12A 227

Chapter 6 Functions
Section 6.2 Modal Assurance Criterion
The Modal Assurance Criterion expresses a degree of confidence for this

calculation:
where
 is the weighting matrix (most often the unity matrix).

If a linear relationship exists between the two complex vectors X and Y, the
MAC value will be near to one. If they are linearly independent, the MAC value
will be small (near zero).
In a more general way, the MAC concept can be applied on two arbitrary
complex vectors. This is useful in comparing two arbitrary scaled mode shape
vectors since similar mode shapes have a high MAC value.
Modal Assurance Criterion values can be used to compare two modal models
obtained from two different modal parameter estimation processes on the same
test data for example or to investigate the validity of the estimated modes within
the same modal model. The MAC between two mode shape vectors, and
, is defined as:
When comparing mode shapes, the MAC values for corresponding modes
should be closed to 100 %.
Section 6.3 Modal scaling
The residue between location and for mode can be written as the
product of a scaling factor (which is independent of the location) and the
modal vector components in both locations. If the structure is proportionally
damped, the modal vectors of the structure are real whereas the residues are
purely imaginary. As a consequence, the scaling factor , is also purely
imaginary.

Chapter 6 Functions
This equation
can be rewritten as
where
 = the modal mass of mode
 = the damped natural frequency of mode
 = the critical damping ratio of mode

 = the undamped natural frequency of mode
At this point, it should be pointed out that the first equation contains more
parameters than the second one, i.e. one more parameter per mode. This is due
to the fact that residues are scaled quantities whereas the modal vectors are
determined within a scaling factor only. In the third equation, the modal mass
values play the role of the scaling constants. It is clear that the value of the
modal mass depends on the scaling scheme that was used to obtain the
numerical values of the modal vector amplitudes.
When the residues of a proportionally damped structure are known, the first 2
equations can be therefore used to compute the modal mass and the modal
vector amplitudes once a scaling method is proposed. Indeed residues, modal
vectors and modal mass are related by the following equation:
To compute the amplitude of one modal vector and the corresponding modal
mass from a set of residues with respect to a given input location you need
one additional equation since the set of equations that can be written for all
output locations in the form of the last equation is underdetermined. Therefore
equations in unknowns are obtained. This last equation will actually
determine the scaling of the modal vector.
Note: An eigenvector determines only a direction in the state space and has no
absolutely scaled amplitude, while a residue has a magnitude with physical
meaning.
The scaling of the eigenvectors will determine by the modal mass. Modal
stiffness is determined as the modal mass multiplied by the squared natural
frequency. Modal damping is twice the modal mass multiplied by the natural
frequency and the damping ratio.
Unity modal A
In this case, the mode shape and participation factors are scaled such that the
Rev 12A 229

Chapter 6 Functions
scaling factor is scaled to
This scaling factor is independent of the DOFs.
Unity modal mass

modal mass in the equation above is equal to 1.
Unity modal stiffness

modal stiffness is scaled to 1.
Unity component
vector is scaled to 1 where is any DOF selected by the user.
Unity maximum component

vector is scaled to 1 where is the DOF with the largest mode shape
amplitude.
Unity Length
squared norm of the vector is scaled to unity.
Residue vector
vector is scaled to 1 where is the DOF with the largest participation
factor.
Section 6.4 Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) and Mean

Phase Deviation (MPD)
For lightly or proportionally damped structures, the estimated mode shapes

should be purely normal. This means that the phase angle between two different
complex mode shape coefficients of the same mode (i.e. for two different
response stations) should either be 0º, +180º or -180º.

Chapter 6 Functions
Section 6.4.1 Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC)
An indicator called the Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) is a indicator that

checks the degree of complexity of a modes. It evaluates the linear functional
relationship between the real and the imaginary parts of the unscaled mode
shape vector. This index should be high (near 100%) for real normal modes. A
low MPC index indicates a rather complex mode, due either to local damping
elements in the tested structure or to errors in the data measurement or to
mistakes in the analysis procedure.
Section 6.4.2 Mean Phase Deviation (MPD)
Another indicator for the complexity of unscaled mode shape vectors is the
Mean Phase Deviation (MPD). This index is the statistical variance of the phase
angles for each mode shape coefficient from their mean value, and indicates the
phase scatter of a mode shape. This MPD value should be low (near 0º) for real
normal modes.
Section 6.5 Mode Over Complexity (MOV)
When a mass is added to a mechanical structure at a certain measurement point

then the damped natural frequencies for all modes will shift downwards. This
theoretical characteristic forms the basis of a criterion for the evaluation of
estimated mode shape vectors.
For each response station, the sensitivity of each natural frequency to mass
increase at that station can be calculated and should be negative. A quantity
percentage called the Mode overcomplexity Value (MOV) is defined as the
(weighted) percentage of the response stations, for which a mass addition
indeed decreases the natural frequency for a specific mode:
where
Rev 12A 231

Chapter 6 Functions
 = the weighting factor

 = 1 for unweighted calculations
 = for unweighted calculations

 = 1 if the th frequency sensitivity to a mass addition in point is
negative
 = 0 otherwise
The MOV index should be high (near 100 %) for high quality.
Physical modes should yield MOV of 100%. A low MOV value indicates a
noisy or computational mode. Such modes may appear during the estimation
process: they try to model the noise on the measured data.
Section 6.6 Mode participation
The relative importance of different modes in a certain frequency band can be

investigated using the concept of modal participation. For each mode, the sum
of all residue values for a specific reference expresses that mode's contribution
to the response.
The modal participation factor indicates the relative importance of the residues
and a high value (near 100%) indicates that the specific mode is well excited by
that specific input.
The summation over all inputs for each mode represents an evaluation of the
importance of each mode, with the highest values belonging to the most
important modes.
Section 6.7 Comparison of modal model
When you have two groups of modes representing the same modal space then
you can compare the two groups. The comparison concerns the damped
frequencies, the damping values, the modal phase collinearities (MPC) and the
MAC values of the two mode sets. This is a useful way of comparing sets of
modes generated from the same data but using different estimation techniques
for example.
The use of a MAC filter allows you to select which modes from one group are
to be compared with which modes from the other group. There are two types of
setting for the filter.
 "Maximum only" which means that each mode in model A is compared
with the mode of model B with which it has the highest correlation (MAC
value)
 "Maximum and all above threshold" means that the comparison will be

Chapter 6 Functions
extended to include all modes in mode set B that exceed a specified MAC
threshold. If "Maximum Frequency Difference" parameter is specified, only
mode pairs whose natural frequencies differ by less than this value will be
considered.
Section 6.8 Decompose
This command decomposes one set of modes into linear combinations of

another set, known as the 'basic' modes.
The decomposition into linear combinations uses the following formula
where:
 is the rth mode of the group to be decomposed
 is the ith mode of the basis group

 s is the general scaling factor
 are the scaling coefficients needed to satisfy the above equation.
The quality of the decomposition can be judged from the value of rest, which
should be small.
If one of the factors dominates, then it indicates that the mode under
consideration is primarily composed of the single basis mode corresponding to
the large factor. This could be because the vibration at that frequency is caused
by a resonance problem.
The weighting factors are a data list with one line for each mode being
decomposed and one column for each basis mode. In addition the maximum
value of ai and the rest are listed.
If the "balanced modes in active processing" is used, the basis modes can be
first scaled to unity length before the above equation is evaluated.
Rev 12A 233

Chapter 6 Functions
Section 6.9 Synthesis of FRFs
The FRFs are synthesized as follow:
where:
 is the frequency response matrix

 is the system poles for mode r
 is the mode shape r
 is the modal participation factor vector for mode r
 is the modal scale factor for mode r
 is the upper residual
 is the lower residual
FRFs are synthesized assuming reciprocity between inputs and outputs. If you
set the "Enforced Reciprocity" option "ON", and the actual modal model in
memory violates this assumption a least squares method will be used to generate
reciprocal mode shapes and modal participation factors for the FRF synthesis.
Section 6.9.1 Correlation and errors
It is also possible to obtain correlation and error values relating to the measured
and synthesized FRFs.
These values are written into the user id of the FRF when executed from an
ASM but not when the FRFs are computed using the Validation menu.
The correlation is the normalized complex product of the synthesized and

measured values.
with

Chapter 6 Functions
 Si = the complex value of the synthesized FRF at spectral line i

 Mi = the complex value of the measured FRF at spectral line i
The LS error is the least square difference normalized to the synthesized values
A listing of FRFs where the correlation is lower than a specified percentage and
which exhibit an error higher than a specified percentage will be presented.
Section 6.10 Hybrid Modeling
During a modeling calculation, like modification prediction in the modal

domain, modes are used which were found by performing a modal estimation
on a set of FRFs. Normally a frequency band is used containing a set of
deformation modes, among which the first deformation mode (the one with the
lowest frequency). Of course these deformation modes represent a modal model
which is not complete: the lower band modes and the upper band modes are
missing.
The higher band modes are represented during the modal estimation by the
upper residual terms. These upper residual terms can not directly be used during
modal synthesis calculations, they first have to be converted to static
compensation modes.
The lower band modes are in fact the rigid body modes (when the frequency
band indeed contains the first deformation mode). These rigid body modes can
be synthesized in the Rigid Body Calculator, which starts from a dedicated set
of FRFs (low frequency band, high frequency resolution, sufficient number of
excitation points spread over the structure, ...). These rigid body modes can also
be synthesized starting from the inertia parameters (which maybe are known by
the manufacturer, or maybe are the output of a FE calculation).
Section 6.10.1 Synthesize rigid body modes
The 6 rigid body modes of a “free-free” suspended structure are 3 translations

according the principle axes of inertia and 3 rotations around these axes. The
geometry information needed to calculate these rigid body modes are the mass,
the center of gravity, the orientation of the 3 principle axes of inertia and the
moments of inertia around these axes.
The frequency (default 1 Hz) and damping value (default 0.1 %) of the rigid
body modes are specified by the user. The mode shapes and the participation
factors of the rigid body modes are calculated according next formulas:
Rev 12A 235

Chapter 6 Functions
where:
ψtrans: Translational Mode Shape
m: Mass
ω: Damped frequency
where:
ψrot: Rotational Mode Shape
rX: Perpendicular distance from response DOF to axis of inertia
I: Moment of inertia
For the specified reference DOFs, next values will be used as participation
factor values (see chapter 2 (see "Data and its management" on page 37) about
the theory):
where:
Ltrans: Translational Participation Factor
where:
Lrot: Rotational Participation Factor
rF: Perpendicular distance from reference DOF to axis of inertia
These expressions are valid in the system of the principle axes of inertia. The
calculated values have first to be transformed to the global axis system and
afterwards to the nodal axis system of the DOFs involved.
Section 6.10.2 Calculate static compensation modes
The upper residual terms, found during model estimation, can be used in
modeling calculations. But only when they have been converted into static

Chapter 6 Functions
compensation modes first.
The static compensation modes can be calculated at a chosen frequency: the

values of the shapes of the static compensation modes values are adapted to this
frequency. This frequency should be significantly higher than the frequency of
the deformation modes. By default, a frequency factor 100.0 is taken which is
applied on the frequency of the upper residual terms (this is the end frequency
of the frequency band of the deformation modes):
Where:
f: Frequency Factor (= 100.0 by default)
The mode shapes can be calculated by the scaling method or the SVD method
(default).
Scaling method
The shape values of the static compensation modes can be calculated from the
shape values of the upper residual terms and the frequency:
The same result can be obtained by keeping the shape values of the residual
terms and adapting the participation factor for each residual term (which equals
1.0 in the related reference DOF, the participation factor in the other reference
DOFs is 0.0). For the kth static compensation term:
SVD method
In order to calculate the static compensation terms, a singular value
decomposition has to be applied on the upper residual term matrix:
The mode shape values of the static compensation mode are related to the left
singular vector, the singular value, and the frequency value :
The participation factor values of the static compensation mode are related to
the right singular vector, the singular value and also the frequency value :
Rev 12A 237

Chapter 6 Functions
Section 6.10.3 Creating a consistent mode set
As explained above 3 types of modal data are involved in hybrid modeling

calculations:
 deformation modes (with reference DOFs in the coupling DOFs)
 rigid body modes
 static compensation terms.
These 3 types of modal data often are inconsistent: the response DOFs in the
mode shapes and the reference DOFs in the participation factor vectors are most
of the times not the same.
When creating a mode set which contains these 3 types of modal data, we have
to deal with this inconsistency.
Inconsistent response DOFs

There are two options to make the response DOFs consistent:
 Keep only shared response DOFs
This option is the default. Only the shared response DOFs are kept when modes
(from different mode sets) are put together in one new mode set.
 Assume zero mode shape values in missing response DOFs
This option makes the mode shape values in the missing response DOFs zero.
Inconsistent reference DOFs

Each mode needs to have participation factor values for all reference DOFs
occurring in all modes of the mode set. The missing participation factor values
are calculated using the reciprocity of the modal model: the modes are scaled to
Unity Modal A and the missing participation factors can take over the mode
shape values (in the corresponding response DOFs). The reciprocal scale factor
Qk to scale the modes to Unity Modal A can be calculated in different ways.
In case of one single participation factor Lk (one driving point for mode k):
In case of multiple driving points, two advanced options are available to scale
the modes:

Chapter 6 Functions
 Least squares
This the default option. In case of multiple participation factors Ljk for mode k,
an over-determined set of equations has to be solved in a Least Squares sense:
Two selection criteria should are available:

1. The participation factors for which the driving point residue has not a
negative imaginary part should be skipped.
This selection criterion is default on.
2. In case of more than 2 references: participation factors for which the
reciprocal scale factor Qk (=Lk/ψk) deviates too much from the average
value should be skipped: the difference with the average should be
smaller than 2 times the standard deviation.
This selection criterion is default off.
 Maximum Driving Point Residue
Only the mode shape and the participation factor in the maximum driving point
are used (see case of single participation factor).
Rev 12A 239

Chapter 7 Processing
In This Chapter
Time Data Editing Functions .............................................241
Basic processing .................................................................252
Data Calculator Functions ..................................................254
Section 7.1 Time Data Editing Functions
These functions can be evaluated in the Time data selection worksheet. They
make it possible to edit and modify segments of a channel. You need to have
included the Time Data Editing or the Time signal calculator Add-in.
You can apply the time data editing functions interactively by clicking the
corresponding icons in the Interactive editing toolbar or use them as formula in
the time signal calculator.
For each of the functions you need to specify the channel, segment or position
on which the calculation will be performed.
The signal concatenation when cutting and modifying segments of signals is

done according to the specified fade settings.
This section provides information about each of the functions that can be
evaluated.
 Editing (on page 243)
 Cut segment (on page 243)
 Segment (keep segment) (see "Segment" on page 244)
 Insert at position (on page 244)
 Overwrite at position (on page 245)
 Append (on page 245)
 Insert delay (on page 246)
 Modify segment (on page 246)
 Smooth segment (see "Smooth_segment" on page 246)
 Replace by curve (on page 247)
 Replace by constant (on page 247)
 Offset segment (on page 248)
 Set mean of segment (on page 248)
 Scale segment (on page 249)
Rev 12A 241

 Filter segment (on page 249)

 Drift correction (on page 250)
Section 7.1.1 Channel, segment and position selection
 When applying the functions interactively from the toolbar:

Select the channel in the dataset. Click therefore on the channel name in the
channel list view or on a cell in the channel pivot view. In the strip cart display
you can select the channel by clicking on the corresponding trace.
Specify the segment on which the calculation should be performed in the cursor
and segment panel of the strip chart display. You can enter the start and end
values in the 'Segment From' and 'Segment to' input fields or select them
graphically by dragging the cursor in the display.
Clicking on a function icon in the interactive toolbar applies the function to the
selected channel(s). As a result the selected channel(s) will be replaced by the
modified one(s).
The 'Copy' or 'Cut' function allows you to place data on the clipboard. The
clipboard is where data that has been cut or copied from a channel is held. Each
time a new cut or copy operation is performed the clipboard data is overwritten.
You can use the 'Insert at position', 'Overwrite at position' or 'Append' function
to place the data on the clipboard into a channel.
Specify the position where the data will be inserted in the cursor and segment
panel of the strip chart display. You can enter the value in the ‘Cursor at' input
field or select it graphically by dragging the cursor in the display.
 When defining the function in the time signal calculator:
For each of the functions you need to use the "function" input parameter to
specify the source trace on which the calculation will be performed. Enter the
Channel id of the source trace (e.g. CH1) as is listed in the Data set table or use
the Point id or DOF id (Point Id:Direction). In the function selection dialog you
can also select the channel by clicking on the channel in the dataset.
The “segment” can be specified by any of the functions in the segment
indication group:
 SI(segment start; segment end) where <segment start> and < segment end>
are the limits of the segment specified in the units of the X-axis.
 SII(segment start; segment end) where <segment start> and < segment end>
are the limits of the segment expressed in sample numbers
 SI_SMALLER(function;value) returns all segments for which the Y-values in
the specified function are smaller than the specified value.
 SI_GREATER(function;value) returns all segments for which the Y-values in
the specified function are greater than the specified value.
 SI_SMALLER_EQUAL(function;value) returns all segments for which the
Y-values in the specified function are smaller or equal than the specified
value.

 SI_GREATER_EQUAL (function;value) returns all segments for which the

Y-values in the specified function are greater or equal than the specified
value.
These operations can be combined with the logical operators AND, OR and
XOR operators.
SI_AND returns all segments that meet the segment indication specified by
<segment1> AND <segment2>.
SI_OR returns all segments that meet the segment indication specified by
<segment1> OR <segment2>.
SI_XOR returns all segments that meet the segment indication specified by
<segment1> XOR <segment2>.
Example:
 CUT_SEGMENT(CH1;SI(5;6)) cuts the segment from 5 to 6 seconds.
 CUT_SEGMENT(CH1;SI_OR(SI_SMALLER(CH1;200);SI_GREATER(C
H1;400)) cuts all segment for which the Y-value is smaller than 200 or
greater than 200.
For the 'Append', 'Insert at position' and 'Overwrite at position' functions the
function1 input parameter specifies the source trace on which the calculation
will be performed. The function2 input parameter specifies the data that will be
appended or inserted. Use the SEGMENT function to define a segment of data.
Example:
 APPEND(CH1;CH2;1;0)
 APPEND(SEGMENT(CH1;SI(0;4.5));SEGMENT(CH1;SI(5;5.5));1;0)
Specify the Position where the data will be inserted by:
 PI(position) where the position is specified in the units of the X-axis
 PII(position) where the position is expressed in sample numbers.
Example:
 INSERT_AT_POSITION(CH1;SEGMENT(CH2;SI(4;4.5);2;0);PI(4);1;0)
Section 7.1.2 Editing
These functions make it possible to copy or cut a segment of data and to insert,
overwrite or append it into a channel. The segment function allows you to keep
a segment of a channel.
Section 7.1.2.1 Cut segment

Cuts the specified segment from the selected channel and fades the data there
where the channel is joined together. The channel becomes shorter.
Note: Please refer to Channel and segment selection (see "Channel,
Rev 12A 243

segment and position selection" on page 242) for more details.
Input parameters
The Fading type (see "Fading" on page 251) specifies the type of fading.
The Fade duration specifies the (time) period over which the fade is applied.
Example
CUT_SEGMENT(CH1;SI(5;6);1;0) cuts the segment from 5 to 6 seconds.
CUT_SEGMENT(CH1; SI_GREATER(CH1;400);1;0) cuts all segment for

which the Y-value is greater than 400.
Section 7.1.2.2 Segment

This keeps the selected segment of the selected channel. The data outside the
selected segment is removed. The channel becomes shorter. The X axis values
of the selected segment are maintained in the new channel.

If multiple segments are selected, the SEGMENT function keeps all segments
appended to each other and fades the data there where the segments are joined
together.
Input parameters
Example:
SEGMENT(CH1;SI(4;4.5);1;0.2)
SEGMENT(CH2;SI_SMALLER(CH1;3000[rpm]);2;0.03)
Section 7.1.2.3 Insert at position

This inserts the selected data into the selected channel at the specified position.
It fades the data there where the data is joined together. The length of the
channel increases.
It is essential that the data to be inserted is compatible with that in the channel
(same sample frequency and same unit).

Input parameters
Example:
INSERT_AT_POSITION(CH1;SEGMENT(CH2;SI(4;4.5);2;0);PI(4); 1; 0)
Section 7.1.2.4 Overwrite at position

Inserts the selected data into the selected channel at the specified position. The
subsequent channel values are overwritten by the values of the inserted data. It
fades the data there where the data is joined together.
It is essential that the data to be inserted is compatible with that in the channel

Input parameters
Section 7.1.2.5 Append

This appends the specified data to the selected channel. The length of the
channel increases. It fades the data there where the data is joined together.
It is essential that the data to be appended is compatible with that in the channel

Input parameters
Example
Rev 12A 245

APPEND(CH1;CH2;1; 0)
APPEND(SEGMENT(CH1;SI(0;4.5));SEGMENT(CH1;SI(5;5.5)); 1; 0)
Section 7.1.2.6 Insert delay

Inserts a segment with a specified <length> and <value> into the selected
channel at a specified position. It fades the data there where the data is joined
together.

Input parameters
The Length and the constant Value of the delay. The length is expressed in
the same unit as the X-axis of the channel.
Section 7.1.3 Modify segment
These functions modify the data values of the given segment according the
specific function and fade the borders of the segment.
Section 7.1.3.1 Smooth_segment

Applies a smoothing to the data values within the specified segment and fades
the borders of the segment.

Input parameters
Type is the smoothing method.
Step 1
Linear (lines): a linear moving average is applied. The Value is the
number of preceding samples over which the average is computed expressed in
lines
Step 2
Linear (time): a linear moving average is applied. The Value is the width
over which the moving average is computed (preceding samples) expressed in

time.
Step 3
Linear (centered): the moving average is calculated according to the
formula Sx = (Yx-1+ 2Yx +Yx+1)/4
Step 4
Exponential: an exponential averaging is applied. The Value is the
exponential ‘weighting factor’ applied to the averaging process. The weighting
factor can take values between 0 and 1. 0 implies no smoothing.
The Fading type (see "Fading" on page 251) specifies the type of fading. The
Fade duration specifies the (time) period over which the fade is applied.
Section 7.1.3.2 Replace by curve

Replaces the data values within a segment with a straight line, a half sine curve
or a cubic spline curve. The curve starts at the first data value in the segment
and ends at the last value in the segment.

Input parameters
The Method specifies the contour used for replacing the data values:
Step 1
Straight Line
Step 2
Half sine
Step 3
Cubic Spline
Section 7.1.3.3 Replace by constant

Replaces the data values within the specified segment with a constant value.

Rev 12A 247

Input parameters
The Type defines how the constant value is defined:
Step 1
User defined: The specified <Value>.
Step 2
Left value: The value of the first sample in the segment.
Step 3
Right value: The value of the last sample in the segment.
Step 4
Mean: The mean value of the segment.
Step 5
Rms: The RMS value of the segment
Step 6
Minimum: The minimum value of the segment
Step 7
Maximum: The maximum value of the segment
Section 7.1.3.4 Offset segment

This shifts the data values within the specified segment with the specified offset
<value>.
Input parameters
The Value is the offset added to the data (positive or negative).
The Fading type (see "Fading" on page 251) specifies the type of contour used
for fading. The Fade duration specifies the (time) period over which the fade
is applied.
Section 7.1.3.5 Set mean of segment

This shifts the data values within the specified segment such that they rely on
the specified mean value.

Input parameters
The Value is the mean value on which the data in the result will rely.

Section 7.1.3.6 Scale segment

Scales the data values within the specified segment by a specified amount.

Input parameters
The Type defines the scaling value to be used
Step 1
Linear scale : Value is a linear scaling factor.
Step 2
dB scale : Value is a scaling factor in dB.
Step 3
Scale to RMS : Value is the RMS value of the data values within the segment
after scaling.
Section 7.1.3.7 Filter segment

Applies a zero-phase filter to the data values within the specified segment.

Input parameters
Type is the filter type to be used
Step 1
Low pass (LP)
Step 2
High pass (HP)
Value is the cutoff frequency of the high and low pass filter in Hertz
Rev 12A 249

This applies a linear correction to the values within the specified segment. The
anchor point remains fixed. The drift point is corrected.
Input parameters
The anchor point is specified by Method:
Step 1
Anchor left, the first value of the segment
Step 2
Anchor right, the last value of the segment
The amplitude of the drift point is specified by Type and value:
Type 1: Value is the offset added to the drift point
Type 2: Value is the amplitude of the drift point after modification
Section 7.1.3.8 Drift correction

This applies a linear correction to the values within the specified segment. The
anchor point remains fixed. The drift point is corrected.
Input parameters
The anchor point is specified by Method:
Step 1
Anchor left, the first value of the segment
Step 2
Anchor right, the last value of the segment
The amplitude of the drift point is specified by Type and value:

 Type 1: Value is the offset added to the drift point
 Type 2: Value is the amplitude of the drift point after modification

Section 7.1.4 Fading
The signal concatenation when cutting and modifying segments of signals is

done according to the specified fade settings. You can use fading to obtain a
smooth transition at the borders of the segment. Fading modifies data points
over a specified time period that is centred on the borders of the segment.
The Fading type specifies the type of fading used:

Step 1
No fading
Step 2
Half-sine cross-fading: the data on either side of the discontinuity is weighted
by a cosine function. The used technique is described below.
The Fading duration specifies the (time) period over which the fade is
applied, expressed in the same unit as the X-axis of the trace. The greater the
duration, the smoother the curve becomes. If no cross-fading is applied, the
segments are joined by a vertical line.
Half-sine cross fading
Half-sine cross-fading uses the following technique

 From both signals to be concatenated at either side of the discontinuity a
piece of data with the size of half the fading duration is used.
 The data from both signals is weighted by a cosine function (over a duration
d).
 The data is added up to yield the final connecting curve.

If possible, data at either side of the discontinuity is used. This way the length
of the result remains the same. For example the cut operation reuses a piece of
Rev 12A 251

data from the 'to be removed' segment between the two valid segments.
If this is not possible (e.g. for the Append function) the data is 'crossed'. The
length of the result will then become shorter with duration equal to the cross
fade duration.
The following figure shows a cross faded cut: two different fading durations are
shown with their resulting curves, one in green and the other in yellow. The red
dashed time axis also indicates the mid-point amplitude of the selected segment.
Section 7.2 Basic processing
Section 7.2.1 Rms calculation
This section describes the ways in which rms calculations are performed for
different measurement functions. RMS stands for Root Mean Square and is a
measure of the energy in a signal.
Section 7.2.1.1 Time signals

When dealing with time samples, then a certain number of samples must be
analyzed in order to obtain a measure of the nature and the energy in the signal.
This is done by squaring values, summing them and then taking an average
(mean) to remove the influence of the number of samples. Then the square root
of the mean is taken to arrive at the rms value. So for a range of samples starting
at sample 0 and ending at sample k

Taking the example of a sine wave, of amplitude A, then the rms value is A/√2
Section 7.2.1.2 Frequency data (spectrum, autopower and

crosspower)
When dealing with frequency data the rms value is computed over a frequency
range defined by the upper and lower frequency values f1 and f2.
All lines completely within the frequency range will be included in the
calculations (Ai). When f1 and f2 coincide with spectral lines, for the lines at the
beginning and the end (A0 and Ak), half of each value is taken. The rms value is
then computed using the following formula:
When f1 and f2 do not coincide with the spectral lines as illustrated below, then a
correction factor is applied to accommodate for this. The correction factor is
proportional with the distance between the lines and f1 or f2. When f1 and f2 are
lying exactly in the middle between two spectral lines the whole values are
taken for A0 and Ak.
In addition the rms calculation makes the following corrections:

 Spectra with a peak scaling are automatically scaled to rms for the
calculations. If the data is amplitude corrected, then it is automatically
converted to energy correction using the amplitude and energy correction
factors of the time windows.
 For a spectrum that has a spectrum format that is power (an autopower
function in power format or a crosspower) the values are not squared. The
Rev 12A 253

rms value is then computed using the following formula (assuming f1 and f2
coincide with the spectral lines):
 For functions that have a quantity that is already a measure of energy

(Sound power, Sound intensity), the values of the lines are simply added.
Section 7.2.1.3 FRF, Impedance, Transmissibility and Transmittance

Rms values for these types of functions are not well defined. The Lms
interpretation for an FRF is to find the rms response when a force of amplitude
1 is applied. A force of amplitude 1 has an rms value Frms equal to
where k is the number of samples in the range.
If the rms of the response spectrum is Xrms, the rms of the FRF therefore is
Section 7.3 Data Calculator Functions
evaluated in the Active Formula Set panel (see "The Active Formula Set
panel" on page 360) of the Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet.
Many of the conditioning functions are also available in the Conditioning

toolbar. (see "Conditioning toolbar" on page 315)
 Conditioning
 Differentiation and Integration (see "Differentiation" on page 256)
 Fit (on page 257)

 Octave (on page 258)

 Reciprocal Switch (on page 258)
 SetXstart (on page 259)
 Smooth (on page 259)
 Smooth_Linear (on page 259)
 Smooth_FRF (on page 260)
 Acoustic weighting (on page 261)
 X_axis_alignment (on page 261)
 x_axis_conversion (on page 262)
 Math
 Trigonometric functions (on page 262)
 Individual functions (on page 262)
 Combined functions (see "Subtracts the specified offset from the dB of the
values of the specified function. Combined functions" on page 263)
 Metrics
 Min and Max (on page 265)
 Mean and RMS (on page 265)
 Signal
 Autopower (on page 265)
 Cepstrum (on page 266)
 Cepstrum_inverse (on page 267)
 FFT (on page 267)
 FFT_inverse (on page 267)
 Spectrum (on page 267)
 Histogram (on page 267)
 Merge spectra (on page 269)
 Merge functions (on page 269)
 Smooth FRF (on page 269)
 Examples of data calculator formulas
 General (on page 270)
 Repeat for... (on page 271)
Rev 12A 255

Section 7.3.1 Conditioning
Section 7.3.1.1 Differentiation
Section 7.3.1.1.1 Source data

Time data or frequency data. Differentiation and integration in time-domain on
time data and in frequency domain on frequency-data.
Section 7.3.1.1.2 Single/Doubledifferentiate

Performs a single/double domain differentiation of the specified function, thus
converting displacement to velocity/acceleration. In time domain is the
following calculation done: a polynomial of N order is used to fit to the first N
data points such that the point at which the derivative is required is at the center.
Second, the analytic derivatives of the fitted polynomial are then determined.
Section 7.3.1.1.3 Single/Doubleintegrate

Performs a single/double domain integration of the specified function, thus
converting velocity/acceleration to displacement.
Section 7.3.1.1.4 Input parameters

Type is the integration method.

 Type = 1: Simpson
 3-point rule: Integration is correct for low frequency components, but
increasingly overestimates at higher frequencies. In the limit, the presence
of the Nyquist frequency in the signal makes the method unstable.
 Type = 2: Trapezium
 2-point rule: Integration is correct for low frequency components, but
increasingly underestimates at higher frequencies.
 Type = 3: FourPoint
 4-point rule: Integration is correct for low frequency components (although
worse than Simpson's rule). It overestimates medium high frequencies, and
seriously underestimates the highest frequencies. It does not become
unstable.
 Type = 4: Bode
 5-point rule: Integration is correct for low frequency components (even
better than Simpson's rule). It underestimates medium low frequencies,
overestimates high frequencies, and seriously distorts the frequencies
around half the Nyquist frequency (i.e. around a quarter of the sample
frequency).
Note: Because of numerical problems, the source data should be properly

conditioned prior to integration.
This means that: DC and very low frequencies should have been removed, as
they would otherwise cause drifts. Use the DETREND_AC function to remove
trends of up to degree 6 for example. Frequencies above 1/4 of the sample
frequency should not be present to avoid over- or under-estimation by one of
the integration methods described above. Use the RESAMPLING function to
double the sample frequency for example
Section 7.3.1.2 Fit

Returns the curve fit of a function based on degree.

Any.

Degree is the degree of the polynomial being fitted to the data.
A degree of 0 will yield the DC level. A degree of 1 will yield a linear function.
Higher degrees will yield polynomial functions with the corresponding shape,
using following approximation:
Rev 12A 257

Section 7.3.1.2.3 Resulting function

Complex block.
Section 7.3.1.3 Octave

Conversion of spectra (and autopowers) to octave.

Spectra (and autopowers)

Type is the octave band.
 1 = 1/1 octave
 2 = 1/2 octave
 3 = 1/3 octave
 6 = 1/6 octave
 12 = 1/12 octave
Section 7.3.1.4 Reciprocal Switch

Returns a function in which all the properties related to the point and reference
attributes will be replaced by each other.
Note: When this formula is applied on Cada-X data, the attributes beginning
with 'primary' and 'secondary' will not be switched.
Section 7.3.1.4.1 Input Parameters

You can define whether you want to keep or change the sign of the phase.
Type 1:
The sign of the phase is not modified.
Type 2:
The sign of the phase in the function is inverted. So the result will be the
complex conjugate of the function. This can especially be useful when making
use of this formula on FRF functions.
Type 3:
The phase is shifted with 180 degrees. So the function is actually multiplied
with -1.

Section 7.3.1.5 SetXstart

Sets the X-starting position to a specified value.

Start is the specified X-start value.
Section 7.3.1.6 Smooth

Returns the smoothing of a function.
This uses the Exponential Averaging expressed by the following formula:
The smoothing is once applied in the forward direction starting from the first
value in the data block and once in the backward direction starting from the last
value in the data block.
The final result is then the average of the data smoothed in the forward and in
the backward direction.

Expfactor is the exponential factor. Weighting function between 0 and 1.0
implies no smoothing. Note that this parameter will not exist for the Linear
method.

Any.
Section 7.3.1.7 Smooth_Linear

Returns the smoothing of a function. This uses a linear smoothing algorithm.

Type =1 linear smoothing. It uses the following algorithm (except for the
first and last sample):
NewX(i) = (X(i-1)+2*X(i)+X(i+1))/4
The width is always 3.
Type = 2 linear moving averaging. It replaces each value by the average of the
specified number of preceding samples. The width is the number of samples
over which the average is computed.
Rev 12A 259


Block with the smoothed data.
Section 7.3.1.8 Smooth_FRF

Returns the smoothing of a function. It uses a linear smoothing algorithm. Two
averaging types are available.

Type =1 linear moving average. It uses the following algorithm:
NewX(i) = (X(i-1)+2*X(i)+X(i+1))/4
The width is the number of samples over which the average is computed. The
default value is 3. All positive odd numbers are supported.
Type = 2 The basic linear smoothing (linear moving average using 3 samples
in the average ) is applied repeatedly on the data, each time starting at a higher
sample and going till the end.
The width is the step in number of spectral lines
Example: block with 30 spectral lines, width = 5

- Pass 1: smooth from 0 to 29
- .............................................
This way, the values are replaced by progressively increasing smoothed values:
the low frequencies are hardly smoothed while the high frequencies are more
smoothed. The use of the linear smoothing keeps the average value OK.
Phase = 0: set phase to zero
Phase = 1: do not change phase while smoothing
Phase = 2: smooth phase too.

Type 1 can be applied on time and frequency data.
Type 2 can be used on frequency spectra only.

The smoothed data.

Section 7.3.1.9 Acoustic weighting

Applies a specified acoustic weighting to a selected function. The existing
weighting will be removed.
 Weight_A (A weighting)
Applies an acoustic A weighting to the specified function.
 Weight_B (B weighting)
Applies an acoustic B weighting to the specified function.
 Weight_C (C weighting)
Applies an acoustic C weighting to the specified function.
 Weight_linear (linear weighting)
Applies a linear weighting to the specified function.
 Weight_user (user defined weighting)
Applies an acoustic user defined weighting to the specified function.
The human ear has nonlinear, frequency dependent characteristics, which means
that the sensation of loudness cannot be perfectly described by the sound
pressure level or its spectrum. To derive the loudness level that would be
experienced from a sound pressure signal, its frequency spectrum is multiplied
by a frequency weighting function. These weighting functions are based on
experimentally determined equal loudness contours which express the loudness
sensation as a function of sound pressure level and frequency.
For a PSD or autopower function in power format, the weighting is applied

twice.

The function Weight_user requires that you specify the frequency weighting
block. Click the ‘Browse …’ button to specify this block. The weighting block
is supposed to be unit less. If it has a unit this will be disregarded by the
software.

Any.

The new-weighted version of the original data.
Section 7.3.1.10 X_axis_alignment

Interpolates non-equidistant X-axis values such that they become equidistant
with specified increment values.
Rev 12A 261

Section 7.3.1.11 X_axis_conversion

The section tracking axis will be converted to Hz or RPM, based on the section
value (relationship between order and frequency).
 X_axis_To_HZ
 X_axis_To_RPM
Section 7.3.2 Math
Section 7.3.2.1 Trigonometric functions

ACos/ASin/ATan
Computes the angles where the cosines/sines/tangents are the values of the
specified function.
Cos/Sin/Tan
Returns the cosine/sine/tangent values of the function.
Note: You can also calculate the sin/cos/tan of a scalar value in a formula e.g.
to multiply a function F(t) with * sin ( ) where is the scalar (angle) in deg.
Section 7.3.2.2 Individual functions

Abs
Converts to the absolute values for the specified function.
Conj
Returns the conjugate of the function.
Inverse
Returns the inverse of the function.
Ln
Calculates the logarithm of the specified function using the specified base value.
Log10
Calculates the logarithm of the specified function using the base value of 10.
Power
Calculates the power of the specified function with the specified power factor.

Scale
Multiplies the function by the given factor.
Sqrt
Calculates the square root value of the specified function.
Add_offset_amplitude
Adds the specified offset to the amplitude of the values of the specified
function.
Add_offset_db
Adds the specified offset to the dB values of the specified function.
Subtract_offset_amplitude
Subtracts the specified offset from the amplitude of the values of the specified
function.
Subtract_offset_db
Section 7.3.2.3 Subtracts the specified offset from the dB of the
values of the specified function. Combined functions
Average
Returns the average of the specified functions.
Enumerating them can specify the functions:

 Average(F1;F2;...;type)
Or by entering one or more ranges:
 Average(F_start:F_end;...;type)
Where type is the averaging method.
Conj_multiply
Multiplies the first function by the conjugate of the second function.
Divide
Divides the first specified function (function1) by the second (function2).
Envelope
Returns the envelope of a given range of functions.
The functions can be given by enumerating them:

 Envelope(F1;F2;...)
Rev 12A 263

 Envelope(F_start:F_end;...)
Envelope_min
Returns the minimum envelope of a given range of functions.

 ENVELOPE_MIN(F1;F2;…)
 ENVELOPE_MIN(F_start:F_end;…)
Product
Calculates the product of the specified functions. You can multiply a order by a
transfer function, to get an order vs rpm with the transfer function applied. The
required conversion of the X-axis (from rpm to Hz) before multiplication is
done automatically.
Add_blocks_amplitude
Calculates the sum of the amplitudes of the specified functions.

 ADD_BLOCKS_AMPLITUDE(F1;F2;...)
 ADD_BLOCKS_AMPLITUDE(F_start:F_end;...)
Add_blocks_db
Calculates the sum of the dB of the specified functions.

 ADD_BLOCKS_DB(F1;F2;...)
 ADD_BLOCKS_DB(F_start:F_end;...)
Subtract_blocks_amplitude
Calculates the difference of the amplitudes of the specified functions.

 SUBTRACT_BLOCKS_AMPLITUDE(F1;F2;...)
 SUBTRACT_BLOCKS_AMPLITUDE(F_start:F_end;...)
Subtract_blocks_db
Calculates the difference of the dB of the specified functions.


 SUBTRACT_BLOCKS_DB(F1;F2;...)
 SUBTRACT_BLOCKS_DB(F_start:F_end;...)
Sum
Calculates the sum of the specified functions. The functions can be given by
enumerating them:
 Sum(F1;F2;...)
 Sum(F_start:F_end;...)
Section 7.3.3 Metrics
Section 7.3.3.1 Min and Max

Returns the minimum/maximum of the function.
Section 7.3.3.2 Mean and RMS

Results in the mean/RMS value of the specified function. This can for example
be used to remove the DC value from a time function.
Example: F1-MEAN(F1)
Section 7.3.4 Signal
Section 7.3.4.1 Autopower

This computes the autopower spectrum of the selected time data in the specified
format. If the input data is an autopower function it applies a format conversion.
Source data
Time or Frequency domain data.
Input parameters
Type is the autopower format.
Rev 12A 265

 1 = Lin. (Linear)
 2 = Pow (Power)
 3 = PSD (Power Spectral Density)
Resulting function
Frequency spectrum with the specified format.
Section 7.3.4.2 Cepstrum

Cepstrum analysis is a nonlinear signal processing technique that can be used
for detecting the periodicity in a spectrum. It converts a spectrum back into a
time domain signature, which has peaks corresponding to the period of the
frequency spacings common in the spectrum.
Spectra from a rotating machine may be quite complex, containing several sets
of harmonics from rotating parts and maybe several sets of sidebands from
various modulations. The cepstrum analysis allows the detection of some kind
of a harmonic series (common frequency spacing separating the peaks or the
spacing of the harmonics and sidebands) not directly synchronized with the
shaft speed.
Note: Only works on real data.
The complex cepstrum of a signal x is calculated by finding the complex

natural logarithm of the Fourier transform of x, then the inverse Fourier
transform of the resulting sequence.
The real cepstrum of a signal x is calculated by determining the natural

logarithm of magnitude of the Fourier transform of x, then obtaining the inverse
Fourier transform of the resulting sequence.
Source data
Time block
Input parameters
Type =1: a real cepstrum is calculated (natural logarithm of 'magnitude' of the
Fourier transform of x)
Type = 2: a complex cepstrum is calculated (complex natural logarithm of the

Fourier transform of x)
Resulting function
cepstrum, time block with the same size as the source data

Section 7.3.4.3 Cepstrum_inverse
Section 7.3.4.4 FFT

Returns the frequency/order spectrum of a time/angle function.
Source data
Any (time data)
Input parameters
This is a simple FFT without user defined parameters.
Resulting function
Complex block in amplitude plus phase format.
Section 7.3.4.5 FFT_inverse

Returns the time function of a spectrum or FRF.
Section 7.3.4.6 Spectrum

This computes the spectrum of the selected time data.
Section 7.3.4.7 Histogram

The histogram is the result of a counting of the occurrence of specific signal
levels in a function. Therefore the function Y-range is divided into a number of
classes.
Let the range of a function y(n) be divided in J classes. Each class j ,j = 0...J-1,
can be characterized by an average value yj and a class increment .
Rev 12A 267

The histogram of a function y(n) can then be defined as,
Source data
Any.
Input parameters
Number of classes
The function Y-range is divided into a number of classes.
Limit definition
1 = the range is calculated from the function minimum and maximum.
2 = the range is defined by the specified lower limit and upper limit.
Type is the histogram format.
1 = Histogram: the number in each class is the count of the data points falling in
that class.
2 = Probability: the number in each class is divided by the total number of

samples and the result is expressed in %.
3 = Density: the number in each class is divided by the class width. This
provides you with results which are independent of the class width. The
probability density expresses the probability histogram normalized with
respect to the class width
This result is expressed in %.
4= Normalize: before the histogram is computed the signal mean is subtracted

from the original signal which is then divided by the standard deviation
5= Cumulative: it gives the probability (in percent) that the signal level is below
a given value.

Section 7.3.4.8 Merge spectra

This merges the specified spectra to one broadband spectrum.
The functions can be specified by enumerating them:

 MERGE_SPECTRA(F1;F2; ...;type)
 MERGE_SPECTRA(F_start:F_end;...;type)
If the two frequency ranges are overlapping the data in that frequency range that
is overlapping is averaged according to the specified averaging type:
Type = 1: Linear average
Type = 2: Power average
Type = 3: Logarithmic average
If there is a gap between the two frequency ranges the data in that frequency
range is set to 0.
Section 7.3.4.9 Merge functions
Returns functions with data of the low-frequency functions below the start
merging frequency and the data of the high-frequency functions above the end
merging frequency. In the merging range the data of low- and high frequency
functions are combined using a linear transition.
Section 7.3.4.10 Smooth FRF
Section 7.3.5 Examples of data calculator formulas
You can define a processing function (see "[Procedure] To define a

processing function" on page 352) in the Active Formula Set panel of the
Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet using either individual data items or
combinations of data items.
The output of a derived processing function is specified as an expression based

on data items, arithmetic operators and mathematical functions.
Rev 12A 269

A new function can be defined in the Active Formula Set panel (see "The
Active Formula Set panel" on page 360) by:
Section 7.3.5.1 Selecting an empty line in the table

The new formula can be typed into the edit line above the table.
Section 7.3.5.2 Selecting an empty cell

The new formula can be typed into the cell, or into the edit line above the table.
Section 7.3.5.3 Pressing the "Create New Function" icon
This will add a new formula to the table.
Note: A data item is referred to as "Fn" (function number), where n is the

index number of the data item. For example, F3 indicates the third data item
(with the index number 3) in the Data List.
Section 7.3.5.4 General

A data item is referred to as "Fn" (function number), where n is the index
number of the data item. For example, F3 indicates the third data item (with the
index number 3) in the Data List of the Data Set panel (see "The Data Set
panel" on page 357).
You can either select the required function from the list in the Select Function
dialog or you can type the formula directly in an empty formula cell or in the
formula editor above the table. To indicate a specific item in the Data List, use
the notation "Fn" (function number) , where n is the index of the specific item in
the list.
ADD
To add the second item (F2) to the fifth data item (F5) of a data list, you would
enter: F2+F5.
SUM
If you want to calculate the sum of the data items with index number 2 and 7,
you would edit the function "SUM(function ; function)" to become "SUM(F2 ;
F7)".

Note: The “;” means AND, like sum (F2 AND F7), while “:” means from...
to..., like sum (from F2 to F7).
Section 7.3.5.5 Repeat for...

If you want to calculate the formula on a range of data items, you can indicate
the range in the “Repeat for...” column of the Formula Set table in the of the
Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet.
The format for this cell is "a:b", where a is the lowest index and b the highest
index number.
Note: The notation Fx should be used in the formula to indicate that a range
of data items is used.
For example, if you want to calculate half the value of your data items starting
with the data item number 10 (F10) and ending with the data item number 16
(F16).
You would define the formula Fx/2 in the Formula column and the range 10:16
in the Repeat for... column.
Formula definition
When you now calculate the results, 7 new data items are added to the data list
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).
Rev 12A 271

Chapter 8 The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis workbook
In This Chapter
The Modal Analysis menu bar ...........................................273
The Modal Analysis button bar ..........................................306
Conditioning toolbar...........................................................315
The Documentation worksheet ...........................................322
The Data Explorer dialog ...................................................327
The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet ..........................341
The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet ....................349
The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet .......................352
The Data Block Processing worksheet ...............................371
The Modal Data Selection worksheet.................................384
The PolyMAX - Band worksheet .......................................391
The PolyMAX - Stabilization worksheet ...........................396
The PolyMax - Shapes worksheet ......................................405
The Time MDOF - Band worksheet...................................412
The Time MDOF - Stabilization worksheet .......................416
The Time MDOF - Shapes worksheet ................................426
The Modal Synthesis worksheet.........................................433
The Modal Validation - Validate worksheet ......................441
The Modal Validation - Data Handling worksheet ............455
The Multi-Run Modal - Fill Mode Mapping Table worksheet 464
The Multi-Run Modal - Merge Modes worksheet..............474
The Modal Rigid Body - Data Selection worksheet ...........483
The Modal Rigid Body - Calculate worksheet ...................489
Section 8.1 The Modal Analysis menu bar
Section 8.1.1 File
Section 8.1.1.1 New...

This opens a new project (see "Projects" on page 38). A dialog appears in
which you can select the template to be used for the new project. The template
defines the initial settings for the new project.
Select the template that you want to use and click Open. A new project with
the default name is opened. To make a new project template based on an
existing setup, save the project using the Save As Template... menu entry. The
next time the File New menu entry is selected, the new project template will
be available for selection. It is possible to change the default template (see
"[Procedure] To change the default project template" on page 39).
Rev 12A 273

Section 8.1.1.2 Open...

This option enables you to open an existing project (see "Projects" on page 38).
It schedules the “Project dialog” in which you can specify the location and the
name of the project you want to open.
Section 8.1.1.2.1 Activate section

In the selected project, you can choose the section that you want to activate.
{Default}
This activates the last opened section in the selected project.
{Create a new section...}

This creates and activates a new section in the selected project.
<Section_name> list
Use the dropdown list of available sections in the selected project in order to
activate a specific section.
Section 8.1.1.2.2 Close the current project and activate section

Check this option "on" to close the current (active) project and activate the
selected section.
Section 8.1.1.3 Close

This closes the active project. The application and any other projects will
remain open. You will be asked if you wish to save the current state of the
project before it is closed.
Section 8.1.1.4 Save

This saves the current state of the active project. Thus settings and acquired data
will be saved to the database.
Section 8.1.1.5 Save As...

This saves the current state of the active project under another name. A dialog
appears in which you can specify the name you wish to assign to the project.
At the bottom of the dialog you can choose to save your project using the pre
7A storage technology. This technology makes use of Microsoft compound
files. All 7B and newer releases will use an LMS implementation of the storage
layer. This new technology increases save and load performance of large
projects, and enhances the project stability.
When the file format will be changed, during saving, a warning message is
shown asking whether you want to convert the project or not. This is for

example the case when you want to save a 6A project in 7B using the LMS
storage technology.
When doing a ‘Save as’, a check is done for the remaining disc space. If the free
space is less than the size of the database (without data in memory) + a minimal
free space of 100MB, an error message will be given. You are expected to free
some space and retry to do the save as.The 100 MB can be changed in the
LoaderExtensions.ini file.
Section 8.1.1.6 Save As Template...

This saves the current settings of the active project as a template. A dialog
appears in which you can specify the name you wish to assign to the new
template.
Section 8.1.1.7 Save As Task Shortcut

This is only available when you have the “Parameter Locking Add-in”. It opens
the “Save As” dialog which allows you to save locked parameter settings as a
task shortcut file (.tsk).
Section 8.1.1.8 LMS Tec.Manager Project Management

In order to active the available entries in this menu, the LMS Tec.Manager
Project Management should be defined in Tools>Options>LMS Tec.Manager.
When doing so, the basic functionalities of registering a new project, checking
out and checking in will be possible.
Section 8.1.1.9 Printer Setup...

This entry schedules the “Print Setup” dialog, in which you can define the
parameters required for printing. These parameters will be used for all printing
operations.
Note: Landscape is the paper orientation setting that is advised when printing
a worksheet.
Section 8.1.1.10 Print Preview

This operation provides a preview of the current data as it will appear when
printed with the defined page setup. It can also be executed by clicking on the
Print Preview icon from the toolbar.
The working area of the desktop is filled with the print preview.
And, depending on the worksheet you are working in, a number of buttons
enable you to manipulate this view.
The following action buttons can be used:
Rev 12A 275

 Print...
This schedules the “Print” dialog from which the print job can be initiated and
closes the Print Preview function.
 Zoom in / Zoom out
Clicking on Zoom in magnifies the current view of the previewed page. This
can be continued as required. The Zoom out button decreases the
magnification to the original value.
 Close
This closes the Print Preview function and returns you to the Test.Lab desktop.
Section 8.1.1.11 Print

This operation can also be executed by clicking on the “Print” icon in the
toolbar. The print job depends on the worksheet you are working in and can be
seen using the Print preview function from this menu.
Section 8.1.1.12 Printing Options

Clicking on this opens a “Printing Options” dialog where you can set the
parameters for format based printing of your data.
Section 8.1.1.13 Most recent files...

This list shows the most recently opened project files. Click on a file to open it
again.
Section 8.1.1.14 Exit

This option closes the Test.Lab desktop and all applications that are running in
it. Confirmation will be requested if unsaved data or setups exist. The active
workbook / project can be closed using the Close entry from the File menu.
Section 8.1.2 Edit
Section 8.1.2.1 Undo

This operation undoes the last action.
Section 8.1.2.2 Cut

This option deletes a selected item from the workspace and places it on the
clipboard. This item is then available for use in other applications which will
check whether they are able to manage this type of data.

Section 8.1.2.3 Copy

This option makes a copy of a selected item and places it on the clipboard. This
item is then available for use in other applications which will check whether
they are able to manage this type of data.
Section 8.1.2.4 Paste

This operation pastes the item currently on the clipboard.

This action deletes a selected item.
Section 8.1.2.6 Select all

This action selects all items in the workspace.
Section 8.1.3 View
Section 8.1.3.1 Layout Management...

This schedules the “Layout management” dialog (see "The Layout
management dialog" on page 79) in which you can create, select or import the
display layout that you want to use for viewing data. Layouts can only be used
in those worksheets where pictures can be used.
Section 8.1.3.2 Save Picture as Layout

This saves changes you have made to the current layout in whatever worksheet
you are working. These changes will be maintained when ever that layout is
selected in the same worksheet. The dialog is only applicable for those
worksheets that use pictures based on layouts you have created as the other ones
have predefined layouts that cannot be altered.
Section 8.1.3.3 Save Picture as New Layout...

This enables you to save the current layout in a worksheet with a specific name.
Section 8.1.3.4 License Usage...

This enables you to list all the licenses that the Test.Lab application is using at
that specific moment.
Section 8.1.3.5 Toolbars

This enables you to toggle the presence of the available toolbars (standard,
Rev 12A 277

conditioning and averaging). When the mouse cursor is placed over an item in
the toolbar, it displays the function associated with that tool.
Section 8.1.3.6 Status Bar

This toggles the presence of the Status bar. The Status bar is found on the lower
edge of the application window.
Section 8.1.4 Data
Section 8.1.4.1 Data Explorer

This schedules the Data Explorer dialog that provides you with two views on
your data - a hierarchical tree view and a detail view (as in Windows Explorer)
of the data in your projects. You can drag specific data from the Explorer into a
display window and also perform certain operations on it.
A toggle at the top of the dialog allows you to select the location of your data
from a dropdown menu. You can choose between Active Project (saved data),
Online data (to be acquired) and all other directories on your computer.
There is a Parent folder button as well as Back and Forward buttons for easy
navigation and a Refresh button to refresh the browser tree when operations
are being carried out when the Data Selection dialog is open. There is also a
List All Blocks button to bring up a list of all the data blocks for a selected item
in the Tree-view panel.
Right clicking on any data entry in this dialog brings up a menu. The entries
available (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on page 327) from the popup menu
depend on the type of data selected.
Section 8.1.4.2 New Section...

This enables you to create a new section (see "Sections" on page 57) in which
data will be saved. In the dialog that appears you can enter the required name.
The new section is based on the current section setup.
Section 8.1.4.3 Rename Section...

This enables you to change the name of a section (see "Sections" on page 57).
In the dialog that appears you can select the section you want to rename.
Note: You cannot rename the currently active section, which is indicated in
the field in the toolbar.
Enter the name that you wish to assign to the selected section and press OK.

Section 8.1.4.4 Delete Section...

This allows you to delete a section from the current project. All the data
contained in the section is deleted too. Individual runs can be deleted using the
popup menu when in the “Data Selection” dialog available from this (the Data)
menu.
The active section cannot be deleted. In the dialog that appears, select the
section to be deleted and click OK
Section 8.1.4.5 View Setup Parameters

This allows you to view the setup parameters.
Section 8.1.4.6 Print Setup Parameters

This allows you to make a printout of the setup parameters.
Section 8.1.5 Tools
Section 8.1.5.1 Add-ins...
Section 8.1.5.1.1 Add-ins dialog

This dialog allows you to download add-ins into LMS Test.Lab Modal
Analysis. Loaded add-ins appear in the workbook.
General add-ins are Desktop “Add-ins”. (see "Add-ins" on page 281)
These are:
Rev 12A 279

 3D Acoustic Camera (on page 186)

 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering (on page 186)
 Application Launcher
 ASAM ODS Database Export (on page 187)
 ASAM ODS Driver (on page 187)
 Audio Replay (on page 187)
 Audio Replay & Filtering (on page 187)
 Automated Reporting (on page 188)
 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection (on page 188)
 Batch Reporting (on page 188)
 Data Block Editor (see "Yellow button" on page 188)
 Data Block Processing (on page 189)
 DATX Data Driver (on page 189)
 Excel Data Driver (on page 189)
 Geometry (on page 189)
 Harmonic Removal (on page 189)
 Harmonic Tracking (on page 189)
 HD Acoustic Camera (on page 189)
 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH (on page 190)
 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension (on page 190)
 Head Data Driver (on page 190)
 Human Body Vibration (on page 190)
 Interactive Time Data Editing (see "Interactive Time Data" on page 190)
 MDM-plug-in (on page 190)
 Mission Synthesis (on page 190)
 Modal Analysis (on page 190)
 Modal Analysis Lite (on page 190)
 Modification Prediction (on page 190)
 Multi Reference Post Processing (on page 191)
 Nastran Data Driver (on page 191)
 nCode Data Driver (on page 191)
 Network Hub (on page 191)
 Offline Sine Data Reduction (on page 191)
 OPAX (on page 191)
 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time Animation (on page 191)
 Operational Modal Analysis (on page 192)
 Operational Modal Analysis Lite (on page 192)


 Parameter Locking (on page 192)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis (on page 192)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite (on page 192)
 Polytec Data Driver (on page 192)
 Principal Component Analysis (on page 193)
 Rigid Body Calculator (on page 193)
 SCADAS Recording (on page 193)
 Signature Throughput Processing (on page 193)
 Sound Diagnosis (on page 193)
 Sound Intensity Analysis (on page 194)
 Sound Quality Metrics (on page 194)
 Tec.Manager Hub (on page 194)
 Time Data Editor – Advanced (see "Time Data Editor - Advanced" on
page 194)
 Time Data Editor – Standard (see "Time Data Editor - Standard" on page
194)
 Time Data Extraction (on page 194)
 Time Data Selection (on page 194)
 Time Domain TPA (on page 195)
 Time Signal Calculator (on page 195)
 Time-Variant Frequency Analysis (on page 195)
 TPA Component Editing (on page 195)
 Transfer Path Analysis (on page 195)
 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5) (on page 195)
 Windows Automation Support (on page 195)
Section 8.1.5.1.2 Add-ins

This section describes the specific add-ins:
Rev 12A 281


 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering
 Automated Reporting
 CAN Bus (on page 283)
 Remote Control (on page 283)
 Source Control (on page 284)
 Time recording during Signature Testing (on page 284)
Angle Domain Processing

This functionality can be used in the Signature Throughput Processing
workbook.
In the Angle Domain Validation worksheet it allows the visualization of data in

the angle domain, as well in the strip chart display as in the quick spectral map
panel. In addition it allows the creation a new TDF containing the selected time
data converted to the angle domain. The angle domain definition parameters
used for converting the data to the angle domain are specified in the Angle
Domain definition panel.
It also adds the SYNC_RESAMPLING commands to the time signal calculator.
In the Time Data Processing worksheet it allows acquiring angle data (link to
gendoc Acquisition Angle domain acquisition) in parallel with the Fixed
sampled data.
The AD acquisition parameters are defined in the AD acquisition tab of the

Acquisition settings dialog. You can choose to perform an AD acquisition in
parallel with the FS acquisition, an AD acquisition only, or a FS acquisition
only.
You are able to define two sets of processing functions, one for the fixed
sampling acquisition (FS), and a new set of functions for the Angle domain
acquisition (AD). In addition to the map of angle data, Order sections,
OA-levels, Averaged and peak hold angle data can be calculated. Frame
statistics can be calculated in a cycle or in defined gate(s).
ANSI-IEC Octave filtering

This functionality can be used in Signature acquisition and in Signature
Throughput Processing.
Octave spectra are generated by filtering the time data in octave bands and
averaging the result in the time domain. This functionality corresponds and is
consistent with the functionalities offered in RTO (Real Time Octave filtering).
You can choose to perform RTO in parallel with FS, RTO only, or FS only. A

checkbox is available for each channel group to select what processing has to be
performed.
Automated Reporting
Automated reporting is about the possibility to start the reporting without user
input immediately after the measurement is finished using predefined templates.
The automated reporting sheet allows you to predefine the plot formats and
mappings.
8.1.5.1.2.1 CAN Bus
The CAN (Controller Area Network) bus add-in is a data communications bus
for the real-time Test.Lab Signature applications:
 Signature Acquisition
 Signature Testing
It enables you to record CAN signals into a throughput file.
The recording of the CAN channels is available when parallel throughput is

active and when a CAN database with the name CAN.dbc is placed in the root
of the C drive. That database is automatically used when the add-in is loaded.
To change the database, the add-in must be unloaded.
Note: The new database must be placed in the root of the C drive with the
name CAN.dbc and the add-in must be loaded to make it active.
The CAN add-in will start and stop the CAN measurement together with the
start and stop (respectively) of the Test.Lab measurement.
The raw CAN messages are converted into physical values and units. The
conversion from a CAN- defined unit into a Test.Lab unit is possible when the
unit is defined in Test.Lab.
The CAN and the Test.Lab data are synchronized, and. the recording frequency
for the CAN messages is 100 Hz.
The CAN add-in works with CAN acquisition devices from Vector Informatik.
The CAN driver library from Vector must be installed and the CAN parameters
must be set up in the Vector hardware configuration (available in the Windows
Control Panel) to match the network in use.
Customized Metrics Calculator

The add-in gives the possibility to define extra user defined sections in
Signature Throughput Processing. It also give the possibility to define
conditions that can be used to accept or reject blocks from a waterfall.
Remote Control
In the Signature Testing workbook, the ‘Remote Control’ add-in can be used
with either the separate 4 button USB-remote control unit ‘SCx-RC01’ or with
the USB connection of the GRAS Intensity Proobe 50AI-L (which has built-in
Rev 12A 283

the same 4 buttons and USB connection).
The actions linked to each of the four buttons or the following:
Source Control
This add-in allows to use the sources of the frontend and to define the signal
that will be sent out by the sources.
Time recording during Signature Testing

This add-in combines the advantages of real-time measurements with the safety
and flexibility of throughput measurements. During the real-time measurement,
a TDF file is written to disc without any loss in performance.
Section 8.1.5.2 Options...

This schedules the "Options" dialog where you can set configuration settings
and see where particular file types are located.

 General tab (see "Options - General tab" on page 285)

 Add-ins tab (see "Options - Add-ins tab" on page 289)
 Data tab (see "Options - Data tab" on page 289)
 File Locations tab (see "Options - File Locations tab" on page 292)
 Sorting tab (see "Options - Sorting tab" on page 295)
 Filtering tab (see "Options - Filtering tab" on page 296)
 Units tab (see "Options - Units tab" on page 296)
 Displays tab (see "Options - Displays tab" on page 297)
 License Server tab (see "Options - License Server tab" on page 299)
 Tec.Manager tab (see "Options - Tec.Manager tab" on page 299)
 Sound Settings tab (see "Options - Sound Settings tab" on page 299)
 Network Hub tab (see "Options - Network Hub tab" on page 300)
 Attributes Tab (see "Options - Attributes Tab" on page 302)
Section 8.1.5.2.1 Options - General tab

In the Options dialog, use this tab to change the general options.
8.1.5.2.1.1 General Options
8.1.5.2.1.1.1 Frequency
It is possible to switch between Sample Frequency, Bandwidth and Span. The
bandwidth defines the maximum frequency that can be measured during an
acquisition. The span, which is set at 80% of the bandwidth, is the frequency
band that is unaffected by the cutoff filters. The sample frequency is twice the
bandwidth.
8.1.5.2.1.1.2 2D Correction mode
The 2D Correction type is applied when showing data in displays.
Note: This option is not used for measurement.
Functions measured in Test.Lab automatically get the 'correct' window

correction factor. This is annotated in the data properties and it is independent
of what is specified in the Options dialog.
Once a function is measured, you can view it in the display with the correction
factor specified by the 2D correction type (default is automatic). This changes
the way the data is displayed but does not change the data and its annotation.
The default method of correcting for the effect of adding a window function
when showing data in displays can be selected.
Automatic means the software selects the best method. If the spectrum format is
PSD for example, the spectrum data will be energy corrected. If not, it will be
amplitude corrected.
Note: The default setting for the correction method is automatic.
Rev 12A 285

Fixed Amplitude means that the data will always be amplitude corrected. Fixed
Energy means that the data will always be energy corrected. Not Corrected
means that no correction method or factor will be applied to the data. Original
means that any new data (based on previous acquisitions) will be corrected
using the same correction method that was applied to the original data.
8.1.5.2.1.1.3 Sampling Bit Size
The data word length used in the communication between the Frontend and
your computer can be specified. For optimized data quality, 24 bit data transfer
is advised. For higher throughput bandwidths, 16 bit data transfer is advised.
8.1.5.2.1.1.4 Calibration Validity Period
The is the period in days that the calibration of a transducer remains valid. The
TEDS standard defines a calibration date to be stored in the transducers, not a
due date. In the case of TEDS import, the system will add the value set here to
the date and perform the check on the result.
8.1.5.2.1.2 Octave Filtering
Octave filtering can be done according to different methods. The options here
allow you to define these settings globally. If needed, you can even enforce it
within a group and/or company using the 'Options Locking' mechanism' (see
Desktop options in Desktop manual). Typically different methods will give only
small differences. Differences will be noticeable if high level narrowband
components are present around the edge frequencies.
Globally, one can distinguish between octave filtering done in the time domain
(with digital bandpass filter banks) and octave filtering done in the frequency
domain (conversion from FFT block by integration over frequency bands). Each
domain can use midband (or center) and edge frequencies according to two
different methods (base-2 and base-10) and can have attenuation filter shapes
that depend on the implemented filter.
8.1.5.2.1.2.1 Octave filter midband and edge frequencies
There are two accepted methods to determine the midband frequencies of the
octave bands:
 the base-2 method: subsequent center frequencies have a ratio of 21/b with 1/b
the bandwidth designator (e.g. b=3 for 1/3 octave band).
Edge frequencies are derived from the center frequency by multiplying or
dividing with 21/(2b).
The reference frequency is fr=1000 Hz. Center frequencies are given by:
 fcn=fr*2n/b for b odd
 fcn=fr*2(2n+1)/(2b) for b even
 the base-10 method: subsequent center frequencies have a ratio of (103/10)1/b
with 1/b the bandwidth designator (e.g. b=3 for 1/3 octave band).
Edge frequencies are derived from the center frequency by multiplying or
dividing with (103/10)1/(2b).
The reference frequency is 1000 Hz.
 fcn=fr*(103/10)n/b for b odd

 fcn=fr*(103/10)(2n+1)/(2b) for b even
Note: Current IEC 61260:1995 and ANSI S1.11-2004 standards accept both
base-10 and base-2, but recommend base-10. Some standards (e.g. ISO
266-1997) are based on base-10 but mention that base-2 may be used as an
acceptable approximation because the differences are small (103/10 =
1.995262).
Note: Apart from the exact midband frequencies as mentioned above, the
designation of the band will be expressed in ‘nominal’ midband frequencies
(typically rounded numbers, also specified in the standards for full and 1/3
octaves) and not with the ‘exact’ midband frequencies (according to e.g. ISO
266-1997 and ANSI S1.6-1984(R2006)). For a list of normalized frequencies,
see the table above.
Note: With base-10 system, midband frequencies of 1/3 octave band will
include e.g. 10, 100, 1000, 10000 (ratio of 10). Other midband frequencies
digits will also repeat themselves apart from the location of the decimal
points. For the base-2 system, the 100 Hz (nominal) third octave band will
have a midband frequency of 99.2126 Hz while the 10000 Hz (nominal) third
octave band will have a midband frequency of 10079.37 Hz.
8.1.5.2.1.2.2 Octave filter shapes
Rev 12A 287

When implemented in the time domain as digital band-pass filter banks on

sampled data, the relative attenuation of the filters is never ‘perfect’ (no
attenuation between the edges and full attenuation outside the edges). The
current IEC 61260:1995 and ANSI S1.11-2004 standards give an upper and a
lower limit for the relative attenuation, depending on the ‘Class’ of analyzer.
These limits allow a shape of the filter response which attenuates before the
edge frequencies and with a finite slope beyond the edge frequencies. When
converting data to octave band in the frequency domain, it is much easier (and
common practise) to implement a (nearly) ideal filter (i.e. a ‘square’ filter
shape): only energy on the frequency lines within the octave band will be
summed. However, in order to match as closely as possible data processed with
time-domain filters with data processed with FFT, it is also possible to use filter
shapes with a ‘smoother’ shape (ANSI Emulation). This requires more
processing, as for each octave band, (weighted) integration over more frequency
lines will be done.
8.1.5.2.1.3 Octave Filtering Options
8.1.5.2.1.3.1 Time-based
For time-based octave filtering, it is possible to select 3 methods:
 ANSI-IEC – Class1 – base 10: the recommended setting as it complies with
the latest IEC and ANSI standard and uses base 10 as recommended by the
standard.
 ANSI – base 2: for compatibility with previous (before 8A) releases (ANSI
method used in Signature throughput processing)
 IEC – base 2: for compatibility with previous releases (before 8A) (IEC
method used in Signature throughput processing)
This choice influences host-based octave calculations performed with the
ANSI-IEC Octave Filtering add-in (e.g. Signature throughput processing or
RTO in parallel with Fixed sampling acquisition). Front-end based octave
filtering (available in the RTO workbook) will always use an ANSI-IEC
–Class1 – base 2 filter implementation.
8.1.5.2.1.3.2 FFT-based
For FFT-based octave filtering (e.g. done in Octave display of narrowband data,
in Signature Fixed sampling, by the ‘Octave’ function in the Data calculator,
etc…) it is possible to select between:
 Ideal – base 10: the recommended setting (only method before 8A)
 Ideal – base 2: for compatibility with e.g. CADA-X data
 ANSI Emulation – base 10: if similarity with time-domain filters is
important (before 8A, only possible in Signature Processing with the ‘ANSI
Emulation’ option set in the setup).
 ANSI Emulation – base 2: for compatibility with e.g. CADA-X data
Note: Whatever the option chosen, the data (from 8A on) will always be
annotated with appropriate ‘Octave ratio’, ‘Octave filter type’ and ‘Octave
domain’ properties.
8.1.5.2.1.3.3 Minimum spectral lines for octave band

You can specify the minimum number of spectral lines (from 1 - 5) for an

octave band.
8.1.5.2.1.4 Offline Octave filtering optimization
A checkbox enables the optimization of the real-time octave filtering when used
in Offline mode.
This optimization generates synthetic data in negative time, with physical

content, such that the octave filters have enough extra time to stabilize in order
to give reliable results from t=0.00s.
This optimization is transparent and no extra action is required for its use.
8.1.5.2.1.5 GPS Options
It is possible to extract the GPS data from a throughput file and to export it to
NMEA or KML file by means of the popup menu in the navigator. Each GPS
point can be exported or just a reduced set of points can be exported. The type
of reduction can be defined in this pane. The reduction can be based on
equidistant distance intervals or on equidistant time intervals.
8.1.5.2.1.5.1 Filter Setting
8.1.5.2.1.5.2 Minimum time between points
8.1.5.2.1.5.3 Minimum distance between points
Section 8.1.5.2.2 Options - Add-ins tab

In the Options dialog, use this tab to set the default “Save list of active add-ins
when the application is closed” option.
If this option is “on” your active add-ins will be saved in the application
configuration files so that they will remain active when you restart the
application.
If this option is “off” your active add-ins will not be saved. All Test.Lab add-ins
are given in the Chapter on “Add-ins”. (see "Add-ins" on page 281) You can
load add-ins using the Tools Add-ins menu entry.
8.1.5.2.2.1 Save list of active add-ins when the application is closed
Uncheck the checkbox if you do not want to save the list of active add-ins when
the application is closed. By default, this option is checked "on" and all your
active add-ins will be saved so that they will remain active when you restart the
application.
Section 8.1.5.2.3 Options - Data tab

8.1.5.2.3.1 External Data Options
8.1.5.2.3.1.1 Throughput File Format
Here you can choose if you want to use TDF or LDSF file format for
throughput files.
8.1.5.2.3.1.2 Throughput Bind Strategy
Here you can set the coupling strategy between the Test.Lab run and and its
associated TDF(s).
Rev 12A 289

 Semi-Embedded
With this coupling strategy, the TDF is located and stored outside of the LMS
project file (*.lms) but in the same directory.
The Test.Lab database and the TDF will behave as they are one and the
association (naming and placement) between the run and the TDF will always
be consistent.
The "Semi-Embedded" option is the default strategy.
This option means that:
 the name of the TDF (and its directories) and the name of the run (and its
project/section) will always be the same.
 the TDF (starting with the project directory) will always be placed in the
same directory as the Test.Lab database.
 when you use Rename Section, the corresponding directory will also be
renamed.
 when you do a Save As of an existing project, all throughput data that was
semi-embedded in the original project, will be duplicated in separate TDF
files.
 Linked
With this coupling strategy, the TDF is located and stored outside of the LMS
project file (*.lms) but in a location that you can specify.
Select this option, if you want to share your data files with other people. You
can then use the Browse... button to search for and find the location you
require.
The coupling between the Test.Lab run and the TDF will be set when the run
was created. From then on, this link may or may not be consistent.
This option means:
 when originally created, there is a relationship between the naming of the
TDF (and the directories) and the naming of the run (and project/section).
But when a Save As or Rename is executed, the naming is not consistent
anymore.
 when doing a Save As, the linked throughput data will not be duplicated.
The new Test.Lab project will still refer to the original TDF's.
Note: The corresponding TDF of a specific run can be found by displaying the
link (path) that is stored in the throughput folder of that run. When you lose the
link by, for example, copying the TDF, you can always restore the link
manually.
8.1.5.2.3.1.3 Waterfall Bind Strategy

Here you can set the coupling strategy between the Test.Lab run and its
associated waterfall data file(s).
 Embedded
With this coupling strategy, the waterfalls are stored inside the LMS project

(.lms) file.
The "Embedded" option is the default strategy.
 Semi-Embedded
With this coupling strategy, the waterfalls are stored in a waterfall database
(.wfs) file outside of the LMS project file (*.lms) but in the same directory.
The external storage of waterfalls applies to fixed and synchronous sampled
waterfall data, in both acquisition and throughput processing applications.
The Test.Lab database and the Waterfall data file will behave as they are one
and the association (naming and placement) between the run and the Waterfall
data will always be consistent.
This location is the {project_name\section_name\run_name} folder.
This means that:
 the name of the Waterfall data file (and its directories) and the name of the
run (and its project/section) will always be the same.
 the Waterfall data file (starting with the project directory) will always be
placed in the same directory as the Test.Lab database.
 when you use Rename Section, the corresponding directory will also be
renamed.
 when you do a Save As of an existing project, all waterfall data that was
semi-embedded in the original project, will be duplicated in separate
Waterfall data files.
 Linked
With this coupling strategy, the waterfalls are stored in a waterfall data (.wfs)
file outside of the LMS project file (*.lms) but in a directory that you can
specify.
Select this option, if you want to share your data files with other people. You
can then use the Browse... button to search for and find the location you
require.
The external storage of waterfalls applies to fixed and synchronous sampled
waterfall data, in both acquisition and throughput processing applications.
The coupling between the Test.Lab run and the Waterfall data file will be set
when the run was created. From then on, this link may or may not be consistent.
This means:
 when originally created, there is a relationship between the naming of the
waterfall data file (and the directories) and the naming of the run (and
project/section).
But when a Save As or Rename is executed, the naming is not consistent
anymore.
 when doing a Save As, the linked waterfall data will not be duplicated.
The new Test.Lab project will still refer to the original waterfall data files.
Note: The corresponding Waterfall data of a specific run can be found by
Rev 12A 291

displaying the link (path) that is stored in the waterfall folder of that run.
When you lose the link by, for example, copying the waterfall data file, you
can always restore the link manually.
8.1.5.2.3.1.4 File Location

This defines the directory where the TDF (and Waterfall data) files are placed
when the TDF (and Waterfall) bind strategy is set to Linked. It can be
anywhere on your system and network.
8.1.5.2.3.2 Universal File Options
8.1.5.2.3.2.1 Write Cada-X compatible component info
This option should be used if you want to export data to universal file that can
be readable by CADA-X. Otherwise the universal file will contain data that
does not meet the need of the CADA-X comp:node:direction format with only 4
characters for comp and node.
8.1.5.2.3.3 Time Data Options
8.1.5.2.3.3.1 Max. number samples for calculations
This shows the network limit for processing data as the maximum number of
samples. This number must be at least 10,000 and no more than 999,999,999.
The default number is 1,000,000 samples.
8.1.5.2.3.3.2 Max. number samples for reporting
8.1.5.2.3.4 LDSF Saving Mode
Secured saving during acquisition: when this option is checked on, every 5s
during the acquisition, the throughput data will be saved to disc. If the
application would crash during the measurement, the LDSF file should be
intact, containing all the data except for max last 5s.
Elaborated overview for quick viewing: when this option is checked on, extra
statistics about the LDSF file will be saved that then will be used for quick
overview of the complete trace.
8.1.5.2.3.4.1 Secured saving during acquisition
8.1.5.2.3.4.2 Elaborated overview for quick viewing
Section 8.1.5.2.4 Options - File Locations tab

In the Options dialog, this shows the list of directories where particular folders
and file types are located by default. These default locations were set during the
Software installation. Test.Lab has 3 types of folders for storing configuration
files, layout files, templates and other files.
Central folder
Upon installation, all default files are placed in the <installation dir>\central
folder. All files in this folder were placed there during the installation. You can
not change the location of this folder. Files in this folder should never be
modified.
Local Folder
On the local folder, all configuration and layout files are stored for the user. The
default location of configuration files is by default on ‘one local folder’ (e.g.

D:/LMSLocalXXX/user). You can choose to have this default location different

per file type – with the radio button in Local Folder.
Group Folder
On the local folder, all configuration and layout files are stored for the user.
8.1.5.2.4.1 Group Folder
This folder is hierarchically placed between the central and local directory. It
allows a group of users to make use of an extra (write protected) folder without
modifying the central directory. A group folder can contain configuration files,
as well as project templates, documentation templates, picture layouts, print
formats, search criteria, data sets and processing sets.
When Test.Lab needs to open a configuration file, it will search for it in the
local folder. If the file is not locally available, Test.Lab will look for it in the
group folder, and then in the central folder. A modified configuration is always
saved locally. When Test.Lab needs any other file (print formats, picture
layouts, etc.), it makes a combination of all the files available, starting with the
local one, then the group one and then the central one. In this way, the result is a
union of all the items in the 3 files.
Example: A user wants to select a print format. Test.Lab makes a list of the print
formats available on the local folder, adds the print formats of the group folder
and then adds the ones of the central directory. In the case a print format with
the same name exists, both on the local and on group folder, only the one on the
local folder is available in the list. A modified print format is always saved in
the local folder.
Note: Test.Lab never copies files to the group folder. This has to be done by a
system administrator.
Upon installation, all default files are placed in the <installation

dir>\central folder. All files in this folder were placed there during the
installation. You can not change the location of this folder. Files in this folder
should never be modified.
8.1.5.2.4.1.1 Use Group Folder
Check this box, if you want to share files with other people. You can then use
the Browse... button to search for and find the location you require.
8.1.5.2.4.2 Local Folder
This displays the directory where your data projects are stored. This location
was set during the Software installation. You can define one location for all
your files or a location for each file type.
8.1.5.2.4.2.1 Define one Local Folder
Click this radiobutton if you want to have all your files in the same place i.e. in
just one local folder. You can then use the Browse... button to search for and
find the location you require.
8.1.5.2.4.2.2 Define Local Folders per File Type
Rev 12A 293

Click this radiobutton if you want to be able to define a different location for
each file type i.e. a local folder for each file type. You can then select a File
Type and use the Browse... button to search for and find the project location
you require.
8.1.5.2.4.2.2.1 Project
A project file is a file with the extension lms that contains all the data that
belong to the project. The location defined alongside represents the directory
where projects will be saved by default. Click the project entry, then enter a new
location in the input field or browse for one in order to change the location.
8.1.5.2.4.2.2.2 Project Template
A Project Template file is a file with the extension tpl that contains a starting
setup that will be used whenever a new project is created. The location defined
alongside represents the directory where this template will be searched for by
default. When a new project is created using the File menu, then you can select
which template to use. When clicking on the icon, then the default
template on this directory will be used. Click the Project Template entry, then
enter a new location in the input field or browse for one in order to change the
directory.
8.1.5.2.4.2.2.3 Memo Inventory
The Memo Inventory contains the document templates for projects, sections and
runs as well as the text file that defines which template is which. The location
defined alongside represents the directory where the templates and the text file
are located, and from where they will be accessed when a new document is
created from a template.
You can change the directory from which the templates will be retrieved by
clicking on the Memo Inventory entry, then entering a new location in the input
field or browsing for one.
8.1.5.2.4.2.2.4 Other local files and folders
The location of all the other files and folders can be defined.
You can change the location by clicking on the Other local files and folders
entry, then entering a new location in the input field or browsing for one.
Note: Any changes will be lost if another tab is selected before the Apply
button is pressed.
8.1.5.2.4.3 File access priority

For reading configuration files, the default priority rule is:
Local folder -> group folder -> central folder
Configuration files will first be read from local folder; if not found there, it
looks at the group folder (if defined); if not found there, it looks at the central
configuration folder.
When having selected ““When accessing files, prioritize group folder”): the

priority rule is:
Group folder -> local folder -> central folder.
To make sure that the correct (group) settings are also used in case of a network
failure, the group folder is copied to the local folder.
Section 8.1.5.2.5 Options - Sorting tab

In the Options dialog, this allows items in the Test.Lab browser tree to be
sorted.
Click the next to an item in the browser tree to view its contents. By
continuing to open up the tree, you can display all the items it contains, such as
folders, subfolders and files.
Different types of items will have different icons.
All other file types e.g. Word or Excel will have the unknown file icon.
Three groups of items can be sorted:

 Files and Databases
Files are those items that the application does not recognize. Databases
(known link) are those items that can be accessed by Test.Lab. Databases
contain folders for storing data.
 Folders
Folders (usually yellow folder icon) are those objects that can contain
subfolders and files for storing data.
 Data
Data items are files containing data.
Check the box alongside the sorting method you want to use.
Grouped means that items will be sorted and grouped together by file type (e.g.
LMS CADA-X project databases) but not into alphabetical (file_name) order.
Grouped sorting method
Alphabetical sorting means that they will be sorted and placed in alphabetical
order regardless of their file type.
Rev 12A 295

Alphabetical sorting method
Sorting items by both methods together means that file types are grouped
together and, within each type, files are put in alphabetical order.
Both (grouped and alphabetical) sorting methods together
Note: Unchecking the sorting method boxes will unsort the items to their
original order.
Section 8.1.5.2.6 Options - Filtering tab

In the Options dialog, this allows items in the browser tree to be filtered or
hidden. This reduces the information displayed and makes finding your desired
data files much easier and faster.
By default all supported file types are enabled in the dialog meaning that all file
types will be shown in the navigator. You can filter out some file types by
disabling the checkbox before each file type. You can disable or enable all file
types by clicking on the buttons “Show All” or “Hide All”. However it is never
possible to disable our own file type format “Test.Lab.”
Section 8.1.5.2.7 Options - Units tab

In the Options dialog, this allows the active unit system (see "Units and how to
handle them" on page 58) in which your data will be expressed to be selected.
Note: Any changes you make to the Active Unit System will only become valid
after you restart the application.
8.1.5.2.7.1 Unit System

8.1.5.2.7.1.1 Active Unit System
Use the dropdown menu to change the unit system if required. You can select
either Technical (default), English, the International System of Units (SI) or

ISO 1683-1983.
8.1.5.2.7.1.2 User Defined Unit
Check the box if you want to define your own unit system (see "[Procedure]
To define your own unit system" on page 62).
You can define a user defined system for each of the four base unit systems
(Technical, English, SI or ISO 1683-1983).
8.1.5.2.7.1.3 Edit Units.. button
Check the "User Defined Unit" box to activate this button.
Push the button to schedule the Edit Units dialog where you can edit the units.
8.1.5.2.7.1.4 List Units button
Push the button to schedule the List Units dialog where you can view the list of
units.
This lists the units of the current unit system that is shown in the Active Unit
System field above.
8.1.5.2.7.1.5 Units of External Data
8.1.5.2.7.1.5.1 Use Original Units
Click this radio button if you want to use the original units when you import
data.
8.1.5.2.7.1.5.2 Use Test.Lab Units
Click this radio button if you want to use the corresponding Test.Lab units when
you import data.
8.1.5.2.7.2 Units of External Data
8.1.5.2.7.2.1 Use Original Units
Click this radio button if you want to use the original units when you import
data.
8.1.5.2.7.2.2 Use Test.Lab Units
Click this radio button if you want to use the corresponding Test.Lab units when
you import data.
Section 8.1.5.2.8 Options - Displays tab

In the Options dialog, use this tab to make changes to the default display
options.
Note: Any changes you make here will only become valid after you restart the
application.
8.1.5.2.8.1 3D Geometry Display

8.1.5.2.8.1.1 Disable Overlay Optimization
Check the box to disable the overlay optimization.
Rev 12A 297

Note: Changes to the Disable Overlay Optimization will only become valid
after the application is restarted.
8.1.5.2.8.1.2 Use Quad Projection American

Check the box to use American projection in place of European projection as
the type of quad projection.
Note: Changes to the type of projection will only become valid after the
application is restarted.
8.1.5.2.8.1.3 Use Cada-X Triad Colors

Check the box to use Cada-X colors in place of Test.Lab colors. This changes
the color that is assigned to the X, Y and Z axis.
Color
Test.Lab Cada-X X-axis
Green Red Y-axis
Blue Green Z-axis
Red Blue
Display colors
8.1.5.2.8.2 2D Function Displays
8.1.5.2.8.2.1 Overall level of octave display based on
You can choose to use the Total Range or the Visible Range of your data to
calculate the Overall level of the octave display.
8.1.5.2.8.2.2 Default Octave Trace Type (Front/Back display)
You can change the default style for displaying Octave traces in a Front/Back
display.
You can select either BlockOutlines or LineSegments from the dropdown menu.
8.1.5.2.8.2.3 Default Trace Style Scheme
You can make changes to the default trace style scheme.
Use the Defaults button to undo all your changes and return to the original
default values.
Use the Change.. button to schedule the Default Trace Properties dialog in
which you can define the default properties of the curve used to draw the traces.
8.1.5.2.8.2.3.1 Line
You can choose styles for the lines from the Trace style, Color, Pattern and
Width dropdown menus.
8.1.5.2.8.2.3.2 Fill
This allows you to select the color used for the selected curves from the Fill
Color dropdown menu.

8.1.5.2.8.2.3.3 Marker
This only becomes sensitive when you have selected markers as the trace style
and pressed the Apply button. You can then select the size of the markers from
the MarkerSize dropdown menu.
8.1.5.2.8.2.3.4 Annotation
This allows you to add a legend to the selected curve.
8.1.5.2.8.2.4 Optimised & Free Y limits based on:
You can change the range for displaying both the Optimised and Free limits for
the Y axis.
You can select either visible range or total range from the dropdown menu.
Section 8.1.5.2.9 Options - License Server tab

8.1.5.2.9.1 License Server Options
This displays the name of the current license server.
8.1.5.2.9.2 Timer Options
This allows you to set a license curfew that returns all licenses at the specified
moment if licenses from a network license server are in use. At the curfew time,
a warning is issued which allows the user to keep the licenses. If five minutes
expire without any reaction on the warning, all applications are shut down and
the licenses are returned to the network license server. An administrator can
force the curfew by using the group folder mechanism to set the timer options,
and the ToolsOptions locking mechanism to make this Timer Options
insensitive for the user.
Note: The Timer Options has no effect when no remote license server is used
or when a control loop is active at the specified time. Changes to the license
server will only become valid after the local license server has been stopped
and restarted.
Section 8.1.5.2.10 Options - Tec.Manager tab

In the Options dialog, this tab displays the Tec.Manager settings.
All the options are described in the Tec.Manager tab document.
Section 8.1.5.2.11 Options - Sound Settings tab

8.1.5.2.11.1 Sound Player
8.1.5.2.11.1.1 Use internal sound player
Select this option, if you want to use an internal sound player.
8.1.5.2.11.1.2 Use external sound player
Select this option, if you want to use an external sound player. You can then use
the Browse... button to search for and find the player you require.
Rev 12A 299

8.1.5.2.11.2 WAV Settings

8.1.5.2.11.2.1 Fade In / Out
Check this box, if you want a smoother start (and end) when you playback your
sound files.
8.1.5.2.11.2.2 Fading Time
You can specify the time (in milliseconds) for fading in and out when you
playback your sound files.
The default time is 100 msec.

8.1.5.2.11.2.3 Bits / Sample
You can specify the number of bits per sample for determining the output
precision when you playback your sound files.
The default number is 16 Bits.
Section 8.1.5.2.12 Options - Network Hub tab

In the Options dialog, this tab allows you to change the StartPoint Server that
Test.Lab connects to, for the Network Hub Add-In.
8.1.5.2.12.1 StartPoint Server
8.1.5.2.12.1.1 StartPoint server computer name
This displays the name of the system that you defined during the Software
installation.
8.1.5.2.12.1.2 StartPoint server port number
The displays the port number that is used by the system.
Note: StartPoint Server changes will only become valid after you restart the
application.
8.1.5.2.12.2 Network
8.1.5.2.12.2.1 Timeout
This shows the time in seconds that the network will wait, when a command
cannot be successfully completed, before canceling the command.
Section 8.1.5.2.13 Options - Frontend

In the Options dialog, this displays the current Frontend settings.
After you connect a Frontend to your computer, and power them up, you should
restart your computer.
Test.Lab will automatically detect the parameters relating to the Frontend

settings (Host ID and Target ID) when you start Test.Lab for the first time.
These parameter settings will be suitable for using Test.Lab in most cases.
However, you may have to change them in some cases (e.g. when using 2
frontends or installing a new device).

8.1.5.2.13.1 Frontend Connection Options

8.1.5.2.13.1.1 Use SPTI
SPTI is a Small computer system interface (SCSI) Pass Through Interface card
used for connecting your PC to the Frontend.
8.1.5.2.13.1.1.1 Host Adapter ID
This is the SPTI port number.
8.1.5.2.13.1.1.2 Target ID
This is the SPTI ID number.
8.1.5.2.13.1.1.3 Scan button
The [Scan] button starts the Frontend Scan Tool for helping you to detect and
configure the SPTI settings.
8.1.5.2.13.1.2 Use ASPI
ASPI is an Advanced small computer system interface (SCSI) Programming
Interface card used for connecting your PC to the Frontend.
8.1.5.2.13.1.2.1 Host Adapter ID
This is the ASPI port number.
8.1.5.2.13.1.2.2 Target ID
This is the ASPI ID number.
8.1.5.2.13.1.2.3 Scan button
configure the ASPI settings.
8.1.5.2.13.1.3 Use UTP
UTP is an Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for connecting your PC to the
Frontend.
8.1.5.2.13.1.3.1 IP Address
This is the UTP IP address.
8.1.5.2.13.1.3.2 Scan button
configure the UTP settings.
8.1.5.2.13.2 FIFO Settings
This is the FIFO (first-in, first-out) buffer size on your computer for handling
data processing requests so that the oldest request is handled next.
Note: Changes you make to the SCI and FIFO settings will only become valid
after you restart the application.
8.1.5.2.13.2.1 Fifo Size

The default is 20,000,000 bytes. You can increase this up to 40,000,000 bytes
for working with high throughput rates or with large numbers of channels.
Rev 12A 301

8.1.5.2.13.3 Optical Cable Length

8.1.5.2.13.3.1 Cable Length
Here you can specify the length of 1 optical cable when you are using a
master/slave frontend setup. The length of this cable will be used to calculate
the delay of the signals between 2 frames to synchronize them.
Section 8.1.5.2.14 Options - Font Size
Note: You will need to restart the application before any changes you make to
the font size will become active.
8.1.5.2.14.1 Measure Sheet Font Size

Changes the font size in the right hand pane in the Measure sheet.
Note: The Font Size you select here will only affect the text in the right hand
pane in the Measure worksheet. It will not affect the text in any other pane or
worksheet.
Section 8.1.5.2.15 Options - Attributes Tab

8.1.5.2.15.1 Extended Info
8.1.5.2.15.1.1 Always include extended project / section information
Including extended project / section information will make an extra minor tab
available. This Extended Documentation worksheet will allow you to select and
edit a htm- or html-template. The attributes will then become available in the
Documentation worksheet.
8.1.5.2.15.1.2 HTML template folder
This field specifies the path of the folder that can contain different Tec.Manager
templates (an .htm or .html file containing meta-information).
8.1.5.2.15.1.3 [Browse...] button
This schedules the Select template folder dialog for specifying the location and
name of the template folder.
8.1.5.2.15.2 Section User Attributes
When creating a new section, copy the User Attribute values from the active
section.
Enabling this option will make sure that when a new section is created, the
attribute values from the active section will be copied.
Note: Please make sure the application is restarted to ensure that the changes
will become valid.
8.1.5.2.15.3 Run User Attributes

When this option is enabled, we will archive the existing user attributes at run
level during the creating of a new run. User attributes that exist at project and

section level will be copied into the run. All these attributes at run level will
have a prefix “Project:” or “Section:”.
Only when this option is selected the attributes at run level are editable by
right-clicking on a run and choosing the entry “Edit User Attributes”. This
command can be found either in the data explorer or in the navigator.
The same functionalities are supported when a run is copied and pasted, we will
also copy the user attributes at run level.
Section 8.1.5.3 Tec. Manager Search
Section 8.1.5.4 Relabel...

This lets you define how the labels (for blocks, texts and projects) will appear in
the browser tree
Section 8.1.5.5 Add New Attribute...

This opens a dialog that allows you to set new documentation attributes.
Section 8.1.5.6 Load Attributes List...

This allows you to load an attributes list into your project.
Section 8.1.5.7 Save Attributes List...

This allows you to save your current attributes list.
Section 8.1.5.8 Channel Setup Visibility

This schedules the Channel Setup Visibility dialog. Here you can define the
fields that will be displayed in the Channel Setup worksheet and the names that
will describe these fields. This entry is only available in those applications that
use the Channel id worksheet.
Section 8.1.5.8.1 Source field names

This list contains all possible fields that are used in channel descriptions.
Section 8.1.5.8.2 Selected fields

This list contains all fields that will appear in the Channel Setup worksheet. It
contains two columns. The left hand one shows the source field name, which
can not be altered. The right hand column contains the name that will appear in
worksheet and which can be defined by the user.
To change the name, right mouse click in the field to display a popup menu.
Select Clear and then enter the new name, either using the keyboard or by
using Copy and Paste. Finally click on OK to close the dialog and update the
Rev 12A 303

channel list.
Section 8.1.5.8.3 Add

This places a field selected from the left list at the bottom of the “Selected
fields” list on the right.
Section 8.1.5.8.4 Remove

This removes a field selected from the “Selected fields” list on the right. This
field will no longer appear in the worksheet.
To remove a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in
front of the row).
Section 8.1.5.8.5 Replace

This replaces the selected field in the right hand list with the selected field in the
left hand list.
It also replaces the former decorated name in the right hand column of the
Selected fields list with the newly entered name.
To replace a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in
front of the row).
Section 8.1.5.8.6 Insert after

This inserts the selected field from the left hand list after the selected field in the
right hand list.
To insert a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in front
of the row).
Section 8.1.5.8.7 Insert before

This inserts the selected field from the left hand list before the selected field in
the right hand list.
To insert a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in front
of the row).
Section 8.1.5.8.8 OK
When the right hand list is complete with the number of fields, their order and
names as required, this button closes the dialog and updates the table in the
worksheet.

Section 8.1.5.8.9 Cancel

This closes the dialog without making any changes to the channel table.
Section 8.1.5.9 Reference Channel Setup Options...

This schedules the Reference Channel Setup Options dialog that enables you to
automatically save and load a reference channel setup when activating a section.
Following options are available:
Section 8.1.5.10 Data Source Editor

This schedules the Data Source Editor in which ODBC data sources can be
selected for use in the Channel Setup Worksheet. This option is only available
in those applications using the Channel setup sheet.
Section 8.1.5.11 Workbook Configuration...

This schedules a dialog with two lists, one showing all the worksheets contained
in the Workbook and the other showing all visible worksheets. It allows you to
indicate which worksheets you want to make visible.
Section 8.1.5.12 User Applications

This allows you to start any external application from within the Test.Lab user
interface. This concerns all files of type .exe, .com or shortcut that have been
put on the following directory: <installation
directory>\central\UserApplications
Section 8.1.6 Window
Section 8.1.6.1 Cascade

This arranges all project windows on the desktop in a cascading fashion.
Section 8.1.6.2 Tile

This re-sizes all project windows on the desktop so that they are all visible and
arranged as tiles.
Section 8.1.6.3 Open applications

The remaining entries in this menu list the windows (workbooks / projects) that
you have open on the desktop. A check mark indicates the active project.
Rev 12A 305

Section 8.1.7 Help
Section 8.1.7.1 Contents and Index

This schedules the Help window on the “Home” page from which help on all
aspects of the software can be accessed.
Section 8.1.7.2 Application

This provides the online help for the LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis software.
Section 8.1.7.3 Worksheet

This provides help on the currently active worksheet.
Section 8.1.7.4 PDF Manual

This provides the printable version of the online help for the LMS Test.Lab
Modal Analysis software.
Section 8.1.7.5 Theory

This schedules the Theory documents.
Section 8.1.7.6 LMS on the Web

This entry provides a menu from where you can link directly either to the Home
Page of the web site or Test.Lab support page.
Section 8.1.7.7 About Test.Lab

This schedules a dialog with the current version and build number.
Section 8.2 The Modal Analysis button bar
Section 8.2.1 Toolbars
You can toggle the presence of available toolbars using the View Toolbars
menu.
There are three toolbars:

Standard
Standard toolbar
Standard toolbar options are:
 New Project (on page 308)
 Open Project (on page 309)
 Save Project (on page 309)
 Active Section (on page 309)
 Create New Section (on page 309)
 Delete Section (on page 309)
 Rename Section (on page 309)
 Copy (on page 309)
 Paste (on page 310)
 Print Preview (on page 310)
 Print (on page 310)
 Open Data Explorer (on page 310)
 Help (on page 311)

Conditioning
Conditioning toolbar
Conditioning (see "Conditioning toolbar" on page 315) refers to the functions

that can be performed on the data that you have on display in the Navigator
display windows.
Conditioning toolbar options are:
Rev 12A 307

 FFT Format Conversion (on page 311)
 Averaged Autopower Spectrum (on page 311)
 Curve fitting (on page 311)
 Smoothing (on page 311)
 Differentiation (on page 312)
 Integration (on page 312)
 Acoustic weighting (on page 312)
 Add (on page 312)
 Subtract (on page 312)
 Multiply (on page 312)
 Divide (on page 312)
 SRS calculation (on page 313)
 Settings dialog (on page 313)
 Overwrite source data (on page 313)
 Tec.Manager (on page 313)
New Project
This enables you to open a new default project (NewProject.lms in the

<installation directory>\central\Install folder).
If you want to start from a user-defined default project, change the default
project and store it in the Local or Group folder. (see "Options - File Locations
tab" on page 292)
In the desktop a new window will open containing the new project. This new
project will be assigned the name “ProjectX” where X is the number of projects
that have been opened and it becomes the active project. All previously-opened
projects remain open.

Note: To open a project with a specific project template you have to use File
New on the menubar.
Open Project
This opens an existing project. It schedules the “Project dialog” in which you
can specify the location and the name of the project you want to open.
Save Project
This saves the current state of the active project. By default, projects are saved
on the directory specified in the dialog obtained by selecting the “File
Locations” tab in Options from the Tools menu.
Active Section
This displays the active section and allows you to select and open an existing
section using the dropdown menu.
Create New Section
This creates a new section based on the current section setup.
Delete Section
This deletes a complete section and also all the data it contains is deleted too.
Rename Section
This renames a section
Copy
This copies an item and places it on the clipboard.
Rev 12A 309

Paste
This pastes an item currently on the clipboard.
Print Preview
This provides you with a preview of the current worksheet as it will be printed
according to the current print setup. The functions are as described for the
Print Preview (on page 275) function from the File menu.
Print
This schedules a print job of the current worksheet. The first page of the
worksheet, as it appears on your monitor, will be printed.
Open Data Explorer
This schedules the Data Explorer (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on page
327) dialog that provides you with two views on your data - a hierarchical tree
view and a detail view (as in Windows Explorer) of the data in your projects.
You can drag specific data from the Explorer into a display window and also
perform certain operations on it.
The online data root folder provides the user with data that is updated while
doing the acquisition. Data is available for each activated domain: Fixed
Sampling, Real Time Octaves and Order Tracked. For each of them 3 kinds of
data will be available:
 Monitoring data: This data will update when the system is armed. Updates
happen on a regular base and are independent from the selected tracking
settings. Time history data shows a time overview of the channel over a
longer period. This period can be defined in the More… dialog of the F8 tab
in measure sheet.
 Instantaneous data: This data will update whenever a new tracking point is
detected. It shows the data that is related with that tracking point.
 Time/Runup/Rundown/Event/Stationary data: the name of this node will
depend on the selected tracking settings. The data shows in this node is the
result of all tracking points found since the start of the measurement up to
now. The data is updated whenever a new tracking point was found. At the
end of the measurement, this data will be equal to the processed data that
will be saved in the project.
Online data also contains the results of compare runs when this add-in is loaded.

It allows to the results of an averaging immediately at the end of each

measurement. It also allows to compare the averaged result of previous
measurements with the currently acquired data.
Help
This schedules the Online help on the “Home” page, from which all the
documentation can be accessed.
FFT
This computes the frequency spectrum (see "FFT" on page 317) of selected
time data curves. The results are to be found in the conditioning folder. A
frequency section will replace the time data.
FFT Format Conversion
This format conversion process (see "FFT Format Conversion" on page 317)
changes the frequency spectrum of selected time data curves to a particular
format.
Averaged Autopower Spectrum
This averaging process (see "Averaged Autopower Spectrum" on page 318)

computes the mean spectrum of selected time data curves.
Curve fitting
This performs a curve fitting procedure (see "Curve fitting" on page 320) of
the required degree. The degree is specified in the dialog, if the interactive icon
is set on. Otherwise the last used setting is used.
Smoothing
This smoothing process (see "Smoothing" on page 320) smoothes the

selected curves with the specified exponential smoothing factor. This is
specified in the dialog, if the interactive icon is set on. Otherwise the last used
Rev 12A 311

setting is used.
Differentiation
This process differentiates the data (see "Differentiation" on page 256) in

the selected curves either once or twice. This number of differentiations is
specified in the dialog, if the interactive setting icon is on. Otherwise the last
used setting is used.
Integration
This integrates the data (see "Differentiation" on page 256) in the selected
curves either once or twice. This number of integrations is specified in the
dialog, if the interactive icon is set on. Otherwise the last used setting is used.
Acoustic weighting
This applies acoustic weighting (see "Acoustic weighting" on page 321) to

the data in the selected curves.
Add
This adds a specified scalar value (see "Scalar math functions" on page
321) to the data in the selected curves.
Subtract
This subtracts a specified scalar value (see "Scalar math functions" on page
321) from the data in the selected curves.
Multiply
This multiplies the values (see "Scalar math functions" on page 321) of the
data in the selected curves by a specified scalar quantity.

Divide
This divides the values (see "Scalar math functions" on page 321) of the
data in the selected curves by a specified scalar amount.
SRS calculation
This calculates the SRS (see "SRS Calculation" on page 322) or Shock
Response Spectrum from an acceleration/time signal.
Settings dialog
When this setting is on, then a Settings dialog will appear in which any
parameters that are required for the function can be set. If this option is off then
the previous or the default value will be taken when you open this for the first
time.
Overwrite source data
When this setting is on, then the computed curve will replace the source curve
in the display. This will be necessary if the function is of a different format to
the source, for example the FFT of a time curve. In this case it is recommended
to work with two display windows, one of which has a copy of the source curve
in it. If this option is off then the computed curve will be added to the display,
with the source curve still visible. In both cases the resulting function can be
retrieved from the "Conditioning" folder.
Tec.Manager
This icon only becomes sensitive and so accessible after you load the
Tec.Manager Hub add-in.
Select Tools Options... Add-ins... and check the Tec.Manager Hub

checkbox to load this add-in.
The Tec.Manager icon schedules the LMS Tec.Manager application. You can
use LMS Tec.Manager to search for data and to insert the results into the
LMSTest.Lab Desktop browser tree.
Rev 12A 313

Average
This option is only available with the Run Data Averaging & Comparison
Organizer Add-in.
The average function averages the values of a particular type of section over a
number of runs.
You can specify the averaging method in the Data options panel of the Compare
runs worksheet.
Envelope Max
Organizer Add-in.
The envelope max function provides you with an envelope function that
indicates which section is making the most significant contribution at different
stages in the run.
Envelope Min
Organizer Add-in.
The envelope min function provides you with an envelope function that
indicates which section is making the least significant contribution at different
stages in the run.
Standard Deviation
Organizer Add-in.
The Standard Deviation option calculates two curves; the standard deviation
added to the average values and the standard deviation subtracted from the
average values. This indicates how much the values of the sections of the
different runs vary from the mean value.
3 Sigma (3 times standard deviation)
Organizer Add-in.

The 3 Sigma or 3 timesstandard deviation option calculates two curves; 3 times

the standard deviation added to the average values and 3 times the standard
deviation subtracted from the average values. This indicates how much the
values of the sections of the different runs vary from the mean value.
Click the icons in the averaging toolbar (Average, Envelope Min or Envelope
Max) for those operations you wish to carry out on the runs for comparison.
Section 8.3 Conditioning toolbar
Conditioning refers to the functions that can be performed on the data that you
have on display in the Navigator display windows. It enables you to view
various aspects of the data and to adapt it to a suitable form required for your
report. The results of conditioning can be viewed immediately in a display, but
are also retained in the active section in the current project. These results will
then be saved in the active section of the project, unless specifically deleted.
To delete the results of conditioning:
First, select the file in the browser tree of the worksheet (or in data selection
using the Data Data Explorer menu).
Then right click the file and select Delete.
Detailed Information on the conditioning functions (on page 317) is provided

in this document.
Section 8.3.1 To condition displayed data
Step 1
Select the layout that you want to use, either from the favorites buttons or the
drop down menu.
If you are going to generate new functions that are not compatible with the
source data (time source and frequency result for example), then it may be
useful to select a layout that contains two windows; one in which the source
data will be retained and the other in which the corresponding conditioning
function will be displayed.
Step 2
Load the data into (both) windows, by dragging it from the browser tree.
Step 3
Check that the Settings dialog icon is depressed, i.e. set to “on”.
This means that a dialog will appear in which any parameters that are required
Rev 12A 315

for the function can be set. These settings will be retained as the default for
further operations.
Step 4
Select the data curves in the display to which you want to apply the same
processing parameters. Left click to select a curve and use the Ctrl key to add to
the selection. Not all curves need to be selected.
Step 5
If you are going to perform an FFT, or Shock Response Analysis, then the result
will be incompatible with the source curves. You can choose therefore whether
to replace the source with the result or to retain the result in the processing
folder from where you can view it separately. To replace the source, click the
“Overwrite source data” icon “on”. Bear in mind that all curves in this
display will be removed in this case. In this situation it is recommended to use a
pair of windows, with the source data being retained in one and the processing
being performed in the other.
If you are performing a function where the Y axis of the result is compatible
with that of the source, then it is not necessary to replace the source. It can be
added to the display, overlaying the source, so you can have the “Overwrite
source data” icon set to “off”.
Step 6
Click on the conditioning function (see "Conditioning functions" on page 317)
icon that you want to use.
Step 7
Enter the required parameter value in the dialog if one is scheduled, and then
click on Apply to view the results. Conditioning will then be performed. Press
on OK to close the dialog and return you to the display.
The function(s) will be computed and displayed if the “overwrite source data”
setting is on.
Step 8
Go to the browser tree and open the “Processing X” folder in the current
project. In there you will see a number of data blocks that correspond to the
number of functions you have generated. These can be dragged into the display
in the normal way.
Step 9
Right clicking on the data block in the browser tree and you will obtain a popup
menu. Select Properties to obtain the Properties dialog box. Click on the
Details tab in which information relating to the displayed data can be seen.
Step 10
If you want to always use the function parameter than you just entered, then you
can switch "off" the interactive settings icon. This ensures that the same value
will be used as default until specifically changed - even if you quit the software
and then return.
Step 11
If you do not wish to retain or save conditioned functions, Select them in the
browser tree (or Data Explorer), right click and then select Delete.

Section 8.3.2 Conditioning functions
evaluated.
 FFT Format Conversion (on page 317)
 Averaged Autopower Spectrum (on page 318)
 Curve fitting (on page 320)

 Smoothing
 Differon page 320entiation and Integration

 Asee "Differentiation" on page 256coustic weighting
 Scasee "Acoustic weighting" on page 321lar math functions
 see "Scalar math functions" on page 321SRS Calculation (on page 322)
Section 8.3.2.1 FFT
This computes the linear spectrum of a selected time data curve.
Source data
Any (time data)
Input parameters
None. This is a simple FFT without user defined parameters.
Resulting function
Complex block in amplitude plus phase format.
Section 8.3.2.2 FFT Format Conversion
This computes (or converts) the frequency spectra to a particular format. It is

particularly useful for comparing spectra from different sources by converting
them to the same format.
Rev 12A 317

Source data
Time or Frequency domain data.
Input parameters
Amplitude scaling: peak / RMS / double sided.
These scaling modes, for a spectrum of a sine wave with an amplitude A, are
illustrated below.
Scaling modes of the frequency spectrum
Spectrum format: linear / power / PSD.
These formats for the autopower spectrum of a sine wave of amplitude A are
illustrated below.
Autopower spectrum formats
Autopower Format peak rms double sided

Linear
Power
PSD
Where = amplitude of the sine wave and = frequency resolution
Resulting function
Frequency spectrum with the specified scaling and format.
Section 8.3.2.3 Averaged Autopower Spectrum
This computes the mean spectrum of selected time data curves.
Source data
Time / angle domain data.

Input parameters
Amplitude scaling: peak / RMS / double sided.
Spectrum format: linear / power / PSD.
Windowing method: Types of time windows available to reduce leakage

problems are Uniform / Hanning / Exponential / Force / Force-Exponential /
Blackman / Kaiser-Bessel / Flattop
BlockSize: Time signal data can contain a very large number of samples and the
resolution of the frequency spectrum can be very small. To improve the
resolution, the data is divided up into smaller blocks. These blocks are defined
by a blocksize that has a number of time samples.
Note: To achieve a high calculation performance the FFT algorithm requires

that the blocksize be a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, ...., 512, 1024, 2048).
Overlap: Data blocks are overlapped to compensate for the effects of using time
windows. Applying a window means that the data at the window's edges is of
little use.
Number of averages
Specifying zero or no overlap means that each block will be processed
consecutively. Specifying a 50% overlap (as shown in the diagram above),
means that each new block will start where it overlaps the previous one by 50%.
The total number of blocks processed is the number of averages. The overlap
can be defined as a % of the blocksize.
The theory document provided on the software CD entitled “signal processing”

has more information on this topic.
Resulting function
Averaged frequency spectrum.
Rev 12A 319

Section 8.3.2.4 Curve fitting

Any.
Input parameters
The degree of the polynomial being fitted to the data.
A degree of 0 will yield the DC level. A degree of 1 will yield a linear function.
Higher degrees will yield polynomial functions with the corresponding shape.

Complex block.
Section 8.3.2.5 Smoothing
(see "Smoothing" on page 320)
Returns the linear or exponential smoothing of a function.
The Exponential Averaging is expressed by the following formula:
The smoothing is once applied in the forward direction starting from the first
value in the data block and once in the backward direction starting from the last
value in the data block.
The final result is then the average of the data smoothed in the forward and in
the backward direction.
The Linear smoothing uses (except for the first and last sample) following
algorithm:
NewX(i) = (X(i-1)+2*X(i)+X(i+1))/4.

Any.
Input parameters
Method : Linear or Exponential

Factor : Factor is the exponential factor. Weighting function between 0 and 1.0
implies no smoothing.
This parameter will be insensitive when the Linear method is selected.

Block with the smoothed data.
Section 8.3.2.6 Differentiation
Source data
Time data or frequency data. Differentiation and integration in time-domain on
time data and in frequency domain on frequency-data.
Input parameters
Single or double integration or differentiation once or twice.
Resulting function
Block with same X axis, different Y axis.
Section 8.3.2.7 Acoustic weighting
(see "Acoustic weighting" on page 321)
Applies a specified acoustic weighting to a selected function. Existing

weighting will be removed.
Source data
Any.
Input parameters
No change, Linear, A, B, C, D, AB, BC or User Defined.
Resulting function
The new-weighted version of the original data.
You can apply a user-defined weighting when you specify a reference

weighting block.
Section 8.3.2.8 Scalar math functions
These functions enable you to add, subtract, divide or multiply selected data by
a specified scalar amount.
Rev 12A 321

Source data
Any.
Input parameters
Scalar amount.
Resulting function
Block with same X axis, different Y axis.
Section 8.3.2.9 SRS Calculation
The conditioning toolbar also allows to perform a Shock Response Spectrum

Calculation, i.e. a Shock Response Analysis.
Source data
Time signal data.
Input parameters
The parameters used in the SRS calculation dialog define a shock response
spectrum.
Parameter Default setting

Minimum frequency 10 Hz
Maximum frequency 2000 Hz
Points per octave 6
SRS Q factor 10
Correction No correction
Instance Maximum
Amplitude Absolute
Dimension Abs. acceleration
SRA defaults
Resulting function
The SRS (shock response spectrum) of the original data.
Section 8.4 The Documentation worksheet
This worksheet allows you to create a set of documentation for both the project

and the sections within it. You can also select and edit a Tec.Manager template.
The attributes can be used in the Documentation worksheet.
Section 8.4.1 [Procedure] Project / Section info
 To create or edit documentation (see "[Procedure] To create or edit

documentation" on page 323)
 The User Attributes Grid (on page 324)
 The Notepad panel (on page 324)
 The Documentation List panel (see "The Attachments panel" on page 325)
 The Attachment panel (see "The Attachment Preview panel" on page 326)
Section 8.4.1.1 [Procedure] To create or edit documentation

Step 1
Choose whether you want to work with the documentation on the project level
or on the section level. If appropriate, select the required section.
Step 2
There are a number of ways in which you can create documentation to
accompany either the project or the section:
You can simply fill in the text in the notepad field.
You can attach documents or other files.
Choose which procedure you wish to follow.
Section 8.4.1.1.1 [Procedure] To fill in User Attribute values

All the User Attribute values that are stored in the project appear in the grid in
the User Attributes panel.
To edit an attribute value, double click on its corresponding Edit button to

open its “Edit Attribute” dialog where you can then enter the required value.
Note: When the extended project / section info is included you cannot modify
the attributes. All the edited fields in the template will respectively be copied to
the project and section info and can be used in the project.
Section 8.4.1.1.2 [Procedure] To create memo documents

Step 1
Click on the New from Template... button in the Documentation List panel.
The default template for a project or section document will appear in the
working area of the Attachment panel and the default name will appear in the
project or section list in the Documentation List panel.
Step 2
Rev 12A 323

Double click on the document that is displayed in the Attachment panel work
area to open the appropriate application.
Step 3
Edit this document in the application. Close the application and save the
document directly to the project. The newly completed document appears in the
Attachment panel work area.
Section 8.4.1.1.3 [Procedure] To attach files

Step 1
Click on the Import button in the Documentation List panel to access the
“Open” dialog and then browse for the file that you wish to import. Then click
on the Open button.
Step 2
The file name will then appear in the Documentation List panel and a preview
of the file itself will appear in the Attachment panel work area. Double clicking
in the Attachment panel opens the file for editing. Closing it saves your
changes.
Section 8.4.1.2 The User Attributes Grid

This grid contains a list of key value pairs that are associated with either the
project or section. It consists of a “name”, “value” and “edit” columns. Right
clicking in this area opens a popup menu that allows you to add a new attribute.
Section 8.4.1.2.1 Name

This column contains the names of the user attributes.
Section 8.4.1.2.2 Value

This column contains the values assigned to the attributes. Values can be edited
by clicking on their corresponding Edit buttons to access the appropriate “Edit
Attribute Value” dialog.
You may need to define User Attributes (see "[Procedure] To define a set of
User Attributes" on page 71).
Section 8.4.1.2.3 Edit

This column allows you to edit the values assigned to the attributes. These can
be edited by clicking on their corresponding Edit buttons to access the
appropriate “Edit Attribute Value ” dialog.
Section 8.4.1.3 The Notepad panel
Section 8.4.1.3.1 Notepad

This word processing field lets you add relevant project or section information
directly into the project or section. Entries can also be copied and pasted into

the Notepad panel.
Section 8.4.1.4 The Attachments panel
Section 8.4.1.4.1 The list of documents

All the files you have attached to or created for your documentation set are
listed here. Click on the file that you want to view or edit. Its contents will
appear in the Attachment panel. Double click on the displayed file to schedule
the appropriate application to edit it.
Section 8.4.1.4.2 The Import button

Clicking on this button, schedules a dialog from which you can select a file to
be attached to the documentation set. A whole variety of files can be attached:
documents, texts, graphics and spreadsheets. The selected file will appear in the
list and be displayed in the attachment panel. Double click on the displayed file
to schedule the corresponding application to edit the file.
When a file is attached to a documentation set, a copy is made that is saved with
the project, and all modifications will be made to this copy only. The original
file remains, unchanged, in its original location.
Section 8.4.1.4.3 The New from Template button

Clicking on this button will create a new memo document using the default
template for the project/section. The new item will appear in the list with the
default name (and possibly a number, if the same name already exists).
Click on the new entry in the list. It is automatically selected and the document
it contains is shown in the Attachment panel. Double click on it to schedule the
application used for editing the document.
It is possible to change the default memo template (see "[Procedure] To

change the default memo template" on page 73).
If you wish to use a different existing template than the default one, go to Tools
Load Documentation Template to browse for the desired template. You may
need to make a new documentation template (see "[Procedure] To make a
new memo template" on page 72) (and add it to the list of the existing ones).
Section 8.4.1.4.4 The Delete button

Clicking on this button will delete the item selected in the Documentation List.
This only deletes it from the list. The original file remains in the LMS project.
Rev 12A 325

Section 8.4.1.5 The Attachment Preview panel
Section 8.4.1.5.1 Attachment display area

This area shows a preview of the item that is selected in the Documentation List
(when possible). Double clicking in this panel schedules the application
associated with that item (if one exists) and allows you to edit the file.
Section 8.4.2 Extended Project / Section info
 To select and edit an htm- or html-template (on page 326)

In Tools Options you have to include the extended project / section
information to make the extra minor tab(s) available.
Section 8.4.2.1 To select and edit an htm- or html-template

This Extended Documentation Info will allow you to select and edit a htm- or
html-template. The attributes will then be listed in the Documentation
worksheet. They can only be edited in the Extended Documentation Info
worksheet.
Select
This button allows you to select an htm- or html-template in the HTML
template folder that was selected in the Tools>Option>Attributes Tab. The path
of the selected template will be shown in the dialog next to the button. Also a
copy of the template will be placed in directory LMSLocal\MemoInventory.
This will allow you to continue working with the template when your
connection to Tec.Manager is broken for example.
When saving a project only the path referring to the template will be saved, the
actual template will not be included in the project.
Edit
This option allows you to edit the selected template.
Accept Changes
Accepting the changes to the template will copy all the edited attributes and
their values to the Project / Section Info worksheet. They can be used in any
other worksheet, but only be edited in the Extended Project / Section Info.
Discard Changes
Discarding the changes will reset all the values of the attributes to the last saved
settings.
Remove
Clicking this button will remove the selected template and allow you to select

another template.
Section 8.5 The Data Explorer dialog
This document describes all the “Data Explorer” functionalities. These are
available in the “Data Explorer” dialog and are embedded in some worksheets
e.g. the Navigator worksheet. All the functions provided are described here.
Section 8.5.1 [Procedure] To view and manage data
The Data Explorer provides you with two views on the data - a tree view and a
detail view ( like a Windows Explorer window).
Step 1
In the Navigator worksheet, click on the Folders toggle button to see both the
tree and the detail view or to see just the detail view.
Step 2
Click on the “Vertical/Horizontal Views” icon to see the detail view either
next to the display area or above it.
Step 3
There are a number of operations that you can use the Data Explorer for:
Section 8.5.1.1 [Procedure] To view the details of data in a folder

Step 1
Click on the Folders button to display the two data views.
Step 2
Browse through the tree view on the left hand side.
Step 3
Click on an item to see its contents in the detail view on the right.
Step 4
Click on the “List all blocks” icon to filter out all data items apart from blocks.
Step 5
You can select data blocks for viewing or other operations - or you can right
click on a data block to add it to the input basket.
Section 8.5.1.2 [Procedure] To fill an input basket

The Data Explorer provides you with an input basket to store data (blocks and
waterfalls) required for specific operations in Test.Lab.
Step 1
Browse for the required data in the Tree-view window.
Rev 12A 327

Step 2
Select the item (block or waterfall) in the Detail View window,right click on it
and click on Add to Input Basket from the popup menu to add it to the input
basket.
Step 3
Browse and add as much data as required in the same way.
Step 4
Click on the input basket in the tree to see its contents in the Detail view
window.
Section 8.5.1.3 [Procedure] To search for data

Step 1
Click on the Search button.
Step 2
Fill in the fields (see "[Procedure] To execute a simple data search" on page
63).
Step 3
Click the Search Now button and the results are put into the “Search Results”
folder in the tree. Clicking on the folder displays the data in the Detail view
window where you can right click on it to save the data to the input basket if
desired.
Note: Each time you search for data, any data from a previous search is
replaced by the data from the new search.
Section 8.5.2 The Data Explorer Toolbar
This panel contains action buttons for easy use of the browser. It also contains a
field that gives the complete computer directory path to the selected data.
Section 8.5.2.1 Back
Clicking (repeatedly) on this button takes you back through the previously
opened items of the Tree-view and the Detail view lists.
Section 8.5.2.2 Forward

Clicking on this button brings you forward through the displays of the various
items of both the Tree-view and the Detail view lists that were opened (one
click per item) prior to clicking on the Back button.
Section 8.5.2.3 Parent Folder
Clicking this button opens the parent folder of the selected item currently being
displayed in the Detail View panel.
Section 8.5.2.4 Folders
Clicking on this button works as a toggle that allows you either to hide the
Detail view panel from view or to view both the Tree-view panel and the Detail
view panel at the same time.
Section 8.5.2.5 Search
Section 8.5.2.6 Vertical / Horizontal Views
Clicking on this icon lets you choose between viewing the Detail View panel
and the Display panel side by side (Vertical Detail View) or one above the other
(Horizontal Detail View).
Section 8.5.2.7 Refresh
Clicking on this button enables the browser tree to be updated to reflect changes
that have been made to the database on the server. This operation can be
executed on any data folder as well as the database containers, e.g. a TDF or
Project database.
Section 8.5.2.8 List All Blocks
Clicking this icon brings up a list of all the data blocks for a selected item in the
Tree-view panel.
Rev 12A 329

Section 8.5.2.9 Path field
This field shows you the complete address (computer directory path) of the
selected data.
Section 8.5.3 The Search panel
This panel is used for locating Projects, Sections (or tests, traces, etc.) and data
blocks. Simple procedures exist to help you execute your data search (see
"[Procedure] To execute a simple data search" on page 63).
The Search panel is described in detail below.
Section 8.5.3.1 Search button

Clicking on this button opens the data search panel which contains several fields
used for specifying search criteria.
Section 8.5.3.2 Address

When the Search panel first appears, it shows the location of the data on view in
the Detail View panel (see "The Detail View panel" on page 337). If you have
already selected the folder that has to be searched, you do not have to change
this address.
Note: Once you start the search process (by clicking on the Start search
button), the contents of the Address field changes, now it specifies the
“Search Results” folder, where the data resulting from your search will have
been put.
Section 8.5.3.3 Origin

This field lets you specify, from a dropdown menu, the general type of data that
you are searching for (LMSTest.Lab data, Cada-X Project Database, Universal
file, etc.).
Section 8.5.3.4 Search For

This field provides you with a dropdown menu from which you can choose the
specific data type that you are looking for (block, waterfall, run etc.)
Section 8.5.3.5 Look in

This field indicates the address (location/directory) where the search will be

executed. It provides you with a dropdown list that shows the history of
previous searches. It gives the addresses of the folders from where previous
searches have been made and allows you to view their contents. The “Look in”
field also allows you to further refine your search within the “Search Results”
folder.
However, if you want to change the “Address” field (at the top of the panel) in
order to search for data found in a different location, you must click on the
Folders button to go back to the browser and select your new location.
Section 8.5.3.6 Search Windows subfolders
Section 8.5.3.7 Search by properties

This function allows you to search by file properties.
Section 8.5.3.8 Property

This loads field values to be searched for (label, average type, Point id, ...) that
you choose from the dropdown menu.
To facilitate your search for the required properties, type the first letter of the
property in the field. This sets the dropdown menu to display all available fields
starting with that letter.
Section 8.5.3.9 Comparison

Here you choose the operator that will define the search criteria.
Section 8.5.3.10 Value

This field indicates the value to be searched for.
If you are not sure of the exact value of the property you can use a wild card.
The * character will search for everything.
Rev 12A 331

Section 8.5.3.11 Adv. Search

Add Criterion
Remove Selected
Replace Selected
Save Criteria
Load Criteria
Section 8.5.3.12 Adv. Sieve
Section 8.5.3.13 Search now

This starts the search using the defined criteria.
Section 8.5.3.14 Stop search

This stops the search process.
Section 8.5.3.15 More...

This opens up new fields of search criteria. It allows you to build a list of
additional criteria to be used during the search process.
Section 8.5.3.16 Add Criterion

This takes a selected criterion from the list of available criteria and adds it to
your list.
Section 8.5.3.17 Remove Selected Criterion

This removes a selected criterion from your list.
Section 8.5.3.18 Save criteria

This allows you to save the criteria to the project. You are first asked to give the
criteria file a name.
Section 8.5.3.19 Load criteria

This loads your list of criteria into the search program, where it will now be
taken into account during the next search process.
Section 8.5.4 The Tree-view browser panel
The Test.Lab directory in the Tree-view contains a number of top level entries,

each of which is described here along with the actions that can be performed on
these items.
Section 8.5.4.1 ASAM ODS
This is the entry point for connections to ASAM ODS servers. Clicking on the
sign next to this icon opens the list of all ASAM ODS servers that have been
configured to be visible for the Test.Lab software.
Section 8.5.4.2 My Links
This icon indicates the collection of bookmarks (or links) made to specific data
items. You may wish to create links (see "[Procedure] To create and export
links (bookmarks)" on page 55).
Clicking on the sign next to the “My Links” icon will reveal the link folders
or specific links that are currently defined.
The links icon can be a link to either one specific data entry or to a
collection of items. This will be indicated both from the 'link to (item)' entry and
whether there is a sign in front of it.
Data that is referenced by a link can be identified by the different data icons
described below and can be viewed directly in the appropriate type of display
window.
Section 8.5.4.3 Current Project
This folder contains all the sections and the results of the conditioning in
the current project. You'll find these results in the “Processing” folders.
Section 8.5.4.4 Network
The “Network Hub” add-in must be loaded for the Network to be available in
the Tree-view browser panel.
Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal the list of StartPoints on the
network from which you can access resources. All the StartPoints appearing in
this list have been defined as part of the installation and configuration
procedures of all the Data Servers in the network. Therefore, they have all been
registered with the StartPoint Server.
If there is a problem connecting to a StartPoint, then this will be indicated by
Rev 12A 333

the presence of the “Not OK” icon . This can be for a number of reasons; for
example that the server is not running, or the folder has been removed from the
server. Try to correct the problem at source and then right click on the item that
is not OK and select Reconnect.
When searching for data that can be viewed in display windows in the
Navigator worksheet then there are several types of databases that can be
searched for. The icons described below represent these.
Section 8.5.4.5 Search Results
Here you find the results of your latest search for comparative data.
Note: Data from a new search replaces existing data in the Search Results
folder.
If you wish to keep search results permanently, they must be saved to the Input
Basket folder. This is made possible by displaying the Search Results data in the
Detail view window and right clicking on them.
Section 8.5.4.6 Input Basket

You fill this basket (see "[Procedure] To fill an input basket" on page 327) (or
folder) with a set of data that you require for a specific operation. There is only
one Input Basket for an active session, but data from other baskets can be
imported into it.
You can also include data in the Input Basket that has been imported from
baskets created in LMS Tec.Manager. If you have this option, you access it by
clicking on the Tec.Manager icon in the Test.Lab toolbar.
Section 8.5.4.7 Online Data
This folder lets you view the online data that has been defined for an
acquisition.
Section 8.5.4.8 Workspace
This folder can hold any temporary data. This data can result from copy/paste
actions or from calculations by the software (intermediate results).
The content of the workspace is lost when leaving the workbook. Data blocks in
workspace can be moved to the active project using the Move to active project
option from the pop-up menu obtained by right clicking on the data block.

Section 8.5.4.9 My Computer
This folder gives you access to all the drives on your computer, as well as all
mapped network drives. Via this way, you can browse to any data type - LMS
and non-LMS formats.
Section 8.5.4.10 Actions

A number of operations can be performed on the items in the Test.Lab directory
browser list. All of the actions described here are accessed from the popup
menu obtained by right clicking on the name of the item. The actions described
here are not necessarily applicable in their entirety to all of the items.
Add Attachment
This operation adds an attachment to the selected folder.
Add Memo Document

This operation adds a selected memo document to the item.
Add Folder
This operation adds a folder to the selected folder.
Add to Input Basket

This operation adds the selected item to the Input basket.
Replace in Input Basket

This operation replaces the items in the Input Basket with the selected items.
Empty Input Basket

This operation empties the Input basket.
Activate This Section

This operation activates the selected section.
View Setup Parameters

Print Setup Parameters
Copy
This operation copies the selected data function, and you can then paste it
directly into a display window.
Edit Properties
This operation opens a dialog that lets you correct data properties.
This operation can only be performed on data in the active project. When
Rev 12A 335

selected on throughput data a dialog is opened that allows you to correct the
Sensitivity factor in addition to the Point id, Point dir and User channel ID. A
new run is created containing the corrected throughput data. The original
throughput data will not be changed.
Delete
This allows you to delete the selected data item.
Empty Input Basket

Import
This operation can be performed on folders in the bookmark collection or
on the collection itself It enables you to access bookmark references created
by other users and placed on a shared file for general access. A dialog is
scheduled in which you can select the directory from where the bookmark
reference is to be imported. Select the required file with the suffix .bmk. Click
on Open to import the bookmark. It will be placed within the book or in the
selected folder.
Import into Active Project

This operation allows to import data stored in a SCADAS Recorder data file. A
new run will be created with a TDF file holding the imported data. This
operation is only available when the 'SCADAS Recording' add-in is loaded.
Export To
This operation allows you to export a data item from the Data Explorer to any
one of the following types of file formats: LMSCada-X, Universal File, SDF,
Matlab, DynaWorks, Text, Wav and Single Wav.
Exporting to Single Wav allows you to append the selected data items together
and write into a single wav file.
It is also possible to export GPS data from a throughput file to NMEA of KML
files or it is even possible to open Google Earth with this GPS data. These
actions are available in the popup menu van a throughput file. Data reduction is
done as specified in the Tools Options - General tab.
List Settings
This opens up a dialog with a list of the settings for the selected section. The
items in the list will depend on the application in which the section was created.
Edit User Attributes

New Folder
This operation creates a new (empty) folder.
Paste
This operation pastes an item into the selected folder.

Paste as Link
This operation pastes an item as a link into the selected folder.
Edit Properties
Properties
This is available on all items. It brings up the properties dialog in which
attributes relating to the item can be read. Fields can be copied into the report if
required using the popup menu in the dialog.
Rename
This operation renames the selected item.
Refresh
View/Change TDF (full) name...
On a Throughput file in the active project, you have the popup option
"View/Change TDFname". For a measured TDF, only the name is shown in the
pop-up. The TDF is located on the same directory as the Test.Lab database (in
the folder /project/section/run ). When the throughput data was processed, you
see also a throughput file in the processing run, which is a link to the measured
throughput file. In this case, "View/Change TDF full name" shows the complete
path to the TDF file. (e.g. :\LMS_Local_Dir\Data\my_project\section 1\run
1\run 1)
View Settings
This displays the current test setup for a section as a Word document.
Note: Changes made here will not apply unless you save the changes when you
exit the application.
Section 8.5.5 The Detail View panel
Selecting an item in the Tree-view browser replaces the Detail View Panel with
the contents of the selected item.
Rev 12A 337

Section 8.5.5.1 Detail view list

Items can be either dragged from the detailed list and dropped into a chosen
layout in the display area or selected for other processes.
Section 8.5.5.2 Actions

The same operations that can be performed on items (see "Actions" on page
335) in the Tree-view browser can also be performed on items in the Detail
view list. They are accessed from the popup menu obtained by right clicking on
the name of the item. These actions are not all necessarily applicable to all of
the items.
Additional actions are obtained by right clicking on data blocks. This is only
possible in the Detail view panel. The Tree-view panel does not show block
details.
Add Memo Document

This operation adds a selected memo document to the item.
Add to Input Basket

This operation adds the selected item to the Input basket.
Replace in Input Basket

This operation replaces the items in the Input Basket with the selected items.
Empty Input Basket

Activate This Section

This operation activates the selected section.
View Setup Parameters

Print Setup Parameters
Copy
This operation copies the selected data function, and you can then paste it
directly into a display window.
Edit Properties

Delete
This allows you to delete the selected data item.
Export to
This operation allows you to export a data item from the Data Explorer to any
one of the following types of file formats: LMSCada-X, Universal File, SDF,
Matlab, DynaWorks, Text, Wav and Single Wav.
Exporting to Single Wav allows you to append the selected data items together
and write into a single wav file.
It is also possible to export GPS data from a throughput file to NMEA of KML
files or it is even possible to open Google Earth with this GPS data. These
actions are available in the popup menu van a throughput file. Data reduction is
done as specified in the Tools Options - General tab.
Play Sound
This operation plays the selected sound data.
Move to active project

This operation moves a data block in workspace to a folder in the active project.
A dialog is scheduled in which you can select the folder to move to.
View/Change TDF (full) name...

On a Throughput file in the active project, you have the popup option
"View/Change TDFname". For a measured TDF, only the name is shown in the
pop-up. The TDF is located on the same directory as the Test.Lab database (in
the folder /project/section/run ). When the throughput data was processed, you
see also a throughput file in the processing run, which is a link to the measured
throughput file. In this case, "View/Change TDF full name" shows the complete
path to the TDF file. (e.g. :\LMS_Local_Dir\Data\my_project\section 1\run
1\run 1)
Filter
This provides a quick filtering of data in the Navigator worksheet. It offers the
possibility to show or hide certain items in a column. The functionality and
usability is similar to an auto-filter in an Excel-sheet. The Filter entry is
available by right clicking on the background in the Detail View panel.
8.5.5.2.1.1 Auto Filter
When checking “on” the Auto Filter, every column is provided with a
dropdown menu in the header. This menu contains a list with all the different
items in that specific column. By checking or unchecking an item, a filtering
can be applied.
The Auto filter can be disabled by unchecking the Auto Filter in the dropdown
menu.
Rev 12A 339

8.5.5.2.1.2 Show All

When a filtering is already applied on the data, you can choose Show All to
show all available data in the Detail View panel.
Select Columns...
Right clicking on the background in the Detail View panel opens a dropdown
menu in which you can choose the entry Select Columns... In this dialog you
can first select the origin and then the type for which you want to specify a
column. Select the columns you wish to display from the list of “available”
columns and put them in the list of “selected” columns. You can sort the display
order of the columns by clicking on the arrow icons. Apply your column list
choices by clicking on the Apply button.
Sort
Now you can use the different columns in the Detail View panel to sort the
available data. You can define the sorting order by selecting the Sort... entry in
the dropdown menu that can be opened by right clicking on a column header or
on the background of the Data View panel. Doing this schedules a dialog box in
which a sort order can be defined by selecting the corresponding columns in the
specified order, and selecting whether data should be sorted in ascending or
descending order. Click on Apply to apply the sorting on the data.
Edit User Attributes

Rename
This operation renames the selected item.
Auto Sort
The Auto Sort function can also be applied by right clicking on a column
header. This will apply a sorting on the Data Set using the settings in the
Tools>Options>Sorting Tab.
Load View
By right clicking on the background of the Detail View panel, a previous saved
view can be loaded. All the settings regarding columns and sorting will be
applied on the available data.
Save View
The selecting/ordering of the columns and the sorting of data within the Detail
View panel can be saved. Save View is available by right clicking on the
background of the Detail View panel. The file will be saved on the location
specified in the Tools>Options>File Location Tab.

Double Clicking
By double clicking on a picture tab or name, the selected picture pops up and
becomes active. You can also change the name of the picture.
Section 8.6 The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet
This part of the Navigator worksheet enables you to create pictures of your data.
Section 8.6.1 [Procedure] To create pictures of your data
This procedure describes how to access data, place it into various pictures and
adapt the appearance of the displays.
Step 1
In the Tree-browser panel of the Data Explorer, browse for the folder containing
the data that you wish to view. Click to see the details in the Detail View on the
right.
Note: Click on the List All Blocks button (on the basket icon) if you want to
see all available blocks in the selected section or folder.
Step 2
Select an appropriate layout, either by clicking on a layout icon or from the
“Create a Picture” dialog (both found in the Picture Selection bar).
Step 3
A representation of the selected layout will appear in the display area and a
“New Picture” tab will appear with an identifying number.
Note: A layout must have the number and type of displays that you want for
your final presentation. While you can adjust the attributes of a display in the
worksheet, you can not change either the display type or the number of displays
in the layout.
Step 4
If the layout is not suitable, click on the picture tab and then click on Delete.
If you cannot find a suitable layout, select View Layout management. This
Rev 12A 341

schedules the “Layout management” dialog (see "The Layout management

dialog" on page 79) in which you can create a new layout.
Step 5
Once both the required data and a suitable layout are available, and before
actually loading any data into a display, you can preview various data to choose
what to put into your picture.
Step 6
Load specific data items by dragging them into the display.
To load a data function record into a FrontBack display, position the mouse
over the required item, and drag it into the required display, dropping it onto
either the left (front) or the right (back) axis. In fact dropping it anywhere in the
left hand side of the display will add it to the front axis. Similarly, dropping it
anywhere on the right hand side will add it to the back axis.
Note: The display must be either empty or be displaying data of the same type
as you are loading.
To view waterfall data in a display, drag and drop the data into either a
Colormap or Waterfall display and it will become visualized.
An alternative method of loading data is to right click on the data in the Data
Explorer and select Copy from the menu. You can then go to the display
window required and position the cursor in the left half of the display if you
want to place the curve on the front axis or the right half of the display if you
want to place the curve on the back axis. Right click and select “Paste” (“to
front” or “to back”) depending on which half of the display that you are in.
Further data records can be dropped into the same display. Right click the line
or curve and select Remove Curve in order to remove a single record. All
curves can be removed with a Ctrl + right click in the display area and selecting
Remove All Curves from the popup menu.
Note: It is not possible to remove individual curves from a waterfall display.
Step 7
When the data is in the required display, adjust its appearance as required using
all the functions available in the display windows. Save the picture if required.
You can now copy the picture into another application, if desired.
Section 8.6.1.1 To preview data

Step 1
Choose the window in the layout that you want to use for viewing the data.
Note: It is recommended that you remove existing curves from this window -
particularly those that are on the back (right hand) axis in a FrontBack
window.
Step 2
Right click inside that window and select Preview mode from the menu.

The preview mode icon will appear above that window.

Step 3
In the Detail view panel, select the data that you want to preview. The data will
immediately appear in the window.
If an item in the Detail view is already highlighted, it will appear automatically
in the window when you click on Preview mode.
Note: When the Preview mode is used in a FrontBack window, the data is
added to the right (back) axis.
A number of data functions can be previewed at a time. Clicking on a second

function with the Ctrl key depressed will add that function to the window.
Step 4
Click on a different data entry and the display will be refreshed.
Step 5
When you have scanned through the data and you are ready to prepare the
picture for presentation, then you can switch the Preview mode off.
Section 8.6.1.2 [Procedure] To copy pictures to another application

Step 1
Start up the receiving application (such as Word® or PowerPoint®) and then
Copy and Paste the item into it.
Step 2
To transfer the contents of one single display or one window in a layout to an
application. Right click near the required window while keeping the Ctrl key
depressed. Select Copy Metafile from the Display menu. The copied image will
appear in the application.
Step 3
To transfer the contents of a complete display or a whole picture, click on the
picture tab to display the popup menu. This provides you with number of
options (see "Picture tabs" on page 346) to copy your picture.
You can also print your pictures based on a predefined format.
Section 8.6.1.3 [Procedure] To print your picture

You can print unformatted active pictures by simply clicking on the print
icon in the Desktop toolbar. The following procedure shows you how to print
your pictures using a predefined format.
Step 1
Click on the picture tab that identifies the picture that you wish to print and
then click on the appropriate entry in the dialog:
Print
This prints your picture with your project's default format, if one exists.
Rev 12A 343

Print with
This opens the “Formats” window containing a list of all available print
formats. Click on the desired format to print your picture using the chosen
format.
You may wish to create a print format (see "[Procedure] To create a

single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 75).
Note: If you wish to print to an electronic file, you must select Electronic as the
Output option in the Printing Options dialog.
Section 8.6.2 The Data Explorer
The Data Explorer has been embedded in the Navigator worksheet to simplify
data selection and storage. There is a Tree-view browser panel (see "The
Tree-view browser panel" on page 332) and a Detail View browser panel (see
"The Detail View panel" on page 337), as well as the Data Explorer toolbar
(on page 328) containing action buttons. The Data Explorer can be accessed
from other worksheets by simply clicking on the Data Explorer icon in the
LMSTest.Lab toolbar.
Section 8.6.2.1 The Data Explorer browsers and toolbar

The Data Explorer consists of browsers and a toolbar. (see "The Data
Explorer dialog" on page 327)
Section 8.6.3 The Picture Display panel
This panel is where pictures are made. A picture consists of a display window
contained in a layout. The data is visualized graphically in the window.
Section 8.6.3.1 The Picture display area

The picture is created and adapted in this area, based on a chosen layout.
Section 8.6.3.2 Layout

A layout is an arrangement of display windows of a particular type and with a
defined set of attributes. A layout is selected from the pane header above the
display windows.
Number of displays
This is determined by the original layout selected. It is not possible to add or

remove displays from an existing layout. To change the number of displays, you
need to select a different layout or to create a new one.
Size of displays
Pressing the Ctrl key and dragging one side of the display to make it bigger or
smaller can adjust the relative size of a display in a layout. You cannot however
make it bigger than its proportion of the original overall layout.
Display type
This is defined when the layout is created. It cannot be adapted at another time,
and so to obtain different types of displays you must either select a different
layout or edit the layout in the 'Layout management dialog'.
Display attributes
The characteristics of the display axes and display area can be set using entries
from the popup menus obtained in and around each window in the layout. The
entries in these menus depend on the type of window.
Section 8.6.3.3 Data

The data forms the contents of the display and the other component of the
picture. Data can be dragged into the picture either from the browser panel or
from the data selector dialog. The data has a number of attributes:
Curve Properties
Right click the data curve itself and select Curve Properties in order to adjust
the color and appearance of a data curve.
Remove
You can remove a data curve from a display by right clicking on the curve and
selecting Remove Curve.
Selection status
In a FrontBack display, you can 'select' data by left clicking on that curve. This
will generate markers on the curve and cursor values will be displayed for these
points when a cursor is dragged over the curves.
You can deselect the same curve by left clicking on it while keeping the Ctrl
key down.
Left clicking on another curve will toggle the selection status.
Curves can be added to or removed from the selection status by clicking on

them while holding down the Ctrl or Shift keys or via the legend.
Rev 12A 345

Section 8.6.4 The Picture Selection bar
This pane header above the display area is where you can select layouts in
which to view your data, and activate the picture you want to work with. It
consists of the following items.
Section 8.6.4.1 Create a picture
The names of all layouts that are available for use (favorites and others) can be
selected from the Layouts dialog that appears. Once selected, the layout will
appear in the data display panel as a new, empty picture.
Section 8.6.4.2 Layout icons
Each layout that has been added to the list of favorites in the “Layout
management” dialog (see "The Layout management dialog" on page 79) will
have an icon displayed here. If you have not specified a particular bitmap to be
associated with the layout then a “plain” icon will be displayed. Simply click on
the icon to load the layout.
Section 8.6.4.3 Picture tabs
A new, empty picture is created each time a layout is selected and a tab appears
to identify and access this picture. Simply clicking on the picture tab activates
and shows the picture. Clicking on the picture tab of an activated picture opens
a dropdown menu that allows you to perform a number of operations on the
active picture:
Move First
Allows you to change the order of the layouts. It will move the current layout
completely to the left in the list.
Move Last
completely to the right in the list.

Move Left
Allows you to change the order of the layouts. The current layout will move one
place to the left in the list.
Move Right
place to the right in the list.
Copy to Metafile
Word and PowerPoint and the contents (the text strings, fonts, lines and colors,
etc.) can be edited within the document.
Copy to Bitmap
A bitmap is a picture format with a fixed number of pixels and colors. It can be
pasted into an application such as Word or PowerPoint and the picture can be
sized within the document. It can be opened in a suitable graphic editing
application, saved as a specific file and edited to a certain extent.
Copy as Active picture (embedded data)

In this case, not only is the picture copied, but the functionality in the
LMSTest.Lab display is available too. All the formatting functions, e.g. adding
and removing cursors, is accessible in the document. File sizes of such pictures
can become quite large.
Copy as Active picture (linked data)

Similar to above except now links are made to the data making the file sizes
smaller. For the links to be valid, the original data must be accessible from the
computer where the document is opened.
Make Printformat
This is the easy way to create a default format (see "[Procedure] To create a
single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 75) for the
layout.
Print
The contents of the picture will be printed using the default print format
connected to the layout from which the picture was made.
Print with...
This allows you to print the picture with a different format to the default print
format. The Formats dialog appears and you can choose a format from the list
of available formats.
Rename
This schedules the Rename Active Tab dialog that allows you to change the
Rev 12A 347

name of the active picture.
Duplicate
This allows you to duplicate a layout within the active section. All settings and
data will also be copied. The new layout will be renamed as 'Copy of' the
original layout.
Delete
Click the active tab and select Delete from the dropdown menu in order to
remove the active picture.
Delete All Pictures

Click the active tab and select Delete All Pictures from the dropdown menu in
order to remove the active picture and all your other pictures in the active
section.
Replace Data Origin

Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data origin of the
functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be done
for broken links as well. The replace will only work if the path to the new data
is identical to the path of the existing data in the displays.
The data origin can be ‘Project’ , ‘Section’ or ‘Run/Analysis/…’ or a

measurement cycle (3th level folder). When selecting ‘project’, a list of the
projects, originating the data in the picture(s), is shown. This list contains
regular testlab projects, ldsf files, tdf files, and non-lms databases. The origin of
unsaved data is not shown. When pushing Browse, a different project can be
selected.
When selecting ‘section’, a list of all sections is shown, originating the data in
the picture(s) – only for LMS projects. When pushing Browse, a different
section can be selected.
When selecting ‘run/Analysis/…’, a list of all ‘2d level’ items of a project

(being all runs, analysis, folders on sections) is shown, originating the data in
‘folder’ can be selected – please be careful to select the corresponding
run/analysis/folder in case of broken links.
When selecting ‘measurement cycle/3th level folder’, a list of all ‘3th level’
items of a project are shown, originating the data in the picture(s) – only for
LMS projects. When clicking on Browse, a different ‘folder’ can be selected.
In case an origin (Project/Section/Run/measurement cycle) does not exist, it is

coloured red.
When clicking Apply, the link to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new selected origin.

Replace Data
Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data individually of
the functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be
done for broken links as well.
For each individual function in the picture(s), you can see which picture, display
and target it belongs, its ‘data origin’ (e.g. being the project containing the data)
and its ‘Data location’ (the structure inside the project). The ‘Data origin’ and
the ‘Data location’ can be changed with the browse button, or –only for test.lab
data - with typing in its new name.
You also see the Dof ID, the Ref DOF Id and the section value for each data
block. When altering these, the data location and data origin will be adapted
immediately. The new data is searched for on the folder itself or 1 folder up (in
case of waterfalls or referenced spectra). The result data will have the same
function classes as the original data. If it is not found, the cell is red and you
cannot click on OK.
You can duplicate data and remove data, move data up and down in the same
target of a display.
When clicking Apply, the links to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new list.
Save as Layout
With this functionality, the current picture (including its settings and data) is
saved as a layout (for the current user) – a name for the layout is asked. When
creating a new picture, this layout can be selected.
Section 8.7 The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet
The Data Presentation worksheet is used for format based printing of your data
to either a printing device or to an electronic document.
Format based printing allows you to print your picture based on a predefined
format where both its appearance settings (picture size, etc.) and data settings
(format, scaling, etc.) have already been predefined. Other properties that need
to be visualized can be defined as well.
Section 8.7.1 [Procedure] To print data using a predefined print

format
Step 1
Click on the down arrow of the picture and select Print with....
You may need to create a print format (see "[Procedure] To create a
Rev 12A 349

single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 75).

Step 2
Select the desired predefined format from the list in the popup menu that
appears.
Note: The selected format must be compatible with the picture that you want to
print.
For example, you cannot print a Waterfall picture with a print format based on a
FrontBack picture.
If you choose an incompatible format for your picture, a warning message
appears. If the list of available print formats is empty, you will need to create a
print format.
Step 3
In the File menu, click on Printing Options... to open the Printing Options
dialog. Click on the appropriate radio buttons depending on the type of
operation you wish to perform.
Note: If you wish to print to an electronic file, you must select Electronic as the
Output option in the Printing Options dialog.
Step 4
Print the data in the chosen format by clicking on Print in the File menu or by
simply clicking on the icon in the LMSTest.Lab toolbar.
A quicker way to print a picture using a predefined format is to click on the
down arrow of the picture and select Print. The print format with the same
name as the layout will be automatically used. If this print format does not exist,
a simple print of the picture will be produced.
Step 5
The following procedure is very useful when you need to print a report based on
a print format containing more than one picture (which is the case for most
reports):
Section 8.7.1.1 [Procedure] To print a multi-picture report

Step 1
In the Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet, click on Load a format... to
open the list of predefined formats. (If the list is empty, you need to create a
predefined format.)
Step 2
Select the desired format. All the layouts of the chosen format are loaded into
the Navigator worksheet as separate pictures.
Step 3
Drag and drop your data into the relevant pictures and print the report by
clicking on Print in the File menu.

Section 8.7.2.1 Data Explorer

The Data Explorer (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on page 327) is found
on several worksheets.
Section 8.7.3 The Format display panel
This panel is where data is formatted using print formats.
Section 8.7.3.1 The Format display area

This area displays the data for formatting purposes.
Section 8.7.4 The Format selection bar
This pane header above the display area is where you can select the formats in
which to publish your data.
Section 8.7.4.1 Load a format

Clicking on this opens a dialog that lets you choose a format from a list of all
available print formats. You may need to create a print format (see
"[Procedure] To create a single-picture print format in the Data Viewing
worksheet" on page 75).

When using a format, the same “picture” tabs that appear in the Navigator -
Data Viewing worksheet (each time that a layout is selected) also appear at the
top of the Format Display panel in the Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet.
Simply clicking on the picture tab (with its corresponding identification
number) activates the picture.
Rev 12A 351

Section 8.8 The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet
This worksheet allows you to calculate your own processing functions (see
"Data Calculator Functions" on page 254) using either individual data items or
combinations of data items.
The output of a derived processing function is specified as an expression based

on data items, arithmetic operators and mathematical functions.
This minor worksheet in the Navigator worksheet is composed of:
Section 8.8.1 The Data Explorer panel
An area for data navigation and data folder selection.
Section 8.8.2 The Data Set panel
This shows the data you want to use for calculations in a list.
Section 8.8.3 The Active Formula Set panel
Here you can define your formulas.
Section 8.8.4 The Picture display panel
An area where you can view the result of the calculations using the formulas
that you defined.
Section 8.8.5 [Procedure] To define a processing function
Section 8.8.5.1 [Procedure] To select the input data

Step 1
In the Tree-browser panel of the Data Explorer, browse for the folder containing
the data that you wish to use.

This can be any folder with data that can be opened in the Navigator worksheet.
Step 2
Select the data folder that you want to use.
When a folder with data is selected, its contents are immediately displayed in
the Detail View panel alongside. Select the data and click on the Add or
Replace button to add the data to the Data Set.
Each item in the Data Set is annotated in a separate column by an index, starting
from 1. These indices are used for the definition of the calculation.
Section 8.8.5.2 [Procedure] To add the input data to the data set
Step 1
Select the data you want to use for calculations in the detail view list of the
browse tree.
Step 2
Click the Add button in the Data Set Toolbar.

The Data is now listed in the Data Set.
Step 3
Alternatively, you can replace data from the Data Set with data you have
selected in the detail view list by clicking the Replace button .
The number of data items you want to replace must be the same as the number
of data items you have selected in the detail view list.
Section 8.8.5.3 [Procedure] To define a function

Step 1
Select your input data by following the procedure above.
The "Active Formula Set" panel contains a table that allows you to define a list
of functions.
Step 2
Alternatively, collect all your input data using the Input Basket.
Step 3
Select the edit field or an empty cell in the "Formula" column of the "Active
Formula Set" panel to define a new function.
Step 4
Click the Insert Function icon to insert a function into the Formula Editor
at the current position of the cursor, if required.
This schedules the Select Function dialog.
Step 5
Select the function that you want to use from the list in the Select Function
dialog.
Rev 12A 353

Step 6
Specify the needed functions and parameters in the pop up window and click
OK. The function is added in the Active Formula list.
Alternatively, you can type the formula and its parameters directly in an empty
formula cell or in the formula editor above the table.
To indicate a specific item in the Data List, use the notation "Fn" (function
number) , where n is the index of the specific item in the list.
For example, if you wanted to add the second item (F2) to the fifth data item
(F5) of a data list, you would enter:
F2+F5.
Most of the functions use one or more data items, and use the word "function"
to indicate a data item.
For instance, the function "SUM(function;function)" calculates the SUM of all
the data items between two specified data items.
So, after selection of the function, you should fill in the functions for which you
want to calculate the sum in the pop-up window.
If you want to calculate the sum of the data items with index number 2 and 7,
you would edit the function "SUM(function ; function)" to become "SUM(F2 ;
F7)".
Note: The “;” means AND, like sum (F2 AND F7), while “:” means from...
to..., like sum (from F2 to F7).
Step 7
Press OK to close the Select Function dialog.
Step 8
Indicate the range in the “Repeat for...” column of the Formula Set table, if you
want to calculate the formula on a range of data items.
In the “Repeat for... ” column, cells have the format "a:b", where a is the lowest
index and b the highest index number.
Note: The notation Fx should be used in the formula to indicate that a range of
data items is used.
(F16).
Formula definition
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).

Step 9
When you have finished entering the formula, press the Enter key of your
keyboard to check the validity of the formula.
If the checkbox of the "Ok" column is green then the formula is valid. If it is not
ok, it turns red and some information is displayed in the logging window.
Step 10
Continue to add formulas following the steps above until the table is complete.
Step 11
Use the icons in the formula set panel to modify the number and order of the
rows in the table, if required.
Step 12
Follow the procedure below to save your results.
Section 8.8.5.4 [Procedure] To edit a function

Step 1
Load, if required, using the "Load FormulaSet from DFS file" icon , the
table that contains the formula that you want to edit.
Step 2
Select the row or the cell in the "Function" column of the table to edit an
existing formula.
The formula will be displayed on top of the table in the formula editor.
Step 3
Edit the formula as required and press Enter.
Alternatively, when you hit the Edit button, the function selection dialog will
pop up, offering you some help on how you can edit the formula.
Section 8.8.5.5 [Procedure] To execute the formulas and view the

results
Step 1
Define a new formula or edit an existing formula if required following the
procedure above.
Step 2
Click on “Calculate” to calculate all formulas, or click on “Calculate selected”
to calculate only the selected formulas.
The results are added to the workspace and visible in the data set list.
Note: The result will be a number of data items if you specified a range in the
“Repeat For...” column.
Step 3
Select an appropriate layout by clicking on a layout icon.
Step 4
Select a row in the data set or select just the “Name” cell and drag and drop it
Rev 12A 355

into the display to visualise it.

(F20). And, you only want to use every other data item.
You would define the formula ("Fx/2") in the Formula column, the range
("10:20") in the Repeat for... column, and the increment (2) in the Increment
column.
(F10/2, F12/2, F14/2, F16/2, F18/2 and F20/2). To display the results, drag and
drop them in a display.
Section 8.8.5.6 [Procedure] To save the results

When you hit the “calculate” button, results are temporarily stored in the
Workspace. To save your results in the active project:
Step 1
Select the results you want to save in the Data Set.
Step 2
Press the Save Selected as... button.
This schedules the Save In Active Project dialog.
Step 3
Browse and select the location in the active project where you want to save the
results.
Step 4
Press OK to save the results and to close the Save In Active Project dialog.
To save all the results you have calculated, hit the Save Results As button
and follow the directions as described above.
Section 8.8.6.1 The Data Explorer browsers and toolbar

The Data Explorer consists of browsers and a toolbar. (see "The Data
Explorer dialog" on page 327)

Section 8.8.7 The Data Set panel
The Data Set contains input data for which you want to do calculations, as well
as the calculated results. Information on the data set is shown in a table with
rows and columns.
The data in this table can be sorted. The sorting can be defined in the same way
as for the details part of the Data Explorer (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on
page 327): double clicking a column header sorts the data following that
criterion.
Section 8.8.7.1 The data set toolbar icons
Section 8.8.7.1.1 Add
Data selected in the detail view list of the browse tree is added to the data set.
Section 8.8.7.1.2 Replace
Data selected in the data set is replaced with data selected in the detail view list.
Section 8.8.7.1.3 Add from Input basket
Data from the input basket is added to the data set.
Section 8.8.7.1.4 Replace from Input basket
Data selected in the data set is replaced with data from the input basket.
Section 8.8.7.1.5 Delete
The data items selected in the data set are removed from the data set.
Section 8.8.7.2 The Data Set Table

The Data Set table displays a list of the input data with some of their properties.
Rev 12A 357

Some of the properties that are displayed are the following:
Id
Name
Formula
Point Id
Point Dir
Y Unit
X-axis
Fs
Section 8.8.7.3 Data Set buttons
Section 8.8.7.3.1 Save results as...

Hit this button to save all the calculated results in the active project.
Section 8.8.7.3.2 Save selected as...
Hit this button to save the selected data items in the active project. To be able to
save data with the Save Selected As button, you must first select an entire
row. This can be done by clicking on the number of the row, in the first column.
Section 8.8.7.3.3 Clear Results

Removes all the calculated results from the Data Set. Data that was imported
into the Data Set using the Data Set toolbar icons cannot be removed.

Section 8.8.7.3.4 Edit Properties...
This allows you to edit some properties of the selected data items, in case these
are calculated results. The properties of Data that was imported into the Data
Set using the Data Set toolbar icons cannot be edited.
8.8.7.3.4.1 Label
This is where the name of the Data is displayed.
If the Keep label checkbox is active, this name (label) will not change due to
other changes.
8.8.7.3.4.2 Change
Activate the appropriate checkbox to change certain properties. Activate the
checkbox next to Change to activate all the underlying checkboxes. You can
change up to six properties at once.
8.8.7.3.4.3 Property
From the dropdown menu, you can choose the property of the date you wish to
edit. Up to six different properties can be edited at once.
8.8.7.3.4.4 Value
This dropdown menu will adapt accordingly to the property that was selected in
the Property dropdown menu (see above).
You can change the value by selecting the desired value from the Value
Rev 12A 359

dropdown menu.
8.8.7.3.4.5 Edit Properties dialog buttons
Previous / Next
These buttons allow you to switch from one data block to another.
Apply to Current
Press this button to apply the changes to the current data.
Apply to All
Restore
This restores the changed properties to their original values.
Close
This closes the Edit Properties Dialog.
Section 8.8.8 The Active Formula Set panel
In this panel, the calculation functions can be defined.
A new function can be defined by:
Section 8.8.8.1 Selecting an empty line in the table

Section 8.8.8.2 Selecting an empty cell

Section 8.8.8.3 Pressing the "Create New Function" icon

Note: A data item is referred to as "Fn" (function number), where n is the

index number of the data item. For example, F3 indicates the third data item
Section 8.8.8.4 Formula Set icons

You can use these icons for a number of actions, among which: add a new
formula row to the table, delete a formula row, move a formula one row up, or
to move it one row down...
Section 8.8.8.4.1 New FormulaSet
This starts a new formula definition table by clearing the table of the current
FormulaSet.
Section 8.8.8.4.2 Save FormulaSet to DFS file
This saves the active Formula set by scheduling the Save DataCalculator
FormulaSet dialog.
Specify the location and name of the FormulaSet file (the DFS extension is
automatically added) and then click Save.
Note: It is possible to read and write this file (with window applications such
as Excel or Notepad).
Section 8.8.8.4.3 Load FormulaSet from DFS file
This loads an existing formula set by scheduling the "Select DataCalculator

FormulaSet" dialog.
Specify the location and name of an existing FormulaSet file with a DFS
extension and then click Open.
Section 8.8.8.4.4 Create new formula
This will create a new formula with the current Formula Editor entry.
Section 8.8.8.4.5 Delete the selected Formula
Rev 12A 361

This will remove the selected formula(s) from the Formula Set.
Section 8.8.8.4.6 Move up
This will move the selected formula one position up.
To do so, first select the entire row by clicking the number in front of the row.
Section 8.8.8.4.7 Move down
This will move the selected formula one position down.
To do so, first select the entire row by clicking the number in front of the row.
Section 8.8.8.4.8 Insert a function
This inserts a function into the Formula Editor at the current position of the
cursor.
It schedules the Select Function dialog (see "Data Calculator Functions" on

page 254) where you can select the function to use.
Section 8.8.8.4.9 Renumber FormulaSet
When there is a conflict in the Ids of the Data Set and the Ids of the formulas,
"Renumber FormulaSet" will set the Ids of the formulas in the Active formula
set such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest Id of the
data items in the Data Set.
Section 8.8.8.5 Formula Editor

Below the formula set icons is the input field of the Formula Editor where you
can define and edit a formula.
Select the row you want to edit in the Active Formula Set table and edit the
formula in the Formula Editor field.
Section 8.8.8.5.1 Formula Editor

In defining a formula, mathematical symbols +, -, * and / can be used.
Additional functions can be accessed through pressing the Insert function icon

. This opens up a dialog with an extensive set of functions that can be used.
When the exact format of a function is known, it can be typed in directly in the
formula edit field, instead of using this dialog.
Most of the functions use one or more data items in their argument, and so use
the word "function" to indicate that.
For instance the function "SUM(function ; function)" calculates the SUM of

two functions.
So, after selection of the function, you should replace the words "function" with
the data items that you want to use. A data item is referred to as "Fn", where n is
the index number of the data item. For example, F2 indicates the second data
item in the Data List with index number 2.
To calculate the SUM of all functions between the first and the second function,
use a : sign. This means that if you want to calculate the sum of all data items
from index 2 to index 7, you would edit the function "SUM(function ;
function)" to become "SUM(F2:F7)".
The validity of the formula is automatically checked upon pressing the

keyboard Enter key. If it is correct, the box in the "Ok" column is green. If the
function is not valid, this box is red and the presumed cause of the invalidity is
indicated in the logging box.
Section 8.8.8.6 Formula Set table
In the Active Formula Set table all the Formulas that are currently active are
listed in a table.
The columns in the table define the properties associated with each Active
Formula.
Section 8.8.8.6.1 OK
This box is green when the formula format is correct. It turns red if the formula
is not valid.
After entering or editing a formula the formula is checked when you press the
Enter key of your keyboard.
Section 8.8.8.6.2 Id
You can assign a unique Id to each formula, which can then be used in other
formulas to refer to. The format of the Id should be "Fn" with n a unique
number.
The Id should be different from these already used in the Data set table. You
Rev 12A 363

can use the Renumber Formula Set icon above the table to set the Ids of the
formulas such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest
number currently available in the Data Set.
Section 8.8.8.6.3 Formula

This is the formula that will be calculated when you press the Calculate button.
Section 8.8.8.6.4 Point Id

Here you can specify the Point id of the result. If you do not fill in this column,
the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Section 8.8.8.6.5 Point Dir

Here you can specify the Point Direction of the result. If you do not fill in this
column, the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Section 8.8.8.6.6 Repeat for...

If you want to calculate the formula on a range of data items, here you can
indicate the range. The format for this cell is "a:b", where a is the lowest index
and b the highest index number. The notation Fx should be used in the formula
to indicate that a range of data items is used.
(F16).
Formula definition
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).
For formulas that require more than one function as input you can use the
notations Fx and Fxn, with xn corresponding to the index x+n. A formula Fx
+Fx10 for example

with a range 1:5 in the Repeat for... column and an increment 1 in the Increment
column, corresponds to the following formulas:
Section 8.8.8.6.7 Increment

The value in this column indicates the increment that will be used with the
defined range.
You would define the formula fx/2 in the Formula column, the range 10:16 in
the Repeat for... column and the increment (2) in the Increment column.
(F10/2, F12/2, F14/2 and F16/2).
If you do not define a value, the default of 1 will be used.
Status
If the Ok column in the active formula table is red this field gives an indication
of what is wrong with the formula.
Section 8.8.8.7 Calculate buttons
Section 8.8.8.7.1 Calculate

This calculates the formulas in the Active Formula Set Table. The results of the
calculation are added to the Data Set table.
The results are saved when you push the Save Results As... button.
Section 8.8.8.7.2 Calculate Selected

This calculates the selected formula(s) using the Active Formula Set table.
Rev 12A 365

Section 8.8.9 The Picture Display panel
This panel is where pictures are made. A picture consists of a display window
contained in a layout. The data is visualized graphically in the window.
Section 8.8.9.1 The Picture display area

The picture is created and adapted in this area, based on a chosen layout.
Section 8.8.9.2 Layout

A layout is an arrangement of display windows of a particular type and with a
defined set of attributes. A layout is selected from the pane header above the
display windows.
Number of displays
This is determined by the original layout selected. It is not possible to add or
remove displays from an existing layout. To change the number of displays, you
need to select a different layout or to create a new one.
Size of displays
Pressing the Ctrl key and dragging one side of the display to make it bigger or
smaller can adjust the relative size of a display in a layout. You cannot however
make it bigger than its proportion of the original overall layout.
Display type
This is defined when the layout is created. It cannot be adapted at another time,
and so to obtain different types of displays you must either select a different
layout or edit the layout in the 'Layout management dialog'.
Display attributes
The characteristics of the display axes and display area can be set using entries
from the popup menus obtained in and around each window in the layout. The
entries in these menus depend on the type of window.
Section 8.8.9.3 Data

The data forms the contents of the display and the other component of the
picture. Data can be dragged into the picture either from the browser panel or
from the data selector dialog. The data has a number of attributes:
Remove
You can remove a data curve from a display by right clicking on the curve and
selecting Remove Curve.

Move to lower
Cut
Copy
Copy Values
Status Message
Data Properties
Curve Properties
Right click the data curve itself and select Curve Properties in order to adjust
the color and appearance of a data curve.
Replay
(De-)selecting of curves
In a FrontBack display, you can 'select' data by left clicking on that curve. This
will generate markers on the curve and cursor values will be displayed for these
points when a cursor is dragged over the curves.
You can deselect the same curve by left clicking on it while keeping the Ctrl
key down.
Left clicking on another curve will toggle the selection status.
Curves can be added to or removed from the selection status by clicking on

them while holding down the Ctrl or Shift keys or via the legend.
Section 8.8.10 The Picture Selection bar
Rev 12A 367

Each layout that has been added to the list of favorites in the “Layout
management” dialog (see "The Layout management dialog" on page 79) will
associated with the layout then a “plain” icon will be displayed. Simply click on
Section 8.8.10.3 Add a detached picture window
Clicking this icon will create a detached window with all the same functionality
and layout as the Picture Selection Bar and the Picture Display Panel. You can
create and view data pictures just as in the non-detached picture panel.
and shows the picture. Clicking on the picture tab of an activated picture opens
a dropdown menu that allows you to perform a number of operations on the
active picture:
Move First
Move Last
Move Left
Move Right
Copy to Metafile

Copy to Bitmap
Copy as Active picture (embedded data)

Copy as Active picture (linked data)

Make Printformat
This is the easy way to create a default format (see "[Procedure] To create a
single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 75) for the
layout.
Print
Print with...
Rename
Duplicate
original layout.
Delete
Rev 12A 369

Delete All Pictures

Click the active tab and select Delete All Pictures from the dropdown menu in
order to remove the active picture and all your other pictures in the active
section.
Replace Data Origin

Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data origin of the
functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be done
for broken links as well. The replace will only work if the path to the new data
is identical to the path of the existing data in the displays.
The data origin can be ‘Project’ , ‘Section’ or ‘Run/Analysis/…’ or a

measurement cycle (3th level folder). When selecting ‘project’, a list of the
projects, originating the data in the picture(s), is shown. This list contains
regular testlab projects, ldsf files, tdf files, and non-lms databases. The origin of
unsaved data is not shown. When pushing Browse, a different project can be
selected.
When selecting ‘section’, a list of all sections is shown, originating the data in
section can be selected.
When selecting ‘run/Analysis/…’, a list of all ‘2d level’ items of a project

(being all runs, analysis, folders on sections) is shown, originating the data in
‘folder’ can be selected – please be careful to select the corresponding
run/analysis/folder in case of broken links.
When selecting ‘measurement cycle/3th level folder’, a list of all ‘3th level’
items of a project are shown, originating the data in the picture(s) – only for
LMS projects. When clicking on Browse, a different ‘folder’ can be selected.
In case an origin (Project/Section/Run/measurement cycle) does not exist, it is

coloured red.
When clicking Apply, the link to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new selected origin.
Replace Data
Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data individually of
the functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be
done for broken links as well.
For each individual function in the picture(s), you can see which picture, display
and target it belongs, its ‘data origin’ (e.g. being the project containing the data)
and its ‘Data location’ (the structure inside the project). The ‘Data origin’ and
the ‘Data location’ can be changed with the browse button, or –only for test.lab
data - with typing in its new name.
You also see the Dof ID, the Ref DOF Id and the section value for each data
block. When altering these, the data location and data origin will be adapted

immediately. The new data is searched for on the folder itself or 1 folder up (in
case of waterfalls or referenced spectra). The result data will have the same
function classes as the original data. If it is not found, the cell is red and you
cannot click on OK.
You can duplicate data and remove data, move data up and down in the same
target of a display.
When clicking Apply, the links to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new list.
Save as Layout
With this functionality, the current picture (including its settings and data) is
saved as a layout (for the current user) – a name for the layout is asked. When
creating a new picture, this layout can be selected.
Section 8.9 The Data Block Processing worksheet
In this worksheet, you can combine data blocks from a selected source (Most
Recent Run, Active Section, Input Basket) in order to create new "metrics",
called "User Metrics". The combination of data blocks is possible through an
advanced calculator.
In this calculator, you can combine data blocks of different nature, assign to the
result any unit you want, including "User Defined Units" one can create in
Tools Options... Units Edit units User Defined Units.
In this calculator, you can create new kind of data blocks. The function class of
such new data blocks is called "User metrics". Since this class is too general, a
specific attribute, the "function description", allows you to create a specific
name for the new metrics resulting from your calculations. The "function
description" together with the point Id and the point direction will appear as the
resulting data block name.
An advantage of the Data Block Processing is to allow post-processing

calculations after each measurement, using the "Most Recent Run" mode
together with automatic calculations.
Rev 12A 371

Here is given a screenshot of the Data Block Processing worksheet:
The Data Block Processing worksheet is divided into three main panels:
Step 1
The Data Lists: On top left, the data list gives a view on all the data available
from the chosen data source, with a function Id (F1, F2 …) appended to every
data block. Below this list lays the Reference blocks list, fed by the
button. Their Ids are different (B1, B2 …) and these ones cannot be overwritten
run after run in the Most Recent Run mode.
Each column of the list can be sorted and a filter can be applied to facilitate the
search of specific data blocks.
Step 2
The Calculator, on the top right is identical to the Data Block Calculator but
allows to combine any data blocks, with the minimal requirement that the x-axis
are of the same type (time, frequency, octave). Combining data blocks may lead
to unknown units and unknown functions. Two columns are added to the
calculator to allow the use of User Defined units and to define the resulting
block name by using the Function Description.
Step 3
The display panel is identical to the one from navigator.
Section 8.9.1 [Procedure] To create and calculate user defined

metrics
Step 1
Take any time trace, for instance a sound file (acoustic group)
Step 2
Replace this time trace into the Input Basket (right click on the data file)
Step 3

Replace in the Time Data Selection worksheet (Data Source: Input Basket; and
click on the Replace button)
Step 4
In Time Data Processing, select the time data in the list
Step 5
In Time Data Processing, select some calculations in "Section" (Overall level,
Psychoacoustic metrics, Frequency/order/octave sections, Level calculations,
Modulation metrics, Frame statistics...)
Step 6
The calculation results in data blocks, which are all copied in the Data List of
the Data Block Processing (Data Source: Most Recent Run; and push the
Replace List button)
Step 7
In the Data Block Processing calculator, enter any formula that mixes data with
identical X-axis but different Y-axis units. The status is red then.
Step 8
Enter any unit, usually a User Defined Unit, created in Tools > Options... >
Units > Edit Units (with User Defined Units selected) > User Defined Units tab.
The status may become green.
Step 9
The data calculated in this calculator, mixing different data blocks and units, has
a general function class called "User metrics".
Step 10
To give a unique block name to the newly calculated data block, you can enter
any name in the "Function Description: cell of the calculator.
Step 11
The resulting name of the calculated "User Metric" block is: Function
Description + Point ID + Point Dir.
Step 12
Press calculate: The data from the formula is added to the Data List.
Step 13
The results are saved in the folder entered in the Results Destination, at the
bottom of the Data List.
Section 8.9.2 The Data List panel
The Data List panel contains a Data Source header and a data list body and a
results destination bottom. These three parts are distinct and described
respectively below.
Section 8.9.2.1 Data Source Selection panel

The data from measurements/channels can be loaded into the Data Set using the
current (active) project, an existing Data Set, the Input Basket, the Most Recent
Run or any combination of these data sources.
Rev 12A 373

Clicking on the […] button brings up the 'Data source selection' dialog in which
the data source can be selected. The selected Data Source is shown in a message
box.
 Most Recent Run (on page 374)
 Active project (see "Most Recent Run" on page 374)
 Data Set (see "Most Recent Run" on page 374)
 Input Basket (on page 375)
Once you have specified where to find the data, click on the [Add] or [Replace]
button.
The [Add] button adds the selected data to the current data set in the Data Set
panel.
The [Replace] button empties the Data Set and its content is replaced by the
newly-selected data.
Most Recent Run

Most Recent Run
This is only sensitive when the Throughput Validation & Processing host (Time
Data Selection worksheet) is used as an Add-in in Acquisition workbooks.
Select this radiobutton to use the most recent run.
After each measurement, the selected run is automatically updated to
correspond to the last measured run.
Active project
When you select to find data in the current (active) project, you can specify a
section and a run (or all runs) from this section.
All the throughput data that have been measured in this section and run(s) are
selected. If your selection does not contain any throughput data, a popup
message will warn you of this fact when you push the Add/Replace button.
Section selection
Select from the dropdown list the section in the current project that you want to
use.
Run selection
Select from the dropdown list the run (or All runs) in the selected section that
you want to use.
Data Set
Select this radiobutton to use a previously defined Data Set.
Enter the name of an existing data set in the field alongside or you can use the
Browse... button to select it.
A Data Set is a collection of pointers to time data. You can make a Data Set and

save it for later reuse in this worksheet using the Save Data Set icon in the Data
Set toolbar.
Name field
This specifies the name and location of the DataSet file.
... button
This schedules the Select DataSet dialog for specifying the location and name of
the DataSet file with a XDS extension. Data Sets have a .XDS extension and are
as default saved in the DataSet folder on your local directory.
Input Basket
This basket can be filled with any data blocks item or object: 2D data,
waterfalls, folders and projects, etc.
Please remind than only Test.Lab data blocks can be loaded to the Data Block
Processing.
Add to List and Replace List buttons

Add to List button
This adds the selected data to the current Data list.
Replace List button
This empties the Data List and its contents are replaced by the newly-selected
data blocks.
Section 8.9.2.2 Data List panel

In this panel, you have a view on all the available data blocks for calculations.
The "Data List" panel is identical to the one of the Navigator. However, the
columns are sorted in a bit different way by default. This sorting is dedicated to
show the most important information at a glance. Here is the available columns:
ID | Name | Folder / Name | Y-axis unit | Function Class | Octave domain
Function ID column
A specific column is added at the left, the "ID" column, this is a very important
information, attributing a function ID to every data block in the list. This
function ID is the one that will be used to build equations in the Data Block
Processing calculator.
Autofilter
It may be possible that the data list is huge. therefore, an "Autofilter" function
on each column of the Data List is helpful to visualize a restricted amount of
Rev 12A 375

data blocks.
Right-click on any Data List column, then choose Filter > Autofilter.
Section 8.9.2.3 Reference Blocks data list

The lower data list is identical to the upper data list, described in Data List
panel (on page 375).
The difference is that the data blocks in this second list are so-called “reference
blocks”. Their function Ids is annotated as B1, B2 … to avoid confusion with
the data from the upper data list.
These reference blocks are loaded using the button from the calculator
panel (see Formula set icons (on page 377)).
The main advantage of reference blocks is its use in the Most Recent Run mode,
when “Calculate Automatically” is selected. In Most Recent Run mode, the
upper data list is replaced after each run but the reference blocks from the lower
data list remain the same whatever happens.
Section 8.9.2.4 Results destination panel

By default, the data is classified in alphabetical order of the data bocks Names.
The sorting can be modified in each column.
In this panel is given the location where to store the results from the Data Block
Processing.
By default, the results are stored in the current section, current run and
"UserMetricSaveDirectory".
To modify the results destination you can select first the Section, then the Run
and finally you can enter a folder name. You can even create a new folder by
entering a new name.
Section 8.9.3 The Data Block Processing Calculator
The Data Block Processing calculator is identical to the Data Block Calculator
from navigator.
However, two specific columns are added to the formula list: the Function
Description and the Unit columns.

These two extra columns allow defining new metrics by combining data blocks
with not compatible units or function class in the Formula column.
In this panel, the calculation functions can be defined. A new function can be
defined by:
Selecting an empty line in the table

Selecting an empty cell
Pressing the "Create New Function" icon

Note: A data item is referred to as "fn" (function number), where n is the

index number of the data item. For example, f3 indicates the third data item
Section 8.9.3.1 Formula Set icons

You can use these icons for a number of actions, among which: add a new
formula row to the table, delete a formula row, move a formula one row up, or
to move it one row down...
New FormulaSet
This starts a new formula definition table by clearing the table of the current
FormulaSet.
Save FormulaSet to DFS file
This saves the active Formula set by scheduling the Save DataCalculator
FormulaSet dialog.
Specify the location and name of the FormulaSet file (the DFS extension is
automatically added) and then click Save.
Note: It is possible to read and write this file (with window applications such as
Excel or Notepad).
Load FormulaSet from DFS file
This loads an existing formula set by scheduling the "Select DataCalculator
Rev 12A 377

FormulaSet" dialog.
Specify the location and name of an existing FormulaSet file with a DFS
extension and then click Open.
Create new formula
This will create a new formula with the current Formula Editor entry.
Delete the selected Formula
This will remove the selected formula(s) from the Formula Set.
Move up
This will move the selected formula one position up.
Down
This will move the selected formula one position down.
Insert a function
This inserts a function into the Formula Editor at the current position of the
cursor.
It schedules the Select Function dialog where you can select the function to use.
Renumber FormulaSet
When there is a conflict in the IDs of the Data Set and the IDs of the formulas,
"Renumber FormulaSet" will set the Ids of the formulas in the Active formula
set such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest ID of the
data items in the Data Set.
Browse for Reference Blocks...

This button opens a panel with a list of data blocks with Ids B1, B2 … .
8.9.3.1.1.1 Add block...

The panel is at first empty, but clicking on “Add block…” opens a browser. It is
then possible to load blocks that are stored outside the current project.
8.9.3.1.1.2 Delete
Deletes the highlighted reference blocks from this list.
8.9.3.1.1.3 Close
Closes the Block Set Editor Selection dialog.
Section 8.9.3.2 Formula Editor

Below the formula set icons is the input field of the Formula Editor where you
can define and edit a formula.
Select the row you want to edit in the Active Formula Set table.
Formula Editor
In defining a formula, mathematical symbols +, -, * and / can be used.
Additional functions can be accessed through pressing the Insert function icon
. This opens up a dialog with an extensive set of functions that can be used.
When the exact format of a function is known, it can be typed in directly in the
formula edit field, instead of using this dialog.
Most of the functions use one or more data items in their argument, and so use
the word "function" to indicate that.
For instance the function "SUM(function ; function)" calculates the SUM of

two functions.
So, after selection of the function, you should replace the words "function" with
the data items that you want to use. A data item is referred to as "fn", where n is
the index number of the data item. For example, f2 indicates the second data
item in the Data List with index number 2.
To calculate the SUM of all functions between the first and the second function,
use a : sign. This means that if you want to calculate the sum of all data items
from index 2 to index 7, you would edit the function "SUM(function ;
function)" to become "SUM(f2:f7)".
The validity of the formula is automatically checked upon pressing the

keyboard Enter key. If it is correct, the box in the "Ok" column is green. If the
Rev 12A 379

function is not valid, this box is red and the presumed cause of the invalidity is
indicated in the logging box.
Section 8.9.3.3 Formula Set table

In the Active Formula set table all the Formulas that are currently active are
listed in a table.
The columns in the table define the properties associated with each Active
Formula.
OK
This box is green the formula format is correct. It turns red if the formula is not
valid.
After entering or editing a formula the formula is checked when you press the
Enter key of your keyboard.
On/Off
When this box is checked, the corresponding formula on this line will be
calculated. When this box is unchecked, the corresponding formula on this line
will not be calculated.
Id
You can assign a unique Id to each formula, which can then be used in other
formulas to refer to. The format of the Id should be "fn" with n a unique
number.
The Id should be different from these already used in the Data set table. You
can use the Renumber Formula Set icon above the table to set the Ids of the
formulas such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest
number currently available in the Data Set.
Formula
This is the formula that will be calculated when you press the Calculate button.
Point Id
Here you can specify the Point id of the result. If you do not fill in this column,
the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Point Dir
Here you can specify the Point Direction of the result. If you do not fill in this
column, the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Function Description
The function description is a user-defined attribute that appears in the calculated
block name.

In the case the resulting data block has a function class "User Metric", then the
block name (appearing in the Data List and in the display Legend) is defined as:
Function Description + Point Id + Point dir.
Since the Point Id and Point Dir are also editable in the Active Formula Set
panel, the resulting data block name can be completely defined.
Unit
The unit column is by default blank. It assumes that if the data blocks entered in
Formula are assembled in an equation such that an existing unit can be easily
derived, then the unit is automatically selected by the calculation itself.
In case the equation does not lead to an existing unit or to a unit easily derived
from an existing one, then the Status bar shows a red light and the calculation
seems not allowed.
Then, one can click on the cell of the Unit column to select an existing unit or a
new unit, created and saved in the Test.Lab unit system (Tools > Options... >
Units > Edit units > User Defined Units).
Repeat for...
If you want to calculate the formula on a range of data items, here you can
indicate the range. The format for this cell is "a:b", where a is the lowest index
and b the highest index number. The notation fx should be used in the formula
to indicate that a range of data items is used.
(F16).
You would define the formula fx/2 in the Formula column and the range 10:16
Formula definition
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).
Increment
The value in this column indicates the increment that will be used with the
defined range.
You would define the formula fx/2 in the Formula column, the range 10:16 in
the Repeat for... column and the increment (2) in the Increment column.
Rev 12A 381

(F10/2, F12/2, F14/2 and F16/2).
If you do not define a value, the default of 1 will be used.
Status
If the Ok column in the active formula table is red this field gives an indication
of what is wrong with the formula.
Section 8.9.3.4 Calculate buttons

Calculate button
This calculates the formulas in the Active Formula. The results of the
calculation are added to the Data Set table.
The results are saved when you push the Save Results button.
Calculate automatically
The Calculate automatically is an option going along with the "Most Recent
Run" mode (Data Source set to "Most Recent Run).
After a measurement (time data acquisition), inline processing is possible via

the chain of Time Data Selection, Time Data Processing and finally Data Block
Processing.
The measured data is automatically loaded into the Time Data Selection and
then into the Time Data Processing when the Most Recent Run mode is selected
for Data Source. From the calculations and processing done in the Time Data
Processing, new data blocks are generated (frequency/order/octave sections,
levels, psychoacoustic metrics...).
The calculated data blocks are automatically loaded in the Data Block
Processing Data List and the saved formulas in the calculator are applied
automatically.
The results are saved in the pre-defined location (Results destination).
Section 8.9.4 The Display panel



Each layout that has been added to the list of favorites in the "Layout
management" dialog (see "The Layout management dialog" on page 79) will
associated with the layout then a "plain" icon will be displayed. Simply click on

the picture. Clicking on the picture tab opens a dropdown menu that allows you
to perform a number of operations on the active picture:
Move First
Move Last
Move Left
Move Right
Copy to Metafile
Copy to Bitmap
Copy as Active picture (embed data)
Rev 12A 383


Copy as Active picture (link data)
Make print Format
This is the easy way to create a default format for the layout.
Print
Print with...
Rename
Duplicate
original layout.
Delete
Delete All Pictures
Click the active tab and select Delete All Pictures from the dropdown
menu in order to remove the active picture and all your other pictures in the
active section.
A small button on the top right of each column appear. By clicking on it, you
can select which type of data block to show or not.
Section 8.10 The Modal Data Selection worksheet
This worksheet enables you to create and view variations of a set of FRFs.
These different variations can be saved as distinct FRF datasets that can be used
directly for an analysis. It helps you to create your FRF set and to have a first
idea of the test data by using sum. For the Modal Analysis Lite workbook, it is
possible to use only 50 DOFs.

 To select Modal data (see "[Procedure] To select Modal data" on page

385)
 Pane Header options (on page 386)
 Find FRFs in panel (see "Find in panel" on page 386)
 Data options panel (on page 387)
 Data Selection table panel (on page 388)
 Display panel (on page 390)
 FRF set panel FRF pane (see "Shapes set panel" on page 390)
 The Geometry display panel (on page 391)
Section 8.10.1 [Procedure] To select Modal data
Step 1
Open, using the File > File Open... menu, the Test.Lab project file that
contains your measured data.
This project should contain both the data that you want to perform Modal
Analysis on and the geometry model that you want to animate.
Step 2
Select the source that contains the measured data.
You can find your FRFs (and others) using either the active section or the input
basket. Using the active section, you can choose between a measurement run,
FRF data set or Processing.
Step 3
Select the option, either younger or older and the direction filter that you want
to use.
Step 4
The table shows the data set that will be used for performing modal analysis.
Step 5
You can also ask for a reverse representation by pushing the [Switch] button for
example if you are working with roving hammer test.
Step 6
You can also exclude or include some FRF in the table by using the exclude and
include buttons.
Step 7
Check the [Selected FRF] option "on" and take a look at the FRF (shown in the
FRF pane) in your dataset by selecting cells in the table.
Step 8
You can also calculate the sum (shown in the FRF pane) to give you a first idea
where the modes are.
Step 9
After you have decided to use the data set, then you can create a FRF set.
The next time, you do not need to repeat the same procedure again. You can
Rev 12A 385

select immediately the active section and use the saved FRF set that you made
before as an "Existing FRF set"
Section 8.10.2 Pane Header options
Section 8.10.2.1 Upper/Lower

The display window is split horizontally with the Bode display above the
Geometry Display.
Section 8.10.2.2 Left/Right

The display window is split vertically with the Bode display beside the
Geometry Display.
Section 8.10.2.3 Print Screen

This schedules a print of the active window in the current worksheet.
The print will depend on your default settings. Paper orientation should be set at
Landscape.
Section 8.10.3 Find in panel
This is where the Shapes dataset you want to use in the analysis can be found. It
can be either a section in the current project or the contents of the input basket.

imported into it.
Section 8.10.3.2 Active Section

This is the section of the current project showing in the Active Selection display
in the buttonbar.
You can select different sources of FRFs, such as a Measurement run, an

Existing Shapes set or a Processing.
Refresh button
This helps you to update the source data of your project if you have made a new
run.
Measurement run
In Test.Lab, all the test data are stored in a Run. Here you can find a dropdown
list containing all the available Runs in the active section. If you want to use all
of them, select "ALL" in the list.
Existing Shapes set

An Shapes set is a group of FRFs. Here you can use Shapes sets that are
available in the active section in the folder "Shapes set".
You can create your own FRFs set in the Shapes set pane. Here you can found a
dropdown list containing the available Shapes sets. If no Shapes set is available,
then "NONE" will appear.
In Test.Lab, a Processing will be created if a modal analysis is made. Mode

and Shapes sets are stored in a Processing. Here, you can have a dropdown list
which contain all the processing with an Shapes set. If there is no Processing
with an Shapes set available, then NONE will appear.
Section 8.10.4 Data options panel
Here you can refine your data source by using "Select" and/or "Directions"
options.
Section 8.10.4.1 Select

When there are repeated data blocks, you can choose between using either the
youngest or oldest of them in your calculations.
Section 8.10.4.2 Directions

This allows you to view in your data table only those directions you are
interested in, by filtering out or hiding those that you are not.
Select the direction (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ, or S) that you want to work with.
You can enter any combination of these directions.
Rev 12A 387

Section 8.10.5 Data Selection table panel
The table presents the available FRFs of the selection that you've made in the
two previous panels (the "Find Shapes In" and "Data options" panels). It is
based on the reference and response points which are defined in the FRFs.
Columns represent references and rows represent responses. A measurement

point (reference and response) contains a node (for example, Point1) and a
direction (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ, or S). Each direction cell represents a Shapes;
by the sign of response and reference if the corresponding Shapes is available
(for example, +\-). When the sign in the direction cell is put inside brackets {for
example, (+\-)}, then the Shapes; is excluded.
Section 8.10.5.1 Switch button

This changes the method used in the dataset table to present your data.
This is useful for a roving hammer test. By pushing this button only once, the
table format will be reversed (for example, if you have 240 references and 1
responses in your test data, pressing "switch" will result in a table with 1
references and 240 responses).
Section 8.10.5.2 References

This shows the number of columns which represents a measurement point in the
dataset table.
Section 8.10.5.3 Responses

This shows the number of rows which represents a measurement point in the
dataset table.
Section 8.10.5.4 Shapes selection buttons

You can include or exclude FRFs by selecting direction cells including whole
rows or columns. The corresponding FRFs will be included or excluded in the
database.
Note: The included FRFs are presented in the direction cell as +\- and the
excluded FRFs are presented in the direction cell as (+\-).
Section 8.10.5.4.1 Include Selected FRFs

This means the selected FRFs will be included in the data set.
Section 8.10.5.4.2 Exclude Selected FRFs

This means the selected FRFs will be excluded from the data set.

Section 8.10.5.4.3 Include All FRFs

This means all the FRFs available (whether selected or not) will be included in
the data set.
Section 8.10.5.4.4 Exclude All FRFs

This means all the FRFs available (whether selected or not) will be excluded
from the data set.
If you want to use only a few FRFs, you can first exclude all the FRFs; then
select some individual FRFs and push the Include selected FRFs button.
Section 8.10.5.4.5 Advanced... button

This schedules the "Advanced Save" dialog.
8.10.5.4.5.1 Advanced Save dialog
This dialog helps you to save the included FRFs defined in the Shapes table in a
Run. You have to define the Section and the Run name that you want to use.
Note: FRFs are copied in the project (no link is used).
8.10.5.4.5.1.1 Section selection

Here, using the dropdown list you can select the section where you want to save
the blocks. You can choose between the "Active Section" and other sections
available in the project.
Active section
This is the section that is currently active. It can be changed in the dropdown list
at the top of every worksheet.
SectionX
The dropdown list gives all the sections in the current project
8.10.5.4.5.1.2 Run Name
Here you can define the name of the Run that will contain the FRFs.
8.10.5.4.5.1.3 Switch Response and Reference
This option can be used if you want to switch the response to reference of all the
included FRFs when saving. This will change the properties of the Response
and reference DOFs.
8.10.5.4.5.1.4 Save
Save the Shapes with the previous definitions.
Rev 12A 389

Section 8.10.6 Display panel
This panel give you the possibility to show some functions in both the Shapes
pane and the geometry display pane.
Section 8.10.6.1 Show points on geometry

Check this "on", when you select cells and, if there is a geometry, the response
node will appear in the geometry display panel.
Section 8.10.6.2 Selected FRFs

Check this "on", when you select cells and the corresponding FRFs will appear
in the Shapes pane.
Section 8.10.6.3 Sum of included FRFs

Check this "on" and the sum of the current Shapes data set (included) in the
table will be calculated and displayed.
Section 8.10.7 Shapes set panel
If you want to create your own database, you can use a Shapes set. A Shapes set
is a group of FRFs. You can either create a new Shapes set or append FRFs to
an existing Shapes set. The FRFs, which are in the table, will be considered as
input when you press the OK button.
Section 8.10.7.1 Create new

This creates a new Shapes set. Select the Create new radio button and give
your new Shapes set a name (for example, MyShapesSet) in the edit box. Then
push the OK button. The new Shapes set will be created in a folder "Shapes
Sets" under the active section.
You can type the name of your Shapes set in the edit box.
Section 8.10.7.2 Append to

This adds data to an existing Shapes set. Select the radio button Append to and
select an available Shapes set in the dropdown list. Then push the OK button.
The FRFs, which are in the table, will be added to the selected Shapes set.
The dropdown list shows you the available Shapes sets. If there is no Shapes set
available, "NONE" will be shown.

Section 8.10.7.3 OK button

Push OK either to create a new Shapes set or to append the FRFs, which are in
the table, to an existing Shapes set.
Section 8.10.8 Shapes pane
This displays the Selected FRFs and the Sum of included FRFs if these display
options are checked on in the Display panel.
Section 8.10.8.1 Display format

The display is a Bode display. It shows either Amplitude (upper) and Phase
(lower) or Real (upper) and Imaginary (lower).
Section 8.10.9 The Geometry display panel
This provides a Geometry display window.
Section 8.10.9.1 Geometry pane

This displays the animation of your test structure and the modes that operate on
it.
Section 8.11 The PolyMAX - Band worksheet
This is the first step in the three-step Frequency Domain Multiple Degrees of
Freedom (MDOF) Estimation. This minor worksheet gives you a simple way to
define a frequency band of interest for performing a modal analysis using both
sum and mode indicator functions.
A more detailed explanation is given in the section on Modal Analysis Theory.
Section 8.11.1 [Procedure] To define the band
A frequency band should be defined before performing a modal analysis.

Step 1
To help you to select a frequency band, you can check the Selected function
Rev 12A 391

option "on" in the Display panel and then select some FRFs in the table. These
will then be shown in the FrontBack display. Or, you can calculate and display
either the sum or the mode indicator function by checking these options on.
Step 2
To define a frequency band use either the double cursor provided in the display
window or the Start and End input fields underneath the window.
Drag the cursor using the right line to move both cursors or the left line to
change the distance between the pair of cursor lines. The values are
immediately updated in the Start and End input fields
If you enter the range values directly into these input fields, these will be
adjusted if necessary.
Step 3
When you have set the frequency band that you want then you can go to the
second step of the MDOF Estimation, the Stabilization minor worksheet.
Section 8.11.2 Data changes
If you are not satisfied with the defined Shapes data set, you can still change it
here.
Section 8.11.2.1 "Change Modal Data Selection..." button

This schedules the "Find FRFs in" dialog.
Section 8.11.2.1.1 Active Section

in the buttonbar.

Refresh button
run.
Measurement run
Existing Shapes set


8.11.2.1.1.1 Processing

Section 8.11.2.1.2 Input basket

8.11.2.1.2.1 Input Basket
imported into it.
Section 8.11.3 Data table panel

direction (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ, S or NONE). Each direction cell represents a
Shapes by the sign of response and reference if the corresponding Shapes is
available (for example, +\-). When the sign in the direction cell is put inside
brackets, for example, (+\-), then the Shapes is excluded.

dataset table.

dataset table.
Section 8.11.3.3 Table

This table displays the data you have selected.
You can select a datablock by clicking on the direction sign of a cell. All the
data can be selected by clicking on the column header. More than one datablock
Rev 12A 393

or row can be selected at a time.
As soon as data is selected, the Shapes function will (with its point and direction
id as its label) appear in the Shapes pane display if the option Selected
function in the Display panel is checked "on".
This panel gives you the possibility to show some functions in the display
window alongside.
Section 8.11.4.1 Selected function

Check this box "on", when you select cells and your selections will appear in
the display.
Section 8.11.4.2 Sum

The real part of the sum is the mean of the absolute value of the real part of all
FRFs and the imaginary part of the sum is the mean of the absolute value of the
imag of all FRFs.
Section 8.11.4.3 MIF (Mode indicator function) / Imaginary Sum

Check this box "on" and the selected type of MIF, currently showing in the
dropdown list alongside, will be calculated and displayed.
In order-based modal only the multivariant mode indicator function is used.
For more details on these indicator functions, see Functions - Mode indicator
functions (see "Mode Indicator Functions" on page 225).
In the drop down list, you can also find a “Imaginary sum”, which is the

absolute value of the imaginary part of the sum.
Section 8.11.4.4 Advanced... button

This button calls the Advanced Band Options dialog.
Section 8.11.4.4.1 Model Size

8.11.4.4.1.1 Model Size
You can fill in the assumed number of poles (rank).
Section 8.11.4.4.2 Options for Enhanced Functions

You can define options for enhanced functions.
8.11.4.4.2.1 Sum
Display the Sum.
8.11.4.4.2.2 MIF / Imaginary Sum
Display the selected function in the list box.
8.11.4.4.2.3 Maximum number of MIFs
You can define the maximum number of MIFs that should be calculated. The
maximum number should neither be bigger than the number of references and
nor be smaller than 1.
Section 8.11.4.5 Save Sum/MIF button

This button calls a save options dialog. Here you can browse to the location
where you want to create a folder with enhanced functions. A folder will be
created in which the Sum and/or MIF functions are saved. Only the functions
that are checked on, will be saved.
Section 8.11.5 Data display
This allows you to see your data and define the frequency range of interest. The
start and end values and the included range (and the number of spectral lines)
are displayed. The frequency range can be set by using the double cursor in the
display pane or by entering values directly in the start and end fields. In both
cases, there is a minimum frequency range that is required by the analysis and
that depends on parameters such as the size of the modal model and the number
of reference DOFs.
Section 8.11.5.1 Start

The first input field shows the minimum value that you want to use for the
estimation. It can be set by entering a value directly or using the outer double
cursor provided.
Rev 12A 395

Section 8.11.5.2 End

The second input field shows the maximum value that you want to use for the
cursor provided.
Section 8.11.5.3 Lines

The number of lines will be calculated immediately.
Section 8.12 The PolyMAX - Stabilization worksheet
This is the second step in the three-step Frequency Domain Multiple Degrees of
Freedom (MDOF) Estimation.
In this minor worksheet, the LMS PolyMAX estimation method (see

"PolyMAX" on page 30) is used to estimate the frequency, damping and
participation factors. The results of both the computation of the covariance
matrix and, in a repetitive manner, the identification of an increasing number of
modes in the model, are displayed in the stabilization diagram. From this
diagram, stabilized poles can be chosen.
Note: The calculated damping in modal analysis is always the structural

damping; the effect of any exponential windowing used during data
acquisition is automatically corrected for.
Section 8.12.1 [Procedure] To stabilize
When you enter this worksheet, the interested frequency range is already
selected (it is the same range as you set in the Band worksheet). Now you can
calculate a stabilization diagram and select the poles from it. The selected poles
will be immediately updated in the poles panel.
Note: If you want to change your band selection, you can still do it in this
worksheet
When you have finished selected all the poles that you want to use in the
analysis then you can go to the third step of the MDOF Estimation, the Shapes
worksheet.
Section 8.12.1.1 [Procedure] To calculate a stabilization diagram

Step 1

Review and change the start and end frequency values in the Band panel if
required.
Step 2
Enter the model size that you want to use in the Model Size input field below
the display.
Step 3
Push the Start button.
Step 4
Wait a few moments and the stabilization diagram will be calculated.
Step 5
Select poles in the stabilization diagram either manually (see "[Procedure] To
select poles manually" on page 397) or automatically. (see "[Procedure] To
select poles using the Automatic Modal Parameter Selection add-in" on page
397)
Section 8.12.1.2 [Procedure] To select poles manually

Step 1
Make a stabilization diagram following the procedure to calculate a
stabilization diagram. (see "[Procedure] To calculate a stabilization diagram"
on page 396)
Step 2
Now you can select a pole in the diagram and it will appear in the poles panel.
Step 3
Continue selecting poles until you have selected all those that you want to use in
your MDOF estimation.
Section 8.12.1.3 [Procedure] To select poles using the Automatic

Modal Parameter Selection add-in
The “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in will select automatically
the physical poles in the stabilization diagram.
Step 1
on page 396)
Step 2
Load the “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in if it is not loaded yet.
Step 3
Select Tools > Add-ins... and check the “Automatic Modal Parameter
Selection” add-in.
Two additional buttons Select poles and Advanced... will become available
below the stabilization diagram.
Step 4
Push the Advanced... button below the stabilization diagram to schedule the
“Advanced automatic selection options”.
Rev 12A 397

A dialog will popup with all the parameters that can be modified using the
“Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in.
Step 5
Set the parameters to the values you require.
You can either use the default parameter values by pushing the Defaults
button, or set your own values.
Note: On most data sets the default values will suffice.
Automatic Selection parameters

Parameter Range Meaning Default
Modal Density Low to High The value of
this parameter
will influence
how the
algorithm
subdivides the
band into
sub-bands for
analysis. If a
high number of
modes are
expected in the
selected band
the value can
be moved
towards
“high”; if a
relatively low
number of
modes is
expected the
parameter can
be moved
towards “low”.
Maximum damping Poles with a 7%
ratio damping ratio
larger than the
set maximum
damping ratio
will not be
selected.
Step 6
After defining your parameter values, select the OK button to close the dialog
and return to the Stabilization worksheet.
Step 7
Push the Select poles button and your poles will be automatically selected in
the stabilization diagram and placed in the Poles list.

Section 8.12.2 Band panel
This allows you to redefine the frequency range of interest.
The two input fields show the start and end values that cover the range (as well
as the number of spectral lines) are displayed. The frequency range can be set
by entering values directly in the start and end fields. There is a minimum
frequency range, which the analysis requires, and this depends on the values of
such parameters as the size of modal model and the number of reference DOFs.

cursor provided.

cursor provided.

Section 8.12.3 Poles panel
This panel give you an overview of all the poles that you have selected. You can
delete poles, have a good look at the properties of your poles as well as save and
load poles.
Section 8.12.3.1 Name table

The table displays the poles selected from the stabilization diagram in the order
selected. As each poles is selected it is given a name (ModeX where X is a
consecutive number) and the table is re-ordered in ascending frequency order.
Section 8.12.3.2 Delete button

This deletes the selected poles from the table above. Select the pole or poles you
want to delete and press the Delete button.

This schedules the Advanced Stabilization Options dialog where you can create
Rev 12A 399

processing with poles in the current project using the current data. Poles, which
have been previously saved in the current project, can also be used by loading
the saved data.
In addition, you can also load poles or modes of different database format such
as Test.Lab, CADA-X, Virtual.Lab and external files, once theses poles or
modes are in the Input basket.
Section 8.12.3.3.1 Options for creating Processing with Poles

8.12.3.3.1.1 Save
As well as creating Processing with your poles you can also remember shapes,
the current Settings and Shapes Set. The option of shapes is useful if you have
load shapes in addition to poles (see loading poles).
Shapes
Check the box to remember your modes shapes with your poles
Shapes Set
Check the box to remember your Shapes Set with your poles.
8.12.3.3.1.2 Processing Name (Optional)
Enter a name for your Processing if required.
8.12.3.3.1.3 Create Processing button
This creates a Processing in the Active Section, based on your selections and
settings above.
Section 8.12.3.3.2 Options for loading Poles into Pole Table

You can use either the Section or Input basket as input for loading poles.
8.12.3.3.2.1 Section
The Sections in the current project available for selection are shown in the
dropdown list.
The Processing's in the current project available for selection are shown in the
dropdown list.
8.12.3.3.2.3 Input basket
The input basket can contain modes from Test.Lab, CADA-X, Virtual.Lab and
external files
8.12.3.3.2.4 More... button
This shows the properties of all the poles based on your selections in the section
or in the input basket.
8.12.3.3.2.5 Load
As well as loading the saved pole data, mode shape and participation factor, you
can also load the saved Settings.

Settings
Check the box to load the Settings saved with the poles.
8.12.3.3.2.6 Load Poles button
This loads the data based on your selections and settings above.
Section 8.12.3.3.3 Display Sum and Mif

This gives you the possibility to show sum and/or MIFs in the stabilization
diagram.
8.12.3.3.3.1 Sum
Display the sum in the front display in the Stabilization diagram.
Display the selected function in the list box. The function will be displayed in
the Back display of the stabilization diagram.
Note: The “Maximum number of MIFs” defined in the Time MDOF - Band
worksheet is also applied in this worksheet.
Section 8.12.3.4 More... button

This shows the properties of all the poles in the Poles table.
This is a stabilization diagram. You can use the up and down buttons to see the
other assumed number of poles of the calculated stabilization diagram.
Section 8.12.4.1 Display parameters
Section 8.12.4.1.1 Rank

This is the modal model size or rank of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.12.4.1.2 Freq.

This shows the frequency of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.12.4.1.3 Damp

This shows the damping of the highlighted pole.
Rev 12A 401

Section 8.12.4.1.4 Scatter

This shows the phase scatter of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.12.4.1.5 Type

This shows the stabilization type of the highlighted pole (Stable:s, frequency:f,
damping:d, vector:v, poles:o).
Section 8.12.5 Data parameters
These parameters help you to change the parameters for the stabilization
diagram.
Section 8.12.5.1 Tolerances... button

This schedules the Tolerances dialog. This dialog allows you to set the
tolerances which determine the stabilization type.
In the dialog box that appears, the input fields express the percentage values of
frequency, damping and vector within which the pole will be considered stable.
Section 8.12.5.1.1 Tolerances dialog

8.12.5.1.1.1 Vector
This shows the tolerance (in %) of the pole vector.
8.12.5.1.1.2 Frequency
This shows the tolerance (in %) of the frequency.
8.12.5.1.1.3 Damping
This shows the tolerance (in %) of the damping.
Pushing the Default button returns the tolerances to the default values.
Pole status values
Symbol Description
o The pole is not stable.
f The frequency of the pole does not change within the tolerances.
d The damping and frequency of the pole does not change within
the tolerances.
v The pole vector does not change within the tolerances.
s Both frequency, damping and vector are stable within the
tolerances

Section 8.12.5.2 Model Size

This is the current value of the modal model size. The required size can be
entered directly in the input field, but will be adapted if necessary to a suitable
value by the software.
Section 8.12.6 Automatic selection
This option is only available if the “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” is

loaded.
To load the add-in, select Tools Add-ins... and check the “Automatic Modal
Parameter Selection” add-in.
Two additional buttons Select Poles and Advanced... will then become
available in the Stabilization worksheet:
Section 8.12.6.1 Select poles button

Push the Select Poles button to find poles with the Automatic Modal
Parameter Selection add-in.

This schedules the “Advanced automatic selection options” dialog. (see
"Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter Selection options" on page 403)
Section 8.12.7 Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter Selection

options
This dialog enables you to set all the parameters that can be modified using the
“Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in. It is scheduled by clicking on
the Advanced... button in the Stabilization worksheet.
Section 8.12.7.1 Parameters
Section 8.12.7.1.1 Modal density

With this parameter you can indicate whether a high or a low number of modes
is expected in the selected frequency band. This will influence how the
algorithm subdivides the band into sub-bands for analysis.
Rev 12A 403

If a high number of modes are expected in the selected band the Modal Density
parameter can be moved towards “high”; if a relatively low number of modes is
expected the parameter can be moved towards “low”.
Section 8.12.7.1.2 Maximum damping ratio

Poles with a damping ratio larger than the set maximum damping ratio will not
be selected. Default value is 7%.
Section 8.12.7.2 Presets

The Preset provides the capability to store/recall settings according to different
databases. If you want to use a pre-defined set of parameter values for the
“Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in, you can define and save your
current parameter values as a “Preset”.
Change the parameter values to those that you require, then push the Add
button, and a dialog will popup where you can define the name of the “Preset”.
The available “Presets” will be shown in the Presets list. To use one of them,
select it and push the Use button. The selected Preset will then be used. Use the
Remove button to remove the selected Preset.
Note: The preset information is not related to the project and so presets are
stored as configuration information. Pushing the Defaults button returns
the selection to the default values of the parameters.
When you have finished defining your parameter values, select the OK button
to close the dialog and return to the Stabilization worksheet.
Section 8.12.7.2.1 Presets list

This lists the available presets.
Section 8.12.7.2.2 Defaults button

This button returns all the parameters to their default values.
Section 8.12.7.2.3 Add button

This adds the current parameter values to a new preset. It schedules the “Add
new preset” dialog where you can name the new preset. Press the “OK” button
to close the dialog.
Section 8.12.7.2.4 Use

Select a preset from the list of available presets and push this button to replace
the current parameter values with those of the selected preset.

Section 8.12.7.2.5 Remove button

Select a preset from the list of available presets and push this button to remove
it from the list.
Section 8.12.8 Action buttons
When you want to recalculate the stabilization diagram, you can start it again.
Section 8.12.8.1 Start button
This starts the calculation of a stabilization diagram.
Section 8.12.8.2 Stop button
This stops the calculation of a stabilization diagram.
Section 8.13 The PolyMax - Shapes worksheet
This is the final step in the three-step Frequency Domain Multiple Degrees of
In this minor worksheet, the Least Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD)

method (see "Least Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD)" on page 29) is used
to estimate modes shapes. You can then animate and compare modes via the
geometry display.
Section 8.13.1 [Procedure] To calculate shapes
When you enter this worksheet, the poles already selected are available in the
Poles table (the same as you set in the Stabilization worksheet) for the
calculation of modes shapes.
Step 1
If you want to change your band selection, you can still do it in this worksheet.
Step 2
Rev 12A 405

required.
Step 3
Set the Residue type and what residuals you want to include.
Step 4
Select the poles in the poles table that you want to use.
Step 5
Give a name to the Processing if required.
Step 6
Push the Calculate button.
Step 7
A new Processing will be created and you can see the result based on your
sections in the modes table.
Step 8
If you desire, you can animate modes in the geometry display. Select a mode in
modes table and push theDisplay button.

cursor provided.

cursor provided.


Section 8.13.3 Residue type panel
This allows you to select the type of mode shape residues you wish to use.
Even though it is reasonable to expect real, normal modes from mechanical

structures, it is recommended that you use the "Complex" option. When the
algorithm produces almost real, normal modes then this provides some
confidence in its accuracy. Normal residues may be required for specific
applications, such as comparisons with undamped finite element modes.
Section 8.13.3.1 Complex

Check this option "on" if you want to use complex mode shape residues, i.e. to
calculate complex modes.
Section 8.13.3.2 Real

Check this option "on" if you want to use real mode shape residues, i.e. to
calculate real, normal modes.
Section 8.13.3.3 Lower residuals

This option gives you the possibility to compensate for the out of band modes.
The lower residual term (residual mass) is used to estimate the modes at
frequencies below the start of the frequency band.
For the frequency band selected, a number of terms equal to the number of
reference DOFs will be generated to compensate for those modes occurring at
frequencies below the start of this band.
Section 8.13.3.4 Upper residuals

The upper residual term (residual stiffness) is used to estimate the modes at
frequencies above the upper limit of the frequency band.
frequencies above the end of this band.
This panel gives you an overview of all the poles that you have selected to use
from the Stabilization worksheet.
You can delete poles and set saving options.
Rev 12A 407

Section 8.13.4.1 Poles Table

This table shows the poles which are available for the calculation of modes
shapes.
Section 8.13.4.2 Processing Name (Optional)

Section 8.13.4.3 Calculate button

Push this button to calculate mode shapes for the selected poles in the poles
table and a new Processing will be created with modes, settings and/or Shapes
set.


This schedules the Advanced Shapes Options dialog.
Section 8.13.4.5.1 Options for calculating Shapes

This allows you to set the options for calculating Shapes, creating Processing
with poles and loading poles into the poles table.
8.13.4.5.1.1 Remember FRF Set in addition to Shapes
Check the box to remember your FRF Set with your mode shapes.
This option allows you to remember the FRF Set with the new Processing when
you calculate mode shapes.

8.13.4.5.2.1 Save
Remember in addition to poles
Shapes
Check the box to remember your mode shapes with your poles.
FRF Set
Check the box to remember you rFRF Set with your poles.


settings above.

8.13.4.5.3.1 Section
dropdown list.
dropdown list.
external files
8.13.4.5.3.4 More... button
8.13.4.5.3.5 Load
As well as loading the saved pole data, mode shapes and participation factor,
you can also load the saved Settings.
Settings
Section 8.13.5 Modes panel
In this panel all the modes from the selected processing are listed together with
the upper and lower residuals (if these exist).
Section 8.13.5.1 Modes table

This is a list of all the modes in the selected processing, together with the upper
and lower residuals. For each mode, the mode number, frequency and damping
ratio is shown.
Section 8.13.5.2 Display button

Select a mode from the Modes table above and press this button to animate it in
Rev 12A 409

the Geometry display.
Section 8.13.5.3 Annotate... button

This schedules the Edit Properties dialog where you can edit the Mode label by
adding information to the Mode name.

When you click on this button you will get the properties of the selected
processing.
This panel provides a Geometry display window that displays the animation of
your test structure and the modes that operate on it.
In the Geometry display (see "The Geometry display functions" on page 158),
the geometry model and the modes can be manipulated through a set of three
icons and a popup menu.
Section 8.13.6.1 Number (Position)

You can select to have either 1 geometry display (Single or Quad) or 2
geometry displays (either in a left and right or in an upper and lower position).
Each configuration has their own action buttons.
Section 8.13.6.1.1 Single

Only one geometry display.
8.13.6.1.1.1 Action buttons
Previous button
Animate the previous mode in the geometry display.
Next button
Animate the next mode in the geometry display.
Section 8.13.6.1.2 Quad

One geometry display in a Quad window. The Quad window shows four views
of the structure. You can use either European projection or American
projection.
To define the type of projection, use Tools > Options...> Displays Tab.

Note: The type of projection will be applied next time when you use the
application.

Previous button
Next button
Section 8.13.6.1.3 Left / Right

This provides 2 geometry displays alongside each other and both displays have
their own action buttons.
8.13.6.1.3.1 Left / Right radio button
The option for the using the previous and next buttons.
Previous button
If the Left (Right) option is "on", this animates the previous mode in the left
(right) geometry display and vice versa.
Next button
If the Left (Right) option is "on", this animates the next mode in the left (right)
geometry display and vice versa.
8.13.6.1.3.2 All
This refers to both geometry displays.
Previous button
This animates the previous mode in both geometry displays.
Next button
This animates the next mode in both geometry displays.
Section 8.13.6.1.4 Upper / Lower

This provides 2 geometry displays one above the other and both displays have
8.13.6.1.4.1 Upper / Lower radio button
Previous button
If the Upper (Lower) option is "on", this animates the previous mode in the top
(bottom) geometry display and vice versa.
Rev 12A 411

Next button
If the Upper (Lower) option is "on", this animates the next mode in the top
8.13.6.1.4.2 All
Previous button
Next button
Section 8.14 The Time MDOF - Band worksheet
This is the first step in the three-step Time Domain Multiple Degrees of
Freedom (MDOF) Estimation. This minor worksheet gives you a simple way to
define a frequency band of interest for performing a modal analysis using both
sum and mode indicator functions.
Section 8.14.1 [Procedure] To define the band
A frequency band should be defined before performing a modal analysis.

Step 1
To help you to select a frequency band, you can check the Selected function
option "on" in the Display panel and then select some FRFs in the table. These
will then be shown in the FrontBack display. Or, you can calculate and display
either the sum or the mode indicator function by checking these options on.
Step 2
To define a frequency band use either the double cursor provided in the display
window or the Start and End input fields underneath the window.
Drag the cursor using the right line to move both cursors or the left line to
change the distance between the pair of cursor lines. The values are
immediately updated in the Start and End input fields
If you enter the range values directly into these input fields, these will be
adjusted if necessary.
Step 3
When you have set the frequency band that you want then you can go to the
second step of the MDOF Estimation, the Stabilization minor worksheet.

here.


in the buttonbar.

Refresh button
run.
Measurement run
Existing Shapes set



imported into it.
Rev 12A 413



dataset table.

dataset table.

This panel gives you the possibility to show some functions in the display
window alongside.
Section 8.14.4.1 Selected function

Check this box "on", when you select cells and your selections will appear in
the display.

Section 8.14.4.2 Sum

The real part of the sum is the mean of the absolute value of the real part of all
FRFs and the imaginary part of the sum is the mean of the absolute value of the
imag of all FRFs.
Section 8.14.4.3 MIF (Mode indicator function) / Imaginary Sum

Check this box "on" and the selected type of MIF, currently showing in the
dropdown list alongside, will be calculated and displayed.
In order-based modal only the multivariant mode indicator function is used.
For more details on these indicator functions, see Functions - Mode indicator
functions (see "Mode Indicator Functions" on page 225).
In the drop down list, you can also find a “Imaginary sum”, which is the
absolute value of the imaginary part of the sum.

This button calls the Advanced Band Options dialog.
Section 8.14.4.4.1 Model Size

8.14.4.4.1.1 Model Size
You can fill in the assumed number of poles (rank).
Section 8.14.4.4.2 Options for Enhanced Functions

You can define options for enhanced functions.
8.14.4.4.2.1 Sum
Display the Sum.
Rev 12A 415


Display the selected function in the list box.
8.14.4.4.2.3 Maximum number of MIFs
You can define the maximum number of MIFs that should be calculated. The
maximum number should neither be bigger than the number of references and
nor be smaller than 1.
Section 8.14.4.5 Save Sum/MIF button

This button calls a save options dialog. Here you can browse to the location
where you want to create a folder with enhanced functions. A folder will be
created in which the Sum and/or MIF functions are saved. Only the functions
that are checked on, will be saved.
This allows you to see your data and define the frequency range of interest. The
start and end values and the included range (and the number of spectral lines)
are displayed. The frequency range can be set by using the double cursor in the
display pane or by entering values directly in the start and end fields. In both
cases, there is a minimum frequency range that is required by the analysis and
that depends on parameters such as the size of the modal model and the number
of reference DOFs.

cursor provided.

cursor provided.

Section 8.15 The Time MDOF - Stabilization worksheet
This is the second step in the three-step Time Domain Multiple degrees of

freedom Estimation.
In this minor worksheet, the Least Squares Complex Exponential (LSCE) (see
"Least Square Complex Exponential (LSCE)" on page 18) estimation method
is used to estimate the frequency, damping and participation factors. The results
of both the computation of the covariance matrix and, in a repetitive manner,
the identification of an increasing number of modes in the model, are displayed
in the stabilization diagram. From this diagram, stabilized poles can be chosen.

In the Modal Analysis Lite workbook, the stabilization diagram will be

calculated only if you are using less than 50 DOFs.
Section 8.15.1 [Procedure] To stabilize
When you enter this worksheet, the interested frequency range is already
selected (it is the same range as you set in the Band worksheet). Now you can
calculate a stabilization diagram and select the poles from it. The selected poles
will be immediately updated in the poles panel.
Note: If you want to change your band selection, you can still do it in this
worksheet
When you have finished selected all the poles that you want to use in the
analysis then you can go to the third step of the MDOF Estimation, the Shapes
worksheet.
Section 8.15.1.1 [Procedure] To calculate a stabilization diagram

Step 1
required.
Step 2
Enter the model size that you want to use in the Model Size input field below
the display.
Step 3
Push the Start button.
Step 4
Wait a few moments and the stabilization diagram will be calculated.
Rev 12A 417

Step 5
Select poles in the stabilization diagram either manually (see "[Procedure] To
select poles manually" on page 397) or automatically. (see "[Procedure] To
select poles using the Automatic Modal Parameter Selection add-in" on page
397)
Section 8.15.1.2 [Procedure] To select poles manually

Step 1
on page 396)
Step 2
Now you can select a pole in the diagram and it will appear in the poles panel.
Step 3
Continue selecting poles until you have selected all those that you want to use in
your MDOF estimation.
Section 8.15.1.3 [Procedure] To select poles using the Automatic

Modal Parameter Selection add-in
The “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in will select automatically
the physical poles in the stabilization diagram.
Step 1
on page 396)
Step 2
Load the “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in if it is not loaded yet.
Step 3
Select Tools Add-ins... and check the “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection”
add-in.
Two additional buttons Select poles and Advanced... will become available
below the stabilization diagram.
Step 4
Push the Advanced... button below the stabilization diagram to schedule the
“Advanced automatic selection options”.
A dialog will popup with all the parameters that can be modified using the
“Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in.
Step 5
Set the parameters to the values you require.
You can either use the default parameter values by pushing the Defaults
button, or set your own values.
Note: most data sets the default values will suffice.

Automatic Selection parameters

Parameter Range Meaning Default
Modal Density Low to High The value of this
parameter will influence
how the algorithm
subdivides the band into
sub-bands for analysis. If
a high number of modes
are expected in the
selected band the value
can be moved towards
“high”; if a relatively low
number of modes is
expected the parameter
can be moved towards
“low”.
Maximum damping Poles with a damping 7%
ratio ratio larger than the set
maximum damping ratio
will not be selected.
Step 6
After defining your parameter values, select the OK button to close the dialog
and return to the Stabilization worksheet.
Step 7
Push the Select poles button and your poles will be automatically selected in
the stabilization diagram and placed in the Poles list.

cursor provided.

Rev 12A 419

cursor provided.

This panel give you an overview of all the poles that you have selected. You can
delete poles, have a good look at the properties of your poles as well as save and
load poles.
Section 8.15.3.1 Name table

The table displays the poles selected from the stabilization diagram in the order
selected. As each poles is selected it is given a name (ModeX where X is a
consecutive number) and the table is re-ordered in ascending frequency order.


This schedules the Advanced Stabilization Options dialog where you can create
processing with poles in the current project using the current data. Poles, which
have been previously saved in the current project, can also be used by loading
the saved data.
In addition, you can also load poles or modes of different database format such
as Test.Lab, CADA-X, Virtual.Lab and external files, once theses poles or
modes are in the Input basket.

8.15.3.3.1.1 Save
As well as creating Processing with your poles you can also remember shapes,
the current Settings and Shapes Set. The option of shapes is useful if you have
load shapes in addition to poles (see loading poles).
Shapes
Check the box to remember your modes shapes with your poles
Shapes Set
Check the box to remember your Shapes Set with your poles.


settings above.

8.15.3.3.2.1 Section
dropdown list.
dropdown list.
external files
8.15.3.3.2.4 More... button
8.15.3.3.2.5 Load
As well as loading the saved pole data, mode shape and participation factor, you
can also load the saved Settings.
Settings
Section 8.15.3.3.3 Display Sum and Mif

This gives you the possibility to show sum and/or MIFs in the stabilization
diagram.
8.15.3.3.3.1 Sum
Display the sum in the front display in the Stabilization diagram.
Display the selected function in the list box. The function will be displayed in
the Back display of the stabilization diagram.
Note: The “Maximum number of MIFs” defined in the Time MDOF - Band
worksheet is also applied in this worksheet.
Rev 12A 421


This shows the properties of all the poles in the Poles table.
This is a stabilization diagram. You can use the up and down buttons to see the
other assumed number of poles of the calculated stabilization diagram.
Section 8.15.4.1 Display parameters
Section 8.15.4.1.1 Rank

This is the modal model size or rank of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.15.4.1.2 Freq.

This shows the frequency of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.15.4.1.3 Damp

This shows the damping of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.15.4.1.4 Scatter

This shows the phase scatter of the highlighted pole.
Section 8.15.4.1.5 Type

This shows the stabilization type of the highlighted pole (Stable:s, frequency:f,
damping:d, vector:v, poles:o).
Section 8.15.5 Data parameters
These parameters help you to perform a better LSCE parameter estimation and
stabilization diagram.
Section 8.15.5.1 Tolerances... button

This schedules the Tolerances dialog. This dialog allows you to set the
tolerances which determine the stabilization type.
In the dialog box that appears, the input fields express the percentage values of
frequency, damping and vector within which the pole will be considered stable.

Section 8.15.5.1.1 Tolerances dialog

8.15.5.1.1.1 Vector
This shows the tolerance (in %) of the pole vector.
8.15.5.1.1.2 Frequency
This shows the tolerance (in %) of the frequency.
8.15.5.1.1.3 Damping
This shows the tolerance (in %) of the damping.
Pushing the Default button returns the tolerances to the default values.
Pole status values
Symbol Description
o The pole is not stable.
f The frequency of the pole does not change within the tolerances.
d The damping and frequency of the pole does not change within
the tolerances.
v The pole vector does not change within the tolerances.
s Both frequency, damping and vector are stable within the
tolerances
Section 8.15.5.2 Time Window... button

This schedules the Time Window dialog.
Section 8.15.5.2.1 Time Window dialog.

8.15.5.2.1.1 First sample
By default, 0 is the first sample. If you notice that the beginning of the impulse
response function is not good, you can set another value.
8.15.5.2.1.2 Number of samples
This shows the number of samples in the impulse response function.
8.15.5.2.1.3 Maximum number of samples
This shows the maximum number of samples available for selection.
Section 8.15.5.3 Model Size

This is the current value of the modal model size. The required size can be
entered directly in the input field, but will be adapted if necessary to a suitable
value by the software.
Rev 12A 423

Section 8.15.6 Automatic selection
This option is only available if the “Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” is

loaded.
To load the add-in, select Tools Add-ins... and check the “Automatic Modal
Parameter Selection” add-in.
Two additional buttons Select Poles and Advanced... will then become
available in the Stabilization worksheet:
Section 8.15.6.1 Select poles button

Push the Select Poles button to find poles with the Automatic Modal
Parameter Selection add-in.

This schedules the “Advanced automatic selection options” dialog. (see
"Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter Selection options" on page 403)
Section 8.15.7 Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter Selection

options
This dialog enables you to set all the parameters that can be modified using the
“Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in. It is scheduled by clicking on
the Advanced... button in the Stabilization worksheet.
Section 8.15.7.1 Parameters
Section 8.15.7.1.1 Modal density

With this parameter you can indicate whether a high or a low number of modes
is expected in the selected frequency band. This will influence how the
algorithm subdivides the band into sub-bands for analysis.
If a high number of modes are expected in the selected band the Modal Density
parameter can be moved towards “high”; if a relatively low number of modes is
expected the parameter can be moved towards “low”.
Section 8.15.7.1.2 Maximum damping ratio

Poles with a damping ratio larger than the set maximum damping ratio will not
be selected. Default value is 7%.

Section 8.15.7.2 Presets

The Preset provides the capability to store/recall settings according to different
databases. If you want to use a pre-defined set of parameter values for the
“Automatic Modal Parameter Selection” add-in, you can define and save your
current parameter values as a “Preset”.
Change the parameter values to those that you require, then push the Add
button, and a dialog will popup where you can define the name of the “Preset”.
The available “Presets” will be shown in the Presets list. To use one of them,
select it and push the Use button. The selected Preset will then be used. Use the
Remove button to remove the selected Preset.
Note: The preset information is not related to the project and so presets are
stored as configuration information. Pushing the Defaults button returns
the selection to the default values of the parameters.
When you have finished defining your parameter values, select the OK button
to close the dialog and return to the Stabilization worksheet.
Section 8.15.7.2.1 Presets list

This lists the available presets.
Section 8.15.7.2.2 Defaults button

This button returns all the parameters to their default values.
Section 8.15.7.2.3 Add button

This adds the current parameter values to a new preset. It schedules the “Add
new preset” dialog where you can name the new preset. Press the “OK” button
to close the dialog.
Section 8.15.7.2.4 Use

Select a preset from the list of available presets and push this button to replace
the current parameter values with those of the selected preset.
Section 8.15.7.2.5 Remove button

Select a preset from the list of available presets and push this button to remove
it from the list.
Rev 12A 425

Section 8.15.8 Action buttons
When you want to recalculate the stabilization diagram, you can start it again.
Section 8.15.8.1 Start button
This starts the calculation of a stabilization diagram.
Section 8.15.8.2 Stop button
This stops the calculation of a stabilization diagram.
Section 8.16 The Time MDOF - Shapes worksheet
This is the final step in the three-step Time Domain Multiple Degrees of
In this minor worksheet, the Least Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD) (on
page 29) method is used to estimate mode shapes. You can then animate and
compare modes via the geometry display.
Section 8.16.1 [Procedure] To calculate shapes
When you enter this worksheet, the poles already selected are available in the
Poles table (the same as you set in the Stabilization worksheet) for the
calculation of modes shapes.
Step 1
If you want to change your band selection, you can still do it in this worksheet.
Step 2
required.
Step 3
Set the Residue type and what residuals you want to include.
Step 4
Select the poles in the poles table that you want to use.

Step 5
Give a name to the Processing if required.
Step 6
Push the Calculate button.
Step 7
A new Processing will be created and you can see the result based on your
sections in the modes table.
Step 8
If you desire, you can animate modes in the geometry display. Select a mode in
modes table and push theDisplay button.

cursor provided.

cursor provided.

Section 8.16.3 Residue type panel
This allows you to select the type of mode shape residues you wish to use.
Even though it is reasonable to expect real, normal modes from mechanical

structures, it is recommended that you use the "Complex" option. When the
algorithm produces almost real, normal modes then this provides some
Rev 12A 427

confidence in its accuracy. Normal residues may be required for specific

applications, such as comparisons with undamped finite element modes.
Section 8.16.3.1 Complex

Check this option "on" if you want to use complex mode shape residues, i.e. to
calculate complex modes.
Section 8.16.3.2 Real

Check this option "on" if you want to use real mode shape residues, i.e. to
calculate real, normal modes.
Section 8.16.3.3 Lower residuals

The lower residual term (residual mass) is used to estimate the modes at
frequencies below the start of the frequency band.
frequencies below the start of this band.
Section 8.16.3.4 Upper residuals

The upper residual term (residual stiffness) is used to estimate the modes at
frequencies above the upper limit of the frequency band.
frequencies above the end of this band.
This panel gives you an overview of all the poles that you have selected to use
from the Stabilization worksheet.
You can delete poles and set saving options.
Section 8.16.4.1 Poles Table

This table shows the poles which are available for the calculation of modes
shapes.
Section 8.16.4.2 Processing Name (Optional)



Push this button to calculate mode shapes for the selected poles in the poles
table and a new Processing will be created with modes, settings and/or Shapes
set.


This schedules the Advanced Shapes Options dialog.
Section 8.16.4.5.1 Options for calculating Shapes

This allows you to set the options for calculating Shapes, creating Processing
with poles and loading poles into the poles table.
8.16.4.5.1.1 Remember FRF Set in addition to Shapes
Check the box to remember your FRF Set with your mode shapes.
This option allows you to remember the FRF Set with the new Processing when
you calculate mode shapes.

8.16.4.5.2.1 Save
Remember in addition to poles
Shapes
Check the box to remember your mode shapes with your poles.
FRF Set
Check the box to remember you rFRF Set with your poles.
settings above.

8.16.4.5.3.1 Section
Rev 12A 429

dropdown list.
dropdown list.
external files
8.16.4.5.3.4 More... button
8.16.4.5.3.5 Load
As well as loading the saved pole data, mode shapes and participation factor,
you can also load the saved Settings.
Settings

ratio is shown.

Select a mode from the Modes table above and press this button to animate it in
the Geometry display.

This schedules the Edit Properties dialog where you can edit the Mode label by
adding information to the Mode name.


processing.


Previous button
Next button

projection.
To define the type of projection, use Tools Options... Displays Tab.
application.

Previous button
Next button
Rev 12A 431


Previous button
Next button
8.16.6.1.3.2 All
Previous button
Next button

Previous button
Next button
8.16.6.1.4.2 All
Previous button

Next button
Section 8.17 The Modal Synthesis worksheet
In this worksheet you can synthesize FRFs starting from selected modes.
By comparing these synthesized FRFs with the original ones, you can check the
correctness of the estimation of the selected modes.
The influence of the modes outside of the selected band can be compensated
with the upper and lower residuals.
When you look at a typical Shapes you will notice that the influence of modes
on frequencies above the selected band can be approximated by a constant term
(the stiffness line) that is represented by the upper residual.
On the other hand the influence of modes on frequencies below the selected
band can be approximated by a constant term (the mass line) that is represented
by the lower residual.
A more detailed explanation is given in the section on Functions - Synthesis of

FRFs (see "Synthesis of FRFs" on page 234). A more detailed explanation is
given in the section on Functions and in the Analysis and Design file
(Anal-Des.pdf) available from the Start menu using Programs LMS Test.Lab
11B Theory Documents Analysis and Design
Section 8.17.1 [Procedure] To synthesis FRFs
An Shapes can be synthesized between any two DOFs for which mode shapes
are available.
The synthesized Shapes can be overlaid directly with the measured Shapes and
the two compared in a Bode display.
This gives you an immediate visual assessment of the accuracy of the estimation
procedure.
Step 1
Select the Processing you want to use from the dropdown list of available
processings in the Processing panel.
Immediately all the possible FRFs are synthesized and appear in the Shapes
table.
The first Shapes is shown in the Bode display.
Step 2
Rev 12A 433

Select whether you want to use either one or both residual types by checking the
appropriate buttons "on", if required.
Step 3
Use the Scroll Down buttons to scroll through your FRFs and display them.
Step 4
Press the Advanced... to set advanced synthesis parameters, if required.
Step 5
Press the Calculate button to save selected FRFs.
You must have selected cells in the Shapes table to save both synthesized and
original measured (if available) FRFs.
Section 8.17.2 Processing panel
In this panel you can choose a processing (if there is one). A processing is
created in the Modal MDOF Estimation worksheet and contains a set of modes
and optionally also an upper and a lower residual. The modes, and the upper and
lower residuals, are shown in the Modes panel.
Section 8.17.2.1 Processing

Select the Processing from the dropdown list of those available for selection.

ratio is shown.
Section 8.17.3.2 Lower residual

Check this box "on" to use lower residual data.
Section 8.17.3.3 Upper residual

Check this box "on" to use upper residual data.


processing.

This schedules the Advanced Synthesis Options dialog.
Section 8.17.3.5.1 Options for Creating Processing from input

basket
This allows you to create Processing with mode set in the input basket, you
have to first add ModeSet into the input basket, enter a name for the Processing,
then push the “Create Processing” button.
Enter a name for your Processing.
8.17.3.5.1.2 Case of Multiple ModeSets in Input Basket:
If there is more than one mode set in the Input Basket, you have to choose either
modes of first mode set will be taken into accoutn when creating processing or
all the modes of all the modes sets. In case of inconsistent data, no processing
will be created.
Take modes of first ModeSet only

Only modes of the first mode set will be used to create processing.
Take all modes of all Mode Sets

If all the mode sets are consistent, i.e. responses and references are the same for
all the modes, all modes will be used for creating a processing, otherwise no
processing will be created.
This creates a Processing, in the Active Section, based on your selections and
settings above.

Select a mode in the mode table, push Display, the mode will be animate in the
Geometry display.
Section 8.17.3.7 Refresh button

If new selection is made in the modes table, push refresh button, the 2D display
will be updated
Rev 12A 435

Section 8.17.4 Shapes table panel
In this panel you have to select the FRFs you want to synthesize.
Section 8.17.4.1 Scrolling buttons

Use the play buttons to scroll through the DOFs, FRFs will display rows by
rows or columns by columns. You can also define the scrolling speed with the
speed slider.
Section 8.17.4.1.1 Scroll Down button
When you click on this button, the selection will scroll row by row (if this is
possible). Push it again to stop the scrolling action.
Section 8.17.4.1.2 Scroll right button
When you click on this button, the selection will scroll column by column (if
this is possible). Push it again to stop the scrolling action.
Section 8.17.4.1.3 Speed (slider)

This defines the scrolling speed.
Section 8.17.4.2 Browse buttons

Use these Browse buttons to select and display selected FRFs.
Section 8.17.4.2.1 Up button

When you click on this button, the selection will move upwards (if this is
possible).
Section 8.17.4.2.2 Down button

When you click on this button, the selection will move downwards (if this is
possible).
Section 8.17.4.2.3 Left button

When you click on this button, the selection will move to the left (if this is
possible).

Section 8.17.4.2.4 Right button

When you click on this button, the selection will move to the right (if this is
possible).
Section 8.17.5 Calculate, Parameters... and Advanced... buttons
Here you can calculate, save and set advanced parameters.

Push calculate to synthesize and save selected FRFs.
Section 8.17.5.2 Parameters...

This schedules the Synthesis parameters dialog.
Section 8.17.5.2.1 Synthesis parameters dialog

Here you can set advanced parameters.
8.17.5.2.1.1 Compare with original FRFs in Data Selection
Check this button "on" to compare the synthesized FRFs with the original ones
(default option) you chose in the Modal Data Selection worksheet.
If you want to change your selection use the Change... button.

8.17.5.2.1.2 Change... button
8.17.5.2.1.2.1 Active Section
in the buttonbar.

Refresh button
run.
Measurement run
Rev 12A 437

Existing Shapes set

Processing

8.17.5.2.1.2.2 Input basket
Input Basket
imported into it.
8.17.5.2.1.3 Generate correlation-error list at the end of the
scrolled synthesis
If this option is checked, a dialog contains the correlation-error list will popup at
the end of scrolling.
8.17.5.2.1.4 Use specified synthesis parameters
Check this button "on" to use specified synthesis parameters. No comparison
can be made with any measured FRFs.
8.17.5.2.1.4.1 Synthesis Parameters
These options only become sensitive and so accessible when you check the
"Use specified synthesis parameters" radiobutton "on".
Use frequency information of FRFs in current Modal

processing run
You can use the frequency information of FRFs in the current processing.
Check this button "on" to use the frequency axes of the data (FRFs) in the
current processing.
You can also specify the frequency axes with the following parameters.
Frequency start
You can specify the starting frequency.

Frequency step
You can specify the increment (frequency step) between two points.
Frequency lines
You can specify the number of frequency lines.
Exponential factor
If the original data measurements were acquired using an Exponential window,
you can reintroduce this effect by changing the exponential (decay) factor.

Data format
You can select the format (Displacement, Velocity or Acceleration) for the
synthesized FRFs, the synthesized FRFs will be converted in
Displacement/Force, Velocity/Force or Acceleration/Force if it's possible.
Build full Shapes table with all DOFs as reference

Check this box "on" to use the full matrix i.e. all the response DOFs will
become reference DOFs.
Note: The lower and upper residuals option is not applied anymore when this
option is 'on'.
Zoom to frequency band of mode set

Check this option to zoom the X-Axis of the 2D display of the synthesized FRF
to the Band of the mode set.

This schedules the Advanced Synthesis Options dialog.
Section 8.17.5.3.1 Shapes table

8.17.5.3.1.1 Refresh when changing processing
If you want to use the Shapes data set in the selected processing as the original
Shapes data in the Shapes table, check this option "on". Each time when you
change the selection of the "Processing", the Shapes table will be updated
automatically with the Shapes data set that was stored in the processing. You
can compare easily the original FRFs with the synthesized FRFs . If no Shapes
data set is stored in the processing, no action will occur.
Rev 12A 439

Section 8.17.5.3.2 Reciprocity

8.17.5.3.2.1 Enforce reciprocity
Check this box "on" to enforce reciprocity between inputs and outputs.
Section 8.17.5.3.3 Synthesized FRFs

8.17.5.3.3.1 Synthesized FRFs
If this box is checked, when you push the Calculate button, the sum of
synthesized FRFs will be calculated for the selected DOFs and remembered in
the defined location.
8.17.5.3.3.2 Sum of FRFs
If this box is checked, when you push the Calculate button, the sum of
synthesized FRFs will be calculated for the selected DOFs and remembered in
the defined location.
Section 8.17.5.3.4 Folder for Calculated FRFs

8.17.5.3.4.1 Location
Define where the synthesized FRFs and the sum of the synthesized FRFs will be
remembered. By default, a location is provided but you can also use the
Browse button to make your choice.
8.17.5.3.4.2 Browse... button
This button schedules the “Selection Dialog”.
8.17.5.3.4.2.1 Selection Dialog
You can select the location where you want to remember the enhanced
functions.
Section 8.17.6 The Display panel
This consists of a Bode or Nyquist display and /or geometry. Select the type of
2D display using Bode or Nyquist option. Select the number of displays using
the display options. To enlarge a display drag the blue line between the two
displays to the desired width. Or, use the popup display menus and Zoom or
Maximize a display.
Section 8.17.6.1 Select Display

You can change the type of 2D display (Bode or Nyquist).
Bode Display
Each display shows two FRFs for each mode: the synthesized and measured
FRFs.

Nyquist display
Each display shows two Crosspowers for each mode: the synthesized and
measured Crosspower.
Section 8.17.6.2 Display options

You can change the number of display windows (1, 2, 3, 4 and 6) in the display.
Section 8.17.6.3 Geometry and/or 2D display option

You can choose to view either 2D displays or Geometry Displays or both
together.
Select Nodes in Geometry

If this box is checked, you will see the nodes highlighted in the geometry if they
are selected in the Shapes table (only for response points).
Direction
You can filter the direction (X, Y, Z, RX, RY and RZ) of the nodes that will be
shown in the geometry display if the “Select Nodes in Geometry” option is
checked.
Section 8.17.6.4 2D Display parameters

Above each display are shown the parameters for the FRFs in the display.
Output
The response DOF of the Shapes.
Input
The reference DOF of the Shapes.
Correlation
This gives the correlation value (in %) relating to the measured and synthesized
FRFs.
Error
This gives the error value (in %) relating to the measured and synthesized FRFs.
Section 8.18 The Modal Validation - Validate worksheet
After the estimation of the modes, there should be some validation of these
modes to make sure that all necessary modes have been found and that the
correct modes have been calculated. In this worksheet (together with the
"Modal Synthesis" worksheet), this validation can be done. There is not a
Rev 12A 441

specific procedure that you have to follow, but in the Validation worksheet all
kind of validation tools are provided.
You can list mode shapes, participation factors and residues. Furthermore, one
of the most important validation tools is the auto-MAC, which calculates the
correlation between different modes in a processing. With the Complexity tool
you can see how real or complex your modes are. Finally, you can compare the
modes in this processing with previous ones.
A more detailed explanation is given in the section on Functions and in the

Analysis and Design file (Anal-Des.pdf) available from the Start menu using
Programs LMS Test.Lab 11B Theory Documents Analysis and Design
Section 8.18.1 [Procedure] To validate the accuracy of modal

models
There are a number of tools or procedures to validate the accuracy of modal

models.
These include:
 Auto-MAC
 Complexity
You may also want to convert the complex mode shapes to normalized ones or
to scale them to enable comparisons to be made.
Section 8.18.1.1 [Procedure] To calculate the Auto-Mac matrix

between modes
Step 1
Select the Active processing you want to use from the dropdown list of
available processings.
Step 2
Push the Auto-MAC button in the "Validate active processing" panel.
Step 3
The Validation function table in the display will adapt to show the modes from
the new processing.
Section 8.18.1.2 [Procedure] To calculate the MPC and MPD

Step 1
Select the Active processing you want to use from the dropdown list of
available processings.
Step 2
Push the Complexity button in the "Validate active processing" panel.
Step 3

The Validation function table in the display will adapt to show the modes from
the new processing.
Section 8.18.2 Active processing panel
created in the Modal MDOF Estinmation worksheet and contains a set of modes
Section 8.18.2.1 Active processing

created in the Modal MDOF Estimation worksheet and contains a set of modes
the upper and lower residual (if these exist).

and lower residuals. For each mode the mode number, frequency and damping
ratio is shown.
Certain "calculations" are done on the selected modes, others on the complete
processing. If you, for example, want to list the residue of a mode, first you
have to select that mode in this list.

Shows the animation of the first selected mode in the Geometry display.

When you click on this button, you'll get a window where you can change the
mode description for the selected mode(s).
If you have selected more than one mode, you can browse through the selected
modes with the buttons "Previous" and "Next". The label of the current mode is
shown.
Rev 12A 443

You can apply your changes only for the current mode by clicking on the
button "Apply to Current" or for all the selected modes by clicking on the
button "Apply to All". You can reset the values by clicking on the "Reset"
button and close the window with the "Close" button.

When you click on this button you will get the properties of the active
processing.

This schedules the Advanced Validation Options dialog.
Section 8.18.3.5.1 Advanced Validation Options dialog

8.18.3.5.1.1 Options for Creating Processing from input basket:
This allows you to create Processing with mode set in the input basket, you
have to first add ModeSet into the input basket, enter a name for the Processing,
then push the “Create Processing” button.
8.18.3.5.1.3 Case of Multiple ModeSets in Input Basket:
If there is more than one mode set in the Input Basket, you have to choose either
modes of first mode set will be taken into accoutn when creating processing or
all the modes of all the modes sets. In case of inconsistent data, no processing
will be created.
Take modes of first ModeSet only

Only modes of the first mode set will be used to create processing.
Take all modes of all Mode Sets

If all the mode sets are consistent, i.e. responses and references are the same for
all the modes, all modes will be used for creating a processing, otherwise no
processing will be created.
This creates a Processing, in the Active Section, based on your selections and
settings above.
Section 8.18.4 Process panel
With this panel you can create a scaled or normalized set of modes starting from
the active processing. The result of this process is a new processing.

Section 8.18.4.1 Process active processing into:

There are two possibilities as follows:
 You may enter a name for your Processing (if required), and when a new
processing is created (for example, when you calculate modes shapes), it
will be named Processing_name (X) {where X = consecutive number}.
or
 You may not enter a name, and then the default name for the new
processing will be Processing (X) {where X = consecutive number}.
Section 8.18.4.2 Type

This specifies the scaling type (see "Modal scaling" on page 228) that you want
to apply on the active processing. You can choose between “Unity Modal A”,
“Unity Modal Mass”, “Unity Modal Stiffness”, “Unity Component”, “Unity
Maximum Component”, “Unity Length” and “Residue Vector”.
Section 8.18.4.3 Scale button

If you push this button, the mode shapes and the participation factors of the
active processing are scaled with the scaling type you have chosen above. It
schedules the DOF dialog with the dropdown list of available DOFs where you
can select the one required.
A new processing is created with these scaled mode shapes and participation
factors.
Section 8.18.4.4 Method

This specifies the normalization method that you want to apply to the active
processing. You can choose between “Amplitude Normalization” and
“Quadrature Normalization”.
Amplitude normalization
The mode shapes and participation factors are normalized by disregarding the
phase information. A new processing is created with these normalized mode
shapes and participation factors.
Quadrature normalization
The mode shapes and participation factors are normalized by disregarding the
coincident response part. A new processing is created with these normalized
mode shapes and participation factors.
Section 8.18.4.5 Normalize button

If you push the button, the mode shapes and participation factors of the active
processing are normalized with the normalization method you have chosen and
a new processing is created with these normalized mode shapes and
Rev 12A 445

If you push the button, the mode shapes and participation factors of the active
processing are normalized with the normalization method you have chosen and
a new processing is created with these normalized mode shapes and
When modes are normalized, they are first rotated to the imaginary axis and are
scaled by using the Residue scaling type. The Residue scaling type scales the
biggest participation factor to 1, so in case of 1 participation factor the mode
shape values equals the residue. This scaling type is also used in the Time
MDOF and the PolyMAX solvers.
In case of the normalized method "Amplitude", the imaginary part of the new
mode gets the amplitude value of the original mode with the sign of the
imaginary part of the original mode. The real part of the new mode is set to
zero.
In case of the normalized method "Quadrature", the imaginary part of the new
mode takes over the imaginary part of the original mode and the real part of the
new mode is set to zero.
If wanted, the normalized mode can be afterwards rotated to the real axis by
scaling it to Unity Modal Mass.
Section 8.18.4.6 Expand button

When you click on the Expand button, the mode shapes and Participation
Factors are expanded to all slave DOFs and saved in a new processing.
Section 8.18.5 List panel
With this panel you can list particular modal parameters.
Section 8.18.5.1 List selected modes of active processing

You first have to choose the modes that you want to use, and then you can
specify the parameter type that you want to list.
When you also want to list the residues then you can also specify the format of
the result.

This specifies the modal parameter that you want to list.
The three types are:
Mode Shapes
When you select this parameter you get a list of the mode shapes for the

selected modes. A mode shape represents the movement of all response (or
output) degree of freedoms (DOFs) on the structure for a specific mode.
Participation Factors
This provides a list of the Participation Factors for the selected modes. Modal
participation factors are terms that represent the participation of modes in the
system response as a function of the reference (or input) DOF. It denotes the
efficiency of excitation of each reference degree of freedom for a specific mode.
Residues
This provides a list of the residues for the selected modes. A residue is a matrix
of imaginary numbers that represents the strength of the mode. Mathematically,
a residue is the product of the mode shape and the transpose of the participation
factor.
Section 8.18.5.3 Format

The format can only be specified when you select "Residues". You can choose
between acceleration, velocity and displacement.
Displacement
This is the product of the mode shape and the transpose of the participation
factor.
Velocity
This is the product of the residue in displacement format and the complex pole.
Acceleration
This is the product of the residue in velocity format and the complex pole.
Section 8.18.5.4 List button

When you click on this button, the specified list, based on your selections, is
shown in the table on the right.
Section 8.18.6 Validate active processing panel
In this panel you can validate the mode shapes in the active processing.
Section 8.18.6.1 Auto - MAC button

If you push this button you calculate the auto-Mac of the active processing.
An auto-MAC is in fact a MAC (Modal Assurance Criterion) with two times the
processing. More information about the MAC can be found in the section
"Correlate with reference processing" panel.
Rev 12A 447

See Functions - Modal Assurance Criterion (see "Modal Assurance

Criterion" on page 228)
Section 8.18.6.2 Complexity button

For lightly or proportionally damped structures, the estimated mode shapes
should be purely normal. This means that the phase angle between two different
complex mode shape coefficients of the same mode (i.e. for two different
response stations) should either be 0º, +180º or -180º.
An indicator called the “Modal Phase Collinearity” (MPC) (see "Modal

Phase Collinearity (MPC) and Mean Phase Deviation (MPD)" on page
230)index expresses the linear functional relationship between the real and the
imaginary parts of the unscaled mode shape vector. This index should be high
(near 100%) for real, normal modes. A low MPC index indicates a rather
complex mode, due either to local damping elements in the tested structure, to
errors in the data measurement or to mistakes in the analysis procedure.
Another indicator for the complexity of unscaled mode shape vectors is the
Mean Phase Deviation (MPD). (see "Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) and
Mean Phase Deviation (MPD)" on page 230) This index is the statistical
variance of the phase angles for each mode shape coefficient from their mean
value, and indicates the phase scatter of a mode shape. This MPD value should
be low (near 0º) for real, normal modes. The Test.Lab software allows you to
calculate both MPC and MPD indices to evaluate the complexity of a number of
mode shape vectors. To decrease the importance of measurement errors near
nodal points, these calculations are weighted by the amplitudes of the mode
shape coefficients.
When you push on the Complexity button. the MPC and MPD are calculated for
the modes in the active processing. The last column lists the phase scatter for
each mode as being either "high", "low" or "?". The table below defines these
descriptions.
Complexity and Phase Scatter values
MPC MPD Phase Scatter

>90% <15º Low
>90% >15º ?
<90% <15º ?
<90% >15º High

This schedules the "Advanced validation options" dialog.

Section 8.18.6.3.1 Auto - MAC

8.18.6.3.1.1 Display shapes (select cells in Auto-Mac table)
When this option is selected and you calculate the Auto-MAC, the result is
shown in the grid on the right as it is, without the option selected. But, if you
now select a field in the Auto-MAC table grid that is the intersection of a mode
and a reference mode, then these two modes will be animated in the Geometry
Display.
Section 8.18.6.3.2 Complexity

8.18.6.3.2.1 Compact
This option gives you a compact view when you calculate the complexity.
8.18.6.3.2.2 Full
This option gives you a full view when you calculate the complexity, you will
have, in addition, the sensitivity (in terms of a + or - sign) for all response
stations.
8.18.6.3.2.3 MOV (Mode Over Complexity)
When this option is checked, MOV (see "Mode Over Complexity (MOV)" on
page 231) will be calculated when you push Complexity.
8.18.6.3.2.4 Mass sen. (Sensitivity of mode frequency for mass
change)
When this option is checked, sensitivity of mode frequency for mass change
will be calculated when you push Complexity.
8.18.6.3.2.5 MPC (Mode phase collinearity)
When this option is checked, MPC will be calculated when you push
Complexity.
8.18.6.3.2.6 MPD (Mode Phase Deviation)
When this option is checked, MPD will be calculated when you push
Complexity.
8.18.6.3.2.7 Scatter (Phase Scatter)
When this option is checked, Scatter will be calculated when you push
Complexity.
8.18.6.3.2.8 MP (Mode participation)
When this option is checked, MP (see "Mode participation" on page 232) will
be calculated when you push Complexity.
Section 8.18.7 Correlate with active processing A with

processing B panel
In this panel you can compare different processings, each of which contains a
set of modes. You can do this by calculating the MAC between these different
Rev 12A 449

sets of modes and decomposing one set of modes into the other one.
Section 8.18.7.1 Section selection

Here, using the first dropdown list you can select the section that contains the
reference processing. You can choose between the “Active Section” and other
sections available in the project.
Active section
This is the section that is currently active. It can be changed in the dropdown list
at the top of every worksheet.
SectionX
The dropdown list gives all the sections in the current project.
Section 8.18.7.2 Processing selection

Here, in the second dropdown list, you can select a processing from the
available processings in the selected section. This processing will become the
reference processing.

You can also add Mode set into the Input basket for correlation.
Note: You have to select in the "Advanced validation options" dialog, the type
of shapes (either Modal or Operational) that should be selected in the input
basket. Only one mode set is considered in the input basket.

processing.
Section 8.18.7.5 MAC button

When you push on this button the Modal Assurance Criterion (MAC) (see
"Modal Assurance Criterion" on page 228) is calculated between the active
processing and the selected reference processing. The MAC is a correlation
between two vectors.
Section 8.18.7.6 Compare button

When you have two groups of modes representing the same modal space then
you can compare (see "Comparison of modal model" on page 232) the two
groups. The comparison concerns the damped frequencies, the damping values,
the modal phase collinearities and the MAC values of the two groups. This is a
useful way of comparing sets of modes generated from the same data but using

different estimation techniques for example.
When you push on this button. A comparison between the active processing and
the selected reference processing will be made.
A data list is presented showing the differences in natural frequencies and

damping ratios, as well as the MAC value for each mode shape, and quality
indicators.
Modes of the two processings are compared to each other, based on two criteria:
 Maximum only
 Maximum and all above threshold
These parameters can be set in the “Advanced validation option” dialog.
Section 8.18.7.7 Decompose button

When you push on this button the mode shapes from the active processing are
decomposed (see "Decompose" on page 233) into mode shapes from the
selected reference processing.

This schedules the "Advanced validation options" dialog.
Section 8.18.7.8.1 Type of shapes in input basket

In your input basket, you can put Modal shapes and/or Operational shapes, here
you have to specify the type of shapes that you want to use.
8.18.7.8.1.1 Modal
Select this radio button if you want to use modal shapes in the input basket.
8.18.7.8.1.2 Operational Deflection
Select this radio button if you want to use operational shapes in the input basket.
Section 8.18.7.8.2 MAC

8.18.7.8.2.1 Display shapes (select cells in the MAC table)
When this option is selected and you calculate the MAC, the result is shown in
the grid on the right as it is, without the option selected. But, if you now select a
field in the MAC table grid that is the intersection of a mode and a reference
mode, then these two modes will be animated in the Geometry Display.
8.18.7.8.2.2 Normalize modes (only in case of modal shapes)
When you use this option, both the modes in the active processing and those of
the selected referenced modes will be normalized with the “Amplitude
Normalization method.
When modes are normalized, they are first rotated to the imaginary axis by
scaling them using the Residue scaling type. (The Residue scaling type scales
Rev 12A 451

the biggest participation factor to 1, so in case of 1 participation factor the mode

shape values equals the residue). This scaling type is also used in the Time
MDOF and the PolyMAX solvers.
In case of the normalize method "Amplitude", the imaginary part of the new
mode gets the amplitude value of the original mode with the sign of the
imaginary part of the original mode. The real part of the new mode is set to
zero.
In case of the normalize method "Quadrature", the imaginary part of the new
mode takes over the imaginary part of the original mode and the real part of the
new mode is set to zero.
If needed, the normalized mode can afterwards be rotated to the real axis by
scaling it to Unity Modal Mass.
8.18.7.8.2.3 Use only shapes values corresponding DOF mask)
A filter can be made for calculating MAC of a certain DOFs. For example, you
can use '*' for all the DOFs.
Section 8.18.7.8.3 Compare (MAC Filter)

You can define specific parameters for comparing set of modes.
8.18.7.8.3.1 Maximum only
When you use this option, each mode in the first set will be compared to the one
in the second set with which it has the highest MAC value.
8.18.7.8.3.2 Maximum and all above threshold
When you use this option, each mode in the first set will be compared to each
one in the second set that has a MAC value above the specified level (default
70%) and with the one with the highest MAC value.
8.18.7.8.3.3 MAC threshold
If you have selected “Maximum and all above threshold”, then you need to
specify the % of the MAC value above which the modes are to be compared.
This value is disregarded when the MAC filter is set to “Maximum only”.
8.18.7.8.3.4 Maximum frequency difference
Besides, the maximum frequency difference (default 50 Hz) defines the
frequency range for comparison. Only modes whose difference in natural
frequencies lies within in this range will be compared.
Section 8.18.7.8.4 Decompose

8.18.7.8.4.1 Balanced modes in active processing
When this option is selected the modes of the active processing are first scaled
to unity length.
You can choose either to “Decompose processing B into processing A” or

“Decompose processing A into processing B”.

This panel provides a display window where you can:

 view the list of selected modes in a Table
 view the MAC matrix
 animate them in a Geometry display
You can configure which displays you want to view and their position. You can
view a display on its own or in combination with another type of display.
Section 8.18.8.1 Validation function table

The name and contents of the table change when a different functionality is
asked for, by using the function buttons in the panels beside.
The table shows the results of the validation functionality.
For example, if "List Residues" is used then the table becomes "List residues".
Section 8.18.8.2 List Options

This schedules the List Options dialog where you can select the formats to be
shown in the list of selected modes. You can view your data in either Real (and
Imaginary) or Amplitude (and Phase) or both formats.
Section 8.18.9 Matrix display
The matrix only shows data when you have calculated the Auto-MAC or the
MAC values. The MAC values are shown in %. The mode number and
frequency value of both modes and their MAC value are displayed in a pop-up
window when you move over a bar with your mouse tip.
Section 8.18.9.1 View options

By right-clicking in the display and selecting Views, you can choose between
the default isometric view and a top view. You can also manipulate the display
using the mouse like another 3D display: you can rotate, translate and scale it.
You can also visualize only a part of the MAC matrix display: select a MAC
value by clicking on it or with the middle mouse button, select a range of
modes. Then right-click in the display and select 'Hiding'. Here you have the
option to:
Rev 12A 453

 zoom to the selection

 hide the selection
 hide the current row
 hide the current column
 show all
 undo
In the right-click menu, you also have the option to maximize and restore the
display.
Section 8.18.9.2 Color scale

The color scale can be shown in the display.
You can change the spectrum of the color scale. You can also change the
number of colors used.
The limits can be set to 'free' or to 'fixed'. When you choose fixed limits, the
color scale will be adapted. All MAC values below the minimum limit will be
colored in the lowest limit color and all values above the maximum limit will be
colored in the highest limit color.
Note: Only the color scale will be changed, not the MAC matrix itself. The
height of the bars will not change.
Section 8.18.9.3 Copy to clipboard

You can copy a screenshot of the matrix display to the clipboard.
Section 8.18.9.4 Matrix display options

You can choose different color schemes for the background and the axes. You
can also choose to switch on or off the cell outlines.
Section 8.18.10 Geometry display
You can choose to display a Single, Quad, Upper/Lower or Left/Right geometry

display.
Section 8.18.10.1 Display combinations

When a geometry display is used in combination with a Table or MAC Matrix,
mode shapes from the Table / MAC Matrix can be animated when you select a
cell in the Table or Matrix.

Section 8.19 The Modal Validation - Data Handling

worksheet
This worksheet helps you to remove or add modes from different processing.
You can also synthesize rigid body modes, calculate static compensation modes,
and import a mode set of an .afm file (ASCII file mode).
Section 8.19.1 [Procedure] To handle your data
Section 8.19.1.1 [Procedure] To load modes from processing to

workspace
Step 1
Select the radio button of "Section".
Step 2
Select the Section from the dropdown list of "Section".
Step 3
Select the "Processing" that you want to remove a mode from the dropdown list
of Processing.
Step 4
All the modes and the lower and upper residuals will be shown in the "Modes"
table.
Step 5
Select all the modes and lower and upper residual, except the ones that you do
not want to use.
Step 6
Push Load button, the selection will be added in the "Modes in Workspace"
table.
Step 7
Repeat the procedure if you need to load modes from a different processing.
Section 8.19.1.2 [Procedure] To load modes from input basket to

workspace
Step 1
Add the mode set into the input basket.
Step 2
Select the radio button of "Input basket".
Step 3
All the modes and the lower and upper residuals will be shown in the "Modes"
table.
Step 4
Select all the modes and lower and upper residual, except the ones that you do
Rev 12A 455

not want to use.

Step 5
Push Load button, the selection will be added in the "Modes in Workspace"
table.
Step 6
Repeat the procedure if you need to load modes from a different processing.
Section 8.19.1.3 [Procedure] To create new processing

Step 1
Load all the modes and lower and upper residuals that you want to group in the
"Modes in workspace" table.
Step 2
Enter the new processing name in the "Processing name (optional)" field in the
"Create Processing from Workspace" panel.
Step 3
Fill in the options in the advanced dialog: how are the mode shapes made
consistent and how are the participation factors made consistent, if needed. See
explanation about the advanced dialog.
Step 4
Push Create button.
Step 5
This processing will be selected and shown automatically in the "Modes" table.
Section 8.19.2 Section panel
Section 8.19.2.1 Section

If you want to use a mode set coming from processing, this option should be
selected.
Section 8.19.2.1.1 Section

By using the first dropdown list you can select the section contains the
processing that you want to load.

This drop down list enumerates the available processings within the selected
section. You can choose any processings available in the selected section.

If you want to use the Input Basket, this option should be selected. Input Basket

Section 8.19.2.2.1 Input Basket

You fill this basket (or folder) with a set of data that you require for a specific
operation. There is only one Input Basket for an active session, but data from
other baskets can be imported into it. You can also include data in the Input
Basket that has been imported from baskets created in LMS Tec.Manager. If
you have this option, you access it by clicking on the Tec.Manager icon in
the Test.Lab toolbar.
Note: Only the first mode set will be used and only modal data (either mode set
or processing ) can be used.
Section 8.19.2.2.2 Refresh

This updates the "Modes" table with the previous selection.

This table presents all the modes together with the upper and lower residual (if
these exist) of the previous panel selection.
Section 8.19.4 Load Selected Modes in Workspace panel
Section 8.19.4.1 Load

Select modes and/or upper and lower residuals in the "Modes" table, push Load
button, the selected elements will be load into the workspace.
Section 8.19.4.2 Display

Shows the animation of the first selected mode in the Geometry display.

processing.
Section 8.19.4.4 List

You first have to choose the modes that you want to use, and then you can
Rev 12A 457

specify the parameter type that you want to list.
When you also want to list the residues then you can also specify the format of
the result.
When you click on this button, the specified list, based on your selections, is
shown in the table on the right.

This specifies the modal parameter that you want to list.
The three types are:
Mode Shapes
When you select this parameter you get a list of the mode shapes for the
selected modes. A mode shape represents the movement of all response (or
output) degree of freedoms (DOFs) on the structure for a specific mode.
Participation Factors
This provides a list of the Participation Factors for the selected modes. Modal
participation factors are terms that represent the participation of modes in the
system response as a function of the reference (or input) DOF. It denotes the
efficiency of excitation of each reference degree of freedom for a specific mode.
Residues
This provides a list of the residues for the selected modes. A residue is a matrix
of imaginary numbers that represents the strength of the mode. Mathematically,
a residue is the product of the mode shape and the transpose of the participation
factor.
Section 8.19.4.6 Format

The format can only be specified when you select "Residues". You can choose
between acceleration, velocity and displacement.
Displacement
This is the product of the mode shape and the transpose of the participation
factor.
Velocity
This is the product of the residue in displacement format and the complex pole.
Acceleration
This is the product of the residue in velocity format and the complex pole.
Section 8.19.4.7 Rigid body...

The theory about the synthesis of rigid body modes can be found in Synthesize

rigid body modes (on page 235).
The 6 rigid body modes of a “free-free” suspended structure are 3 translations

according the principle axes of inertia and 3 rotations around these axes. The
geometry information needed to calculate these rigid body modes are the mass,
the center of gravity, the orientation of the 3 principle axes of inertia and the
moments of inertia around these axes.
The frequency (default 1 Hz) and damping value (default 0.1 %) of the rigid
body modes are specified by the user. The mode shapes and the participation
factors of the rigid body modes will be calculated and stored in the workspace.
Section 8.19.4.8 Static comp...

The theory about the calculation of static compensation modes can be found in
Calculate static compensation modes (on page 236).
The static compensation modes can be calculated at a chosen frequency: the

values of the shapes of the static compensation modes values are adapted to this
frequency. This frequency should be significantly higher than the frequency of
the deformation modes. By default, a frequency factor 100.0 is taken which is
applied on the frequency of the upper residual terms (this is the end frequency
of the frequency band of the deformation modes).
The mode shapes can be calculated by the scaling method or the SVD method
(default).
Section 8.19.4.9 ASCII file...

A dialog is launched to load modes and lower and upper residuals from a
chosen AFM file (AFM stands for ASCII File Mode, file extension: .afm).
An AFM file contains the information of a ModeSet in ASCII format. This

means that it is saved in plain text format.
An AFM file can be created by exporting a ModeSet to AFM format by

right-clicking on the ModeSet and selecting the AFM option in the export entry.
It can also be created in a simple text editor, like Notepad, if you save the file
with .afm extension.
Section 8.19.5 Modes in workspace panel
Section 8.19.5.1 Modes in workspace table

these exist) that are loaded in the workspace.
Rev 12A 459

Section 8.19.6 Create Processing from workspace panel
Section 8.19.6.1 Create

Push Create button, a processing will be created with the modes and lower and
upper residuals listed in the "Modes in workspace" panel. The name of the new
processing can be specified by the user. Also advanced options can be used to
deal with inconsistent modes.
Section 8.19.6.2 Processing name (optional)

Section 8.19.6.3 Advanced

The theory about making a consistent mode set can found in Creating a
consistent mode set (on page 238).
Two methods can be used to deal with mode shapes which have inconsistent
response DOFs:
 Keep only the common response DOFs
 Assume the values in the missing response DOFs to be zero.
About participation factors which have inconsistent reference DOFs: the
missing values are calculated by reciprocal scaling. The reciprocal scale factor
can be derived in a least squares way from the existing driving points or it can
be derived from the maximum driving point only. Two advanced options can be
used to find the most suitable driving points:
 Skip over-complex driving points
 Skip out-of-band driving points
Note: Over-complex driving points are the ones of which the imaginary part of
the corresponding driving point residue has a positive sign. When the scaling
would be based on such a driving point only, the mass sensitivity of the scaled
mode would be positive (the frequency would increase when applying a mass
load, instead of decrease).
If wanted, also the existing participation factor values can be re-calculated by

reciprocal scaling.

Select an element in the "Modes in workspace" panel, push Delete button, the
element will be removed form the workspace.

Section 8.19.6.5 Annotate

When you click on this button, you'll get a window where you can change the
mode description for the selected mode(s).
If you have selected more than one mode, you can browse through the selected
modes with the buttons "Previous" and "Next". The label of the current mode is
shown.
You can apply your changes only for the current mode by clicking on the button
"Apply to Current" or for all the selected modes by clicking on the button
"Apply to All". You can reset the values by clicking on the "Reset" button and
close the window with the "Close" button.

When you click on this button you will get the properties of the mode and lower
and upper residuals of "Modes in the workspace" table.
This panel provides a display window where you can:

 view the list of selected modes in a Table
 view the MAC matrix
 animate them in a Geometry display
You can configure which displays you want to view and their position. You can
view a display on its own or in combination with another type of display.
Section 8.19.7.1 Validation function table

The name and contents of the table change when a different functionality is
asked for, by using the function buttons in the panels beside.
The table shows the results of the validation functionality.
For example, if "List Residues" is used then the table becomes "List residues".
Section 8.19.7.2 List Options

This schedules the List Options dialog where you can select the formats to be
shown in the list of selected modes. You can view your data in either Real (and
Imaginary) or Amplitude (and Phase) or both formats.
Rev 12A 461

Section 8.19.8 Geometry panel


Previous button
Next button

projection.
application.

Previous button
Next button



Previous button
Next button
8.19.8.1.3.2 All
Previous button
Next button

Previous button
Next button
8.19.8.1.4.2 All
Previous button
Next button
Rev 12A 463

Section 8.19.8.2 Type (Position)
Section 8.19.8.2.1 Table

This display the list of selected modes. The list will depend on the selections
you have made in the right hand panels.

This displays either one or two geometry displays (either in a left and right or in
an upper and lower position). Each configuration has their own action buttons.
Section 8.19.8.2.3 Table / Geometry

This displays the list over the geometry display(s). Each configuration has their
own option and action buttons.
Section 8.19.8.2.4 Geometry / Table

This displays the geometry display(s) over the list. Each configuration has their
Section 8.20 The Multi-Run Modal - Fill Mode Mapping

Table worksheet
This minor worksheet is used to fill in the mode mapping table. This table will
contain the target modes and the modes of each modal estimation or processing
you want to merge. After having defined the target modes, the modes from
different modal estimations or processings have to be added to the same table.
The target modes are used as reference modes both for the automatic
arrangement of the modes in the mode mapping and for the merging operation.
Section 8.20.1 [Procedure] To create a Mode Mapping Table
In order to create a mode mapping table, both the target modes and the modes to
be merged, have to be selected. These modes can come from a processing, an
operational processing or the input basket.
Section 8.20.1.1 [Procedure] To look for Modes in a Processing

Step 1
Select the “Processing” radio button in the “Look for Modes to be Merged”
panel.
Step 2

Select a Section from the dropdown list.

Step 3
Select a Processing from the dropdown list.
Section 8.20.1.2 [Procedure] To look for Modes in an Operational

Processing
Step 1
Select the “Operational Processing” radio button in the “Look for Modes to be
Merged” panel.
Step 2
Select a Section from the dropdown list.
Step 3
Select a Processing from the dropdown list.
Section 8.20.1.3 [Procedure] To use the Input Basket to add Modes

You have to fill the input basket (see "[Procedure] To fill an input basket" on
page 327) with the mode sets from which you want to add modes.
Note: A mode set can be either a modal mode set, a set of operational defection
shapes or an operational mode set.
Step 1
Push the “Advanced...” button, a dialog will popup and you can choose the type
of mode set that will be used in the Input Basket.
Step 2
Add the mode sets to the Input Basket.
Step 3
Select the “Input Basket” radio button in the “Look for Modes to be Merged”
panel.
Section 8.20.1.4 [Procedure] To define Target Modes

Step 1
Select the Processing with the target modes.
Step 2
Select the mode(s) in the list that you want to use as the target mode(s).
Step 3
Push the “Add” button in the “Add Selected Target Modes ” panel.
The target mode will be shown in the header column of the mode mapping table
as:
“Target 1 : <<target number>> : <<frequency of the mode>>”
Note: All target modes have to come from the same processing.
Step 4
Rev 12A 465

If you want to redefine your target modes, use the “Replace” button. All the
current target modes will then be replaced by your latest selection.
Section 8.20.1.5 [Procedure] To define Modes to be Merged

Step 1
Select a Processing that contains modes that need to be merged
Step 2
Push the “Add” button in the “Add Processing to be Merged” panel.
The modes of the added processing will be shown in the latest row of the Mode
Mapping Table.
Step 3
Repeat the same procedure for other processings you want to merge.
Note: You can define a different manner of mapping using the “Advanced...”
button in the “Add Processing to be Merged” panel (see "Add button" on
page 468).
Section 8.20.2 Look for Modes to be Merged panel
This is where the modes you want to use for merging can be found. Data can
come from a processing (modal analysis data) or an operational processing
(operational modal analysis data) coming from a section in the current project or
the contents of the input basket.

If you want to use a mode set coming from a modal analysis, this option should
be selected.

By using the first dropdown list you can select the section contains the
processing that you want to merge.

This drop down list enumerates the available processings within the selected
section. You can choose any processings available in the selected section.
Section 8.20.2.2 Operational Processing

If you want to use a mode set coming from an operational modal analysis, this
option should be selected.


By using the first dropdown list you can select the section that contains the
operational processing you want to merge.

This drop down enumerates the available operational processings within the
selected section. You can choose any operational processings available in the
selected section

If you want to use the Input Basket, this option should be selected.
Section 8.20.2.3.1 Input Basket

imported into it.
Section 8.20.2.3.2 Advanced...

This schedules the ''Type of modeset in input basket'' dialog.
Here, you can select the type of shapes that you will be using in the input basket
before you start adding the data to the input basket.
Modal
The data will come from a modal mode set (modal analysis data).
Operational
The data will come from an operational mode set (operational modal analysis
data).
Section 8.20.2.4 Mode Table

these exist) of the in the previous panel selected processing (the ''Look for
Modes to be Merged'' panel).
Section 8.20.2.4.1 Mode table parameters

For each mode the mode number, frequency and damping ratio is shown.
Rev 12A 467

Section 8.20.3 Investigate Selected Modes to be Merged panel

Shows the animation of the first in the modes table selected mode in the
Geometry display.

processing.
Section 8.20.4 Add Selected Target Modes panel
For merging modes, you first have to define the target modes. Choose your data
either from a section or from the input basket, select mode(s) in the modes table
and push the “Add” or “Replace” button.
Section 8.20.4.1 Add button

Select a mode or multiple modes in the mode table, push “Add” and the
mode(s) will be used as target mode(s).
Section 8.20.4.2 Replace button

Select a mode or multiple modes in the mode table, push “Replace”, the modes
will be used as target mode(s).
Section 8.20.5 Add Processing to be Merged panel
Section 8.20.5.1 Add button

Push “Add”, all the modes available in the mode table will be added as modes
to be Merged.

This button gives access to the Advanced options to fill Mode Mapping Table
dialog.

Section 8.20.5.2.1 Advanced options to fill Mode Mapping Table

dialog
In this dialog you can specify the default strategy for the arranging of the mode
mapping table.
8.20.5.2.1.1 According to frequency correspondence
In this case the default mapping happens according to the frequency
correspondence. Modes of an added processing will be placed beneath that
target mode that will lead to the best frequency correspondence.
8.20.5.2.1.2 Consider corresponding modes in band
In this case the default mapping also happens according to the frequency
correspondence. However only target modes with a certain band are
considerate. The difference between the mode and the corresponding target
mode will remain lower than the given band.
8.20.5.2.1.3 Frequency Bandwidth
The band that will be used to arrange the added modes in the mode table. If you
enter 10 Hz for this value and 100 Hz is the target frequency, the range will be
as 95 Hz to 105 Hz.
8.20.5.2.1.4 According to frequency correspondence in band
In this case the mapping happens according to the frequency correspondence
within the frequency bandwidth. Modes of an added processing will be placed
beneath that target mode that will lead to the best frequency correspondence.
This option is available only when you use the "Consider corresponding modes
in band " option.
8.20.5.2.1.5 According to MAC correspondence in Band
In this case the mapping happens according to the MAC between the target
modes and the one that needs to be merged. This option is only available when
you use the "Consider corresponding modes in band" option.
Note: For using this option, at least one common DOFs should be available in
the target mode and the one that needs to be merged. Otherwise, it is
meaningless to calculate the MAC.
Section 8.20.5.3 Add all processings button

Pushing “Add all processings” will add all the modes of all the processings
available in the chosen section to the mode mapping table (which contains the
modes to be Merged).
For each processing a new row will be created in the mode mapping table.
Rev 12A 469

Section 8.20.6 Mode Mapping Table panel
Section 8.20.6.1 List Options...

This schedules the List Options... dialog.
Section 8.20.6.1.1 List Options... dialog

Here you can choose to show also the damping values of the modes in the mode
mapping table.
Section 8.20.6.2 Mode mapping table
Section 8.20.6.2.1 Processing Name

This column lists the name of the processings (together with the project and
section name) that will be merged.
Section 8.20.6.2.2 Target <<Target X>> <<frequency of the target

mode>>
You will have as many columns as the number of target modes.
Each column will have the same kind of the header displaying the target mode
frequency, for example: Target 1 26,5 Hz
When you add a processing to be merged, a mapping will be created between

modes in the processing and the target modes according to the settings in the
“Advanced option to fill the mode mapping table” dialog.
Section 8.20.6.2.3 Rejected

Shows the number of modes that will not be merged in the corresponding
processing.
Section 8.20.6.2.4 Upper Residual

Shows the availability of Upper Residual in the corresponding processing.
Section 8.20.6.2.5 Lower Residual

Shows the availability of Lower Residual in the corresponding processing.
Section 8.20.6.3 Arrange... button

After you have selected a certain processing (by selected a row or field in the
table) you can push this button to display the “Arrange Frequencies of Selected
Processing” dialog.

Section 8.20.6.3.1 Arrange Frequencies of Selected Processing

You can arrange manually the mapping between the target mode and the
selected processing in the “Mode mapping table”. If you want to leave holes in
the mode mapping table you have to insert one of the “skip's” and arrange it at
the correct position.
8.20.6.3.1.1 Available list
Shows the modes available still the selected processing in the “Mode mapping
table”. Only those which are not already selected are displayed. There are also
some “skip” mode which you can use to create holes in the mode mapping
table.
8.20.6.3.1.2 Insert and Remove buttons
Insert (>) button
Adds the selected mode from the Available list to the Selected list.
Remove (<) button

Removes the selected mode from the Selected list.
8.20.6.3.1.3 Selected list
Shows the modes that will be merged of the selected processing in the “Mode
mapping table”.
8.20.6.3.1.4 Mapping buttons
Begin button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the first target mode.
Up button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the previous target mode.
Down button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the next target mode.
End button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the last target mode.

If you select a processing in the “mode mapping table” and push the “Delete”
button, this processing will be excluded from the mode mapping table and the
modes in this processing will not be merged.
Rev 12A 471



Previous button
Next button

projection.
application.

Previous button
Next button


Previous button
Next button
8.20.7.1.3.2 All
Previous button
Next button

Previous button
Next button
8.20.7.1.4.2 All
Previous button
Next button

Rev 12A 473




Section 8.21 The Multi-Run Modal - Merge Modes

worksheet
This minor worksheet is used to merge modes according to Mode Mapping

table defined in the Fill Mode Mapping table minor worksheet (see "The
Multi-Run Modal - Fill Mode Mapping Table worksheet" on page 464). The
target modes in this mode mapping table are used as reference modes for the
merging.
Section 8.21.1 [Procedure] To merge Modes
In order to merge modes first a mode mapping table has to be composed, for
which both the target modes and the modes to be merged, have to be selected.
These modes can come from a processing, an operational processing or the
input basket.
Step 1
Select the target modes and the modes to be merged in the Fill Mode Mapping
table minor worksheet (see "The Multi-Run Modal - Fill Mode Mapping
Table worksheet" on page 464).
Step 2
Enter a name in the Processing field of the “Merge Modes in the Mode Mapping
Table” pane for the resulting processing.
Step 3
Push the “Merge” button.
Step 4
The resulted processing will be selected automatically in the Mode list.
Step 5

Select a mode in the mode list.

Step 6
Push the “Display” button to animate the selected mode in the geometry
display.
Section 8.21.2 Merge Options panel
Here, you can select the scaling method that you want to use.
Section 8.21.2.1 Scaling method

For Processings you can choose in this pull down menu between Unchanged,
Driving point, Unity Modal A and Response Scaling.
For Operational Processings you can choose between Unchanged and Response
Scaling.
Unity Modal A
The mode shape values will be scaled according to the reciprocal scale factor
(determined by the driving points).
Scale Factor - Unity Modal A
with the ith driving point mode shape value,
the ith driving point participation factor value and * denotes the conjugated
value.
The scaled mode shape than becomes
and the resulting participation factor becomes
Driving Point Scaling

This method scales the mode shapes of the mode to be merged so that the
largest (in absolute value) common (between the mode to be merged and the
target mode) driving point residue value will be equal for both modes
Rev 12A 475

Scale Factor - Driving Point Scaling
with i the common driving point that maximizes
or
The resulting scaled mode shape than becomes
The participation factors are taken over from the target modes.
Response Scaling
This scaling method is both useful for classical modal analysis if no driving
points are available as for operational modal analysis (where the concept of
driving points doesn't exist).
If there is only one common Degree Of Freedom (DOF) between the mode to be
merged and the corresponding target mode, the resulting mode shape values are
scaled in such a way that this common DOF will be the same for the scaled
mode and the target mode.
If there is more than one common DOF, this scaling happens in a least-squares
fashion
Scale Factor - Response Scaling
with the ith common mode shape value of the target mode,
the ith common mode shape value of the mode to be merged and * denotes
the conjugated value.
The scaled mode shape than becomes
The participation factors (in the case of classical modal analysis) or reference
factors (in the case of operational modal analysis) are taken over from the target
modes.
The modes are just joined together without any scaling.

No scaling
Section 8.21.3 Merge Modes in Mode Mapping Table panel
Here, you can set advanced options and then merge your modes.

Optionally you can enter a name for your Processing if required. When a new
processing is created (for example, when you calculate modes shapes) with a
given name (for example Processing_name), it will be named Processing_name
(X) where X is a consecutive number.
If you do not enter a name for the new processing then it will have the default
name of Processing (X) where X is a consecutive number.
Section 8.21.3.2 Merge button

The modes to be merged are defined in the mode mapping table. Push this
button to merge them. The resulted processing will automatically be selected in
the Mode list.

When you push on this button the “Advanced options to fill Mode Mapping
Table” dialog will be shown, where you can specify the strategy to determine
the resulting poles.
Section 8.21.3.3.1 Advanced option to fill Mode Mapping Table

dialog
You can specify whether you want to use the target mode's poles or the
averaged poles of the modes to be merged as the resulting poles.
8.21.3.3.1.1 Use poles of target modes
If you want to use the poles of the target modes as the poles of the merged
modes you have to select this radio button.
8.21.3.3.1.2 Use averaged poles
If you want to use the averaged poles of the modes in the mode mapping table
as the poles of the merged modes, use this radio button. For each column of the
mode mapping table the poles are averaged resulting in a pole that will be used
instead of a target pole.
Rev 12A 477

Section 8.21.4 Mode List panel
the upper and lower residual (if these exist).

Choose this radio button to select a processing (coming from modal analysis
data).

In this dropdown list you can select an available processing from the active
section.
Section 8.21.4.2 Operational Processing

Choose this radio button to select an operational processing (coming from
operational modal analysis data).

In this dropdown list you can select an available operational processing from the
active section.
Section 8.21.4.3 Mode table

these exist) of the selected processing.
Section 8.21.4.4 Buttons
Section 8.21.4.4.1 Display button

Shows the animation of the first in the mode table selected mode in the
Geometry display.
Section 8.21.4.4.2 Annotate button

Clicking on this button will launch a window allowing you to change the mode
description for the selected mode(s).
If you have selected more than one mode, you can browse through this selection
with the buttons "Previous" and "Next". The label of the current mode is shown.
You can apply your changes only for the current mode only by clicking on the
button "Apply to Current" or for all the selected modes by clicking on the
button "Apply to All".

You can reset the values by clicking on the "Reset" button and close the
window with the "Close" button.
If you close the window without having clicked on the apply buttons nothing
will be changed.
Section 8.21.4.4.3 More button

processing.
Section 8.21.5 Mode Mapping Table panel
Section 8.21.5.1 List Options...

This schedules the List Options... dialog.
Section 8.21.5.1.1 List Options... dialog

Here you can choose to show also the damping values of the modes in the mode
mapping table.
Section 8.21.5.2 Mode mapping table
Section 8.21.5.2.1 Processing Name

This column lists the name of the processings (together with the project and
section name) that will be merged.
Section 8.21.5.2.2 Target <<Target X>> <<frequency of the target

mode>>
You will have as many columns as the number of target modes.
Each column will have the same kind of the header displaying the target mode
frequency, for example: Target 1 26,5 Hz
When you add a processing to be merged, a mapping will be created between

modes in the processing and the target modes according to the settings in the
“Advanced option to fill the mode mapping table” dialog.
Section 8.21.5.2.3 Rejected

Shows the number of modes that will not be merged in the corresponding
processing.
Rev 12A 479

Section 8.21.5.2.4 Upper Residual

Shows the availability of Upper Residual in the corresponding processing.
Section 8.21.5.2.5 Lower Residual

Shows the availability of Lower Residual in the corresponding processing.
Section 8.21.5.3 Arrange... button

After you have selected a certain processing (by selected a row or field in the
table) you can push this button to display the “Arrange Frequencies of Selected
Processing” dialog.
Section 8.21.5.3.1 Arrange Frequencies of Selected Processing

You can arrange manually the mapping between the target mode and the
selected processing in the “Mode mapping table”. If you want to leave holes in
the mode mapping table you have to insert one of the “skip's” and arrange it at
the correct position.
8.21.5.3.1.1 Available list
Shows the modes available still the selected processing in the “Mode mapping
table”. Only those which are not already selected are displayed. There are also
some “skip” mode which you can use to create holes in the mode mapping
table.
8.21.5.3.1.2 Insert and Remove buttons
Insert (>) button
Adds the selected mode from the Available list to the Selected list.
Remove (<) button

Removes the selected mode from the Selected list.
8.21.5.3.1.3 Selected list
Shows the modes that will be merged of the selected processing in the “Mode
mapping table”.
8.21.5.3.1.4 Mapping buttons
Begin button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the first target mode.
Up button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the previous target mode.
Down button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the next target mode.

End button
Maps the selected mode in the Selected list to the last target mode.

If you select a processing in the “mode mapping table” and push the “Delete”
button, this processing will be excluded from the mode mapping table and the
modes in this processing will not be merged.


Previous button
Next button

projection.
application.
Rev 12A 481


Previous button
Next button

Previous button
Next button
8.21.6.1.3.2 All
Previous button
Next button

Previous button
Next button

8.21.6.1.4.2 All
Previous button
Next button




Section 8.22 The Modal Rigid Body - Data Selection

worksheet
This minor worksheet is used to select the modal data you want to use for the
rigid body properties calculation. Also the mass line method can be chosen and
a frequency band can be defined. You can calculate a rigid body correlation and
animate modes or residues.
Section 8.22.1 [Procedure] To select Modal data
Step 1
Open, using the File > File Open... menu, the Test.Lab project file that
Rev 12A 483

contains your measured data.

This project should contain both the data that you want to perform Modal Rigid
Body analysis on and the geometry model that you want to animate.
Step 2
Select the source that contains the measured data.
By clicking on the Change Modal Data Selection button, you can find your
FRFs (and others) using either the active section or the input basket. Using the
active section, you can choose between a measurement run, FRF data set or
Processing. By default, the FRFs you selected in the Modal Data Selection
worksheet, will be listed here. If you excluded some FRFs in the Modal Data
Selection worksheet, they will be excluded here as well.
Step 3
The table shows the data set that will be used for performing rigid body
analysis.
Step 4
Check the Selected FRF option "on" and take a look at the FRF (shown in the
FRF pane) in your dataset by selecting cells in the table.
Step 5
You can also calculate the sum (shown in the FRF pane) to give you a first idea
where the modes are.
here.


in the buttonbar.

Refresh button
run.
Measurement run

Existing Shapes set



imported into it.


dataset table.

dataset table.
Rev 12A 485


This panel gives you the possibility to show some functions in both the FRF
pane and the geometry display pane.
Section 8.22.4.1 Show points on geometry

Check this "on", when you select cells and, if there is a geometry, the response
node will appear in the geometry display panel.
Section 8.22.4.2 Selected FRFs

Check this "on", when you select cells and the corresponding FRFs will appear
in the FRF pane.
Section 8.22.4.3 Sum of included FRFs

Check this "on" and the sum of the current FRF data set (included) in the table
will be calculated and displayed.
Section 8.22.5 Verify data panel
This panel gives you the possibility to select a mass line method, select and list
mode shapes and lower residuals, calculate a rigid body correlation and animate
modes or lower residuals.
Section 8.22.5.1 Mass line method

Here you have the choice between Unchanged FRF method, Corrected FRF
method and Lower Residual method.

Unchanged FRF
When this method is selected, the original unchanged FRFs will be used to
calculate the rigid body properties. There is no need to have the deformation
modes available. In the FRF pane you can select the frequency band you want
to use.
Corrected FRF
When this method is used, the influence of the first deformation modes will be
subtracted from the FRFs and the corrected, synthesized FRFs will be used for
the rigid body calculations.
Lower Residual
When this method is selected, lower residuals will be used to calculate the rigid
body properties. Lower residuals represent the influence of the modes below the
first deformation modes and are therefore representative for the rigid body
modes.
Section 8.22.5.2 Select processings with mode shapes / lower

residual
When the Corrected FRF method is chosen, you can select the mode shapes you
want to use by pushing the Select... button. You can find the mode shapes
using either the active section or the input basket. Using the active section, you
can select the processing you want to use. When the Lower Residual method is
used, you can do the same for selecting the lower residuals.
Section 8.22.5.3 List values for modes

When the Corrected FRF method is used, you can select to list the values for the
Mode shapes or for the Participation factors. When you push the List button, a
window will pop up, displaying the demanded values. When the Lower
Residual method is used, you can list the residues.
Section 8.22.5.4 List rigid body correlation

When the Unchanged FRF or Corrected FRF method is used, you can calculate
a rigid body correlation for the FRFs. The rigid body correlation is calculated as
follows: for each spectral line in the selected frequency band, an ODS mode
shape is calculated for each DOF. Also 6 rigid body mode shapes are calculated
according to the main axes: 3 translational and 3 rotational modes. The ODS
mode shapes are then decomposed into these 6 rigid body modes. This leads to
a set of equations that is overdetermined i.e. there are more equations than
variables or unknowns. This is then solved in a least square sense. The
remainder or rest term then defines the rigid body correlation.
You can choose to calculate the correlation over the columns or rows. When
you calculate the rigid body correlation over the columns, for each reference
DOF the lowest correlation, the highest correlation and the average correlation
will be calculated in the selected frequency band.
Rev 12A 487

When you choose to calculate this for the rows, the same will be done for each
response DOF. When the Lower Residual method is chosen, you can calculate
the rigid body correlation over the columns. In this case, the frequency band has
no influence.
Section 8.22.5.5 Animate for selected column

When the Corrected FRF method is chosen, you can animate the first mode for
the selected response DOF. When the Lower Residual method is chosen, you
can animate the lower residual for the selected response DOF.
Section 8.22.5.6 Status

You can check if the selected FRFs or lower residuals meet the constraints that
are necessary to perform a good rigid body analysis.
The checks that are done are:

 Reference and response DOF occurrences in the FRF data set
 Minimum inputs: 9
 Minimum outputs: 24
 Rigid Body correlation inputs: This should be at least 95%
 Rigid Body correlation outputs: This should be at least 90%
For the Lower Residual method, the Rigid Body correlation of the residuals
should be at least 95%.
These are recommended constraints to perform a good rigid body analysis. If

one or more of these recommended constraints are not fulfilled, the status will
be orange. You can still proceed to calculate the rigid body properties, but they
are not likely to be good.
There are also minimal constraints that need to be fulfilled to do a rigid body
analysis:
 There should be at least 2 inputs.
 There should be at least 6 outputs.
When one or more of these minimal constraints are not fulfilled, the status will
be red and you cannot proceed to calculate the rigid body properties.
Section 8.22.6 FRF pane
This displays the Selected FRFs and the Sum of included FRFs if these display
options are checked on in the Display panel.


cursor provided.

cursor provided.

Section 8.22.7 Rigid body analysis panel
In this panel the results of the rigid body correlation is listed when you push the
List button in the Verify data panel.
Section 8.22.7.1 Rigid body correlation table

This list the lowest, highest and averaged correlation results of the rigid body
analysis.
Section 8.22.8 Geometry display panel

This displays the animation of your test structure and the modes or lower
residuals that operate on it.
Section 8.23 The Modal Rigid Body - Calculate worksheet
This minor worksheet is used to calculate the rigid body properties. You can
also animate the rigid body modes here.
Rev 12A 489

Section 8.23.1 Calculate rigid body properties panel
Section 8.23.1.1 Data parameters

Here you can see some of your data parameters that you set in the Modal Rigid
Body - Data Selection worksheet. Also, you can enter the mass of the structure.
Section 8.23.1.1.1 Mass line method

Here the mass line method that is selected in the Data Selection worksheet, is
listed.
Section 8.23.1.1.2 Band

The start and end frequency of the frequency band that will be used are listed
here. Also the number of frequency lines in that band is displayed. When the
Lower Residual method is chosen, these frequency values are listed as well
although they have no influence on the calculation.
Section 8.23.1.1.3 Mass

In this field you have to fill in the mass of the structure in kg.
Section 8.23.1.2 Create geometry node at center of gravity

Here you can create a node at the center of gravity and you can also define a
name for this node.
Section 8.23.1.2.1 Create node

Check on the check box Create node and a node will be added to the
geometry.
Section 8.23.1.2.2 Node name (optional)

Enter the name of the node. By default cog:1 will be used as the name.
Section 8.23.1.3 Synthesize rigid body modes

Here the parameters for synthesizing the rigid body modes can be set.
Section 8.23.1.3.1 Frequency

This will be the frequency for the rigid body modes. By default this is 1 Hz.
Section 8.23.1.3.2 Damping

This will be the damping value for the rigid body modes. By default this is 0.1%

Section 8.23.1.3.3 DOF mask

You can specify a list of DOFs for which the rigid body modes will be
calculated. By default all DOFs are used. This is defined by *.
Section 8.23.1.3.4 Processing name (optional)

You can specify a name for the processing in which the rigid body modes will
be saved. By default this is RigidBody.
Section 8.23.1.4 Calculate and Advanced buttons
Section 8.23.1.4.1 Calculate button

When this button is pushed, the rigid body modes and rigid body properties will
be calculated.
Section 8.23.1.4.2 Advanced... button

This schedules the Advanced calculate options dialog.
Section 8.23.1.4.3 Advanced calculate options

Reference
You can specify coordinates and orientation of the reference.
Load settings from processing (containing rigid body modes)

You can choose a section and a processing from which you want to load the
settings to calculate the rigid body properties and modes.
Section 8.23.1.5 Status
Section 8.23.1.5.1 Status line

When you push the Calculate button, the same check as in the Modal Rigid
Body - Data Selection (see "Verify data panel" on page 486) worksheet will be
performed and the status of that check will be displayed here.
Section 8.23.1.5.2 Logging... button

This schedules a dialog that contains the details about the checks that have been
done.
Rev 12A 491

Section 8.23.2 Rigid body modes panel
Here you can select, display and annotate the modes in your processing.
Section 8.23.2.1 Processing selection

In the drop down list you can select a processing with rigid body modes. Only
rigid body processings are listed.
Section 8.23.2.2 Also consider processings with deformation modes

If you check on this box, other processings with deformation modes will be
listed too.

ratio is shown.

Select a mode from the Modes table above and press this button to animate it
in the Geometry display.

This schedules the Edit Properties dialog where you can edit the Mode label
by adding information to the Mode name.

processing.
Section 8.23.3 Rigid body properties panel
In this display, the rigid body properties are listed.
Section 8.23.3.1 Properties

These properties are:

 Mass
 Reference
 Coordinates of center of gravity about reference
 Moments of inertia about reference
 Moments of inertia about center of gravity
 Principle moments of inertia
 Moments of inertia about center of gravity
 Principle axis
Section 8.23.4 Geometry display panel

This displays the animation of your test structure and the modes or lower
residuals that operate on it.
Rev 12A 493

(bookmarks) • 52, 58, 335
Index [Procedure] To create memo documents • 326
[Procedure] To create new processing • 459
( [Procedure] To create or edit documentation •
59, 326
(De-)selecting of curves • 369 [Procedure] To create or modify a layout • 81,
94, 97
[
[Procedure] To create pictures of your data •
[All] • 133 343
[Between X limits] • 133 [Procedure] To define a function • 355
[Browse...] button • 305 [Procedure] To define a predefined list of
[Procedure] How to import data using attribute values • 73
Tec.Manager • 52 [Procedure] To define a processing function •
[Procedure] Project / Section info • 326 273, 355
[Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print [Procedure] To define a set of User Attributes •
format • 76, 77, 79 72, 327
[Procedure] To add the input data to the data [Procedure] To define additional search criteria
set • 355 • 67
[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In [Procedure] To define Modes to be Merged •
toolbar to Word or PowerPoint • 76, 77, 80 468
[Procedure] To attach files • 327 [Procedure] To define Target Modes • 468
[Procedure] To calculate a stabilization [Procedure] To define the band • 394, 415
diagram • 399, 420 [Procedure] To define your own unit system •
[Procedure] To calculate shapes • 408, 429 62, 64, 299
[Procedure] To calculate the Auto-Mac matrix [Procedure] To edit a function • 357
between modes • 445 [Procedure] To execute a simple data search •
[Procedure] To calculate the MPC and MPD • 65, 331, 333
445 [Procedure] To execute the formulas and view
[Procedure] To change the default memo the results • 357
template • 75, 328 [Procedure] To fill an input basket • 330, 337,
[Procedure] To change the default project 388, 395, 416, 441, 468, 469, 487
template • 41, 275 [Procedure] To fill in User Attribute values •
[Procedure] To copy pictures to another 326
application • 345 [Procedure] To handle your data • 458
[Procedure] To create a data source from a text [Procedure] To load modes from input basket
file • 222 to workspace • 458
[Procedure] To create a data source from an [Procedure] To load modes from processing to
Access file • 223 workspace • 458
[Procedure] To create a data source from an [Procedure] To look for Modes in a Processing
Excel file • 221, 222, 223, 224 • 467
[Procedure] To create a database source that [Procedure] To look for Modes in an
can be used for import into the channel setup Operational Processing • 467
• 217, 221, 223, 224 [Procedure] To make a display layout • 81
[Procedure] To create a Mode Mapping Table • [Procedure] To make a new memo template •
467 74, 328
[Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print [Procedure] To make a new project template •
format in Word or PowerPoint • 76, 77 41
[Procedure] To create a single-picture print [Procedure] To make a reference curve layout •
format in the Data Viewing worksheet • 76, 94
346, 349, 352, 353, 371 [Procedure] To make a unit xml file • 64
[Procedure] To create and calculate user [Procedure] To merge Modes • 477
defined metrics • 375 [Procedure] To print a multi-picture report •
[Procedure] To create and export links 352
Rev 12A 495

[Procedure] To print data using a predefined Acoustic Geometry • 159
print format • 352 Acoustic weighting • 258, 264, 315, 320, 324
[Procedure] To print your picture • 346 Action buttons • 407, 413, 428, 434, 465, 475,
[Procedure] To remove a data source • 225 484
[Procedure] To save the results • 358 Actions • 337, 340
[Procedure] To search for data • 331 Activate section • 276
[Procedure] To select Modal data • 387, 486 Activate This Section • 338, 341
[Procedure] To select poles manually • 399, Active processing • 445
420 Active processing panel • 445
[Procedure] To select poles using the Active section • 391, 452
Automatic Modal Parameter Selection Active Section • 389, 394, 415, 440, 487
add-in • 399, 420 Active Unit System • 299
[Procedure] To select the input data • 355 Add • 306, 359
[Procedure] To set printing options • 76, 77, 78 ADD • 274
[Procedure] To stabilize • 398, 420 Add a detached picture window • 370
[Procedure] To synthesis FRFs • 436 Add all processings button • 472
[Procedure] To use cursors in the display • 69 Add Attachment • 337
[Procedure] To use the displays • 153 Add Automatic Cursor • 124, 150
[Procedure] To use the Input Basket to add Add block... • 381
Modes • 468 Add button • 407, 428, 468, 471
[Procedure] To validate the accuracy of modal Add Criterion • 334, 335
models • 445 Add Double Cursor • 124
[Procedure] To view and manage data • 330 Add Folder • 338
[Procedure] To view the details of data in a Add from Input basket • 359
folder • 330 Add Harmonic Cursor • 124
Add Memo Document • 337, 340
< Add New Attribute... • 306
<Section_name> list • 276 Add Processing Cursor • 125, 150
Add Processing to be Merged panel • 471
2 Add Selected Target Modes panel • 471
2D Correction mode • 287 Add Single Cursor • 124
2D Display parameters • 444 Add to favorites • 96
2D Function Displays • 300 Add to Input Basket • 338, 341
Add to List and Replace List buttons • 377
3 Add to/Remove from Favorites • 179
3D Acoustic Camera • 187, 188, 282 Add_blocks_amplitude • 267
3D Effect • 129 Add_blocks_db • 267
3D Geometry Display • 300 Add_offset_amplitude • 266
Add_offset_db • 266
A Add-ins • 185, 281, 283, 291
A note about units • 11 Add-ins dialog • 281
About Test.Lab • 309 Add-ins... • 281
Abs • 265 Address • 333
Absolute • 163, 168, 169, 172 Adv. Search • 334
Acceleration • 450, 461 Adv. Sieve • 334
Accept Changes • 329 Advanced • 463
According to frequency correspondence • 471 Advanced Automatic Modal Parameter
According to frequency correspondence in Selection options • 405, 406, 427
band • 472 Advanced calculate options • 494
According to MAC correspondence in Band • Advanced option to fill Mode Mapping Table
472 dialog • 480
ACos/ASin/ATan • 265 Advanced options to fill Mode Mapping Table
dialog • 471

Advanced Save dialog • 391 Attachment display area • 329
Advanced Validation Options dialog • 446 Audio Replay • 187, 189, 282
Advanced... • 470 Audio Replay & Filtering • 187, 189, 282
Advanced... button • 391, 397, 402, 405, 410, Auto • 127
418, 423, 427, 431, 437, 442, 446, 451, 454, Auto - MAC • 451
471, 480, 494 Auto - MAC button • 450
AFM file (ASCII format) • 56 Auto Filter • 342
All • 414, 435, 466, 475, 476, 485 Auto Sort • 343
Alpha Blended Transparency • 177 Autofilter • 378
Also consider processings with deformation Automated Reporting • 187, 190, 282, 285
modes • 495 Automatic Geometrical • 165
Always display intersections • 131 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection • 187,
Always include extended project / section 190, 282
information • 305 Automatic selection • 405, 426
Ampl/Phase • 169 Automatic topological • 165
Amplitude • 113, 168, 169, 172 Autopower • 258, 268
Amplitude normalization • 448 Available list • 473, 482
Amplitude/dB Real/dB Imag/dB • 170, 172 Available List • 179
Amplitude/Phase • 168, 171 Average • 266
Analyses • 45 Averaged Autopower Spectrum • 314, 320,
Angle • 132 321
Angle Domain Processing • 187, 188, 282, 284 Axis options • 129
Animate for selected column • 490
Animation • 164
B
Animation Control • 166 Back • 331
Animation settings • 164 Background • 177
Annotate • 463 Balanced modes in active processing • 455
Annotate button • 481 Band • 492
Annotate... button • 412, 433, 446, 495 Band panel • 401, 408, 422, 429
Annotation • 134, 301 Banded • 170
Annotation visible • 110, 116, 120 Base Resolution • 109, 110, 115, 116, 119, 120
ANSI-IEC Octave filtering • 187, 188, 282, Base unit set • 62
284 Basic processing • 255
Append • 243, 248 Batch Reporting • 187, 190, 282
Append to • 393 Begin button • 474, 483
Application • 309 Bits / Sample • 302
Application Launcher • 187, 189 Bode • 88, 99
Applications • 39, 40 Bode Display • 443
Apply to All • 362 Bottom color • 177
Apply to Current • 362 Bounding Box • 175, 177
Arrange Frequencies of Selected Processing • Bridge Settings • 209, 215
473, 482 Browse buttons • 439
Arrange... button • 473, 482 Browse for Reference Blocks... • 381
Arrow • 164 Browse... button • 443
Arrow color and style • 178 Build full Shapes table with all DOFs as
Arrows Directions • 172 reference • 442
Arrows Format • 171 Buttons • 481
Arrows Scalar Transform • 172
ASAM ODS • 335 C
ASAM ODS Database Export • 187, 189, 282 Cable Length • 304
ASAM ODS Driver • 187, 189, 282 Cada-X • 53
ASCII file... • 462 Calculate • 367
Aspect ratio • 129 Calculate and Advanced buttons • 494
Rev 12A 497

Calculate automatically • 384 Component Visualization... • 176
Calculate button • 384, 410, 431, 439, 494 Concatenated Files... • 56
Calculate buttons • 367, 384 Conditioning • 259, 310
Calculate rigid body properties panel • 492 Conditioning functions • 318, 319, 320
Calculate Selected • 368 Conditioning toolbar • 258, 310, 318
Calculate static compensation modes • 239, Conj • 265
462 Conj_multiply • 266
Calculate, Parameters... and Advanced... Consider corresponding modes in band • 471
buttons • 439 Contents and Index • 309
Calculated Content • 138 Copy • 133, 279, 338, 341, 369
Calculations • 136 Copy as Active picture (embedded data) • 349,
Calibration Validity Period • 288 371
CAN Bus • 284, 285 Copy as Active Picture (embedded data) • 57
Cancel • 307 Copy as Active picture (linked data) • 349, 371
Canonical dimensions • 61, 62 Copy as Active Picture (linked data) • 57
Cascade • 308 Copy Legend Values • 138
Case of Multiple ModeSets in Input Basket: • Copy to Bitmap • 56, 349, 371
438, 447 Copy to clipboard • 457
Cepstrum • 258, 269 Copy To Clipboard • 176
Cepstrum_inverse • 258, 270 Copy to Metafile • 56, 127, 349, 371
Change • 361 Copy values • 133
Change... button • 440 Copy Values • 369
Channel definition fields • 209 Copying pictures • 42, 56
Channel group field definitions • 217, 218, 221 Corrected FRF • 489
Channel identification characteristics • 209 Correlate with active processing A with
Channel identification fields • 209 processing B panel • 452
Channel Setup Visibility • 306 Correlation • 444
Channel, segment and position selection • 244, Correlation and errors • 236
246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252 Cos/Sin/Tan • 265
Channels • 209 Create • 462
Clear Results • 360 Create a new section... • 276
Clear Selection • 162 Create a picture • 348, 370, 385
Close • 97, 276, 362, 381 Create geometry node at center of gravity •
Close the current project and activate section • 493
276 Create new • 392
Color • 164 Create new formula • 363, 380
Color Format • 169 Create node • 493
Color Interpolation • 170 Create Processing button • 402, 411, 423, 432,
Color scale • 457 438, 447
Color Scale • 118, 131 Create Processing from workspace panel • 462
Color Vector Transform • 170 Creating a consistent mode set • 240, 463
Colormap • 89, 100, 141, 142, 145, 146, 148, Creating print formats • 75
151, 152, 153 Cross (back) • 127
Compact • 451 Cross (front) • 127
Compare (MAC Filter) • 455 Current Project • 336
Compare button • 453 Cursor • 130
Compare with original FRFs in Data Selection Cursor calculations in Waterfall and Colormap
• 440 display • 137
Comparison • 334 Cursor Legend • 126
Comparison of modal model • 234, 453 Cursors • 130
Complex • 409, 430 Curve fitting • 314, 320, 323
Complexity • 451 Curve Properties • 134, 347, 369
Complexity button • 450 Curve scrolling (prev/next on function

displays) • 181 Deform • 164
Custom Content • 138 Deformation Directions • 168
Customized Metrics Calculator • 187, 191, Deformation Format • 167
282, 284, 285 Deformation Scalar Transform • 168
Cut • 133, 278, 369 Deformed Model • 161
Cut segment • 243, 246 Delay (ms) • 164
Delete • 96, 279, 338, 341, 350, 359, 372, 381,
D 463
Damp • 404, 425 Delete (favorites) • 96
Damping • 404, 425, 493 Delete All Pictures • 350, 372
Data • 280, 347, 368 Delete button • 402, 410, 422, 431, 474, 483
Data and its management • 39, 238 Delete Section... • 281
Data Block Editor • 191 Delete the selected Formula • 364, 380
Data Block Processing • 187, 191, 282 Derived Frequency • 123
Data Calculator Functions • 257, 354, 364 Derived Frequency / Order • 122
Data changes • 394, 415, 487 Derived number • 123
Data display • 397, 403, 418, 424 Deselect All Curves • 126
Data Explorer • 280, 353 Detail view list • 340
Data format • 442 Determining the optimum number of modes •
Data functions • 44 21
Data List panel • 377, 378 Differentiation • 258, 259, 315, 320, 324
Data management and configuration • 39 Direction • 444
Data model • 31 Directions • 390
Data options panel • 387, 389 Disable Overlay Optimization • 300
Data parameters • 404, 425, 492 Discard Changes • 329
Data Properties • 133, 369 Displacement • 450, 461
Data record headers • 45 Display • 460
Data Selection table panel • 387, 390 Display Area Color • 129
Data Set • 376 Display attributes • 347, 368
Data Set buttons • 360 Display button • 412, 433, 438, 446, 470, 481,
Data Source Editor • 308 495
Data Source Selection panel • 375 Display combinations • 457
Data table panel • 395, 416, 488 Display format • 393
Data types you can import • 43 Display Format • 128
Data values • 45 Display Handle • 130
Database sources • 217 Display options • 443
Date • 73 Display panel • 387, 392, 396, 417, 455, 464,
DATX Data Driver • 187, 191, 282 488
dB • 113 Display parameters • 404, 424
Decades • 107 Display shapes (select cells in Auto-Mac table)
Decimals • 110, 111, 116, 117, 120, 121, 130 • 451
Decompose • 235, 454, 455 Display shapes (select cells in the MAC table)
Decompose button • 454 • 454
Default • 276 Display size • 176
Default • 173 Display Size • 128
Default Memo template • 74 Display Sum and Mif • 403, 424
Default Octave Trace Type (Front/Back Display type • 347, 368
display) • 300 Divide • 266
Default Trace Style Scheme • 300 Document Memo Templates • 74
Defaults button • 407, 428 Documentation • 39, 42
Define Local Folders per File Type • 296 Documentation and Presentation • 69
Define one Local Folder • 295 Documentation User Attributes • 72
Definition • 227 DOF mask • 493
Rev 12A 499

Double Clicking • 343 • 34
Double Cross • 146 Export to • 341
Double Order • 146 Export To • 339
Double X • 144 Export To Video... • 176
Double Y • 145 Export... • 96
Double Z • 145 Exporting data items • 42, 45, 52
Down • 380 Extended Info • 305
Down button • 439, 474, 483 Extended Project / Section info • 329
Drift correction • 244, 253 External Data Options • 291
Driving Point Scaling • 478
Duplicate • 350, 372
F
DynaWorks • 54 Faces • 161, 163
Fade In / Out • 302
E
Fading • 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252,
Edges • 161, 163 253
Edit • 278, 327, 329 Fading Time • 302
Edit Arrow Limits • 172 Favorites list • 96
Edit Arrows Scale... • 170 FFT • 258, 270, 314, 320
Edit Color Scale... • 169 FFT Format Conversion • 314, 320
Edit deformation Scale... • 167 FFT_inverse • 258, 270
Edit Properties • 338, 339, 341 FFT-based • 290
Edit Properties dialog buttons • 362 FIFO Settings • 304
Edit Properties... • 361 Fifo Size • 304
Edit Units.. button • 299 File • 275
Edit User Attributes • 339, 343 File access priority • 296
Editing • 243, 246 File Location • 294
Elaborated overview for quick viewing • 294 Fill • 134, 301
Elements in the My Links collection folder • Filter • 342
57 Filter segment • 244, 252
Empty Input Basket • 338, 341 Filter Setting • 291
End • 398, 401, 409, 419, 422, 430, 491 Find in panel • 387, 388
End button • 474, 483 First sample • 426
Enforce reciprocity • 442 Fit • 258, 260
Engineering notation • 110, 111, 117, 120, Fit Model • 173
121, 130 Fixed... • 107, 112, 118
Envelope • 266 Folder for Calculated FRFs • 443
Envelope_min • 267 Folders • 332
Error • 444 Font • 110, 111, 112, 116, 117, 118, 120, 121
Estimation of modal parameters • 9 Format • 111, 117, 121, 450, 461
Euler Angles • 161, 162, 163 Format X • 107
Example • 23, 29 Format Y • 112
Examples of data calculator formulas • 273 Format Z • 118
Excel Data Driver • 187, 191, 282 Formula • 366, 382
Exclude All FRFs • 391 Formula Editor • 364, 365, 381
Exclude Selected FRFs • 391 Formula Set icons • 363, 378, 379
Existing Shapes set • 389, 395, 416, 440, 487 Formula Set table • 365, 382
Exit • 278 Forward • 331
Expand • 165 Frames per cycle • 164
Expand button • 449 Free • 107, 112, 118
Exponential factor • 441 Freq. • 404, 424
EXPONENTIAL WINDOW CORRECTION Frequency • 143, 287, 404, 425, 493
IN MODAL ANALYSIS • 33 Frequency Bandwidth • 472
Exponential window on reference and response Frequency data (spectrum, autopower and

crosspower) • 256 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension • 187,
Frequency lines • 441 192, 282
Frequency start • 441 Head Data Driver • 187, 192, 282
Frequency step • 441 Help • 98, 309
FRF pane • 491 Help button • 205, 207
FRF Set • 411, 432 Hidden lines • 132
FRF, Impedance, Transmissibility and Histogram • 258, 270
Transmittance • 257 Host Adapter ID • 303
Front/Back • 151 HTML template folder • 305
FrontBack • 90, 101, 141, 144, 145, 147, 148, Human Body Vibration • 187, 192, 282
149 Hybrid Modeling • 237
Frontend Connection Options • 303
Full • 452 I
Function Description • 383 Icon • 97
Function display windows • 98 Id • 366, 382
Function ID column • 377 Imag • 113
Functions • 227 Imag (Imaginary) • 168
Imaginary • 169, 171
G
Import • 338
Gauge / Numerical • 131 Import into Active Project • 339
General • 132, 258, 273 Import... • 96
General (Desktop) add-ins • 186 Importing and exporting data • 42
General Options • 287 Importing data items • 42
General… • 108, 115, 119 Include All FRFs • 391
Generate correlation-error list at the end of the Include Selected FRFs • 391
scrolled synthesis • 441 Inconsistent reference DOFs • 240
Geometry • 45, 84, 154, 187, 191, 282, 467, Inconsistent response DOFs • 240
476, 485 Increment • 367, 384
Geometry / Table • 467, 477, 486 Individual functions • 258, 265
Geometry and/or 2D display option • 443 Input • 444
Geometry display • 457 Input basket • 395, 403, 411, 416, 423, 432,
Geometry display panel • 492, 496 440, 487
Geometry display windows • 98, 153 Input Basket • 337, 376, 377, 388, 395, 416,
Geometry pane • 393, 492, 496 441, 453, 459, 469, 487
Geometry panel • 464, 474, 483 Input parameters • 259, 260, 261, 262, 263,
GPS • 55 264, 269, 270, 271, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324,
GPS Options • 291 325
Graphic Area Color • 130 Input Parameters • 261
Grid • 110, 115, 119 Insert (>) button • 473, 483
Group Folder • 295 Insert a function • 364, 380
Insert after • 307
H Insert and Remove buttons • 473, 483
Harmonic count • 131 Insert at position • 243, 247
Harmonic Cross • 149 Insert before • 307
Harmonic Order • 148 Insert delay • 243, 248
Harmonic Removal • 187, 192, 282 Integrate/Differentiate • 113
Harmonic Tracking • 187, 192, 282 Interactive Time Data • 187, 192, 282
Harmonic X • 147 Interactive zooming • 128
Harmonic Y • 148 Interpretation of the exponential factor • 36
Harmonic Z • 148 Interpreting Units • 61, 63
Hatching • 114 Introduction • 185, 217
HD Acoustic Camera • 187, 192, 282 Inverse • 265
HD Acoustic Camera iNAH • 187, 192, 282 Investigate Selected Modes to be Merged
Rev 12A 501

panel • 470 List Units button • 299
IP Address • 304 List values for modes • 490
Isolines • 170 LMS Document templates • 42
LMS on the Web • 309
K LMS Tec.Manager Project Management • 277
KML (Keyhole Markup Language) • 55 Ln • 265
Load • 403, 411, 424, 433, 460
L Load a format • 353
Label • 131, 361 Load Attributes List... • 306
Layout • 129, 140, 347, 368 Load criteria • 335
Layout editing area • 97 Load Criteria • 334
Layout icons • 348, 370, 385 Load FormulaSet from DFS file • 363, 380
Layout list • 95 Load Poles button • 403, 412, 424, 433
Layout Management... • 279 Load Selected Modes in Workspace panel •
LDSF • 60 460
LDSF Saving Mode • 294 Load settings from processing (containing
Least Square Complex Exponential (LSCE) • rigid body modes) • 494
18, 26, 29, 33, 419 Load View • 343
Least Squares Frequency Domain (LSFD) • Local Folder • 295
29, 33, 408, 429 Local or global estimates • 14
Left / Right • 413, 434, 465, 475, 484 Location • 443
Left / Right radio button • 413, 434, 465, 475, Location point definition • 209, 215
484 Lock position • 136
Left button • 439 Log • 113
Left Right Geometry • 86 Log10 • 265
Left/Right • 166, 388 Logging... button • 494
Legend • 126, 178 Look for Modes to be Merged panel • 469
Legend Options • 178 Look in • 333
Length • 162 Lower residual • 437
License Server Options • 301 Lower Residual • 473, 482, 489
License Usage... • 279 Lower residuals • 409, 430
Lighting • 177 LR Geometry • 157
Limits • 106, 111, 112, 117, 118, 121, 135
M
Line • 134, 301
Line color, style, and thickness • 178 MAC • 454
Line Style • 109, 111, 115, 116, 119, 120 MAC button • 453
Line Style... • 132 MAC threshold • 455
Line Type • 130 Main frame and signal processing units • 198
Linear • 107 Main/Overlaid • 166
Linear / dB • 131 Make Printformat • 349, 371
Lines • 161, 163, 398, 401, 409, 419, 422, 430, Mapping buttons • 474, 483
491 Marker • 134, 161, 162, 177, 301
Link • 167, 171 Mass • 493
List • 73, 460 Mass line method • 489, 492
List All Blocks • 332 Mass sen. (Sensitivity of mode frequency for
List button • 450 mass change) • 452
List Options • 456, 464 Master/Slave configuration • 198, 205
List Options... • 472, 481 Math • 265
List Options... dialog • 472, 481 Matlab • 54
List panel • 449 Matlab data • 43, 49
List rigid body correlation • 490 Matrix display • 456
List selected modes of active processing • 449 Matrix display options • 457
List Settings • 339 Max. number samples for calculations • 294

Max. number samples for reporting • 294 Mode participation • 234, 452
Maximize • 128, 176 Mode shape animation • 175
Maximize to Picture • 128 Mode Shapes • 449, 461
Maximum and all above threshold • 455 Mode table • 481
Maximum damping ratio • 406, 427 Mode Table • 470
Maximum frequency difference • 455 Mode table parameters • 470
Maximum number of MIFs • 397, 418 Model for continuous data • 19
Maximum number of samples • 426 Model for sampled data • 20, 25
Maximum only • 455 Model scale • 163
MDM-plug-in • 187, 192, 282 Model Size • 397, 405, 418, 426
Mean and RMS • 258, 268 Models • 178
Mean Phase Deviation (MPD) • 233 Modes in workspace panel • 462
Measure Sheet Font Size • 304 Modes in workspace table • 462
Measurement point identification fields • 218, Modes panel • 412, 433, 437, 446, 460
219 Modes table • 412, 433, 437, 446, 460, 495
Measurement run • 389, 395, 416, 440, 487 Modification Prediction • 187, 192, 282
Memo Inventory • 296 Modifications • 178
Merge button • 479 Modify segment • 243, 249
Merge functions • 258, 272 More button • 481
Merge Modes in Mode Mapping Table panel • More... • 334, 460, 464
479 More... button • 403, 411, 412, 423, 424, 432,
Merge Options panel • 477 433, 437, 446, 453, 470, 495
Merge spectra • 258, 272 Most recent files... • 278
Method • 448 Most Recent Run • 376
Metrics • 268 Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays •
Microphone settings (M4 , VM8 module) • 179
217 MOV (Mode Over Complexity) • 452
MIF (Mode indicator function) / Imaginary Move • 160
Sum • 396, 417 Move down • 364
MIF / Imaginary Sum • 397, 403, 418, 424 Move First • 349, 370
Min and Max • 258, 268 Move Last • 349, 370
Minimum distance between points • 291 Move Left • 349, 370
Minimum spectral lines for octave band • 290 Move Right • 349, 371
Minimum time between points • 291 Move to active project • 342
Mission Synthesis • 187, 192, 282 Move to Front/Back • 133
Modal • 454, 470 Move to global maximum / minimum • 136
Modal Analysis • 187, 192, 282 Move to lower • 369
Modal Analysis Lite • 187, 192, 282 Move to next local maximum / minimum • 135
Modal Analysis Theory • 9 Move to next Sample • 135
Modal Assurance Criterion • 230, 450, 453 Move to previous local maximum / minimum •
Modal Cursor calculations in Front/Back and 135
Bode display • 136 Move to previous Sample • 135
Modal density • 406, 427 Move to… • 135
Modal parameters • 9, 32 Move up • 364, 380
Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) • 233 MP (Mode participation) • 452
Modal Phase Collinearity (MPC) and Mean MPC (Mode phase collinearity) • 452
Phase Deviation (MPD) • 233, 450, 451 MPD (Mode Phase Deviation) • 452
Modal scaling • 231, 447 Multi Reference Post Processing • 187, 193,
Mode Indicator Functions • 227, 397, 418 282
Mode List panel • 480 Multiple degree of freedom method • 13
Mode mapping table • 472, 482 Multiple input analysis • 14, 24, 25, 27
Mode Mapping Table panel • 472, 481 Multiple input Least Squares Frequency
Mode Over Complexity (MOV) • 233, 452 Domain • 30
Rev 12A 503

Multiple inputs least squares complex Octaves • 107
exponential • 24 ODBC databases as an input source for
My Computer • 337 Channel Setup • 217, 220
My Links • 57, 335 Offline Octave filtering optimization • 291
Offline operation • 203, 205
N Offline RPM-Extraction • 187, 193, 282, 284
Name • 327 Offline Sine Data Reduction • 187, 194, 282
Name table • 402, 422 Offset and increment • 109, 110
Names • 161, 162, 163 Offset segment • 243, 251
Nastran Data Driver • 187, 193, 282 OK • 307, 365, 382
nCode Data Driver • 187, 193, 282 OK button • 393
Network • 302, 336 On/Off • 382
Network Hub • 187, 193, 282 Online Data • 337
New Folder • 339 Only an exponential window on the response •
New FormulaSet • 363, 379 35
New Memo Template • 74 OPAX • 187, 194, 282
New Section... • 280 Open applications • 308
New... • 275 Open KML • 55
Next button • 413, 414, 434, 435, 465, 466, Open... • 276
475, 476, 484, 485 Opening a project directly • 41
NMEA (National Marine Electronics Opening a project within an application • 41
Association) • 55 Operational • 470
No scaling • 479 Operational Deflection • 454
Nodal lines • 164 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time
Nodal Lines Directions • 173 Animation • 187, 194, 282
Nodal Lines Format • 173 Operational Modal Analysis • 187, 194, 282
Nodal Lines Properties • 173 Operational Modal Analysis Lite • 188, 194,
Node • 162 282
Node name (optional) • 493 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis • 188,
Nodes • 161, 162 194
None • 165 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite •
Normalize button • 448 188, 194
Normalize modes (only in case of modal Operational Processing • 469, 480
shapes) • 454 Optical Cable Length • 304
Notepad • 327 Optimised & Free Y limits based on: • 301
Number • 73 Optimized • 107, 112, 118
Number (Position) • 413, 434, 465, 474, 483 Options • 109, 115, 119, 122, 129, 137
Number of displays • 347, 368 Options - Add-ins tab • 287, 291
Number of samples • 426 Options - Attributes Tab • 287, 305
Number of visible traces • 131 Options - Curve • 132
Numerical Display Panel • 83 Options - Data tab • 60, 287, 291
Nyquist • 102 Options - Displays tab • 287, 299
Nyquist display • 443 Options - File Locations tab • 287, 294, 311
Nyquist window • 91 Options - Filtering tab • 287, 298
Options - Font Size • 304
O Options - Frontend • 302
Octave • 92, 103, 140, 144, 258, 261 Options - General tab • 287
Octave bands • 107 Options - License Server tab • 287, 301
Octave filter midband and edge frequencies • Options - Miscellaneous - Online • 131
288 Options - Network Hub tab • 287, 302
Octave filter shapes • 289 Options - Numerical Display • 98, 131
Octave Filtering • 288 Options - Sorting tab • 287, 297
Octave Filtering Options • 290 Options - Sound Settings tab • 287, 302

Options - Tec.Manager tab • 287, 301 283
Options - Units tab • 287, 298 Polytec add-in • 43, 51
Options - View • 132 Polytec Data Driver • 188, 195, 283
Options for calculating Shapes • 410, 432 Power • 266
Options for Creating Processing from input PQA • 200
basket • 437 PQBA • 200
Options for Creating Processing from input PQCA • 200
basket: • 446 PQDCA • 200
Options for creating Processing with Poles • PQFA • 200
402, 411, 423, 432 PQMA • 201
Options for Enhanced Functions • 397, 418 PQTA • 201
Options for loading Poles into Pole Table • Practical implementation • 36
402, 411, 423, 432 Practical implementation of the method • 20,
Options... • 138, 177, 286 26
Order • 142 Precision • 132
Order map, spectrum waterfall, individual Pre-fix Node - Name with Component • 175
spectra of a waterfall • 122 Presets • 406, 427
Order Tracking • 188, 194, 283, 284 Presets list • 407, 428
Origin • 175, 179, 333 Pressing the • 273, 362
Original units versus Test.Lab units • 63 Preview Mode • 127
Other folders • 60 Previous / Next • 362
Other local files and folders • 296 Previous button • 413, 414, 434, 435, 465, 466,
Output • 444 475, 476, 484, 485
Overall level of octave display based on • 300 Principal Component Analysis • 188, 195, 283
Overall Level Options... • 129 Print • 278, 346, 350, 371
Overwrite at position • 243, 247 Print Preview • 277, 313
Print Screen • 388
P Print Setup Parameters • 281, 338, 341
Pane Header options • 387, 388 Print with • 346
Parameter estimation methods • 18 Print with... • 350, 371
Parameter Locking • 188, 194, 283 Printer Setup... • 277
Parameters • 406, 427 Printing Options • 278
Parameters... • 440 Process active processing into: • 447
Parent Folder • 331 Process panel • 447
Participation Factors • 449, 461 Processing • 113, 243, 389, 395, 403, 411, 416,
Paste • 125, 279, 339 423, 432, 437, 438, 440, 447, 459, 469, 479,
Paste as Link • 339 480, 487
Paste to Front / Back • 125 Processing Cross • 153
Paste to Upper / Lower • 125 Processing Frequency • 152
Path field • 332 Processing Name • 472, 482
PDF Manual • 309 Processing name (optional) • 463, 493
PDT • 199 Processing Name (Optional) • 402, 410, 411,
Phase • 113, 169, 172 423, 431, 432
Picture tabs • 345, 348, 353, 370, 385 Processing Order • 151
Planes • 177 Processing panel • 437
Play Sound • 341 Processing selection • 453, 494
Point Dir • 366, 383 Processing X • 151
Point Id • 366, 383 Processing Z • 151
Poles panel • 401, 410, 422, 431 Processing… • 137
Poles Table • 410, 431 Product • 267
PolyMAX • 31, 398 Project • 296
PolyMAX Modal Analysis • 188, 195, 283 Project data • 59
PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite • 188, 195, Project Template • 296
Rev 12A 505

Project templates • 41 Replace Data Origin • 350, 372
Projects • 39, 40, 275, 276 Replace from Input basket • 359
Properties • 339, 495 Replace in Input Basket • 338, 341
Properties… • 137 Replace Selected • 334
Property • 334, 361 Replay • 134, 369
Protect Measured • 165 Reset All • 114
Residue type panel • 409, 430
Q Residue vector • 233
QDA • 201 Residues • 449, 461
QDAC • 202 Response Scaling • 478
QTV • 202 Responses • 390, 396, 417, 488
Quad • 413, 434, 465, 475, 484 Restore • 128, 176, 362
Quad Geometry • 87, 158 Resulting function • 261, 263, 264, 269, 270,
Quadrature normalization • 448 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325
Results destination panel • 378
R Retry button • 204, 206
Rank • 404, 424 Right button • 439
Real • 112, 167, 169, 171, 409, 430 Rigid body analysis panel • 492
Reciprocal Switch • 258, 261 Rigid Body Calculator • 188, 195, 283
Reciprocity • 442 Rigid body correlation table • 492
Reference • 494 Rigid body modes panel • 494
Reference Blocks data list • 378 Rigid body properties panel • 495
Reference Channel Setup Options... • 308 Rigid body... • 461
References • 390, 395, 416, 488 Rms calculation • 255
Refresh • 332, 340, 460 Road Runner files • 43, 48
Refresh button • 389, 394, 415, 438, 440, 487 RPC III • 56
Refresh when changing processing • 442 RPC III files • 43, 49
Rejected • 473, 482 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer
Relabel... • 306 • 188, 195, 283, 284
Relate Size to Magnitude • 178 Run Name • 391
Relative • 163 Run selection • 376
Remember FRF Set in addition to Shapes • Run User Attributes • 305
411, 432 Runs • 59
Remote Control • 284, 286
S
Remove • 133, 307, 330, 347, 369
Remove (<) button • 474, 483 Sampling Bit Size • 288
Remove All Cursors • 125 Save • 276, 392, 402, 411, 423, 432
Remove All Curves • 126 Save as Layout • 351, 373
Remove animation • 166 Save As Task Shortcut • 277
Remove button • 407, 428 Save As Template... • 277
Remove cursor • 135 Save As... • 276
Remove Curve • 126 Save Attributes List... • 306
Remove Selected • 334 Save criteria • 335
Remove Selected Criterion • 335 Save Criteria • 334
Rename • 340, 343, 350, 371 Save FormulaSet to DFS file • 363, 379
Rename Section... • 280 Save layout button • 97
Renumber FormulaSet • 364, 380 Save layout field • 97
Repeat for... • 258, 274, 366, 383 Save list of active add-ins when the application
Replace • 307, 359 is closed • 291
Replace button • 471 Save Picture as Layout • 279
Replace by constant • 243, 250 Save Picture as New Layout... • 279
Replace by curve • 243, 250 Save results as... • 360
Replace Data • 351, 372 Save selected as... • 360

Save Sum/MIF button • 397, 418 Selected function • 396, 417
Save View • 343 Selected list • 474, 483
SCADAS III • 197 Selected List • 179
SCADAS Recording • 188, 195, 283 Selecting an empty cell • 273, 362
Scalar math functions • 315, 316, 320, 324 Selecting an empty line in the table • 273, 362
Scale • 132, 266 Selection • 161
Scale button • 448 Selection Dialog • 443
Scale Factor • 178 Selection order buttons • 179
Scale segment • 243, 251 Selection status • 347
Scaling method • 239, 477 Separate Files... • 56
Scan button • 303, 304 Set mean of segment • 243, 251
Scatter • 404, 425 Settings • 403, 412, 424, 433
Scatter (Phase Scatter) • 452 SetXstart • 258, 262
Scroll Down button • 438 Shade color • 178
Scroll right button • 439 Shapes • 402, 411, 423, 432
Scrolling buttons • 438 Shapes pane • 393
SDF • 54 Shapes selection buttons • 390
SDF files • 43, 48 Shapes Set • 402, 423
Search • 332 Shapes set panel • 387, 392
Search button • 333 Shapes table • 442
Search by properties • 334 Shapes table panel • 438
Search For • 333 Show • 137
Search now • 334 Show all • 175
Search Results • 336 Show All • 161, 163, 342
Search Windows subfolders • 334 Show Arrows Scale • 171
Searching for Data using the Data Explorer • Show Color Scale • 169
65 Show Deformation Scale • 167
Second X Axis • 108 Show Favorites • 179
Second X-axes • 123 Show Model Scale • 163
Section • 402, 411, 423, 432, 459, 469 Show none • 175
Section panel • 459 Show None • 161, 163
Section Scaling • 114 Show points on geometry • 392, 488
Section selection • 376, 391, 452 Signal • 268
Section User Attributes • 305 Signal conditioner identification fields • 218,
Sections • 59, 280 220
Sections, (orders, frequency sections, octave Signal conditioning fields • 209, 214
sections, overall level, ...) • 122 Signal conditioning modules • 198, 199
SectionX • 391, 453 Signature Data Post-Processing • 188, 196,
Secured saving during acquisition • 294 283, 284
Segment • 243, 246 Signature Throughput Processing • 188, 196,
Select • 134, 329, 389 283
Select all • 279 Single • 413, 434, 465, 474, 484
Select All • 162 Single cross • 144
Select All Curves • 125 Single degree of freedom method • 13
Select Columns... • 342 Single or multiple degree of freedom method •
Select Deform Maximum • 162 12
Select Display • 443 Single X • 140
Select Nodes in Geometry • 443 Single Y • 141
Select poles button • 405, 427 Single Z • 141
Select processings with mode shapes / lower Single/Doubledifferentiate • 259
residual • 489 Single/Doubleintegrate • 259
Selected fields • 306 Size • 177
Selected FRFs • 392, 489 Size of displays • 347, 368
Rev 12A 507

Size to fit • 138 SUM • 274
Slave DOFs • 165 Sum of FRFs • 442
Smooth • 170, 258, 262 Sum of included FRFs • 392, 489
Smooth FRF • 258, 273 Surfaces • 161, 163
Smooth_FRF • 258, 263 SVD method • 240
Smooth_Linear • 258, 262 Switch button • 390
Smooth_segment • 243, 249 Switch Response and Reference • 392
Smoothing • 114, 165, 315, 320, 323 Synthesis of FRFs • 236, 436
Snap to data values • 131 Synthesis Parameters • 441
Snap to Data Values • 136 Synthesis parameters dialog • 440
Software and Hardware • 185 Synthesize rigid body modes • 238, 461, 493
Solids • 161, 163 Synthesized FRFs • 442
Sort • 342 Sysnoise databases • 43, 49
Sound Diagnosis • 188, 196, 283
Sound Intensity Analysis • 188, 196, 283 T
Sound maps • 175 Table • 396, 417, 466, 476, 485, 488
Sound Player • 302 Table / Geometry • 467, 476, 486
Sound Quality Metrics • 188, 196, 283 Tacho channel (rpm), Derived Tacho channel
Source Control • 284, 286 and Static channel • 123, 124
Source data • 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, Take all modes of all Mode Sets • 438, 447
268, 269, 270, 320, 321, 323, 324, 325 Take modes of first ModeSet only • 438, 447
Source field names • 306 Target <<Target X>> <<frequency of the
Spectrum • 258, 270 target mode>> • 473, 482
Speed (slider) • 439 Target ID • 303
Sqrt • 266 TDF • 60
SRS Calculation • 316, 320, 325 Tec. Manager Search • 306
Standard • 310 Tec.Manager Hub • 188, 196, 283
Standard Content • 138 Tests • 44
Start • 398, 401, 409, 419, 422, 430, 491 Text • 55, 73
Start button • 407, 428 Text annotation color • 177
StartPoint Server • 302 The Active Formula Set panel • 257, 273, 354,
StartPoint server computer name • 302 362
StartPoint server port number • 302 The Attachment Preview panel • 326, 329
Static comp... • 462 The Attachments panel • 326, 328
Status • 367, 384, 490, 494 The Automatic (cursor) menus • 150
Status Bar • 280 The Axis menus • 106
Status line • 494 The Cada-X project database • 43
Status Message • 133, 369 The Cursor menus • 135
STL data • 43, 51 The Curve Legend menus • 126, 134, 137
Stop button • 407, 429 The Data Block Processing Calculator • 378
Stop search • 334 The Data Block Processing worksheet • 373
StripChart • 104 The Data Explorer • 346, 353, 358
Style font • 130 The Data Explorer browsers and toolbar • 346,
Style line • 130 358
Subdivisions • 109, 110 The Data Explorer dialog • 280, 313, 330, 346,
Subtract_blocks_amplitude • 267 353, 358
Subtract_blocks_db • 268 The Data Explorer panel • 354
Subtract_offset_amplitude • 266 The Data Explorer Toolbar • 331, 346, 353,
Subtract_offset_db • 266 358
Subtracts the specified offset from the dB of The Data List panel • 375
the values of the specified function. The Data menus • 133
Combined functions • 258, 266 The Data Set panel • 273, 354, 358
Sum • 268, 396, 397, 403, 417, 418, 424 The Data Set Table • 359

The data set toolbar icons • 359 The Picture display panel • 354
The Delete button • 328 The Picture Display panel • 346, 368
The desktop • 39 The Picture Selection bar • 348, 369
The Detail View panel • 333, 340, 346, 353, The PolyMAX - Band worksheet • 393
358 The PolyMax - Shapes worksheet • 408
The Display menus • 124, 135 The PolyMAX - Stabilization worksheet • 398
The Display panel • 385, 443 The Processing (cursor) menus • 150
The Documentation worksheet • 326 The Search panel • 333
The Double (cursor) menus • 124, 144 The Single (cursor) menus • 124, 140
The followed strategy • 37 The TDF database • 43, 45
The Format display area • 353 The Time MDOF - Band worksheet • 414
The Format display panel • 353 The Time MDOF - Shapes worksheet • 429
The Format selection bar • 353 The Time MDOF - Stabilization worksheet •
The Geometry display functions • 160, 412, 419
433, 464, 474, 483 The Tree-view browser panel • 335, 346, 353,
The Geometry display menu • 161 358
The Geometry display panel • 387, 393, 412, The User Attributes Grid • 326, 327
433 Theory • 309
The Geometry model manipulation icons • 160 Throughput Bind Strategy • 291
The Harmonic (cursor) menus • 124, 147 Throughput File Format • 291
The Import button • 328 Ticks • 109, 116, 119
The Layout editing panel • 97 Tile • 308
The Layout management dialog • 80, 279, 344, Time • 122, 123
348, 370, 385 Time (Throughput) • 122, 124
The Layout management panel • 95 Time Data Editing Functions • 196, 243
The list of documents • 328 Time Data Editor - Advanced • 188, 196, 283
The LMS SCADAS III frontend • 198 Time Data Editor - Standard • 188, 197, 283
The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis workbook Time Data Extraction • 188, 197, 283
• 275 Time Data Options • 294
The Modal Analysis button bar • 309 Time Data Processing • 188, 197
The Modal Analysis menu bar • 275 Time Data Selection • 188, 197, 283
The Modal Data Selection worksheet • 387 Time Domain TPA • 188, 197, 283
The Modal Rigid Body - Calculate worksheet • Time recording during Signature Testing •
492 284, 286
The Modal Rigid Body - Data Selection Time Signal Calculator • 188, 197, 283
worksheet • 486 Time signals • 255
The Modal Synthesis worksheet • 435 Time vs frequency domain implementation •
The Modal Validation - Data Handling 16
worksheet • 458 Time Window dialog. • 426
The Modal Validation - Validate worksheet • Time Window... button • 426
444 Time-based • 290
The Multi-Run Modal - Fill Mode Mapping Timeout • 302
Table worksheet • 467, 477 Timer Options • 301
The Multi-Run Modal - Merge Modes Time-Variant Frequency Analysis • 188, 197,
worksheet • 477 283
The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet • Title Content • 140
354 Title Layout • 140
The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet • Title Legend • 126
351 To condition displayed data • 318
The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet • 343 To preview data • 345
The New from Template button • 328 To select and edit an htm- or html-template •
The Notepad panel • 326, 327 329
The Picture display area • 347, 368 To use the displays • 98
Rev 12A 509

To view data • 98 Use ASPI • 303
Tolerances dialog • 404, 425 Use averaged poles • 480
Tolerances... button • 404, 425 Use Cada-X Triad Colors • 300
Tool • 132 Use Component Visualization • 175
Toolbars • 280, 309 Use embedded configuration • 204, 206
Tools • 281 Use external configuration • 204, 206
ToolTip Style • 130 Use external sound player • 302
Top color • 177 Use frequency information of FRFs in current
TPA Component Editing • 188, 197, 283 Modal processing run • 441
Transducer fields • 209, 212 Use Group Folder • 295
Transducer identification fields • 218 Use internal sound player • 302
Transfer Path Analysis • 188, 197, 283 Use of windows during Modal Impact Testing
TRDS files • 43, 46 • 33
Trigonometric functions • 258, 265 Use only shapes values corresponding DOF
Type • 109, 116, 120, 177, 179, 404, 425, 447, mask) • 455
449, 461 Use Original Units • 299
Type (Position) • 466, 476, 485 Use poles of target modes • 480
Type of shapes in input basket • 454 Use Quad Projection American • 300
Types of analysis • 12 Use specified synthesis parameters • 441
Use SPTI • 303
U Use Test.Lab Units • 299
UL • 103 Use UTP • 304
UL Geometry • 156 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5) • 188, 197, 283
Unchanged FRF • 489 User Applications • 308
Undeformed Model • 162 User Attributes • 72
Undo • 128, 278 User Defined Unit • 299
Unit • 108, 111, 114, 117, 118, 121, 383 Using cursors in displays • 69
Unit System • 299 Using Test.Lab Units • 64
Unit systems • 61, 62 Using the original units • 64
Units • 61
V
Units and how to handle them • 60, 298
Units of External Data • 299 Validate active processing panel • 450
Unity component • 232 Validation function table • 456, 464
Unity Length • 232 Value • 327, 334, 362
Unity maximum component • 232 Value display • 130
Unity modal A • 232 VDAC • 202
Unity Modal A • 478 Vector • 404, 425
Unity modal mass • 232 Velocity • 450, 461
Unity modal stiffness • 232 Verify data panel • 489, 494
Universal File • 53 Vertical / Horizontal Views • 332
Universal File Options • 294 View • 279
Universal files • 43, 47 View options • 456
Up button • 439, 474, 483 View Settings • 340
Upper / Lower • 414, 435, 466, 476, 485 View Setup Parameters • 281, 338, 341
Upper / Lower radio button • 414, 435, 466, View/Change TDF (full) name... • 340, 342
476, 485 Views • 173
Upper Lower Geometry • 85 Visible • 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 115, 116,
Upper residual • 437 117, 119, 120, 121
Upper Residual • 473, 482 Visual Extensions • 175, 177
Upper residuals • 410, 431
Upper/Lower • 92, 166, 388
W
UpperLower • 141, 144, 145, 147, 148, 149 Waterfall • 93, 105, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145,
Use • 407, 428 146, 149, 151, 152

Waterfall Bind Strategy • 292
Wav • 55
WAV Settings • 302
Weighting • 113
Window • 308
Windows Automation Support • 188, 197, 283
Work offline button • 204, 206
Workbook Configuration... • 308
Worksheet • 309
Workspace • 337
Write Cada-X compatible component info •
294
X
X • 127, 162, 168, 172
X axis • 91, 94, 102, 106
X Axis • 108
X_axis_alignment • 258, 265
X_axis_conversion • 258, 265
X-axes • 122
X-axis • 106
XY • 94, 106, 173
Y
Y • 162, 168, 172
Y (back) • 127
Y (front) • 127
Y back axis • 94, 106
Y front axis • 94, 106
Y horizontal axis • 91, 94, 102, 106
Y vertical axis • 91, 102
Y-axis • 112
Yellow button • 187, 190, 282
YZ • 174
Z
Z • 162, 168, 172
Z-axes • 123
Z-axis • 118
Zoom • 132, 135
Zoom in / zoom out • 160
Zoom to frequency band of mode set • 442
ZX • 174
ZX / XY /YZ Plane • 175
Rev 12A 511

The LMS Test - Lab Modal Analysis Manual: Rev 12A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The LMS Test - Lab Modal Analysis Manual: Rev 12A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The LMS Test - Lab Modal Analysis Manual: Rev 12A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The LMS Test.

Lab Modal Analysis manual

Copyright LMS International 2012

Chapter 1 Modal Analysis Theory ................................................................................. 9

Chapter 2 Data and its management ........................................................................... 37

Chapter 3 Documentation and Presentation .............................................................. 67

Chapter 4 Software and Hardware ............................................................................ 183

Chapter 5 Channels .................................................................................................... 207

4 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

Chapter 6 Functions ................................................................................................... 225

Chapter 7 Processing ................................................................................................. 241

Chapter 8 The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis workbook ......................................... 273

6 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

8 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

Chapter 1 Modal Analysis Theory

Section 1.1 Estimation of modal parameters

Section 1.1.1 Modal parameters

A modal analysis provides a set of modal parameters that characterize the

Derivation of modal parameters

If a structure exists on which measurements can be made, then it can be

Figure 1: Equation 1-1

The corresponding relation for FRFs is:

 = IR between the response (or output) degree of freedom and the

10 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

 = the mode shape coefficient at response DOF of mode

The fundamental problem of parameter estimation consists of adjusting

Section 1.1.2 A note about units

Section 1.2 Types of analysis

Section 1.2.1 Single or multiple degree of freedom method

The single degree of freedom assumption

Under this assumption, the FRF can be defined as:

This is assuming that to have the dimension of displacement over force.

It is possible to compensate for the modes in the neighborhood of this band, by

12 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

Upper and lower residuals

The equation can be further simplified by neglecting the complex conjugate

Section 1.2.1.1 Single degree of freedom method

Section 1.2.1.2 Multiple degree of freedom method

Section 1.2.2 Local or global estimates

Local versus global estimates

Local estimates Global estimates

Section 1.2.3 Multiple input analysis

 = matrix with as elements

 = vector (column) with mode shape coefficients at the output

14 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

implies Maxwell Betti reciprocity,

 = vector (row) with coefficients that express the participation of

Note: If reciprocity is assumed then the modal participation factors are

 = vector of data between output DOF and all input DOFs.

The identification of modal participation factors is essential for decoupling

The response data relative to another input DOF :

Section 1.2.4 Time vs frequency domain implementation

Using digital signal processing methods, only samples of a continuous function

 = samples of data in the measured range.

16 LMS Test.Lab The LMS Test.Lab Modal Analysis manual

Analysis frequency band vs. measurement band

By substituting sampled time for continuous time

Note: However this calculation is not unique.

Section 1.3 Parameter estimation methods